Home

Océ PRISMAproduction Server - Océ

1. Los 2044 os 916 4es2 57 88 67 24 766 as 96 95 32 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 Use of the Function The sliders of the dialog see above represent a mathematical curve which leads in its default position almost linear from the bottom left corner to the top right corner of the window This results in a linear therefore even conversion of the input gray values to the output unit The drawing below illustrates the connections between in and output The axis left represents the gray shades the output unit in this case the printer is capable of The horizontal axis bottom represents the gray shades of the input unit here PS or PDF The transfer curve now behaves like a axis of reflection with which from the gray values of the bottom axis the values of the left axis are calculated If the course of the curve gets more flat the range and the position of the gray values of the left axis will be shifted down This has the effect that in the output data stream not the whole spectrum of pos sible gray values is supported and the resulting images will be darker with less contrast Shifting the whole curve up results in an evenly brighter image shifting the whole curve down darkens the image To specifically change critical areas of an image like dark shadows and bright lights it is sufficient to move the dots of the respective areas To avoid rough C
2. Service Description Port Control Status Default OpenSSH Secure Shell Daemon SSH 22 YaST usable started OP Provides access to a remote system It replaces not installed telnet rlogin rexec and rsh with encrypted communications PP Run Xerox or small printers with PS LPR PP Account Server accserv 1203 r needed started PP internal PP Communicator execution deamon exed flexible i needed started PP internal PP Explorer Server Control during start and stop 1208 needed started PP internal PP Internal spool access service libspld 651 f needed started PP internal PP 32768 65536 needed PP internal m Java RMI established connection m Access for java clients Explorer Launcher to Explorer server PP 1206 PP internal needed started m Java RMI Registry listener to initialize con nection m Access for java clients Explorer Launcher to Explorer server PP Java Server interface Access for non java clients 1207 needed PP internal for example PJM commandline PP LCDS SCT 1500 needed started PP internal PP Message Window lt gt message daemon msgs 1209 PP internal PP Online Help Server Port is opened while using 1210 PP internal needed started the online help window PP Order Distribution System ODS Internal 1200 PP internal needed started communication odsnetm PP PJM Server pjmdm Explorer server Spool 1201 PP internal needed started lt gt ODS PP Receive line
3. General Print Parameter Job Queues Cluster Colors input Devices Output Devices Printer Notification Name Physical Number Type A 1 STANDARD SAMPLE 240 SAMPLETRAY B 2 UP3I DT6180_bookletmaker UP3I DT6180_bookletmaker UP31 Duplo_Bookletmaker UP3I Duplo_stitcher UP3I VP_3090_Stitcher UP3I YP 5000_HCS UP3I VP 5000_HCS_withStitcher UP3I VP_5000_Stitcher JUP3I VP_PS_BKND_stitcher i Note Even a continuous feed printer has at least one output tray for continuous feed paper 368 Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration Printer Notification Printer Configuration Printer Notification Introduction This combobox offers only files scripts or programs which are stored in the path u prismapro bin ani and it s subdirectories All programs which names start with an dot are ignored The command must be specified for each printer separately Different commands can be used The command is executed at every change of the printer status and always only on the master server The specified program gets a file as the fist command line parameter which contains some information on the job This file must be deleted by the program after it finished processing the information This is always a unique name in the whole file system Directory for the temporary files u prismapro data ani Illustration General Print Parame
4. Note You cannot create page segments in output files which are divided Determining the Correct Parameters After locating the shell script you want to use you have to prepare the following param eters m The name of the PCL file to be converted a The page size of the PCL file The page size for conversion must match the size specified when the PCL file was gener ated otherwise there could be misregistration in the printout For example if a driver centers an A4 page on an A3 page you must select A3 for the conversion not A4 Overview of predefined page sizes DIN Formats Abbrev Size in mm Size in inches an a CT CE Arman Ay o ooo ee mooo p eee r mea e porse eono US Formats Abbrev Size i inmm Size in Inches Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Operation Overview of variable page sizes Variable Formats Abbrev Size in X Direction Size in Y Direction m The layout of the output file simplex duplex or tumble m The name of the output file to be generated Example 1 for help The entry pcela6 for example would display further information about which parameters are required and which options you can use for the conversion The first help page shows the settings for predefined paper formats D3_P_SIM D3_P_DUP D3_P_TUM format DIN A3 D4_P_SIM D4_P_DUP D4_P_TUM DIN A4 A3_P_SIM AS_P_DUP A3_P_TUM A3 uncut 30 5x43 0 cm A4_P_SIM Ad_P_DUP A
5. 5 inch in x direction If the variable paper size options are used the f option should not be used more fj TIFF Converter Operation Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 133 TIFF Converter Operation Arguments in if s option is used specifies the first tiff file if l option is used specifies the ascii file containing the list of tiff files if w option is used specifies the tiff file s with wildcard s The filename must be placed in quotation marks all other options specifies the tiff file out output file rootetiff root E The control parameters can be entered in any sequence but must be separated by a blank Control Parameter Description s Collects all the TIFF files in a directory converts them and creates a single output file The TIFF files have to be named as follows name ext ext 1 n Files have to be numbered contiguously The name of the first file in the series is specified with the program call Example Files image 1 image 2 image 3 image 4 and image 5 are converted together and combined in a single output file Collects the TIFF files listed in an ASCII file converts them and creates a single output file Example tiffconv l X A filelist list afp File filelist u tiff File tif u tiff File2 tif u tiff File3 tif u tiff Filex tif w Collects the TIFF files specified by wildcard converts them and creates a single output fil
6. The following buttons refer to the entries of a selected table in the list New entry Click this button to create a new entry Duplicate entry Use this button to duplicate a selected highlighted entry in the list 228 Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation LCDS Module Stockset Configuration Tool UI Element Description Delete entry Deletes a selected highlighted entry in the list Before this is done you will be prompted to confirm Status bar This bar at the bottom of the editor window indicates the status of the SCT For instance you will be informed if the SCT DAT has been changed and needs to be saved Activating a table will automatically save the configuration Note The term Form is used with the LCDS Module in the sense of general settings for cutsheet inbin configuration defined in a SC table The form message window is gener ated if the stockset is defined in the start JDE or JDL If the stockset is changed using DJDE the conversion process automatically inserts OTEXT WAIT messages showing the name of the SC table Note It is recommended to avoid positioning forward or backward after interrupting the print job in the All Jobs window if the print data you want to skip contain OTEXT mes sages generated by the stockset handling These messages will be processed in any case leading to an improper reloading of paper Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation 229
7. Chapter 8 PJM Command Line 537 PJM Command Line Parameters 538 Information Pa rameters f lt file name gt pfl lt file name gt imp lt impos file gt Meaning Path of print files s Local print files to be printed using the parameters in the job ticket loaded with t or r or and oct The file names in the job ticket are replaced one by one by the names specified Note The replacement in the list of files takes place after the custom ticket has been merged with the local reprint ticket If more files are given here than defined in the merged ticket ad ditional default file entries are created defaults according to the ticket type APA LCDS POD Default the filenames de fined in the ticket Path of pfl s PFL print files to be printed using the parameters in the job ticket loaded with t or r or and oct The print file names in the job ticket are replaced one by one by the names specified Files must be specified as follows Archive User Document for private or Archive User Document for public jobs Note Same as for the f parameter Path of imposition file Impositioning set All files are imposed after they are chained PJM control Pa rameters type lt language module gt getid id lt job ident gt Meaning Specifies the type of the ticket APAILCDSIPOD Default POD The type option is useful in combination with the f option only because otherwise
8. Drilling Reserved for future functions Available colors white black gray Chapter 10 Workflows 583 Workflow Media Assignment to Printers red yellow green blue turquoise violet orange brown gold silver noColor pink buff ivory goldenrod mustard Available Media Types Standard Transparentfilm Precuttabulator Preprinted 3 Configuring Input Trays In Configuration gt Printers select the Input Devices tab and define for every Cutsheet printer as many input trays as the number of different medias you intend to use in your workflow 4 Assigning media types to input trays 584 Chapter 10 Workflows Workflow Media Assignment to Printers In the Printer Pool application select the Media Settings icon to assign the media defined in the Paper application to the input trays of the selected printer These media can be regarded as your default media load PRISMAproduction Media assigned to input Trays 8 268 x 11 693 300dummy z a 600dummy Nam olor ype iz Weight rder C Dolphin 48_pool white Standard 279 0 white Plain 210 Flurdrucker red Plain 210 TP CB blue Plain 210 Druckerpark x TP_Dolphin green Plain 210 0 Hh P5000 f white Plain 215 9 z ware white Plain p gt yee User Permissions ieee User def
9. scan started this can take several minutes Please wait Cancel Note The printer configuration manager does not check if the required physical connection is really available on the server for which the printer is configured Electronic Switch box Unit Address Host If there is an electronic switchbox between server and printer installed it can be necessary to enable this checkbox But enable this item only if the switchbox rejects to switch the printer to another host Internally the 370 Channel board s will set in reset state when they are not used but it takes more time to get them running every time the printer is enabled This is the physical number of the I O interface starting with o Example 1st SCSI Controller or 370 Channel board has the number o 2nd SCSI Controller or 370 Channel board has the number 1 For LPT printers you can select units LPT1 to LPT3 Address on the 370 Channel or the SCSI bus Tcp ip address or the hostname of the destination system 350 Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration General Ul Element Description Port The tcp ip port number which is expected by the receiving system The name of the printqueue on the destination system Directory The directory on the destination system where the data has to be transferred The username which should be used for user ftp login Passw
10. Catalog job Catalog File Copies files File_Copies Form job Print_Form Format files Format files JDL_Name Chapter 7 Configuration Parameter Descrip tion Comments carriage control character type Customer catalog e g for LCDS file copy count DL LP used for jobs con sisting of multiple files job grouping form name file type defining the process service to be called form definition paper tray ID 1 255 LCDS start com mand Job Description Entry LCDS start com mand Job Definition Language HotDir Hot Directory FieldName Param eters Job Copies Job Type Layout Number of Pages Output Tray Page Sequence Pagedef Paper Size Print Mode Printer Name Reference ID Resolution DPI Substitute Table Reference Char Oc PRISMApro duction Server Ticket Parameter Section amp Key word job Copies job Job_name job Job_Class job Job_Type files Pdstrce Default use Formdef value use Formdef value use Syst NO gt 0 Parameter Descrip tion Comments job copy count DL LP used for single data file jobs MVS job name job queue number DL switchable class mapping POD APA LCDS OLDS Native sides and plex page definition MVS job ID font resolution print data contains table reference characters Configuration Fo
11. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Only Update Installed Packages Add On Products No add on product selected for installation Packages e Packages to Update 319 New Packages to Install 7 Packages to Remove 1 e Total Size of Packages to Update 1 4 GB Backup Create Backup of Modified Files Create Backup of etc sysconfig Directory Language e Primary Language English US Additional Languages German French Italian Dutch Spanish Keyboard Layout e Fnalish US CEI f Change For a default installation there should be no error message and the section packages should just show changes of removal of obsolete packages and the installation of new packages needed also to satisfy new dependencies If there is an error in section software there will be a warning message for section Packages Choose section Packages and solve all conflicting selections After solving all issues click Next to return to main Installation Settings Note All Oc PRISMAproduction Server software packages will be shown in section Update problems as they are 3rd Party packages Chapter 1 Installation 27 Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Action A popup window will now appear which informs about automatic changes to installed packages in order to satisfy new dependencies Please accept these changes by clicking Continue Fil
12. a Inthe installation dialog the version which is actually installed and the source for the update installation are displayed below the title line Chapter 1 Installation Oc PRISMAproduction Server Installation Deinstallation Update m Select Update to open a new screen and choose one of the following possibilities Update new packages Only new packages or higher versions will be installed Update all packages All available packages will be exchanged including older identical versions Note Update is not possible between V3 and V4 Undo rollback of latest Oc PRISMAproduction Server Update m Execute install prisma m Select Undo from menu Uninstallation m Execute install prisma m Select Uninstallation from the installation dialog Define the Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster Note Only necessary if the Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster consists of more than one server Enter the Oc PRISMAproduction Server slave server IP addresses In the Master Slave application under Configuration in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer see Master Slave Configuration on page 301 Import Oc PRISMAproduction Server licenses m Connect the CodeMeter license dongle to the system m Open the Licenses application under Configuration in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer see also Licenses on page 313 m Assign each available license to the server s by d
13. Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Job Processing Tab Description Extend Printable Area Checked This is only needed for print jobs having page images which are smaller than the size of the input medium which they are printed on AND the page image has to be shifted Under these circumstances it may happen that part of the page image is not printed To advise DPconnect to take care of this check this box Unchecked DPconnect does no special action Default Unchecked Processing of In put Media At tributes Printer Capabili ties for Tabulator Media Sets Checked The media attributes in the Xerox ticket are supported and will be passed on to the printer Unchecked The media attributes in the Xerox ticket are ignored A default medium will be used instead Default Checked Simplex Print on Tabulator Media Single Tabulator Media Set per Job Choose this for Oc VarioPrint 5 1xx Duplex Print on Tabulator Media Multiple Tabulator Media Sets per Job Choose this for Oc VarioPrint 6xxx Simplex Print on Tabulator Media Multiple Tabulator Media Sets per Job Choose this for Oc VarioPrint 2110 and Xerox DocuTech 61Xx Default Duplex Print on Tabulator Media Multiple Tabulator Media Sets per Job Sort Order of Tabulator Media Sets Ascending Use this setting if a tabulator media set is to be used which is sorted in an ascen
14. Chapter 7 Configuration 383 LCDS Parameter Configuration Job Control Files JCF Sections of the Job Control File Header The header section is mandatory for each Job Control File It contains parameters of general validity as well as the setup of the process chain i e names and sequences of the dynamic processes The information in the header can be read by all processes Input Filter ComInfo This section contains information on each process for the internal GCI communication interface and is mandatory for each process The only parameters which may be changed control the GCI user trace i e the communication interface trace Device This section contains information on the data source of the input filter which as a single process reads directly from a device tape drive floppy drive All other processes obtain their input data via the GCI see also LCDS Module Online Con figuration Subcatinfo In this section you define all subcat types used by the input filter together with the maximum number of members that may be open at one time In version 3 0 this number is always 1 The subcat types JOB and XPAR always have to be stated the others only if required If resources are converted without type definitions for example FNT LGO IMG and FRM have to be stated No parameters may be changed in this section Action The action section contains parameters for a specific action of the input filter
15. DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries 180 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket In Tem put plate Tick et Shipment Info Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket In Tem put plate Tick et GUI Job Parameter Pine peQume o a came X X GUI Job Attributes Message Inform operator only Hold job until operator confirmation 5 Store All settings available here F m ooo fem E O E oara S C rera Print Mode X All settings available here Color Selection X X All settings available here Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect DPconnect all DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket In Tem DPconnect put plate T C pe A O ee From Print Data using Size no of Tab Pages UP3I Devices All settings available here Header Trailer All settings available here X Events _ Start Job Events All settings available here X SS ee ae ae e d eee e Notification All settings available here X Custom Settings oo C Ma O O Nr 2 20 X Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket In Tem DPconnect put plate Tick et List of Files ette O A a A C E A e a Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 181 DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries 182 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket In Tem DPconnect put plate Tick omer E Open o C p a C e a S Um
16. gt Devices Click a button to select the device as current external media Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 71 Print File Manager PFM Status Bar The bottom section of the PFM window is a status bar used to display status information When you make an entry in a field or select a device by clicking a toolbar button the result of the action is shown here Control Panel 72 The main section of the window is a panel in which the left side shows the contents of the local PFL the center shows the copy transfer functions and the right side shows the contents of the desired required external medium Documents in archive The left section of the control panel consists of a standard file selection box and additional control elements The file selection box displays the following elements retrieved from the local PC A folder list that displays all the PFL s in the ODS network A document list that displays all the cached documents in the selected PFL A filter determining which documents are displayed You can select the documents you wish to export from the document list If you move the mouse cursor on a linked document a popup window will display the medium the document was exported to You can select several files at once To do this select one file then keep the left mouse button pressed and drag the pointer to the end of the set you want to select Any links that you should happen to select are ignore
17. Password Password for the user above Mirror Policy See Mirror Policy in Mirror Print Jobs Prerequisites and Functionality on page 627 Ticketrule See Mirror Ticket Rules in Mirror Print Jobs Prerequisites and Functionality on page 627 Mirror Service After the entries in Configuration gt System have been completed a mirror service is created on the original server This mirror service relates to the configured mirror server Therefore this server is displayed in the list of services Services application in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer Per default this service is deactivated and must be enabled via the Services menu or toolbar If the mirror server is accessible the service gets the status online see below Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 629 Mirror Print Jobs Workflow 8 o Hide free services Enable Services Name Server Sim T pfmstore 1x010222 free amp pfmimpex 1x010222 free Ly pfmget 1x010222 free amp rscstore 1x0 10222 free Re rscget 1x010222 free B jobrequirement Ix010222 free p mirror 10 53 76 32 disabled eS oddaservice 1010222 free R ppm 1x010222 free amp pelcony 1x010222 free amp pclcony 1x010222 free Configuration gt Accounting When mirroring jobs it is necessary to restrict the range of job IDs on the original system as well as on the mirror system to avoid the creation of the same job IDs on both systems For examp
18. Then the installation starts and prepares all hard drives and installs necessary software packages 20 Chapter 1 Installation Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Step Action After the installation of the software is finished the system automatically re boots to continue installation from the hard disk AT THIS TIME PLEASE REMOVE ANY DVD AND THE FLOPPY USB STICK FROM THE DRIVES After an automatic reboot the installation and configuration will be finished automatically The installation is completed when the graphical login screen is displayed If the unattended installation was done with a USB stick the partition infor mation of this particular USB stick was inserted into the etc fstab file during installation and will remain there pointing to an accessible disk In order to recreate full auto mount functionality for USB devices it is required to remove the corresponding line of this USB stick from file etc fstab as follows m Login as user root m Open file etc fstab with you favorite editor m Search for a line beginning with dev disk by id usb and remove this line Save file etc fstab Note Using a floppy which is not dedicated for the used server model will end up in an unus able system because the low level drivers differ from server type to server type and will therefore not be able to access the hard disks Note Due t
19. Transferring Documents to a PFL You transfer documents to the PFL via the Print Job Manager PJM Therefore you select the Store dialog in the Job Attributes section and select a predefined archive under In PFL or As Preprint Format of External Media External media are physical devices used for storing data such as PCs tape drives and CD recording systems PFM currently supports only PCs and tapes The origin of ex ported documents is always recorded on the external medium Documents can only be imported back into their original folder Component Function Tapes Documents are archived on tapes in the form of cpio or tar archives The origin information is contained in the directory structure within the archive file Important Tape cpio tar archives cannot be extended The rule is one tape one archive Hosts Documents are archived on external host systems as cpio or tar archive in a predefined directory structure u prismapro archive lt host gt lt folder gt lt host gt The name of the server to which the archive belongs lt folder gt The name of the external archive lt typ gt The archive type cpio or tar Note Extension of existing host archives is not supported in the current PFM version A folder can be reused or deleted when all its docu ments have been reimported Devices For more information refer to Devices 74 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity
20. admin and service permission groups Chapter 7 Configuration 293 System Configuration Country Preferences Illustration B amp ODS Parameter System and Job Parameter eMail Notification Mirroring LDAP Parameter Country Preferences Password Country Preferences Country Preference US Date Format English United States Number Format English United States Measure System imperial Example Term Short Date Medium Date Long Date Time Number Unit of Measure Format 742408 Jul 2 2008 Wednesday July 2 2008 3 47 41 PM 1 234 567 89 1 234 567 89 inch Ready Stage description table Country Prefer m ence Ul Element Description Default depends on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system language a CA DE 7 GB US Predefined country settings can be selected or the settings can be modified by selection boxes described below If the settings in this dialog do not match with US DE CA or GB Mixed is displayed Date Format Here you can select the format for many countries as well as Number Format the Measure System metric or imperial Measure System The examples are adjusted to the values which are currently set The default settings are dependent on the user language 294 Chapter 7 Configuration System Confi
21. 314 Double click a license entry to open a license information window Chapter 7 Configuration Licenses License Name PRISMAproduction Server V4 Tier 8 INTERNAL Dongle Name 1 1192415 Activation Date Expiration Date Apr 10 2009 Product Code 100127 Instances 0 State Ok Used instances 1x010222 ops oce net Master Apart from the information already given in the license table the following is displayed in this window UI Entry Description Activation Date Displays the date of the activation of the Emergency dongle Product Code Describes the internal product number Assignment of Licenses with the Licenses Application License assignment to an Oc PRISMAproduction Server server can be done by double clicking the corresponding cell of the server column last column of the table and license row In a drop down list the number of assignable licenses will be displayed mostly you a can change the number from o to 1 Meaning of the Numbers o Means that this license is not assigned to the server 1 Means that this license is assigned to the server gt 1 means the amount of instances which are assigned to the server Chapter 7 Configuration 315 Accounting Administration Overview Accounting Accounting Administration Overview Introduction The account server is a daemon process running once in an Oc
22. Chapter 7 Configuration 379 Overview of LCDS Module Processes Directory u prismapro data lt catalog gt rds Contents Converted resources u prismapro data lt catalog gt priv Temporary converted resources X Filter u prismapro data lt catalog gt priv Converted resources temporary inline graphics u prismapro data lt catalog gt tmp Interface files X Filter gt Spool Accounting and intermediate pds output files for NTO1 pro cessing Input Filter All input processing is handled by the Ifilter It receives data from tape cartridge floppy and hard disk and imports it into the LCDS Module internal format All read data and resources are stored in the directory u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt The print data stream is handed over to xfilter via named pipe without being written to disk due to performance reasons XRC The XRC takes Xerox print resources of the types FNT IMG LGO FRM as input and converts them to the LCDS Module internal resource format in the directory u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt rds XDL Compiler The XDL Compiler compiles JSL files and stores the results in the LCDS Module internal format The compiled information is later used by Input Filter and X Filter for processing print data X Filter The X Filter processes the print data stream and creates output which can be printed on the Oc printers and on standard IP
23. The data argument values required for this statement are taken from an LP input queue template This is the template assigned to that LP input queue over which the jobs are being received It is recommended that this template uses the same destination printer that is actually selected here in the translation table Ignore Statement The action done in this case depends on the statement itself see table in the appendix Some statements are completely omitted others are processed with the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system default settings instead Default The defaults depend on the statements Controls for translation rules input You can set up the parameters using up to two selection boxes and up to seven edit fields underneath Only those controls are visible which are required for the selected statement The descriptive labels above the controls change according to the selected statement For a full description of all ticket statments and their possible values see DPconnect Ap pendix on page 196 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 173 DPconnect Barcode Tab DPconnect Barcode Tab 174 The barcode controls shown below have been added to the DPconnect configuration user interface DPconnect prints the job name of the incoming print job or a free defined text as barcode on a document page or on an added blank sheet either before or behind the document To activate this DPconnect barco
24. gt Take default setting of the UnityRIP 212 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation LCDS Module New catalog LCDS Module New catalog Introduction The necessary print resources for printing LCDS data are be stored and organized in different customer catalogs To create a new customer catalog Illustration COMPOSER DEVICE sLcos ixo10222 0ps oce net 4 aala x n SGCI Ix010222 0ps oce n File name Type Size Last modified Access HEADER DEFAULT Directory 7entries 7 11 07 10 24 AM r w HOME STANDARD Directory 2 entries 1 30 07 11 38 AM riw IMPSETS icdsdemo Directory 3 entries 7 11 07 10 24 AM rjw JOBINPUT TICKETS LCDs ix010222 ops oce LINEDATA TABLE PREPRINTS RESOURCES LOCAL IXO1 RESOURCES SHARED l RESOURCES SYSTEM IxO New catalog name xXDATA DEVICE XPDC XPDC_DEFAULT XRESOURCE Ix010222 9 B entries Ready 1 In the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer open the Server Files application and go to the LCDS or the GCI file system 2 Select File gt New directory or click the Create new directory icon to open the New catalog dialog box 3 Under New catalog name enter a name The length of the field is restricted to 32 bytes Click OK to co
25. i Installing or upgrading a Cold Standby Rack 2 identical servers with Common Hard Disk Extension requires additional configuration and hardware setup in order to realize a working Master Backup configuration A separate Cold Standby Rack CD with additional documentation for network setup and UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply support is available at the Oc Software Support department Note Please contact the Oc Software Support Poing before installation Points to consider BEFORE Installation 14 m The unattended installation assumes that all servers are preconfigured according to the Oc guidelines for customer use m All servers with Mylex or LsiLogic Raid Controller MUST have at least two logical disk drives configured Otherwise the installation fails for a missing disk drive m The size of the root file system is 8GB so the use of hard disks of at least 36 GB is required This ensures to have enough space left min 8 GB for installing and running Oc PRISMAproduction Server on the u file system m Ensure to have Legacy USB Support disabled in the BIOS settings of the server This will prevent the system from booting the License Dongle it will fail and the server stops booting at all m Itis NOT allowed to have any USB storage devices connected to the server at instal lation time except the USB stick used for unattended installation Chapter 1 Installation Create Server Configuration Media Cr
26. Activate device Stitch Offset Enter an offset value which in dicates the distance from the upper and lower edge of the paper If nothing is entered here the staples will be placed near the upper and bottom edge of the document Chapter 10 Workflows Workflow UP I Devices UI Element Description i Stacker Offset Indicate if you wish an offset when stacking Stacker means here the internal stacker of the stitcher Restrictions Information on the restrictions of this postprocessing type The UP I values will be added to the ticket parameters Chapter 10 Workflows 577 Workflow Color Selection Workflow Color Selection Introduction You can define the colors in the PJM to ensure that the print job submitted is printed with the correct colors Select Colors in the PUM You can define the colors for the print job in the PJM dialog Job Attributes gt Print The number of possible settings corresponds to the number of toner stations installed in the selected printer You can configure this number in Configuration gt Printers gt General The toner colors selectable in the PJM gt Job Attributes gt Print dialog can be provided with the following procedure Steps to configure the Printer Colors Step Action In the Explorer open Configuration gt Printers gt Toner Stations 578 Chapter 10 Workflows Workflow Color Sel
27. Chapter 3 User IDs and Access Rights User IDs and Access Rights User IDs and Access Rights Introduction With Oc PRISMAproduction Server you can configure a very flexible access concept which allows to provide users with different roles and permissions The basic intention is to configure the access concept in such a way that is meets most of the requirements of the daily routine For example a user task could be to monitor and operate the system but not to uninten tionally modify anything Another task could be to administrate and to configure the system The latter user has to be provided with much more permissions to fulfill his tasks than the first one Therefore it is possible to create different users in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Every user logs on to the system with his user name and password Users can have different permissions The administrator provides users with permissions by assigning a permission group A permission group is a collection of charactaristic at tributes of a specific user role and permissions which can be activated and deactivated Permission groups can be configured individually see User Management User Permis sions on page 271 Predefined Users and Permission Groups 62 To be able to work with the system after a new installation four basic users are predefined Predefined basic permission groups of the same name are assigned to these users Neither basic user nor basic p
28. Choose section Network Devices SUSI CLS File Edit Help a Software oo F System La Network Card Network Services _ 5a Security and Users BB Viiuaization PO Miscellaneous Search Enter all appropriate data and finish configuration Open file etc hosts with an editor and comment out the line which repre sents the second network interface This line will prevent Oc PRISMApro duction Server from working properly Example m 192 168 10 50 lxo01234 0ps de lxo01234 m 192 168 20 50 lxoo1234 0ps de Note This check and change MUST be made every time the network set tings are changed If the file etc hosts is not properly configured Oc PRISMAproduction Server may fail or show unpredictable be havior and errors Additional entries for the etc hosts file should be made manually using an editor Note To enable all network settings especially to set the hostname prop erly an additional reboot is required BEFORE installing Oc PRISMAproduction Server Network Services All network services not needed for running Oc PRISMAproduction Server are disabled by default or even not installed at all for example rsh rexec rlogin The default config uration just runs a minimal set of services needed for proper operation of the system The following describes how you can activate some of these services Chapter 1 Installation 35 Config
29. Configuration TicketRules Main Window name to a specific value of the table The table is editable inside and outside of Ticket Rules therefore it is possible to import and export the table as a CSV file So the table could be created or edited in any spreadsheet calculation program Each value table is referred by it s unique name The lower part of the window displays the selected value table and provides controls to modify the table See TicketRules Value Tables on page 437 Attention All elements of a TicketRule are globally known over all rules and therefore must have an unique name Note Changes do not become valid until the Save button is pressed Note The Used in Rules entry cannot be edited The name of the rule is added automatically as soon as the element is inserted in the action sequence of a rule Chapter 7 Configuration 419 TicketRules Main Window Illustration E g t mx eae Rules Parameters Variables Value Tables Activation Active Name Description Used in Rules Show_rule SubRule1 Show_rule 2006 00679 sizetest job_name another_var priority Test_Rule 4 8h Q Q X Z ait file File_Size numeric greater than 1000000 job Job_class 6 2 oO else job Job_Class 7 oF as k job Job_name Test56 E else E warning Job Name unknown SubRule1 a p foreach Customers Address if job Job_
30. Description A more detailed description of the library Servers The servers on which the libraries are located If you use data mirroring the same library can be located on several servers OUTPUT and TARGET can only be on the master HEADER can be located on any print server New path To change the physical path only possible for HEADER TARGET and OUTPUT enter the new path here The path is created if it does not yet exist The new path must be empty Move data You must check this option to move the existing library to a new path Otherwise a new library is created in the new path the new library will be used for all future processing and the old one will remain at its original location Note The library can only be moved to an empty path Library paths File menu and toolbar see General Usage of the Configuration Applications on page 256 338 Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration Overview Printers Printer Configuration Overview Introduction A The Printer Configuration Manager is used to configure all printers in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network The application consists of the Printer menu and a tool bar which give you access to identical functions The window is divided into two main parts The upper half displays a table with all configured printers Printer Table The lower half gives you access to up to nine different tabs on which
31. If limited dummy job is enabled then the limited dummy job will be sent to the printer o limited dummy job disabled 1 limited dummy job enabled Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation PCL Module Print Parameters Parameter De Description fault Value MEDIA_AT The printer supports does not support media attributes inquiry TRIBUTES o0 in Windows Application Driver data stream o The printer does not support media attributes inquiry 1 The printer supports media attributes inquiry READBACK 1 Enable or disable PJL readback If readback is enabled the presence of certain printer features will be queried for via PJL and disabled automatically if they are not present o PJL readback disabled 1 PJL readback enabled SET_ESCE 1 Enable or disable setting of lt ESC gt E o disabled 1 enabled If enabled a Printer Reset is sent to the printer after each print job SET_EXT_OFF Extended job offset specifies which job offsets take effect SET o Only PCL job offset takes effect 1 Both PJL and PCL job offset take effect 2 PJL and PCL job offset suppressed 3 Only PJL job offset takes effect wom mon Values 1 2 and 3 are valid for OPS printers only SET_OFFSET 1 The printer supports does not support job offset via PJL o disables offset 1 enables offset For switching the PJL command SET OFFSET is used SET_OUTBIN o o No setting of output tray via PJL 1 Setting of internal output tray UPPER 2 Setti
32. PRISMAproduction Server Explorer server network It collects the accounting data sent by the different modules and writes the accounting entries into a database and also into the legacy files It can also delete accounting entries and files after a configurable time number of days All accounting information based on legacy files is kept in the directory u prismapro account This directory name cannot be changed Accounting Configuration Window 316 The Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer offers an accounting administration window in the Configuration part of the Explorer This window consists of three tabs General General configuration set tings See Accounting Adminis tration General Settings on page 317 Chapter 7 Configuration Database Permissions PostgreSQL database ac cess See Accounting Adminis tration Database Permis sions on page 320 Legacy Files Legacy Files administra tion See Accounting Adminis tration Legacy Files on page 321 Accounting Administration General Settings Accounting Administration General Settings Introduction This tab can be used to configure major accounting behavior Enable Disable storing legacy accounting entries in files Enable Disable storing accounting in the accounting database Configure connection attributes of the accounting database if an external database should be used to store dat
33. PRISMAproduction Server IBM Specific OCT Conversion IBM Option OCT Parameter Description and limitations 0ac 0ac receiver Acc_Custom_Id Accounting information count oaddress1 receiver Rec_Street Specifies address string oaddress2 receiver Rec_ZIP Specifies address string oaddress3 receiver Rec_City Specifies address string oaddress4 receiver Rec_Country Specifies address string obi obin job intray Determines output bin Range 1 255 obu obuild receiver Rec_Building Name of the building ing 516 Chapter 7 Configuration LP IBM Option OCT Parameter Description and limitations ocod ocode page Ocop ocopies odatac odat ack odatat odatatype ode odepart ment odi odistribu tion originator Sending_Param_ oc cdp originator Sending_Param_ ocod originator Sending_Param_ oc cdepage files PDSDCK files DataT ype receiver Rec_Company originator Sending_Param_ odi originator Sending Param_ odistribution OCHARS originator Sending Param_ OCHARS OCC originator Sending Param_ occ See occtype and otre occtype files Pdscc occ yes and occtype a then Pdscc 1 occ yes and occtype m then Pdscc 2 occ yes and occtype o then Pdscc 4 occ yes and occtype x then Pdscc 8 occ no then
34. PpActive PpHost PpPCCColumn PpPCCTrans PpPCCType PpCode PpRStructure PpRConstant PpRAdjust PpRLTHELD PpRLength PpROffset PpRPostamble PpRPreamble PpBAdjust PpBLTHFLD PpBLength PpBOftset PpBPostamble PpBPreamble ProcessCCbytes Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket General Description Options and Syntax De fault These are LCDS Prepro cess parameters Pp These parameters basical ly speaking overwrite the respective JDL JDE pa rameters of Volume HOST CODE and LINE statement for the LCDS converter and the input filter related parameter of the Record PpR and Block PpB statements These parameters depend on each other Please use the PJM LCDS GUI to define and test certain PJM tickets and use these parameters which fit to each other for creation of OCT tickets PpActive YES NO switches the LCDS prepro cess option on or off De fault off Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes LCDS Setting gt Prepro cessing This option overwrites the ifilter related preprocess parameters PpR and PpB and uses any combi nation of ASCII control characters 0A oC oD as delimiter ASCIIskipCC Additionally this option converts these CC in IBM3211 PCC ASCI IconvCC Default is to use neither of these modes LCDS Setting gt Prepro cessing Oce Custom Ticket Note Li The description of the parameters is more d
35. a target printer has to be selected Toolbar and Menu Parameter Functions Icon Description Apply changes Save the values in the window to the database Discard changes The values in the window are overwritten by the values stored in the database Apply default setting for selected printer The translation table parameters of the selected printer are set to their default values and are stored in the database Apply default setting for all printers The translation table parameters of all printers are set to their default values and are stored in the database The user interface consists of the following tabs Job Processing Tab see DPconnect Job Processing Tab on page 160 Data Processing Mode Tab see DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab on page 164 Input Job Ticket Translation Tab see DPconnect Input Job Ticket Translation Tab on page 172 m Barcode Tab see DPconnect Barcode Tab on page 174 2 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 159 DPconnect Job Processing Tab DPconnect Job Processing Tab Illustration B EIKA Configuration for Printer YP5000 Job Processing iInput Job Ticket Translation Barcode 1 Input Job Ticket overrides PRISMAproduction Ticket Template 4 Allow Identical Copies from Ticket Template E Extend Printable Area 4 Processing of Input Media Attributes P
36. closed or connected Database Type of the database Default Files and PostgreSQL Name Name of the database can be modified Default PPACC and PPACC_V2 Version Version of the PostgreSQL Default Version 1 and Version 2 Host Hostname where the database runs on Port Port number to access the database server can be modified Default 5433 Owner User name which has permission to access the database accad min is the preconfigured internal default user which cannot be modified Default accadmin Password User Passwords Export Import of Database Accounting The export and import feature is the way to migrate accounting database content from an older database version to a newer one So export should be done before installation of a new Oc PRISMAproduction Server version containing a new database structure version i Note Before export it is recommended to condense the database to the necessary records by executing in database maintenance the action Clean up Accounting database vacuum This will afterwards reduce time to parse the imported records into the database 318 Chapter 7 Configuration Accounting Administration General Settings To export the database content use the export button You will be asked for a file name to store the original accounting records that were sent to the accounting server to gether with their time stamp To i
37. configuration window see Input Modules Overview on page 460 Global LP Parameters In the menu bar global LP parameters can be set in a dialog To open this dialog click the following items Edit gt Edit global parameters gt LP The following parameters can be set The bold values are the default values Parameter Possible values Description Network connection time out in seconds Connection Time 300 out lt Number gt The value o disables this feature so no time out will occur not recommended Maximum Client o The maximum number of simultaneous client connections for the daemon The value o disables this feature so that no Connections lt Number gt limit is set 515 LP Daemon port on which it receives lt Number gt jobs Trace channel o Defines the port where application socket lt LP port number gt traces are made To enable this the Trace flags must have at least the following flag set 0x00000200 The value o disables this feature Trace flags ffffoof8 Defines the detail level of the trace file lt of fFfffff gt See also the Trace channel and the Trace level parameter Chapter 7 Configuration LP Parameter Possible values Description Trace level o Defines the detail level in the trace file lt 1 4 gt When trace level is o error traces are still being written Also dependent of the Trace Flags data traces can
38. gt No stitching is done Highlight Color Translate Statement directly gt 210 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Appendix Options Highlight color jobs Highlight color parts and normal color parts are processed and printed with their respective print colors A second highlight color image layer is generated DPconnect applies its own fixed highlight color settings for the Unity RIP That is Separation method is Standard Colors CMY RGB all colors are searched for So all colors except black and white are treated as highlight color Highlight color settings for the Unity RIP from the LP Input Queue Template are allways ignored Normal jobs The complete job is processed and printed whith normal color A second highlight color image layer is not generated Highlight color settings for the Unity RIP from the LP Input Queue Template are ignored Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Highlight Color Settings in LP Input Queue Template Apply to all Jobs gt Highlight color parts and normal color parts are processed and printed with their respective print colors DPcon nect applies the highlight color settings for the Unity RIP from the LP Input Queue Template Ignore Statement gt Highlight color parts of a print job will always be printed in the normal print color black A second highlight color image layer is never generated Highlight color
39. gt Menu Job gt Transfer Mode Apart from Default the PJM setting always overrides the setting in the System Configuration Chapter 7 Configuration 417 TicketRules Main Window TicketRules Main Window Introduction 418 The TicketRules application window is divided into two parts The upper part lists the respective elements which can be used in the rules The lower part contains a detailed definition dialog where you can define the properties of rules variables and value tables In the upper part the TicketRules main window provides four different tabs a Rule List Displays the rule list which you use to add delete activate deactivate change to SubRule and to edit rules The entries in the colums Activation the rule is active or inactive or is a SubRule Name unique name of the rule and Description user defined short description of the rule are defined by the user in the Add Edit rule dialog To edit a rule modify name and description select the rule and click the entry in all columns except the Activation column with the right mouse button or click the Edit icon Z in the tool bar The Activation column can be used to activate or deactivate a rule or to change a rule to a SubRule if this is allowed see below The lower part of the window repesents in this case the Rule Definition Window where you combine the different parts to create a well formed rule
40. ing the import process Errors are reported on the console and logged in the Oc PRISMApro duction Server Backup log file To be able to understand what happened on an Oc PRISMAproduction Server system regarding Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup a history file is maintained Unlike the backups which are controlled by the storage manager the history file is stored inside the Oc PRISMAproduction Server structure because it s Oc PRISMAproduction Server s memory not that of the storage manager By using the History command one can see in chronological order which backup restore import operations have been executed in the current Oc PRISMAproduction Server system For convenience reasons only parts of the history for example all erroneous attempts can be listed Description of the History options Option Parameter Meaning Description select all Type of history entries backup restore import error Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 613 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Parameter Meaning Description file lt string gt Location of the history file Default current history file u prismapro cfg prismabackup histo ry xml The following parameters are displayed for each backup found Date Time Date and time when the operation has been performed Backup ID Identifier of the backup Type of Operation B
41. on page 508 Protocol Proprietary from IBM Standard RFC1179 Indirectly using FTP NFS SMB or by file copy link or move needed Client software Host Router from Oc or Download from IBM Notexplicitly neces needed Data transmission Special Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server license re start possible Yes Yes using check pointing starting at the last correct Only when the used transfer proto col supports this checkpoint 461 Chapter 7 Configuration Input Modules Overview Receiving com pressed data Partly decompres sion script is need ed Partly decompres sion script is need ed Partly decompres sion script is need ed control Job mirroring needs Interconnec tivity license Configuration 462 Can mirror data files on the fly or mirror with job submission Data file parameter Supported for the Supported for the Supported for the extraction OCT AFP data format AFP data format AFP data format Oc custom ticket Limited using JCL Full using field Limited using the OCT control and User Exitson names and or by LP control the MVS host providing an OCT Job submission mirroring only Job submission script is needed The configuration of the Input Module types Download HotDir and LP has been combined in o
42. receiver Rec_Name Specifies the maximum number of messages printer Range 0 9999 Specifies name Max 90 characters ono onodeid userinfo Notify Node id information Max 20 characters ooffxb files PdsOfEXB Specifies X offset on backside of page ooffxf files PdsOfEXF Specifies X offset on frontside of page ooffyb files PdsOffYB Specifies Y offset on backside of page ooffyf files PdsOffYF Specifies Y offset on frontside of page oou ooutbin oov ooverlay job Outtray files FrontSideOvls Chapter 7 Configuration Output tray Range 1 65 535 Specifies the name of the overlay printed on every page of the job Between 1 8 characters LP IBM Option OCT Parameter Description and limitations files Pagedef OPAGEDEF Opa opassthru OPRMODE Opr opro grammer oresp ores path oro oroom originator Sending_Param_ opa originator Sending Param_ opassthru userinfo PR_Mode originator Sending_Program mer_Name originator Sending_Param_ ore sp originator Sending Param_ orespath Additional user information provided with the job Name value name value FORMS CLASS DESTINATION SEGMEN TID Programmer name Max 40 characters Specifies search order for Ad vanced Function Printing re sources receiver Rec_Room Specifies room name Max 90 characters osep osepara tor originator Sending
43. A Job Control File may contain several action sections The actions are processed se quentially by the input filter Resource Converter XRC Sample SpoolJob XDL Compiler X Filter 384 Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration LCDS Jobs Window LCDS Parameter Configuration LCDS Jobs Window Introduction You can use LCDS Jobs to configure all the application dependent parameters of the JCFs for the LCDS Module much more easily than with a simple editor for a detailed description of JCF see the chapter before Parameters which have to be modified by editing the JCF manually are also described in this chapter Open the LCDS Jobs application by clicking Configuration and selecting LCDS Jobs in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server tree view i Note All buttons or commands which are grayed out dimmed and are not mouse or key sensitive cannot be activated either because the user has no right of access or because the function concerned cannot be executed at this point Illustration Server Ix010222 0ps oce net_ Job PrintLCDS z amp H o Section Subsection Name Value l Filter Traceflags FFFFFFF8 a l Fiter TraceLevel o l Fiter Action ByeOrder BigEndian l Filter Action SkipBytes o l Fiter Cominfo Traceflags FF00000000000000 I Fiter Cominfo TraceLevel o l Filter Device ChanAddress Ox3E Fitter Device ChanAddress1 Ox3E l Fikter Device C
44. In the lower part the parameters are divided into groups to show which of these parameters belong together The group column is used for this purpose For Download the following groups are used Group Description General General Download HotDir or LP parameters Data Input Define the data structure of the input file Data Output Define the data structure of the output file Chapter 7 Configuration 463 Input Modules Overview Description Define the job Control parameters Job Submission Define job submission and job mirroring Extraction of OCT Parameters from Data File 464 One possibility to set Oc Custom Ticket OCT parameter is to write them into the data file and to extract them with the input modules This feature offers you more control over printing the job This works even if the transfer protocol LP for example doesn t give a possibility to pass these parameters At the moment only parameters in the AFP data files are supported If multiple data files belong to one Oc PRISMAproduction Server job each of these can have parameters which can set the file section OCT parameters individually Be aware that not all file section parameters changes can be handled correctly in a multi file job For the other OCT sections the first value found is taken The values in the following data file s from the same job are ignored All parameters in the Specification PPS Job Ticket secti
45. Native PCL 5 datastreams are passed through to the printer if the printer does not support PJL or are encapsulated with a PJL sequence at the beginning and at the end of the job 232 Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation PCL Module General Features Supported Printers The PJL PCL Backend supports printers up to 1000 ppm connected via TCP IP Func tional code 6 or higher is required To provide the Output Management System with the required information the printer must support the PJL commands defined in Print Job Language Technical Reference Manual Hewlett Packard Company Supported printers are VarioStream 9220 VarioStream 9210 VarioStream 7650 VarioStream 7650 VarioStream 7550 VarioStream 7450 VarioStream 7400 VarioStream 7300 VarioStream 7200 VarioStream 6100 VarioPrint 5160 VarioPrint 5115 VarioPrint 3090 Generic_Cutsheet Generic_Single Generic_CTWIN Restrictions MSG pages are not supported Absolute and relative positioning is not supported The NPRO functionality is not supported Tuning sets are not used The backend does not connect to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server database It does not make entries in it or use any information from it Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation 233 PCL Module Native Workflow PCL Module Native Workflow Introduction Print jobs which should be printed with the PJL PCL Backend must be generated with the Native Ticket of Oc PRISMAproduction Server Illustrati
46. Occurrences can be set to any positive number or to all An empty replace string is allowed also The Find and Replace can be done case sensitive or case insensitive By default the check box is selected and the replacement is done case sensitive The Example and becomes text fields show how a given text is changed by the current Replacement definition These text fields are directly adapted to the definition if this is changed It s also possible to type in an example text and to see how it is changed by the current definition When pressing the Ok button the syntax is checked for correctness and the Replacement definition is inserted in the selected cell The Find and the Replace character strings are enclosed in quotes separated by a blank and followed by a blank followed by the number of Occurrences or all followed by another blank and an indicator for case sensitive cs or case insensitive ci use Examples m Replace case sensitive all occurrences of special with special all cs This means Find special Replace Occurrences all case sensitive Example super special extra job gt super extra job m Delete the first three occurrences of new in a string new 3 ci This means Find new Replace Occurrences 3 case insensitive Example a New very new fine new total new job gt a very fine total new job RegEx Replacement This function is simil
47. OverwritesMVSHeader gt The AFPparameters from the Noop overwrite the MVS Download header parame ters o lt Number min o max 950 gt Job Submission Parameters Parameter JobGrouping SingleFileJobs gt Each data file of the grouped job is submitted as a separate job GroupedFileJobs gt Each grouped job is submitted as one single job with multiple data files default Chapter 7 Configuration See also chapter Extracting AFP parameters in Input Modules Overview on page 460 Defines the ticket parameter source priority First Oc PRISMAproduction Server queue which is used as base to add MVS alphabetical class value to it Possible values Description Specifies how grouped jobs are submitted LP Parameter Possible values Description MaxCopies o Maximum number of copies a lt Number gt printable job may contain The value o disables this feature De fault o MaxKBytes o lt Number gt Mirror Yes gt Defines the time when the data DataFile Mirror data file s with Down files are mirrored To be able to load while receiving them on use this feature the Interconnec the fly tivity license is needed and the No gt MirrorServer must be defined Mirror data file s during the job for this port submission when mirroring is defined for this port Note Set this parameter to No when a job submis sion script is us
48. PRISMAproduction Server Host Router from Oc Printing Systems GmbH or the software product PSF MVS Download from IBM can be used The simplest use case is to send a single data file as job to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server The Download header is used to extract parameters for the OCT See Parameter to OCT Conversion for details and to submit the job to the spool Addition ally it is possible to extract parameters from an AFP print data file and to use these to modify the OCT It is also possible to send grouped jobs a job contains multiple data files These can then be submitted as one job or each print data file separate as one job For details see the Download configuration Parameter Priority The Oc Custom Ticket OCT parameters are defined by several sources When multiple sources define the same parameter the source priority defines which value is taken The following parameter sources and priorities exist priority increases from left to right Default Ticket gt Data file parameter gt Download header parameter With the Download configuration parameter TicketParameterPriority the priority of the AFP No op and the Download header parameters can be changed Unknown or Customer Specific Parameters Unknown or customer specific parameters can be added using the AFP No ops see chapter Extracting AFP parameters or by using the Download User Exit The syntax of the parameter must be as follows
49. PRISMAproduction Server data base 260 Chapter 7 Configuration User Management Overview PRISMAproduction ae d Waiting for automatic login User Interfaces The following user interfaces can be used to administrate users and Permission Groups System Configuration gt User User Management User on page 264 Create and modify users and establish membership to a group of permissions System Configuration gt User Permissions User Management User Permissions on page 271 Create new groups of permissions by copying existing groups and switching permissions on or off System Configuration gt User Info User Management User Info on page 269 Modify user specific data Name Mail Language of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer user interface not of the operating system If a user has no permissions to create users and groups the entries User and User Per missions do not exist Only the User Info application always exists Minor modifications for example changing the language for a user are possible here The User and User Permissions applications can be opened with write permission only once The user who is the first to open the respective application is granted write permission All others only get read permission Chapter 7 Configuration 261 User Management LDAP Support User Manageme
50. Parameter Header_Outtray Header_Intray Header_Rotation Active_Notification General Description Options and Syntax De fault Output tray in which the header should be put Default A B C D For mdef Default Default Input tray from which pa per for the header should be taken Default 1 2 8 Default Default Rotation angle for the header o 90 180 270 Default o mail notifying triggered by job states mailNotify lt mail ad dress gt lt status 1 gt lt status 2 gt lt status n gt lt status gt STARTIPRINTINGIFIN ISHEDIERRORIINTER RUPTICAN CELEDIDELETED Example mailNotify test nowhere com PRINTING FINISHED Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes Job Attributes gt Head er Trailer POD only Job Attributes gt Head er Trailer POD only Job Attributes gt Head er Trailer POD only Job Attributes gt Notifica tion Defines the custom cata log for XEROX and con verted AFP resources and printfiles Use only cata logs defined in the LCDS GCI view of the resource manager Default DEFAULT Job Attributes gt Print LCDS Only Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket 553 Oce Custom Ticket 554 Parameter Catalog_Host Alarm_Delay client Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket General Description Options and Syntax De fault Defines the server of the ODS cluster where the catalog is located and de fined and whe
51. Print Parameter Some special settings depending on the selected device type Printer Configuration Print Parameter on page 352 Job Queues Set or restrict the queues which should be allowed to be used by the printer Printer Configuration Job Queues on page 364 Cluster Specify the membership of printer clusters Printer Configura tion Cluster on page 365 Colors Set or restrict the colors which should be allowed to be used by the printer Printer Configuration Toner Stations on page 366 Input Devices Devices Description of the paper input input trays Printer Configuration Input Devices on page 367 Output Devices Devices Description of the paper output output trays Printer Configuration Output Devices on page 368 Printer Notifica Active Notification Interface command for printer status tion changes Printer Configuration Printer Notification on page 369 Gray Curves Gray curve settings for Postscript converter available only if UnityRip license is installed Printer Configuration Gray Curves on page 370 Chapter 7 Configuration 341 Printer Configuration Add a new Printer Printer Configuration Add a new Printer Introduction Selecting the function Add a Printer in the Printer menu or tool bar opens the following dialog Illustration Printer Name s8000 Printer Model Var
52. See also LP on page 508 See The Job Submission Script in Input Modules Overview on page 460 for more details Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Chapter 12 Oc Document Designer Integration in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Oc Document Designer for Oc PRISMAproduction Server Oc Document Designer for Oc PRISMAproduction Server Introduction This chapter describes how the Document Designer LINUX command line version is integrated in Oc PRISMAproduction Server V4 00 xx The term ODDA Oc Document Designer Advanced is used alternatively to address the Document Designer throughout this chapter The integration is based on a hot directory scenario A dynamic job ticket extension is used to call the Document Designer in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow No user interface is needed the dynamic section can be added to an APA Job Ticket using a plain text editor The resources referenced in the ODDA workflow step can be either addressed locally or by the Oc PRISMAproduction Server library system The Document Designer executable is called directly in the workflow i e it is assumed that the primary use case will be long running production jobs with many pages Requirements The following components are needed to use ODDA within Oc PRISMAproduction Server a ODDA Connector RPM license dependent delivered on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server CD Contains the ODDA Oc PRISMAproduction Server co
53. Take the exception plex mode from input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt PlexMode Simplex Duplex Duplex Tumble gt All exception plex pages are printed in this mode Ignore Statement gt All pages are printed like in Document Plex Mode Exception X Image Shift Exception Y Image Shift Translate Statement directly gt Take page numbers and shift from input ticke Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Pages where shift is to be applied Even Page Numbers Odd Page Numbers All Page Numbers gt This alternative pages are to be shifted Image Shift in X Y Direction value mm gt Use this shift value Ignore Statement gt No shift is done Image Rotation on Exception Pages Translate Statement directly gt Take image rotation from input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Image Rotation Integer 0 90 180 270 gt Alternative rotation will be selected Ignore Statement gt No rotation LP Input Queue Name Translate Statement directly gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 201 DPconnect Appendix Redirection to another LP Input Queue indicated in the job ticket on the print server The job will be processed acoording to the ticket template assigned to this queue Substitute Statement with an other
54. Template Template 2 Tenplate 3 Tanplate4 Template 5 Impostioning Imposttioning 10 Copies Imposttioning Imposttioning for PPP 1 for PPP 2 To Printer 2 for 2 Up for Booklet To Printer 4 To Printer 4 To Printer3 To Printer 3 DPconnect DPconnect DPconnect Translation Table 1 Translation Table 2 Transtation Table 3 Valid for Printer 1 Valid for Printer 2 Valid for Printer 3 Input Tray Control off input Tray Control on input Tray Control on Input Tray Selection Input Tray Selection attribute based number based Take Copy Count from Template instead from Input Job Printer 1 Printer 2 Printer 3 Continuous Feed Cut Sheet Controlled by Paper Controlled by Irput Attributes Tray Numbers PPP 1 PPP 2 Comparison There might be also a simpler solution to the problem described above Instead of defining five ticket templates LP input queues and logical DigiPath printers it would be sufficient to define only one for each element This has the following disadvantages when printing m You have to change the printer in the single ticket template every time you want to print on a different target printer m You also have to modify the ticket template every time you want to print the job ina different way different impositioning scheme different copy count which is not set in the template m Every time you change the target printer you have to ensure that the settings of the translation table which belongs to the curre
55. The import is only performed for the servers defined in this list Default all servers Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 611 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Parameter Meaning Description all The complete job data base is to be im ported for example only all or nothing Default No jobs are imported Note jobs and servers options are mutually exclusive Reason the job information is distributed among all servers Therefore jobs can only be imported into an identical Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server cluster all lt string list gt all The home directories of all users in the backup are restored lt string list gt the home directories of the users listed are imported lt string list gt The home directories of the users listed are imported Default No home directories are import ed 612 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client History Option Parameter Meaning Description haltonerror true false true The import process is stopped when an error occurs The directories files already imported remain untouched false The import process continues with the next plug in when an error occurs The imported directories files of the plug in which raised the error may be incomplete i Note It s up the user to ensure data in tegrity when there are errors dur
56. You can also select a defined module or all modules 4 Next time reply automatically for current module only Mi for current module only for all module names CONTINU Q Previ T TERT LPT 310 Chapter 7 Configuration Message System Triggers Active Notification Interface Message System Triggers Active Notification Interface Introduction Here you can specify programs scripts which will be executed if a certain message is generated by the system For example you can configure the system to create traces ifa certain error occurs This function is similar to the Active Notification Interface in the Printer Configuration Consequently the executable programs scripts have to be located in the u prismapro bin ani directory Illustration mh Ll BXD General Automatic Saving Autornatic Answers Triggers Message Suppression Message Id Modulename Messagetext Trigger Command Active 00100051 Communicator Server Warning New connectio Icds_74000300_301_3 a Triggers Table Column Description Message Id Select the message from the list which should invoke a specified program script Modulename Opens a drop down list with all modules which generate mes sages Select or enter an appropriate module or select all mod ules This restricts the trigger to the messages that come from the selected modules Mess
57. a 300 DPI clusters 300 dpi printers of various types a Test clusters Test printers of various types the selection is made on the basis of paper type job class etc Printer cluster for splitting jobs on the basis of copies Type Jobsplitting Note li This cluster type is only available for the POD Module 276 Chapter 7 Configuration Cluster Configuration The printout of a job which contains several job copies can be distributed over more than one printer using the cluster function To do this you have to define a cluster of the Jobsplitting type to which you assign at least two printers In the PJM select the cluster name as Printer in the Job Parameter section The number of jobs created with an own job ID equals the number of printers in the cluster The jobs will be printed to gether If a printer fails another printer will take over the job A complete overview on the workflow you find in chapter Jobsplitting per Job Copies in the Oc PRISMApro duction Server User s Guides To configure printer cluster select Cluster Configuration Column Titles OE es Cluster_Name Enter the name you want to assign to the cluster The name can contain up to 20 characters No blanks are allowed You have to convert cluster names with blanks if you update from an older version than 3 02 19 Jobs which use old cluster names must be reassigned Edit properties in the Job List Clu
58. gt Print are to be printed separat ed by semicolons i e 5310 60 803 1 5 10 2 13 1 3210 35 11 Job Attributes gt Print Note for LCDS If Print erTyp SCT the form is set internally If PrinterTyp FanFold MediaName the Print_Form Parameter Print_Form Name of a form may be used Toner_Color_Names List of colornames separat Job Attributes gt Print gt ed by comma Color Selection Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket 549 Oce Custom Ticket 550 Parameter Priority St_Native St_Preprint St_Resource St_Resource_Dest St_Native_Dest St_PFL_Dest Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket General Description Options and Syntax De fault Priority of the print job 1 255 Default 128 Store output in libraries yes no Default no Store output as native file yes no Default no Store output in PFL yes no Default no Store output in preprint cache yes no Default no Store output as resource yes no Default no Type of destination where output is to be stored as a resource Header Tar get Overlay Vari able Marks Merge Map ping Tiff Ps Pdf Default Target Type of destination where output is to be stored as a resource Target only Default Target Name of PFL where out put is to be stored Default Default Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes All Jobs gt Job Properties Job Attributes gt Store Output POD o
59. ing _Param_ opassthru opa forms FORMS job Print_Form FORM SYSOUT opa Job ID JOB_ID job Reference_Id REFERENCE_ID REFERENID2 2 tid OPAGEDEF i files Pagedef opr opro e fd grammer grammer_Name oprmode PRMODE userinfo PR_Mode PR_MODE2 OPRMODE oresp ores originator Send path ing Param_ oresp originator Send ing Param_ orespath osep osepara originator Send tor ing Param_ osep originator Send ing _Param_ oseparator osfo orchfo originator Send orchfontlib ing Param_ osfo originator Send ing Param_ orchfo originator Send ing_Param_ orchfontlib Chapter 7 Configuration 471 Input Modules Overview 472 IBM Option MVS JCI E Parameter HotDir OCT Parame Info Page Parameter ter TITLE oti otitle TITLE originator Sending_Ti tle otr otrailer originator Send ing Param_ otr originator Send ing _Param_ otrailer files Pdstrce PDSTRC ous ouserid originator Sending Us HOST_USER er oxo oxoff originator Send set ing_Param_ oxo originator Send ing _Param_ oxoffset E oyoff originator Send set ing_Param_ oyo originator Send ing _Param_ oyoffset PORT originator Receiving_In PORT_NUMBER put_Channel PRTQUEUE RESEMT DESTINATION RESOLUTION job Printer_Name Job DPI Notes 1 Not supported by Oc PRISMAproduc
60. m Problem occurring executing LP command Cancel Print Jobs with Iprm The Iprm command is used to cancel a LP print job in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server spool To specify the job which needs to be canceled the LP printer as well as the Oc PRISMAproduction Server job Id must be specified The command can be used for local LP printers lprm P lt printer gt as well as remote printers lprm P lt print er gt lt host gt Since the functionality of the cancel job is implemented in the LPD it Chapter 7 Configuration 513 LP 514 depends on this implementation if the command works properly or not The Iprm command only creates a valid LP request and waits for a return code Note when the Oc PRISMAproduction Server LPD processed the command The Iprm command only can cancel Jobs which are submitted from the same node as where the Iprm command is executed Be aware that when a Network Address Translation Table NAT is used between the lp clients and the LPD all the computer systems behind the NAT are seen as one node This means that all these nodes can see each other LP jobs and also can delete these Syntax u prismapro bin lprm D P lt printer gt lt host gt lt port gt U lt user gt lt JobId gt u prismapro bin Iprm V Operator Description D Switch debugging on Optional trace is written into file u prismapro diag lp lprm log P lt printer gt
61. script is only executed on the Original server If MirrorDataFile No see the figure in Mirror Print Jobs Introduction on page 625 option 1 the print data files are transferred by PJM See also Download on page 474 for more details Mirror Jobs using HotDir To be able to Mirror Jobs using the HotDir Input Module the global mirror configuration must be performed in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Configuration After this is done the mirror server can be selected in the HotDir configuration The Print Data files cannot be mirrored with the HotDir daemon MirrorDataFile No the files are transferred by PJM See also HotDir on page 488 for more details Mirror Jobs using LP 632 To be able to Mirror Jobs using the LP Input Module the global mirror configuration must be performed in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Configuration After this job submission scripts must be used to activate the print file mirroring and the use of the ticket rules The print data files are mirrored using the LP daemon if MirrorDataFile Yes see the illustration in Mirror Print Jobs Introduction on page 625 gt option 2a This setting can only be used if no print data files are modified in the job submission script since this script is only executed on the Original server If MirrorDataFile No the print data files are transferred by PJM see the illustration in Mirror Print Jobs Introduction on page 625 gt option 1
62. the window see screenshot of the variables list This function can be applied to integer and float values only If the selected parameter contains a string value then this calculation is not executed The contents of the variable is modified by executing the defined calculation This calcu lation is defined by the a calculation operator or from the drop down menu WoW WoW nh aS select m and the calculation value The Example and becomes fields show how a given value is changed by the current calculation definition These fields are directly adapted to the definition if this is changed It s also possible to type in an example value and to see how it is changed by the current definition If you press the Ok button the syntax is checked for correctness and the calculation definition is inserted in the selected cell Examples a Increment an integer value by 10 10 This means Operator Value 10 Example 32 gt 42 a Multiply a float value Chapter 7 Configuration TicketRules Variables 2 15 This means Operator Value 2 15 Example 3 1 gt 6 665 Replacement If you select alteration type replacement a definition dialog appears in the lower part of the window The contents of the variable is modified by exchanging the string defined in Find with the string defined in Replace Occurrences defines how many occurrences of the string are replaced
63. tivity license is needed and the No gt MirrorServer must be defined Mirror data file s during the job for this port submission when mirroring is defined for this port i Note Set this parameter to No when a job submis sion script is used in which data file manipu lation steps are done MirrorPolicy Mandatory gt Defines the job acceptance on A job is not accepted on this this server when the mirror serv server when it can not mirror the er doesn t accept the job To be job able to use this feature the Inter Optional gt connectivity license is needed A job will always be accepted in and the MirrorServer must be dependent of the mirror job sta defined for this port tus MirrorServer Name or IP address of the mir lt IP Address gt ror server Only available when the Interconnectivity license exists and the mirror server is defined in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Sys tem Configuration PrgJobSubmis pjm This program or script is used to sion lt Another executable script or submit the job into the Oc binary gt PRISMAproduction Server sys tem See section The job submis sion in Input Modules Overview on page 460 482 Chapter 7 Configuration Download Parameter TicketRule Possible values CE lt String gt Description Name of the Ticket rule to use when the job is submitted The Ticket Rule must be defined in th
64. up It contains all static components and configuration data and is later on also used for data created dynamically and as mount point for the actual network drive used by the storage manager Client Install the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Client package by using the rpm utility Step Action copy the RPM oce sys prismabackup_client rpm to a temporary directory change to the temporary directory and call rpm ihv oce sys prismabackup_client to install the package rpm e oce sys prismabackup_client to remove the package After having successfully installed the client package you ll find a directory usr local pris mabackup It contains the start script and the executable program files for the GUI Graphical User Interface Do the following to start the System Backup window m Login as root user on the master server m Open a Linix shell and change to the following directory usr local prismabackup Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 599 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Installation and Workflows m Start the UI with prismabackup_gui py File Help s Backup Restore Import History Backup name Description Components C Ef components LS AFP Print Resources C Jobs LCDS APA Print Resources O Miscellaneous C oS Configuration Ly PFL Archives D POD Composer Resources C POD Unity Rip Resources D PRISMAproduction Configurati
65. you can select the Server from a list if the POD system consists of more than one server Under Database Link you can select the default database link DEFAULT Postgres or a name of another connection which has to be configured before on the Database links tab see Archives Database Links Document Manager Cache on page 445 Archives of the Preprint cache type cannot be linked to a database The selection is the deactivated a Ifyou click OK the archive is physically created on the selected server The changes are saved in the database A message informs you about the successful creation of the archive Chapter 7 Configuration Archives Database Links Document Manager Cache Archives Database Links Document Manager Cache Introduction From version 3 10 all archives are always linked to a database The documents of the PFL archives are kept in the file system while the meta data of these documents are saved in an external database Meta data of the documents are additional information like the last access of the document the access frequency of the document the input files from which the document has been created and many more job ticket details In the PJM file selection these meta data enable you to search for specific properties of documents and to find them accordingly see Archives Search Function on page 453 From this version of the Oc PRISMAproduct
66. 1000000 Paste to value Used in rule s Finish Each condition contains a Name a Parameter an Operator and a Value The name of the condition must be unique because all conditions are globally known over all rules The Parameter for the condition can be selected from a drop down list This ensures that no misspelling occurs Variables can also be used as parameters The user defined variables can be selected at the end of the drop down list Parameters are marked in blue color variables in green Chapter 7 Configuration 425 TicketRules Definition of Conditions Settings Messages and Return Exit Operators are used for conditions You can select an operator from a drop down list A condition with the operator does not exist is true if the specified key of the section does not exist in the ticket The value is obsolete in this case Please note that this condition is different to is not set The latter one is true if the pa rameter does not contain a value or does not exist in the ticket The operator matches reg ex is true if the specified parameter value matches the regular expression given in the value column The value you set in the Value field is automatically set in double quotes You can also check the content of a variable To do this select a variable in the Paste to value field and paste it wit
67. 16 in the middle of the window Insert the required stocknames in combination with the number of the input bins in the Entries table at the bottom of the window Duplicate Duplicates the table shown in the window You will be prompted to insert a new name Use this command if you want to make minor changes to a copy of an existing table Update active Same as Duplicate but duplicates the active table and it s name To differentiate the duplicates the SCT adds an increasing number to this name Use this command if you want to create groups of similar tables Delete Catalog Printertype Deletes a selected table from SCT DAT Before this is done you will be prompted to confirm In this selection box define the catalog used for the modification of the SC tables The space in this text field is limited to one word with a maxi mum of 14 characters Insert any optional term for example Cutsheet which serves as a comment to the selected table Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation 227 LCDS Module Stockset Configuration Tool UI Element Description sss sSSCS Comment Insert a comment for the entire table for example on the printer or on the application for which the table is designed Max BIN Select the number of input bins of the printer The number is used to check active input bins in an active table A warning will be displayed if you
68. 2 messages 3 questions 4 logging 5 diagnosis PDSINFO Section Parameter De fault Value Description CKPTPAGE 10 Trigger for writing a checkpoint after at most nnn pages CKPTTIME 1000 Trigger for writing a checkpoint after at most nnn seconds In units of 1 1000 seconds Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation 245 PCL Module Print Parameters Parameter De fault Value DSFOR MAT 0 0 7 0 0 Description Selects printing of HDR SEP TXT MSG TRL pages HDR m o disables printing of Header pages m 1 enables printing of Header pages SEP m o disables printing of Separator pages m 1 enables printing of Separator pages TXT must be 7 MSG must beo TRL m o disables printing of Trailer pages m 1 enables printing of Trailer pages JOBCNTRL 1 PJL Section 246 Parameter De fault Value DUMMY _LIMIT ED o Specifies job processing at the end of job 1 do not accept every end of job only for the last job in the queue gt higher printing performance 1 accept every end of job Description The printer has does not have the so called cut sheet emula tion This feature is unique to OPS printers and will be disabled au tomatically if the printer query states that it is not present in the printer o Printer does not have cut sheet emulation 1 Printer has cut sheet emulation OPS printers only Enable or disable limited dummy job
69. 5 15255 Letter SEF Chapter 10 Workflows 573 Workflow UP I Devices All values are in mm The most common formats appear bold LEF Long edge forward SEF Short edge forward Duplo Stitcher Without Stitch Positions mm mm L Restrictions Maximal 50 sheets with 80 g m g UI Element Description Rotation Without no rotation With Rotate by 90 degrees Stitch Positions The staples will always be positioned centric You can influence the distance of the staples by entering values in these fields Stitcher Restrictions Information on the restrictions of this postprocessing type Recommended Settings for Duplo Stitcher Format Format Printing Position Rotation Stitch Stitch name size direction in Duplo Position Position A B 574 Chapter 10 Workflows Workflow UP I Devices Format Format Printing Position Rotation Stitch Stitch name size direction in Duplo Position Position A B Legal 356x SEF Not passible 216 mm Ledger 432 xX SEF 279 mm A3 420 X SEF 297 mm A3 430x SEF 305 mm ee E E A A General lengthx LEF SEF Yes length 4 length width 3 4 3 4 SEF length All values are in mm The most common formats appear bold LEF Long edge forward SEF Short edge forward VP 5000 High Capacity Stacker Stacker Bloftser Restrictions he u
70. Acrobat is invoked automatically Also the system language can be modified The following two chapters explain how to install and use this functionality Note In Oc PRISMAproduction Server V4 the former Java Web Start functionality has been replaced by the Launcher application You can still use Java Web Start for some modules but it s not supported anymore Highlights 56 m You can use the complete functional range of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer from each desktop computer That means the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system can be configured jobs can be submitted and controlled a The java application is downloaded from the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server to your desktop computer where it is cached Once cached it can be started quickly Chapter 2 Remote Access to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer Access with the Explorer Launcher m There is no Java Web Start specific know how needed A web browser is used to estab lish initial communication From then on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ex plorer can be accessed like a local application by a desktop As from the user perspective the Launcher runs under the hood only a small splash screen during loading reminds you of the Launcher one gets the impression of running the Explorer inside the native Oc PRISMAproduction Server environment The user feels closer to the system with all the advantages and disadvantages if
71. Action gt LP Input Queue Name String gt The job will be redirected to the queue indicated in the edit field LP Input Queue Name Ignore Statement gt No redirection to another Input Queue Slipsheeting Translate Statement directly gt A slip sheet is added after the job If no slip sheet material has been defined the default media will be used Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Interposing of Slipsheets After every print job gt A slip sheet is added after every job If no slip sheet material has been defined the default media will be used Ignore Statement gt No slip sheets are processed Slipsheet Input Medium Translate Statement directly gt Take the properties for the slip sheets from input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt 202 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Appendix Options Input Media Color White Pink gt Substitute color with selected one Input Media Type Stadard Transparent Sheet gt Substitute prefinish with selected one Custom Defined Media Color String length 30 gt Substitute color with this Custom Defined Media Type String length 30 gt Substitute prefinish with this Paper Length mm gt Substitute paper length with this Paper Hight mm gt Substitute paper height with this Paper Weight g m gt Substitute pap
72. Available backup all backups in the selected path are listed Select the backup which you want to restore Using the waste bin button you can also delete selected backups a After selecting an available backup the components included are shown in the Components section of the window This allows you to select single components for the restore If you click on the tree nodes the servers of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system are displayed on the first level This allows you to deselect single servers Note that the deselection is only valid for the component which is selected in the level above a Ifa backup and at least one component is selected the Start button gets active Press this button to start the restore process Note You can only restore backups which have the same main version number as the current Oc PRISMAproduction Server system All server names and corresponding IP addresses of the current system must be identical with the server names and IP addresses of the system from which the backup has been performed The restore of jobs can only be performed on an identical system same server name same IP addresses same configuration of the print servers The components OS Configuration and Miscellanous cannot be restored with this GUI If you need information on how to extract the contents of these components please contact your local service engineer Importing Components from Older Version
73. COLOR_PURPLE oxoooB MAGENTA COLOR_PINK Ox0003 ROYAL COLOR_DARKBLUE Ox0009 RUBY COLOR_ORANGE oxoooA VIOLET COLOR_DARKTURQ oxoooD Jobname Settings The contents under JOBNAME can be configured in many ways This value can be displayed in the Spool window The maximum length is 64 bytes The value is part of the accounting and will be printed on the accounting trailer page Configuration in PrintLCDS JCF There is an Xfilter options parameter in the job control file PrintLCDS JCF which serves for the configuration of the value JOBNAME The parameter name is JobnameCfg and its value is a list of source information generating the value in the JOBNAME col umn The list has the following format type offset length Negative numbers and blanks are not permitted You can type a maximum of 11 triplets type offset length Further triplets will be ignored The last sign of a triplet has to be a semicolon The types type of the sources are coded as numbers see table below Types may appear repeatedly in the list for example to display several parts of HRPTNA in JOBNAME offset marks the beginning of the information in the respective source information which should be transferred to JOBNAME offset o represents the beginning of the source Chapter 7 Configuration 407 LCDS Parameter Configuration Special Functions and User Scripts information If offset is greater as or equals t
74. Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Appendix Options Use system default if available Sender Name Translate Statement directly gt Take sender name from input ticket Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action gt Take sender name from the ticket template Job Information User Name Ignore Statement gt Use system default if available Recipient Name Translate Statement directly gt Take receiver name from input ticket Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action gt Take receiver name from the ticket template Job Information Shipment Rceiver Name Ignore Statement gt Use system default if available Document Input Medium Separator Page Input Medium Back Cover Page Input Medium Front Cover Page Input Medium Exception Page Input Medium Translate Statement directly gt Take the properties for the default separator back cover front cover and exeption pages input media of the document from input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 197 DPconnect Appendix Input Media Color White Pink gt Substitute color with selected one Input Media Type Stadard Transparent Sheet gt Substitute prefinish with selected one Custom Defined Med
75. Chapter 4 POD Module Operation TIFF Converter Troubleshooting Error Error 19 Variable format not supported in PCL Action Variable format possible in AFPDS only Error 20 Measure undefined Error 21 Input file has no valid extension option sample Check and correct the command line entry Check and correct the command line entry Error 22 Pointer to TAGs out side valid range Create the TIFF file again Error 23 Orientation Parameter not supported in PCL Error 24 TAG 0x140 Color Map not supported Error 25 TAG ox102 Bits Per Sample parameter not supported Create the TIFF file again Create the TIFF file again without color informa tion Create the TIFF file again without color informa tion Error 26 TAG 0x115 Samples Per Pixel parameter not support ed Error 27 30 Internal error Error 31 Child process not exe cuted Error 32 Child process failed Error 33 No such file Create the TIFF file again without color informa tion Report the error to your system consultant Report the error to your system consultant Report the error to your system consultant Check whether the ASCII file exists Error 34 TAG 0x106 Photomet ric Parameter not supported Error 35 Name of input file specified incorrectly with collect function s option Create the TIFF file without the inverted image Rename the input file s Errors 41 43 reserved
76. Chapter 7 Configuration 279 Events Configuration Events Events Configuration Introduction It is possible to make the start of a job dependent on the occurrence of a particular event Job execution is directed with the Start Job Events and Start Print Events functions in the Job Attributes Section of the PJM see chapter Job Attributes gt Start Job Events and chapter Job Attributes gt Start Print Events in the Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server User s Guides The events that users can choose in the PJM to direct job execution have to be defined using this configuration interface This interface is also used during processing to confirm the occurrence of a particular event Illustration s E gh X Events Name Description Active Trans_F Delivery to France iw Trans_GB Delivery to Graet Britain iw Begin night shift 8 30 pm zj Column Titles 280 Column Description Events Name Name of the event This is used in the PJM for directing and controlling the events A typical event name would be roll loaded Description For instance roll with red paper must be loaded on the printer Active Setting an event to active state indicates that it has occurred This setting can also be changed by the operator For a description of the menu and toolbar icons see General Usage of the Configuration Applications on
77. Configuration 457 Archives Appendix Configuration of an External Database System JDBC Driver The access from Oc PRISMAproduction Server over Java and SQL statements to an external database system is performed via JDBC drivers Basically it s not important which system is connected Still it is required copy the JDBC driver of the respective database system into the Explorer directory u prismapro lib explorer codebase and to perform a Reset Oc PRISMAproduction Server For all database systems offered in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server configuration di alog JDBC drivers are provided depending on the platforms and versions You have to copy them into the above mentioned directory before you can use them User The configuration of users with access permissions and other system settings is different for every database system To make a database user selectable you have to create a new user in Oc PRISMAproduction Server The external password which is required in the dialog is only valid for the external database and has no effect within Oc PRISMApro duction Server itself A database user pfladmin is created by default Design of the PFLEXT Database It is very important that you create a database on the external database system with the exact name PFLEXT This database must have exactly the tables fields and initializations as the SQL script for PostgreSQL below The SQL script u prismapro data postgres s
78. Content Database Details Description Version number of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server release from which the backup has been created Date and time of backup creation User who created the backup Last restored configuration backup Description Shows a history of the backup and its restores which you have selected in the table above This window also informs you if the components of a backup have been saved or restored success fully Each component is marked with an icon indicating its status If there is a status message associated with the compo nent you can display the message by double clicking or right clicking the item The content view of a system backup shows a selected set of the most important files which are included in the backup For each file a short description is given in order to illustrate the meaning of the file The file icon illustrates if the file can be viewed or not The viewing is done using a simple text viewer therefore some files cannot be viewed Shows the database tables which are contained in the selected backup This view provides a 1 to 1 overview on the contents of the backup archive This tab is only available for users of the type admin and service Some files can be viewed in ASCII text mode Backup Restore diagnostics 334 In case a backup or restore should fail a diagnostics dialog will be displayed This diag nostics di
79. Do not convert RAW ASCII data are not converted either by DPconnect or during job processing afterwards The data can be printed via a generic backend Default PostScript Unity RIP Remove Input Job m Active Ticket from A possibly existing Xerox job ticket preceeding the data is ASCII Data removed only relevant for m Not active RAW processing A possibly existing Xerox job ticket preceeding the data is not removed Raw data with or without Xerox job ticket can be printed on Xerox printers or via Oc PRISMAproduction Server with DPconnect AFP IOCA Data m AFP IOCA AFP IOCA data are not converted The generated data can be printed via an IPDS or a PostScript backend m Do not convert RAW AFP IOCA data are not converted The generated data can be printed via an IPDS or a PostScript backend The gener ated data cannot be imposed with the PDC or be stored as AFP overlays Default AFP IOCA Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 167 DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab 168 Item Description Remove InputJob m Active Ticket from AFP A possibly existing job ticket preceeding the data is removed IOCA Data m Not active only relevant for A possibly existing job ticket preceeding the data is not re RAW processing moved Raw data with or without Xerox job ticket can be printed on Xerox printers or via Oc PRISMAproduction Server with DPconnect
80. Document Designer during runtime either by mounting the appropriate directories or by copying the resources in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server library system m Create an APA Ticket and add the dynamic ODDA section see next chapter Submit the ticket via the standard PJM In an automated environment the print input will most likely be dropped in hot folders dedicated to specific ODDA workflows Job Ticket To create an ODDA workflow a dynamic job step calling the Document Designer command line must be added to an APA Ticket files Post_Import_Steps oddaservice L oddaservice 2 _Service oddaservice WFD_File SODDA lt workflow file gt 4 JOB_File SO0DDA lt job file gt 5 Engine_Configuration lt engine configuration name gt 6 Step Action 1 Link the file section with the dynamic job step oddaservice 2 Define the section in the Job Ticket which describes the name of the service and the parameters which are forwarded by the workflow engine when the service is called during runtime 3 The name of the service must always be oddaservice as it is installed under this name by the ODDA RPM The name of the dynamic section lines 1 and 2 in the ticket could be different but are named identically here for simplicity reasons 4 The Document Designer Workflow Definition File If lt workflow file gt is prefixed by ODDA the addressed WFD file is temporarily extracted from the ODDA libra
81. Document Manager Cache Create a Document Manager Database on an External Server A version of the Document Manager must be running on the Windows 2000 2003 server where the external archive should be created see Oc PRISMAarchive Document Manager User Guide chapter 11 Configuration of the Document Manager on the Windows 2000 2003 Server for the correct Connection to the Print File Library m Create user For a correct connection to the Print File Library you have to create a user pfladmin after the installation of the Document Manager under Windows This user must have the same password which has been used to set up the database connection under PRISMAproduction If a different user than pfladmin has been set for the database connection under Windows an account for a user of the same name has to be created Under Windows this user should be part of the DocMa Document Managers and DocMa System Administrators groups a Settings in the PRISMAarchive Administration Use the tool under Programs gt Oce gt Oce PRISMAarchive gt Administration to create the PFLEXT database under this user account Under Console Root gt Oce PRISMAarchive Administration gt Storage Adminis tration gt Archives create an archive with the name PFLEXT Under Console Root gt Oce PRISMAarchive Administration gt Document Admin istration gt Attributes Pool set up the followi
82. Error 44 Only 300 or 600dpi are permitted for striped images Create TIFF file with the correct resolution 300 or 600 dpi Errors 45 49 reserved Error 50 TAG s not in ascend ing order Create TIFF file with the correct resolution 300 or 600 dpi Errors 45 49 reserved Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 141 TIFF Converter Troubleshooting Error Action Error 50 TAG s not in ascend Create TIFF file with the correct order ing order Errors 51 53 reserved Error 54 Resolution TAG Create TIFF file with correct TAG s 0x11A or 0x11B missing 142 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PPML Converter Overview PPML Converter PPML Converter Overview Introduction This converter enables you to print PPML files via the Oc PRISMAproduction Server POD Module PPML Personalized Print Markup Language is based on XML and is used for printing personalized data Requirements You need a license for the Oc PRISMAproduction Server POD Module and additionally a license for the PPML converter PPML2AFPconvert 4 0 For the printer a CPSI license is required The following Hard and Software versions are required Oc PRISMAproduction Server Server V4 0 or higher Suse Linux SLES 10 or higher SPS with PS Version 3 8 2 or higher Printer from bundle 5 Functional Code and CPSI RIP V3 04 02 or higher Installation and Deinstallation The PPML Module is installed with the Oc PRISM
83. Input Channel has mirroring con figured Mandatory When job mirroring fails the job also fails on this Server Optional Job continues on this server even when the mirroring fails oct OCT Name and path of the Oc Custom Ticket OCT or job ticket Any value in this ticket overrides the values in the default ticket t Ticket Name and path of the default ticket Must be in a sub direc tory of u prismapro cfg jobinput ticket tr TicketRule Name of the ticket rule to be used when this job is submitted This Parameter only exists when it is configured for this Input Channel user Username Name of the Input module name This value must be a valid Oc PRISMAproduction Server system user Using another value than specified below will cause problems This parameter must have one of the following values Download daemon gt Download HotDir daemon gt HotDir LP daemon gt LP If no errors occur and the job is accepted by the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system this script should have the return code o In all other cases the return code may be every thing except the value o This will then cause the Input Module to encounter that an error has occurred and write an error message Note Be aware that incorrect implementation of this customization script can cause a loss of data files jobs get lost Chapter 7 Configuration 467 Input Modules Overview 468 The standard output and
84. Intel R Xeon R CPU 3060 2 40GHz Main Memory 1024 MB Keyboard Layout e English US Partitioning e Create swap partition dev sdal 1 4 GB e Create root partition dev sda2 8 0 GB with reiserfs e Create partition dev sda3 24 6 GB for u with reiserfs Add On Products No add on product selected for installation Software SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP1 KDE Desktop Environment for Server X Window System e Server Base System e Size of Packages to Install 3 1 GB Booting Boot Loader Type GRUB e Location dev sda2 boot e Sections SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP1 default Floppy Failsafe SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP1 Added Kernel Parameters splash silent Time Zone gap Change Note It is forbidden to change any of the settings shown in this window because of an error in SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 these settings WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED and WILL CAUSE THE INSTAL LATION TO CONTAIN ERRORS To start the installation press Accept and button Install Confirm Installation All information required for the base installation is now complete If you continue now partitions on your hard disk will be formatted erasing any existing data in those partitions according to the installation settings in the previous dialogs Go back and check the settings if you are unsure Install
85. Jobs Introduction Introduction Oc PRISMAproduction Server makes it possible to mirror print jobs This means it can automatically transfer print jobs from the original server to another Oc PRISMApro duction Server master called mirror server If the original server is not available anymore it should be possible to execute the job on the mirror server To ensure this Oc PRISMAproduction Server checks if the mirrored job could be executed on the mirror server The mirror server is defined globally on the original Oc PRISMAproduction Server server The actual mirroring can be defined for each job separately using the PJM user interface the PJM command line or specially configured Input Modules The print job mirroring is designed in such a way that the configuration of the original server and the mirror server do not have to be the same Differences between the two configurations for example printer name resolution job queue must be adjusted using special mirror ticket rules External resources have to be made available also on the mirror server Different path names can also be handled by mirror ticket rules The general ticket rules which modify the ticket before mirroring and in case of mirroring by input modules the job submission script as well as the default ticket have to be available only on the Original server The Oc PRISMAproduction Server job identifiers for mirrored jobs are identical on the original
86. LCDS Module Stockset Configuration Tool 230 Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation PCL Module General Features PCL Module General Features Introduction The PJL PCL Backend extends PJL PCL printing with Output Management functional ity of Oc PRISMAproduction Server Native Workflow Commands Interrupt Continue Print Ranges Messages at start of print job at end of print job at printer errors on interrupts Checkpointing Esc Sequence s Replacement Filter including Barcode Input Esc Sequence s Replacement Output Accounting according to Oc PRISMAproduction Server conventions CustomTone passthrough mode Support of PCLs printers up to 1000 ppm Configuration of backend according printer capabilities output trays offset Message dialog on missmatch of job requirements and printer capabilities Trace functionality according to Oc PRISMAproduction Server conventions Header and trailer pages Note i To use the PJL PCL backend you need a valid license Currently you need the following license Product name PJL_Driver Product version 4 0 Support of PUL and PJL Encapsulated PCL5 Data Streams Printer capabilities are checked through PJL protocol and passed to the spool Through PJL the printer is switched to and from PCL datastream Through PJL the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Jobstring is passed to the operator panel of the printer Support of Native PCL 5 Data Streams
87. LCDS_APA PrintResourcesPlugin tgz 02 08 05 08 42 48 LCDS_APA_PrintResourcesPluginGbogen ops de plugin total time 004 068 02 08 05 08 42 49 AFP PrintResourcesPlugin isny ops de creating 71122964952130 isny ops de AFP_PrintResourcesPlugin tgz 02 08 05 08 43 00 AFP _PrintResourcesPluginGisny ops de plugin total time 011 447 02 08 05 08 43 00 AFP PrintResourcesPlugin bogen ops de creating 11122964952130 bogen ops de AFP_PrintResourcesPlugin tgz 02 08 05 08 43 11 AFP _PrintResourcesPlugin bogen ops de transferring 71122964952130 bogen ops de AFP_PrintResourcesPlugin tgz 02 08 05 08 43 13 AFP PrintResourcesPlugin bogen ops de plugin total time 012 529 02 08 05 08 43 23 PFL_ArchivesPlugin isny ops de creating 11122964952130 isny ops de PFL_ArchivesPlugin tgz 02 08 05 08 43 26 PFL ArchivesPluginG isny ops de plugin total time 002 778 02 08 05 08 43 26 PFL_ArchivesPluginGbogen ops de creating 71122964952130 bogen ops de PFL_ Archives Plugin tgz 02 08 05 08 43 26 PFL_ArchivesPlugin bogen ops de transferring 71122964952130 bogen ops de PFL_Archives Plugin tgz 02 08 05 08 43 26 PFL ArchivesPlugin bogen ops de plugin total time 000 454 BACKUP FINISHED SUCCESSFUL total time 055 792 seconds Step Action Preparation step Data from the configuration database has been extracted to systeminfo prop u erties Oc PRISMAproduction Server
88. LP printer lt host gt LP host Optional lt port gt LPD port Optional U Specify user root only Optional lt JobId gt Oc PRISMAproduction Server Job Id to be deleted V Lprm version Example u prismapro bin lprm P lptesto1 00000001 In case of an error the following return codes and messages are used a Unknown LP parameter m LP socket connection problem occurred m Problem occurring executing LP command Chapter 7 Configuration LP Control Function Ipc The LP control client Ipc only allows the user to enable a LP printer This has the same effect enabling the printer in the Input Status View By using the all keyword instead of the printer name all LP printers will be enabled The enable printer functionality is also the only official Ipc sub command which is defined in the LP protocol Additional functionality provided by other lpc implementations use none official ways to provide this functionality Syntax u prismapro bin Ipc D enable lt printer gt lt host gt lt port gt u prismapro bin Ipc V Description Operator D Switch debugging on Optional trace is written into file u prismapro diag lp lpc log enable Enable LP printer to receive jobs lt printer gt LP printer or keyword all for all LP printer LPD host Optional LPD port Optional lt host gt lt port gt V Lpc versio
89. Manage ment Overview on page 258 Cluster Configura tion on page 276 System start of a print job Configure basic system ODS and job parameters Logging Enable or disable logging for the different Logging on page processes also called servers in the Oc 278 PRISMAproduction Server system Events Define special events which control the Events Configura tion on page 280 System Configura tion Overview on page 281 Devices Define devices tapes floppies network devices and link them to computers of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system Devices Configura tion on page 298 Master Slave Set up all computers within an Oc PRISMAproduction Server system and define if they are Master Slave or PrintSlave Master Slave Con figuration on page 301 Chapter 7 Configuration 253 Configuration Overview Application Description Message System Central configuration of the message sys tem Language support Deleting messages automatically Saving messages automatically to an external file m Automatic answers to messages to question dialogs Actions triggered by certain messages Suppression of the view of messages in the messages window Message System Overview on page 304 Licenses Manage all licenses in
90. Max BIN 4 MAN 1 Comment AUX 2 Comment DEFAULT FEED Entries name number active T comment FEED1 w comment FEED2 z comment FEED3 wl comment FEED4 comment New entry Duplicate entry Delete entry File lt u prismapro data cat DEFAULT SCT DAT gt is changed Username service Overview Before setting up tables with the SCT it is recommended to analyze the applications which are to be printed In general there are two possibilities for the systems engineer or administrator to set up tables Definition of tables for more than one application Example The following 8 applications should be printed with different paper colors or forms Applications 1 2 Stocknames WHITE YELLOW 224 Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation LCDS Module Stockset Configuration Tool Applications Sa SE E ee ae ae e o A a E Using a printer with 4 input bins for example Oc VP 5000 you need to set up three tables SCT table name Stockname Applications COLORo1 WHITE YEL 1245 LOW BLUE RED COLORo2 WHITE GREEN GRAY 36 FOR MA FORMB FORMC Using a printer with 3 input bins for example Oc PS75 you need to set up five tables SCT table name Stockname Applications COLORo4 COLORo2 WHITE GREEN GRAY FORMX FOR 78 MA EFORMB FORMC Definition of many tab
91. Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Tasks and Compo nents Introduction Tasks The Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup version 1 00 00 is an additional software which is delivered with Oc PRISMAproduction Server To enable its function the software has to be installed on the master of an Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster only The existing system is not changed In general the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup allows to backup all or part of the data of an Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster and m either to restore it in an identical configuration same cluster same Operating System same main Oc PRISMAproduction Server version m or to import it to a different configuration different Operation System different newer Oc PRISMAproduction Server version but same cluster regarding host names and IP addresses The creation of a backup is supported for Oc PRISMAproduction Server versions 3 00 3 02 3 04 3 10 4 0 Restoring is supported within identical versions Importing is sup ported in the same or higher versions As migration tool it is mainly intended to perform the import of a Caldera environment in SuSE for example to versions 3 04 3 10 The current version of Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup is a supplement for Configuration Backup Restore of Oc PRISMAproduction Server The Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup does not replace the functionality of the Configuration Backup Restore of Oc PRISMAproduc
92. Overview Unity Unity Overview Introduction This chapter describes what the POD Module Unity software product does and the purposes for which it can be used Definition Unity is a converter for PostScript and PDF documents PDF Portable Document Format It converts the print data into AFPDS using IOCA s Image Object Content Architecture It runs as an integrated service under SUSE Linux and acts as a RIP Raster Image Processor The program is controlled by the POD Module As an add on for the POD Module the Unity makes it possible to relocate the task of converting print lan guages which usually requires a lot of computing power to a separate computer Unity is controlled in the POD Module by way of the Print Job Manager The Print Job Manager PJM interface is where you select your print file and begin the conversion If the source format of your print file is PostScript 2 PostScript 3 or PDF the UnityRIP Module can convert the data into IOCA format which the printer can interpret This chapter helps you prepare for productive operation with the Unity It defines the requirements and describes the preliminary steps you have to perform before beginning work UnityRIP Server Requirements for using the Unity The conversion requires the following hardware and software Operating system SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Processor Pentium IV processor or higher RAM Minimum 1 GB RAM pe
93. PDF file enlarges the file size The resulting AFP files are accordingly big PostScript Workflow Many of the PostScript data on the market are not created according to the DSC rules Document Structuring Convention by Adobe Therefore these data are not page inde pendant and can therefore not be used in ObjectContainers A simple solution for this problem is to convert the PS into PDF The following steps are the same as for the PDF workflow described above This means the PostScript data are normalized via the conversion into PDF and are then processed with the known PDF workflow which generates AFP with ObjectContainers Note Li Programming with PostScript makes it possible to create a vast variety of complex print applications Many of the resulting advantages and features cannot be realized anymore after the conversion to PDF For example proprietary print parameters like stapling or stitching are not interpreted Loop programming and the usage of forms or similar re sources may also lead to large PDF files see note for the PDF workflow Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 97 Unity Unity Plus Graphic Arts_Plus The PDF workflow needs an additional conversion of PostScript into PDF All further steps are the same as for the PDF worklflow oon 3 lt TEA ys A Sa h a 7 2 A Alh Tac A Cal Nich Neel 5 al y 3 L aly 4 aa 3 by 4 5 bpon Ta 5 4 Tonpa 5 Input PS Normalized PDF Single PDFs PDF ObjCon Ou
94. POD Module Operation DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab Illustration H 9 Configuration for Printer YP5000 E A Job Processing Data Processing Mode input Job Ticket Translation Barcode Search Order for Custom Ticket Rules shown below Identifying required Print Data Converter ASCII Data PostScript Unity RIP H Remove ob Ticket from ASCII Data AFP IOCA Data AFP OCA A Remove Input Job Ticket from AFP PCL Data PCL Converter M Remove Input Job Ticket from PCL Data PDF Data PDF Unity RIP Remove Input Job Ticket from PDF Data PostScript Data PostScript Unity RIP H Remove Input Job Ticket from Po TIFF Data TIFF Converter E Remove Input Job Ticket from T Ready Data Processing Window Description Search Order for Identifying re quired Print Data Converter Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 165 DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab 166 Item Description Choose search order for identifying the required print data converter The required converter can be obtained from the following information sources m Oc Custom Ticket which is generated for each job when it was received via the LP or HotDir channel a Ticket template which is assigned to the receiving LP or HotDir channel m Rules shown below The following choises for t
95. Paper Configura use in the system See also Workflow tion Tool on page Media Assignment to Printers on page 583 413 Ticket Rules Use this feature to change ticket parame TicketRules Intro ters depending on other ticket parameters duction on page at job submission time 416 Archives Create modify or mirror archives for Archives print data of the POD Module Overview on page 441 Input Modules In these dialogs you can configure the Input Modules input queues for automatic job generation Overview on page when data are received via input channels 460 LP In LP Out HotDir Download DPconnect DPconnect enables you to print jobs DPconnect Func which have been sent from a DigiPath tionality on page workstation on an Oc Oc 147 PRISMAproduction Server system with the POD Module Chapter 7 Configuration 255 General Usage of the Configuration Applications General Usage of the Configuration Applications Introduction Because of the database concept some icons and control elements appear with the same functionality in many of the configuration applications This chapter explains these ele ments and will be referred to in the subsequent chapters Editing configuration data The configuration data is stored in the form of database tables Each table consists of rows and columns When you select a row you can edit its contents provided its value is
96. Preprinted Width of the paper in mm or inch Height of the paper in mm or inch Order Count Quantity of proposition of sorted printed sheets between min o and max 100 Drilling In case of drilled paper insert max 4 holes DPconnect needs the setting Drilling 3 If you select Form you can define the following parameters for each form Column Description Form Name Freeform name max 8 characters Form Description Description of the form max 255 characters Chapter 7 Configuration 415 TicketRules Introduction Ticket Rules TicketRules Introduction Introduction This feature offers a wide range of functions to cover almost any possible request for adapting jobs to the customer environment by changing parameters inside the job ticket Generally TicketRules manipulate parameters of job tickets which have been created automatically and therefore need some adjustments These jobs are submitted to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system via the input modules Download LP or HotDirectory Consequently the ticket rules have to be applied to the jobs in the configuration of the input queues Ticket rules can also be applied to mirrored jobs This is sometimes important to modify the tickets of mirrored jobs so that these jobs can be submitted on the mirror server which has a different configuration as the original server To avoid undesired changes of a ticket
97. Printer Configuration Cluster Introduction The system offers a possibility to build printer cluster which consist of more than one logical printer The same logical printer can also be a member of more than one cluster Clusters are configured with the C uster Configuration on page 276 tool They appear as virtual printers in Oc PRISMAproduction Server environment On this tab the administrator assigns selected printers to one cluster or more than one cluster Illustration General Print Parameter Job Queues Cluster Colors Input Devices Output Devices Printer Notification Select Name ir CS_Test_Cluster a FF_Test_Cluster Ww Jobsplitting The list shows all available printer clusters configured in the system The clusters can be defined in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer under Configuration gt Cluster To add or remove the membership of the current printer to a cluster the checkbox in the first column has to be de selected Note Li There is no check if the printers in a cluster are compatible with each other The admin istrator is responsible for building reasonable clusters The PJM addresses a cluster like a single logical printer Most of the attributes of the first logical printer in the cluster will be used for the whole cluster virtual printer Chapter 7 Configuration 365 Printer Configuration Toner Stations Printer Configuration Tone
98. See TicketRules Definition of Rules on page 423 Parameter List All actions which are defined in a ticket rule work with the ticket parameters The parameters list displays all known ticket parameters together with their descriptions You can add delete or modify new or customer specific parameters in this list All parameters defined here can be selected in the rule definition dialogs The parameter list has no separate detailed window See TicketRules Parameters on page 429 a Variables List The list shows all variables which have been defined in TicketRules Here you can define new variables which refer to a parameter or another variable and which may alter the value found in the current ticket for the referred parameter in different ways alteration types calculation replacement and so on Variables receive their value in the moment they are used in a rule that means they cannot be used to store previous values of a parameter For this case you can define new parameters In the lower part of the window you can edit the alteration code if an alteration type is used for the selected variable See TicketRules Variables on page 430 a Value Table List Value tables can be defined for the so called foreach action Each column of a value table has a unique name to refer to it With the foreach action a loop is started over each row of the specified value table All other actions can now refer by the column Chapter 7
99. Sheet DPconnect Barcode will be printed on a document page The desired page number has to be specified in the DPconnect Barcode statement in the LP input queue assigned job ticket template Add Extra Sheet Before Document DPconnect Barcode will be printed on an extra sheet added before the document The front page of this sheet is accessed with page number 1 the back page with number 2 The desired page number has to be specified in the DPconnect Barcode statement in the LP input queue assigned job ticket template Add Extra Sheet Behind Document DPconnect Barcode will be printed on an extra sheet added behind the document The front page of this sheet is accessed with page number n 1 the back page with number n The de sired page number has to be specified in the DPconnect Bar code statement in the LP input queue assigned job ticket tem plate Default Add no Extra Sheet Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 175 DPconnect Barcode Tab Note i When using an added barcode sheet the resulting page numbering range for barcode positioning which is from 1 to n extends over all the original document pages any inserted blank pages or blank sheets and the added barcode sheets Note i Barcode type code 39 is being used Allowed characters are A Z 0 9 the following characters inside the double quotes and the blank character The Barcode Text edit field restricts input to this charact
100. Stitch left edge command is put to the job only if dual stapling is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take dual staple substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring dual staple only gt Take dual staple substi tution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices if dual staple is requested in the input ticket All UP3I devices selected here are used Ignore Statement gt No stapling is done Right Side Portrait Staple Translate Statement directly gt A UP I Stitch Corner Staple Bottom left corner command is put to the job only if stapling is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Appendix Options LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take right side portrait staple substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring right side portrait staple only gt Take right side portrait st
101. Switches the file type CMD Command file ASCII on or off o Off this file type will not be exported to the Xerox format output device 1 On this file type will be exported to the Xerox format output device Default Chapter 7 Configuration 399 LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters 400 CME Copy modification entry binary Default 1 DAT System data file binary Default o FNT FRM FSL Font file binary Default 1 Form object file binary Default 1 Form source language file ASCII Default 1 ICT Ink catalog binary Default 1 IDR IMG IPM Ink directory binary Default 1 Image file binary Default 1 Interpress font mapping file binary Default o JDL Job descriptor object file binary Default 1 JSL LGO Chapter 7 Configuration Job source language file ASCII Default 1 Logo file binary Default 1 LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters LIB Utility file binary Default 1 LOG System integrity log file binary Default o MSC OSD PCH Temporary user file binary Default 1 OSDS diagnostic file binary Default o System patch file binary Default o PDE Page descriptor entry file binary Default 1 SAF STK SYS SAFES diagnostic file binary Default o Stockset file binary Default 1 System control file binary Default o TM
102. The rules are restored from this file when the application is opened again The list of known sections and keys is saved in the file u prismapro lib ticketRules tick etParameter dat This file is updated when changes have been approved in the list of known sections and keys The value tables are stored in the u prismapro cfg ticketRules directory The ticket rules value tables and the ticketParameter dat file are exported as a part of the database export during prismadiag The ticket rules value tables and the ticketParameter dat file are saved and restored in a Backup Restore If Oc PRISMAproduction Server is updated the ticket rules and the list of known pa rameters are restored If the default list of known parameters has been changed between the old and the new version the ticketParameter dat file is updated accordingly Logs and Traces When a rule is applied to a job ticket a section named ticketRulesHistory is added at the end of the ticket This section contains a list of all parameters which were changed by the rule but with the value before the rule was applied The syntax of the parameters is section key value For example job jobname old_name For sections which can occur multiple times also the number of the specified section is defined files 10 File_Copies 3 Traces are written into the files explorer lt Linux login_name gt out and explorer lt Linux g login_name gt err in u
103. There is no information on tabs in the document to be printed A resource file containing tab pages must be available in addition to the print file This resource file has been created using a special tool and has been saved as Resource of the type Tab Resource in the PJM Store options Under Positions you indicate before which document pages a tab page has to be inserted Chapter 10 Workflows Workflow Tab Printing Illustration i Tab Printing Tab Set A4Tab03En1 v Explicit Positions Resource From Print Data From Print Data using Size of Tab Pages Ok Cancel Help UlElement Element Tab Printing Tab Set Explicit The positions of the tab pages are indicated explicitly The tab pages are expected in a resource file Positions Indicate the pages of the input document before which a tab page should be inserted The input document is the document which does not yet contain tab pages UlElement Description i Has to be activated to make the settings for tab printing The required tab set is set here Rules for entering the position The single positions are separated by a semicolon Values must be in ascending order With duplex tumble documents you have to take care that the position always refers to a front page you cannot insert tab sheets before back pages The positions can be described by the foll
104. To Value list and Value Paste to value Used in rule s Customers_Address City Customers_Address Class Customers_Address Customer Name Customers_Address ZIP Code The resulting foreach loop shows like this The value table is evaluated row by row If the zip code matches the parameter Job_Class is set to the value of Class in this row The last matching row wins as the loop goes down over all rows of the table p foreach Customers Address 3 4 if Customers_Address ZIP Code matches reg ex 3 0 9 6 job Job_Class Customers_Address Class 436 Chapter 7 Configuration TicketRules Value Tables TicketRules Value Tables Introduction i For the foreach action see TicketRules Define Foreach Loop on page 435 value tables can be defined Each column of a value table has a unique name to refer to it With the foreach action a loop is started over each row of the specified value table All other actions can now refer by the column name to a specific value of the table The table is editable inside and outside of TicketRules therefore it is possible to import and export the table as a CSV file So the table could be created or edited in any spread sheet calculation program Each value table is referred by it s unique name Note All value tables which you define import here are globally known over all ticket rules and must therefore hav
105. Triggers Active Notification Interface 311 Message System Message SUPPreSSION cccssceessseeesseseeseeees 312 PLAC CS OSeacecact covcetcccnedassvereng icueessacueiectawnnas E 313 LIG QMS CS xiancees stead aden dai e aai a aaa d Taada aaa aaa 313 ACCO NUN O orsoni aaraa aaa a Tabanan EnEV a A daa arahat ainda e Ea 316 Accounting Administration OVErVieW ccccccceeceesssseeessseesenneees 316 Accounting Administration General SettingS ceeee 317 Accounting Administration Database Permissions 066 320 Accounting Administration Legacy Files sssssesseseees 321 Consumables asan aa aaa a Sodesedecdealacvesevavensts satan 322 Consumables Configuration ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaes 322 BACKUP REStOSE sceesssceeeeeceeceeeeeceeeceseeessseessenssecueaueeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeess 327 Contents Backup Restore Basic CONCEPt s sssscecsseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 327 Backup Restore WiINGdOW ccccccceseceseseseesnnncnneeeecueeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeess 330 Backup Restore Convert Old BaCkuPS ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesees 335 Library paths susiana teeda aeaa EENE 337 Library path CONFIQUIATION ccccsssceseeessssereeneeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 337 DPT MIVCCUS aeei aaee aa aaa ea a a aaa aaa iaaa aa a 339 Printer Configuration OvervieW sssssssssssssssssss
106. User name and password are always requested in the log in dialog The user account is saved within Oc PRISMAproduction Server and is checked by Oc PRISMAproduction Server on every user log on a LDAP User Option Authorization Ldap In contrast to the External User the log in data are kept on the LDAP server and authorization is performed via LDAP After a successfull authorization LDAP users are assigned to the Permission Groups which has been defined in System Configuration gt System Configuration LDAP Parameter on page 290 If other Permission Groups should be assigned to particular LDAP users this has to specified in the user management See also User Management LDAP Support on page 262 a User with Account on the Master Server Option Authorization auto Since Oc PRISMAproduction Server is installed on a Linux server the Linux user name can also be used for the Oc PRISMAproduction Server login If the user logs in from a terminal within the Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster using the Linux user name he does not have to indicate an Oc PRISMAproduction Server user name and password The login to Oc PRISMAproduction Server is performed automatically Chapter 7 Configuration User Management Overview i Oc PRISMAproduction Server considers this user as trustwothy because his data have already been checked by Linux Note The functionality of the Linux desktop depends
107. Workflow Media Assignment to Printers Workflow Media Assignment to Printers Introduction Steps The following steps must be performed to make use of the Attribute based Input Media Selection AIMS features of a supporting printer model Set messages flags It is advisable to activate a monitoring mechanism when working with media attributes This mechanism will issue messages in case of a mismatch of the paper types defined in Oc PRISMAproduction Server and provided by the printer Therefore you can select a special tuning set Activate media attribute mismatch MMT message on the Print Parameter tab in Configuration gt Printers available Tuning Sets I Activate media attribute mismatch MMT message _set_ _view_ __ Cancel Create paper types Under Configuration gt Paper define the papers you wish to use on your production system by entering a name and the intended media attributes The paper names defined here will be assigned to input bins later on It is necessary that the names and attributes match those entries defined on the target printers Otherwise no match on media attributes will be possible The following attributes characterize a paper Paper Name Freeform text but must be unique Weight As indicated on the package Color See table below Type See table below Size Width X Size Height Y Size Order Count Reserved for future functions
108. a rule must be explicitly requested for a job Only one rule can be requested for a job To execute more rules on one job the rules have to be defined as sub rules and the sub rules have to be actions of another rule super rule This rule can then be requested Ifa job is submitted via PJM then the PJM server merges the required default job ticket and the Oc custom ticket to a new ticket and calls the execution function in the Ticket Rules server with a reference to the job ticket The requested rule is applied to the ticket the control is given back to the PJM and the job is submitted with the changed ticket parameters Definitions 416 The following definitions are prerequsite to understand the purpose and function of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server TicketRules Job Ticket Definition The job ticket contains the job parameters The list of parameters is divided into named sections The section files can occur multiple times the other sections are unique Inside a section unique names for each parameter exist as so called keys For each key a specific value can be assigned Example In the section files a key File_Copies exists The assigned value is an integer value defining the number of copies of the file that shall be printed Chapter 7 Configuration TicketRules Introduction TicketRules Definition With the TicketRules application a sequence of actions depending on specific conditions of the ti
109. actions to be done before or after the backup Note This functionality will only work for executing scheduled backups with BackupEDGE Performing an Unscheduled Full Backup will not execute commands in any start stop file this for example stop Oc PRISMAproduction Server has to be done MANUALLY in this case BackupEdge will use the RETURN Code of edge start to control further processing which means that a RETURN CODE equal o will start the backup while a RETURN CODE NOT equal o will skip the backup Oc PRISMAproduction Server will NOT touch any existing customer configuration which exists on the server when Oc PRISMAproduction Server is installed However the above mentioned three files will be replaced overwritten by Oc PRISMAproduction Server enabled configuration if the files are not changed from the installed default per formed by BackupEdge itself AND The above mentioned scripts are preconfigured within the default installation of BackupEDGE and will executed within the default backup domain system only without explicit reconfiguration this is default For in formation about usage and configuration of backup domains please see the BackupEDGE documentation chapter 21 which covers this issue in more detail If an existing customer configuration of BackupEdge exists on the server when installing Oc PRISMAproduction Server software the files will NOT be replaced The Oc PRISMAproduction Server en
110. after successful conversion 220 Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation LCDS Module LCDS Resources Deletion Mode Description o The single element will be moved to backup files fnt_conv frm_conv img_conv and lgo_conv which serve as input library for the CONVERT function So all single resources will be collected in their original format and can be converted again by the CONVERT function whenever this is needed 1 The single element will be deleted from the COPY library without saving Regardless of the Deletion_mode o or 1 the resource element is not available on the system for the COPY function anymore after successful conversion Regardless of the Deletion_mode it is recommended to keep the original data on the Xerox resource tape or on the Xerox floppy Note the following when loading resources from Harddisk m Copy Xerox resources with corresponding extensions for example ABC FRM in uppercase characters into the directory u prismapro data resimport Icds Note You can use the command chfnm u to convert all resource names from low ercase to uppercase m Select Harddisk as the input device and start copying a The files in u prismapro data resimport Icds are not deleted automatically after the conversion Compile JSLs After copying the resources on your system you have to compile the JSLs This is done in the JSL section of the LCDS Resources window Here you can also edit the JSLs and m
111. an example text and to see how it is changed by the current definition When pressing the Ok button the syntax is checked and the field definition is inserted in the selected field The delimiter is enclosed in single quotes followed by a blank followed by the field range definition with the syntax lt From Field gt lt To Field gt Examples m Extract the characters 5 to 10 from a string 5 10 This means Delimiter From Field 5 To Field 10 Example Teststring gt string m Cut off all characters including the _ character 2 1 This means Delimiter _ From Field 2 To Field 1 Example Global_Company_Name gt Company_Name m Extract all characters between the first two I 2 2 This means Delimiter From Field 2 To Field 2 Examples etc hosts gt etc or etc hosts test gt hosts Chapter 7 Configuration TicketRules Define Foreach Loop TicketRules Define Foreach Loop Introduction The following example explains the usage of the foreach action type with value tables Example First a condition has to be added which refers to a value table row Name Parameter Operator Value Paste to value Used in rule s Description Customers Zip code Customers_Address ZIP Code matches reg ex Fao alue of a Condition value can be any combination of free
112. are located on the computer on which the converter is running these resources can be stored in a normal Linux path You then have to select this local path in the file selection box m Ifthe resources are located on another computer of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network on which the converter is not running a virtual directory RE SOURCE_PPML is provided This directory is a link to u prismapro data ppml In this directory you have to create a subdirectory in which all necessary resources must be copied This subdirectory has to be selected as Resource Path Per default a subdirectory demo is already existing Additionally you can define the layout to be printed in this dialog Do not optimize PDF Elements When converting PPML data PDF pages are created which are packed in the corresponding containers of the AFPDS data stream During the PDF creation for example some parts can be compressed This may lead to a smaller amount of data but decreases performance during conversion Per default the optimization is performed but can be switched off if this box is activated 6 Use the Compose dialog to call the Professional Document Composer to create imposi tioning sets for certain postprocessing devices see the user guide for the Professional Document Composer This dialog also allows you to combine the PPML file with a predefined impsitioning scheme 7 Click the Execute button to convert and print the file on the se
113. are valid Note Li If more than 1 file section in the Job Ticket references the Document Designer service it is called separately for each file in the list The output files generated are grouped this means they are printed as individual files and in the sequence given in the Job Ticket ODDA Resources Two resources control the behavior of the Document Designer command line apart from the input data m The Workflow Definition File a The Job Definition File For details about the content and meaning of these files consult the Document Designer documentation These resources can be referenced either as local files or as Oc PRISMAproduction Server library files It is strongly recommended to use the implicitly created library ODDA as only the Oc PRISMAproduction Server library concept guarantees the availability of the content on all servers in a cluster Alternatively when using the local 636 Chapter 12 Oc Document Designer Integration in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Oc Document Designer for Oc PRISMAproduction Server file approach the resource directories must be mounted on all servers of a cluster individ ually ODDA Service The ODDA service oddaservice is called at the appropriate point in time in the workflow when the dynamic extension described above is encountered in a Job Ticket It maps the parameters passed by the workflow engine to Document Designer command line parameters including the inpu
114. backup is restored However a selective restore is possible based on m either by including only data of certain plug ins command option plugins a and or by including only the data of certain servers command option servers Note The restore operation is only supported in version 3 04 3 10 and 4 0 Backup data of version lt 3 04 can only be imported When restoring only part of the data the user is responsible for data integrity As for data integrity reasons the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Master server must be shut down before performing the restore the information about the current configuration and status is read from the systeminfo properties file This file is created automatically during the preparation step for the restore but it can also be created manually by any text editor The latter would allow a restore in case the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system is not fully operable Summary The restore process is performed in two steps Step Action Remarks 1 PrepareRestore The properties file is created and Oc PRISMAproduction Server is shut down 2 Restore The system state is checked If okay Oc PRISMAproduction Server is down on Master server and up on all Slave PrintSlaves the data is collected and stored by the storagemanager Description of the PrepareRestore options No options Description of the Restore options Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduct
115. bility to create you own company specific colors and to identify them by an alias name Using these color definitions simplifies the complete workflow for the graphic designer For the separation it is sufficient to communicate this name to the RIP The system then identifies the appropriate parts of the color and extracts these as color separation Here also applies the so called In Rip separation If the documents have been built up consequently with spot colors the separation is quite easy You can also use the standard process color names Cyan Magenta and Yellow spelled exactly this way In comparison spot colors have the advantage that all color shadings are only defined in the spot color itself and therefore no interferences with neighbor colors are to be expected To separate named colors you have to select the respective function in the POD file properties in the PJM see the description of the POD File Properties gt Spot Colors Color Names Mode in the POD User s Guide Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 89 Unity Color Separation 90 Collect Compose Media Halftone and Raster Color Unity Separate Colors Separation Method Spot colors Color Names Mode color Name in the source file Printer color PANTONE 224 CV Alternate Color E Merge all separable color planes to a single HLC Frequency Angle 106 45 0 Several colors ca
116. cannot be changed it works just as a factory default The second one is identical to the first one and may be changed according to your own Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 101 Jobrequirement Functional Module 102 needs You may use the PJM to do all the changes necessary for your task You find the templates in the usual symbolic OBINPUT_TICKETS folder When setting up an LP input queue you may assign one of the ticket templates in JOBINPUT_TICKETS to an LP input queue by selecting the appropriate one with the combo box in the Selected Profile line The JOBREQUIREMENT TIC template may be used for LP input queues submitting jobs by pjm as well as by startdpconnect Detailed workflow of Job Routing using the jobrequirement function a Oc PRISMAproduction Server processes print jobs as usual but does not specify a physical destination printer a The jobrequirement function detects the requirements of the job which are necessary to decide which of the attached destination printers are able to print this job After this the print job is held in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server spool m The detected job requirements are now visible for the operator or printroom manager a The printroom manager selects the job in the All Jobs view and accepts the job re quirements Due to his knowledge of the capabilities of the attached destination printers he selects the suitable physical printer a The printroom manager changes th
117. cccccecceseceeeseeeseeeeseeees 423 Foreach actiotrsrsceniin iieii 435 Introduction cc ccccccscesscesscesssssecsssessecsseesseeees 416 Main Window ccccccccscesseesscesecessesssssesessees 418 MiGSSd OOS ise ississciscs sesscesisesnecavstueeieonssesseseesseszces Paratnieters aea ETR Return Fxit Save and log SEINES ss casacvansissavscheisdetessesaess iesassenstvsdvesb a Value tables Variables sinnini aaas TIFF Converter CONCEP sidisen riser ias in i sn aiara 130 Op r ti n issaraen 132 U Unity UNY srne nan dvessneavonsies AIMS Extended AIMS Color Separation 00 COnVERSION eisessessiitedeisees sass Get PE Service sssscsscsscssiescsstiscestestasseszassssoscet Input Tray Switching were Resources and Fonts Troubleshooting eee Unity Plus Graphic Arts_Plus oe 96 UnityRIP Witte RIP GedverAinawitatiiedeemeae 75 User Defined Paper User Defined Paper misapis iiini 414 User IDs User TDS iniiao 62 User Laguage User Lag uage sic ssssecicessesdssceseoncsosssosedsasdosdveenss 264 User Management Create and Administrate Users cccsccccceees 264 EDAP Support sccscsscosevessetsvsiues ieexestsscseesseseces VEL VIEW arra TEN User Info Window User Permissions cccccccssecssseceeseeeseeeessees User Roles 641 Index User Roles sersem nnan 63 WwW Workflow Color Selection c cccccccscessessesseseessessesseseseaees 578 Tab pintig orsisiiiiinieroioipiniises 568 WIP ST dev
118. channel Trace flags Possible values 300 lt Number gt o lt Number gt o lt Download port number gt ffffoof8 lt of fEffftf gt Description Network connection time out in seconds The value o disables this feature so no time out will occur not recommended The maximum number of simultaneous client connections for the daemon The value o disables this feature so that no limit is set Defines the port where application socket traces are made To enable this the Trace flags must have at least the following flag set 0x00000200 The value o disables this feature Defines the detail level of the trace file See also the Trace channel and the Trace level parameter 478 Chapter 7 Configuration Download Parameter Trace level Possible values Description o Defines the detail level in the trace file lt 1 4 gt When trace level is o error traces are still being written Also dependent of the Trace Flags data traces can still be writ ten General Parameters Parameter Description Possible values lt Any character String gt Description The description of the Down load port PortMaxClient Connections o lt Number gt Data Input Parameter Parameter EbcdicHeader Conversion Possible values SEB243V1 gt Use the EBCDIC SEB243V1 character set SEB243V1 IfsToSpace gt Use the EBCDIC SEB243V1
119. character set with the special IFS to space conversion IBM CP_V10500 gt Use the EBCDIC IBM CP_V10500 character set Data Output Parameter The maximum number of simul taneous client connections for this port The value o disables this feature so that no limit is set Description Defines the Download header conversion table from EBCDIC to ASCII This is needed for the Oc Custom Ticket and the IN FO pages Chapter 7 Configuration 479 Download Parameter OutputDataS tructure Possible values Description AddCRLF gt Specifies the data structure of the Add CRLF as record delimiter output file AddCRLF_WithAFPTrim gt Add CRLF as record delimiter with AFP record trim NoRDW gt Remove record length field compressed data PassThrough gt Leave the input data file as it is LCDS data stream VAR gt Use the IBM format RDW Variable record 4 byte as record delimiter VAR_WithAFPTrim gt Use the IBM format RDW Variable record 4 byte as record delimiter with AFP trim OCT Parameters Parameter DefaultTicket ExtractParame ters Possible values Description oo Name of the default ticket to be used for job submission or lt File name gt AFPParameters gt See also chapter Extracting AFP Extracts parameters for the OCT parameters in Input Modules from the first No op in the AFP Overvi
120. describes the program functions and outlines measures for correcting possible problems Stand Alone Conversion in Command Line Mode If the TIFF Converter is run as a separate process the conversion job is submitted via a user specific statement A number of these statements are available to choose from The required statement is either selected by the user or integrated into a user specific shell script This customizing is performed by the system administrator using operating system tools Description of Control Parameters If the TIFF Converter is called without parameters tiffconv the following help text is displayed 132 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation RERRRRRKARERERRKAKERARKRRERERERAKAKRERAARAKERRKAAKRERKARAKRRAKERAKAAKERRKAKRRRRRA C Oc Printing Systems Germany 2001 2003 Proprietary data company confidential All rights reserved KARKAAAAARKAAARAAAARARAAAAAARARAAKARARARARARARRAKAAARAAAAKAAARAKAAAARARAKARARR AAA Version Usage more f V3 02 01 Large File Support max TIFF file size 4 GB tiffconv options in out Valid options values in brackets are default s a w E x arg y arg N a m arg i arg 0 arg u f arg X arg samples tiff files out of a directory to one output file samples tiff files out of a filelist to one output file samples tiff files specified by wildcards to one output file generates only a page printfile obso
121. di rectly without SCT in AFP file Not for PS5 5 75 or equivalent Designed for PS 158 or higher SC Table Name of SCT Table to be activated with PJM Call for Printer Typ SCT only Blanks must be _ LCDS Setting gt General LCDS Setting gt General LCDS Setting gt General LCDS Setting gt General LCDS Setting gt Feed LCDS Setting gt Feed Oce Custom Ticket Parameter Feed Mode MainBin AuxForm_Back General Description Options and Syntax De fault MAIN or 1 16 XEROX like Parameter to use the input bin as speci fied by STOCKSET SCT MAIN Default or to use the defined bin as input bin e g for test purpose Integer 1 16 Defines the number of the special XEROX input bin called MAIN Integer 1 16 Defines the number of the special XEROX input bin called AUX Definition of FORM Overlay to be used in the FEED AUX case to be loaded on front pages to be printed from AUX tray This option is designed for fanfold printers Like AuxForm_Front for the back page of a sheet to be printed from the AUX tray Likewise this option is designed for fanfold printers sponding GUI option Additional notes LCDS Setting gt Feed LCDS Setting gt Feed LCDS Setting gt Feed LCDS Setting gt Feed LCDS Setting gt Feed Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket Description of the corre 563 Oce Custom Ticket 564 Parameter
122. directly in this table or via the context menu see below Using this setting you can force the system to preset certain default settings in connection to the selected country For exam ple the presentation of the date in the All Jobs list or the default measure unit in Configuration gt Paper m Default If this option is selected the global settings which have been defined in Configuration gt System are also valid for this user See System Configuration Country Preferences on page 293 a CA DE GB US Predefined country settings can be selected or the settings can be modified by opening the Specific Country Settings dialog click the button Date Format English United States Number Format English United States Measure System metric xample Term Format Short Date 4 14 08 Medium Datum Apr 14 2008 Long Date April 14 2008 Time 5 30 15 PM Number 1 234 567 89 j 1 234 567 89 Measure System mm Here you can select a Date Format a Number Format and a Measure System metric or imperial for many countries The examples are adjusted to the values which are currently set The default settings are dependent on the user language If the settings in this dialog do not match with US DE CA or GB Mixed is displayed If you right click the mouse in the table a context menu is opened with the f
123. error inform administrator 125 Error opening input file Action Verify that input file exists If it does in form the administrator 126 Expired or invalid license 104 Error reading input file Action System error inform administrator 128 Wrong page layout Note Internal error Action Report error to systems consultant 131 12 Command line error Action Check and correct the command line 105 13 Error writing output file Action System error inform administrator 132 14 Compression error Note Internal error Action Report error to systems consultant 134 16 Resolution not supported Note Internal error Action Report error to systems consultant Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 127 PCL Converter Troubleshooting 128 135 17 Front end error with return code o Note Internal error Action Report error to systems consultant 136 18 Page size exceeds limitations Note Internal error Action Report error to systems consultant 137 19 AFPDS and TIFF datastream only MMR possible Note Internal error Action Report error to systems consultant 138 20 Input trays out of range Note Wrong input tray selected Action Select correct input tray 139 21 Output trays out of range Note Wrong output tray selected Action Select correct output tray These settings 22 Page width greater page length not possible are rejected at Note User error the GUI Action Correct input file These settings
124. externally purchased sources do not allow state preservation m Resources softfonts macros overlays are not permanently kept in the memory Therefore the resources cannot be accessed anymore after a restart of the PCL converter Reason The PCL converter is restarted for every conversion Unlike an HP printer it does not work in an infinite loop Therefore the converter does not know permanent resources from a former conversion anymore Known and acceptable differences between the PCL Converter and PCL Emulation a Highlight color cannot be accessed like it is possible with the PCL emulation For this full color would be necessary as described in the HP Technical Reference Manual Use HP color drivers we recommend HP Color LaserJet 4500 to create color files Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Troubleshooting Reason the externally purchased sources comply with the manuals mentionened above and expect escape sequences for color conversion described in theses manuals Converter Error Messages Error No Under Oc Stand alone Error message PRISMApro process duction Serv er o o Process completed without errors Error opening protocol file Note The logging function is only intended for troubleshooting It must be switched off during normal operation Action Switch off the logging function 102 Not enough memory 124 Error opening output file Action System
125. generate a large number of files When traces are written the following files can be found in the u prismapro diag hotdir directory lt Jobld gt _ lt filename gt The data file to be printed lt JobId gt oct The job specific Oce custom ticket created by HotDir lt JobId gt _original oct The customer supplied Oce custom ticket lt JobId gt _pjm_cmd out The command used to call the job submission script All_ISS_ The protocol of the Input Status View command exchange All_PJM_ The protocol of the PJM socket commands hotdir err hotdir log The HotDir daemon error and log files Dependent of the trace flags set and the type of HotDir configured not all of these files is created Chapter 7 Configuration 501 HotDir Behavior in Error Situations Trace Level and Flags details 502 This chapter is only useful for users who want to know more details In most cases the options described in the previous chapter will be sufficient HotDir has a trace level and trace flags which control the behavior on how the trace file is written Using theses levels and flags it is possible to control the amount of data and when the data is written The flags are used bit wise which means each trace flag mode can be set separately Normally the TraceLevel should be set to 3 or 4 to get enough trace details this will produce large traces Trace level The trace level can be set from o to
126. have to select the tabset which corresponds to the tabset inserted into the printer With the tabs Standard Paper and User defined Paper you can chose between the units mm and inch You can switch between four tabs to show or modify the different tables Chapter 7 Configuration 413 Paper Configuration Tool Illustration B gh X mm User defined Paper Standard Paper Form Tab Paper Name Weight Ad4_preprinted Ad4_preprinte Ad4_preprinte A4_preprinte 90 Yellow 90 Green 90 Blue 90 Red Description of the tabs Tab User defined Pa per Standard Paper Form Tab Color Y Size Drilling Order Count 297 0 297 0 297 0 297 0 Type Preprinted Preprinted Preprinted Preprinted oocooo Description Select this entry to set up user defined medias and to specify various media attributes see table below User defined papers can be assigned to printer input trays using the Media Settings dialog in the Printer Pool application Paper types which are most commonly used are already prede fined and are shown in the table if you select this entry These papers are only defined by size Standard papers can be assigned to printer input trays using the Media Settings dialog in the Printer Pool application see chapter Printer Pool gt Tool Bar and Menu Functions in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server
127. in which the colors to be considered for separation are located The following illustration shows an RGB color scheme a select ed dot at R 255 G 230 and B 1 50 and a circle around this dot This circle indicates the position of the neighboring similar color values which are located in the tolerance zone indicated a 86 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity Color Separation Color mode Description CSY sRGB colors are treated as pure colors because only one channel R G or B exists for the internal conversion based on the standardized color rendering profile In this case no color range can be defined If you create PDFs using Adobe Distiller make sure that in Settings gt Job Options gt Color gt Working Spaces gt RGB the sRGB IEC61966 2 1 profil is not selected Choose instead Adobe RGB 1998 Note The sRGB IEC61966 2 1 profile is set as default profile in Adobe Distiller for RGB color work spaces and is optimized for display on various screens This profile is not very suitible for color separation with UntityRIP Selection of a range is not provided in this case Therefore the whole color range of the color channel C M or Y will be separated This leads to an output of all shades of the selected channel on the color form Bear in mind that in some cases the yellow separation contains more information as for example the cyan separation Therefore only if
128. m Open the Download Configuration and create a new Download port m Enter the port number which matches the TCP IP printer in MVS m Click OK Then you have to change the following setting Set DefaultTicket to LCDS_Driver TIC note the leading dot This job ticket sets the job type to LCDS switches banner generation on and selects the printer DocuPrint Without these settings the JES filter will probably complain because of nonsense record lengths Restriction LCDS Driver tickets are not yet fully supported by the PJM GUI Currently the GUI doesn t enforce selecting a printer of type LCDS Driver and it displays many pa rameters like JDE JDL LCDS preprocessing although these are meaningless in the LCDS Driver Do not save the template ticket u prismapro cfg jobinput ticket LCDS_Driver TIC with the PJM GUI If you want to edit such a ticket you should better use a text ed itor On MVS host side you will need a properly configured TCP IP printer with the IP Address of your Linux server and port number of your download daemon some print jobs with ANSI IBM3211 or without carriage controls Chapter 7 Configuration 359 PostScript Backends Xerox 6180 VP2110 VP61xx OCE31x5 Canon 150 CPS700 900 PostScript Backends Xerox 6180 VP2110 VP61xx OCE31x5 Canon 150 CPS700 900 Introduction i The purpose of the PostScript Backends is as follows Printing of a given PostScript
129. m You should know the color to be separated To find out a desired color you have to use third party products like Enfocus PitStop Advantages a Easy handling because color information can be identified and separated uniquely m Easy creation of the raw data because you always work in the same color space m Low error rate and few error runs The separation of pure colors can be selected in the POD file properties in the PJM see the description of the POD File Properties gt Standard Colors in the POD User s Guide Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 85 Unity Color Separation Collect Separate Colors Compose Separation Method Standard colors CMY RGB Media Halftone and Raster e Color cotor Name in the source file Printer color Freque Angle Unity Cyan 106 Magenta 106 Yellow 106 Red 106 Green 106 Blue 106 All Colors 106 one color that should be separated as HLC The Printer color will always be Alternate Color Frequency and raster settings can be adjusted individually Ok Cancel Mixed colors Mixed colors are used in many documents Such a color can be for example RGB orange of the following values R 255 G 230 and B 150 Color mode Description RGB x If you want to use this color for separation and you also want to separate similar colored pixels next to this color it is advisable to indicate an additional range of values
130. may be enriched with PJL commands however PJL com mands other than PDL language settings will be ignored If no explicit PDL language setting exists DPconnect determines the type of the print data by searching for characteristic byte sequences a Customer developed print job submitter software with File types PostScript PDF PCL ASCII TIFF AFP IOCA Xerox ASCII or XPIF job ticket or without job ticket Using LP protocol or Oc PRISMAproduction Server Hotdir Note It is recommended to use the above mentioned Xerox printer types These are the most capable ones because they offer the widest range of job features Of course you can use other Xerox printer types But Xerox job tickets for these printer types may not be suitable for all desired job features a Print jobs with other Xerox job ticket types DPconnect accepts jobs with almost any kind of Xerox job ticket which complies with the Xerox Job Ticket Programming Guide This is to cover a wider range of Xerox print jobs However some rarely appearing job ticket statements are not implemented These statements will be shown in a message in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server message box To handle these cases DPconnect may be set up in a way either to in terrupt job processing and ask the operator how to proceed or to ignore the unimple mented statements DPconnect supports jobs which store the job ticket apart fom the print data in a separate file This is for instan
131. neither checked nor any preflights are done Such tasks should be performed before submission of the PDF file to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system Working with ObjectContainers assumes that only one document page is used per con tainer Therefore multipage PDF files have to be separated into single pages which are then sequentially supplied with an ObjectContainer frame and sent to the printer Procedure Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity Unity Plus Graphic Arts_Plus In the PJM select PDF Unity or PS Unity as input data format to adjust the con verter options When generating the print job the PDF file will be separated into single page PDFs in the first place Each page is then packed into an ObjectContainer From these containers an AFP data stream is created Afterwards you can apply different oper ations to this AFP file for example with the PDC The printer has a RIP integrated which extracts single PDF pages from the incoming AFPs and converts them into bitmaps These are then processed directly in the printer without further manipulation for example compression Obos h h A onpa a 4 5 5 obpr 5 4 Obor Input PDF Single PDFs PDF ObiCon Output AFP i Note If you convert PDF files which contain so called forms references to always equal page contents the total of the single pages may require much more memory than the original Also embedding fonts in the single page
132. network overload less shared mapped folders and load on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server m You can specify an OCT which is automatically sent after the data is copied trans ferred a When multiple files are selected and JobSequencing is set to grouped a subdirectory is created where the selected data files are copied transferred to a If JobSequencing is set to FileTime the needed one second delay is automatically put between each transferred data file The jobs are always generated using a trigger file which is created after each job when the copy process data transfer was successful A small trace file is written every time the HotDirWinClient is used The syntax of the HotDirWinClient command is as follows HotDirWinClient exe Sequence MultiFile OCT TransType FTPISMB lt Target gt lt Data files gt The items in square brackets are optional the items in lt gt must be specified Parameters Description sis Sequence Specifies how single and multiple data files are handled Be aware that the sequence in which the data files are selected is not the same sequence as the files are provided as parameter for the HotDirWinClient The following options are valid FileTime A delay of one second is put between each copied transferred data file This makes it possible for the HotDir daemon to use the data file time to submit the jobs in the correct sequence See HotDir config
133. no sense and is therefore not considered as well defined The foreach loop will walk over every row of the selected value table and process the actions in its block for every row See TicketRules Define Foreach Loop on page 435 Add message Opens the Add Messages Dialog which allows editing of ey messages see Add Messages Dialog Finally a valid message can be chosen and this will be added to the sequence of actions See TicketRules Definition of Conditions Settings Messages and Return Exit on page 425 Add subRule Opens the Add Sub rules Dialog which allows editing of sub g rules see Add Subrule Dialog A sub rule can be chosen and this will be added to the sequence of actions Add Return A return statement will be added to the sequence of actions before after B Add exit An exit statement will be added to the sequence of actions before after Add exit job An exit job statement will be added to the sequence of actions before after Add comment This action type is intended for better clarity of the rules With before enough clear comments a rule will be much easier to maintain after Hp Delete tree entry action x Deletes the selected action from the sequence of actions Chapter 7 Configuration TicketRules Definition of Conditions Settings Messages and Return Exit TicketRules Definitio
134. not derived from values in other fields To modify a column entry double click it with the mouse There is a standard set of functions and icons for editing tables Configuration Icons Icon Description Inserts a new row or item following the selected one Add new Row Item x Deletes the selected row or item Delete Row Item amp Shows the actual status of the data stored in the database Any Reload Dis changes that you have made via the interface are discarded if you card all do not save them prior to executing this function Changes B Saves to the database any changes that you have made via the inter Save face gh Duplicates a row or an item in the database The entry can be Duplicate Row modified afterwards Item Context Menus If you click with the right mouse button on a column title a context menu opens with functions to sort the list or to hide and display colums 256 Chapter 7 Configuration General Usage of the Configuration Applications Sort ascending Sort descending Unsort Hide column Show column gt Reset to default Column resize mode Auto resize last column Auto resize next column Auto resize subsequent columns Auto resize all columns No automatic resizing Ifyou click with the right mouse button in the list a context menu opens with commands to insert or delete rows Add new row Duplicate row Delete row Copy value of cell Pas
135. of Files amp Workflow Definition section you can choose the files from these libraries Language Modules Depending on the language module you can select files from different libraries Module Description Select files from the different input devices CARTRIDGE QIC TAPE which are collected under the DEVICE library Select original files in their native format from TARGET For LCDS resources select input devices presented under DEVICE XFLOPPY_35 XRES_CARTRIDGE XRES_TAPE For LCDS print data you can select cartridge channel additionally channel1 to channel4 or tape under the XDATA_DEVICE library You can also select JSLs and re sources directly from the jsl and XRESOURCE library Select original files in their native format from TARGET OUTPUT saves files in the TIFF PS and PDF format which have been reconverted from IOCA In PFL you find the archives which contain the final print jobs and print files Under PRPRINTS you can select archives with print jobs and print files which are not yet finished Chapter 7 Configuration 337 Library path configuration Library paths Window Column Description Name The logical name of the library also virtual paths Path The physical path of the file Type Indicate whether the library belongs to the Composer Printer PJM or web client The type INTERNAL means that the library is not visible as node in the Explorer tree
136. on the user role of the Linux user name Permission Groups and Default User i In order to provide permissions for users within Oc PRISMAproduction Server these users are assigned to Permission Groups A Permission Group contains a specific user role and a set of editable permissions New Permission Groups can be created and assigned to users in the user management See User Management User Permissions on page 271 Oc PRISMAproduction Server users admin service applic and operator are precon figured as basic users Predefined permissions groups with the same names are assigned to these users Note These basic users and basic Permission Groups cannot be modified or deleted User IDs and Access Rights on page 62 Login with Authorization Auto Basically the user of an Oc PRISMAproduction Server system should be able to work under the same conditions in every environment Master Slave or from a LAN connected workstation this means with the same windows and with the same functionality To get access to Oc PRISMAproduction Server a login which requires a valid access permission is always performed The difference is whether the login on the Linux system is performed on a dedicated Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Master or Slave or from outside from a worksta tion where Oc PRISMAproduction Server is only one application among others The user of the Oc PRISMAproduction Serv
137. page 15 Alternatively to the installation DVD there are also 4 installation CDs attached Note Li The installation DVD and the installation CDs can only be used alternatively and not in parallel for the same installation Hardware Requirements a A minimum of 1 GB MB RAM is required for installing and running Oc PRISMAproduction Server in an productive environment If the value is below this limit an error message is displayed m The use of hard disks of at least 36 GB is required See the Release Notes for detauled requirements Enhanced Documentation For details about making boot modules and configuration floppies for the LINUX system see file OCE installation readme txt English language or OCE installation liesmich txt German language on the Server Configuration Floppy CD There are also Quick Guides README for English language LIESMICH for German language located on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Chapter 1 Installation 13 Installation of SUSE Linux Preliminary Notes Installation on non Oc certified Servers On the Server Configuration Floppy CD you find images of Server Configuration floppies of the type Generic These images can be selected by the type of hard disk controller which is built into the system please see installation readme files on the CD for further details For the installation of Linux itself please refer to the description below Cold Standby Rack High Availability
138. prepares the job on the mirror Input channel mirroring a Print data are mirrored by the input channel daemon b PJM transfers only the ticket and prepares the job on the mirror Normally the whole job is mirrored using the PJM option 1 in the figure above This causes additional I O load on the Original server To reduce this load some of the Input Modules can mirror the data files on the fly to the mirror server option 2 in the figure above Each received network data packet is immediately sent to the mirror server This means that during job submission the print data don t have to be read from Hard Disk and sent to the mirror server Currently this feature is only available for the Download and LP Input Module For a description of the possibility to mirror jobs via Input Modules see Input Modules Overview on page 460 An Oc PRISMAproduction Server server can be an Original server as well as a Mirror server at the same time This means that 2 Oc PRISMAproduction Server servers can serve as backup solution for each other Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Mirror Print Jobs Prerequisites and Functionality Mirror Print Jobs Prerequisites and Functionality Prerequisites m Interconnectivity License must be installed on the original Oc PRISMAproduction Server Master and on the second Oc PRISMAproduction Server Master server which is used as mirror server m Under Configuration gt User
139. printer by print parameters Example jn simple nc 2 f test afp For fully prepared print jobs All parameters are defined in the Job Ticket Chapter 8 PJM Command Line 541 PJM Command Line Parameters Parameter Group Description Local Ticket For prepared print jobs A few parameters in the job ticket must Print Files be updated Example t test tic f test afp prt myprinter Local Ticket Oct For print jobs which are based on a default ticket and where a lot of parameters must be updated All dynamic parameters are contained in the Oct Local Ticket Oct Should not be used Either the dynamic parameters are written Print Files in an Oct or the Print Files group is used for overwriting Reprint request The special request r where a job kept in intermediate storage should be reprinted The Job Ticket for the reprint is supposed to be the ticket of the original job If the f parameter is used together with a Job Ticket it simply overwrites the file name in the List of Files in the Job Ticket The file type in the ticket remains valid If it is used without a Job Ticket the type of the file depends on the language module which interprets the job on the server Default file types are IOCA for the language module POD AFP for the language module APA and LCDS Data for the language module LCDS Syntax Examples for Use Cases Command Requesting a job id s Servername user U
140. printer data send via lpr Ipd 515 PP optional closed PP Receiving jobs send via download downloadd 1025 65536 PP optional closed Only the configured ports are opened Chapter 1 Installation 41 Security and Services Service Description Port Control Status Default PP ResMng GUI lt gt Communicator Resource 1555 PP internal needed started Manager PP Simple Network Management Protocol sn 161 162 needed started mp Interface for read write PRISMA configura tion and job parameters Planned to become closeable via configuration PP Oce post script driver PP snaztcp lt gt li in id mode LU6 2 not 6201 6216 PP internal optional closed available at the moment PP Spool Daemon lt gt ODS splsocd 1300 PP internal needed started PP Web Server HTTP Access for java clients 80 PP internal needed started Explorer Launcher to Explorer server for loading java classes PP Mirror daemon is needed to be able to receive 8000 optional closed Data files on the mirror server Only running when Interconnectivity License ex ists on the server PP Postgres database for Print File Library 5433 PP internal needed started PRISMA Server YaST needed started PP General PRISMA startup Please do not alter Proxy Server configure a Proxy Server for KDE YaST X not config applications ured Not a local service Remote Administration VNC Server 5901 usabl
141. prismapro diag explorer and in explorerserver log and explor erserver err in u prismapro diag explorerserver Chapter 7 Configuration 439 TicketRules Activate for LP Download and HotDir TicketRules Activate for LP Download and HotDir Introduction Please choose as program for the job submission TicketRules for the desired port printer or directory in the Download LP or HotDirectory Configuration Window Examples for the usage for jobs transmitted via download to Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server a Depending on the MVS jobs class a specific Formdef should be selected for the job m Depending on the FORMS parameter a specific Oc PRISMAproduction Server printer should be selected in the job ticket m Depending on the BUILDING and ROOM parameter specific Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server printers and Job queues are selected The description for the valid sections parameters and values you find in Oce Custom Ticket on page 548 440 Chapter 7 Configuration Archives Overview Archives Archives Overview Introduction In the Configuration workspace you find the Archives application which allows you to create new archives or to modify and mirror existing archives for the POD Module print data Additionally you can create the database connection or set up the Document Manager Cache for the archives Finally you can back up and restore document and job data The user interface c
142. queues print and hold exist They almost correspond to the settings of the so called mailbox Chapter 7 Configuration PostScript Backends Xerox 6180 VP2110 VP61xx OCE31x5 Canon 150 CPS700 900 Queue print A job which is sent to this queue will be printed immediately In this case printed means that the job has been ripped and sent to the CPS by the EFI controller The EFI controller then reports that the job has been printed Queue hold In this case the job remains in the EFI controller and has to be activated separately Note Li For details concerning the print parameters see Oc PRISMAproduction Server Technical Reference Guide Chapter 7 Configuration 361 Printer Configuration Custom specific Infopages and Resources for Configured Printers Printer Configuration Custom specific Infopages and Re sources for Configured Printers Introduction The systems creates automatically new runtime printer directories which contain printer specific files for example resources for infopages This is done when a new printer is configured AND always on startup of the system During this procedure the content of old printer runtime directories is deleted if they exist The runtime printer directories are build and filled in 5 steps Every configured printer leads to a sub directory in u prismapro cfg printers where the name of the subdirectory is the name of the printer Exception Names startin
143. required for the job can all be accessed on the server concerned For instance if the job files have to be converted but the converter is installed on a different server the conversion step will have to be executed on the other server Default not active Access Each Print er of a Cluster When you are using printer clusters you normally just pick the cluster name for selecting a printer and the system decides which physical printer will print the job Default not active Chapter 7 Configuration 285 System Configuration eMail Notification System Configuration eMail Notification Introduction If you create a print job via PJM you can specify an E mail address which receives a message if the job has a defined status To use this function you have to make known the access data of the SMTP server to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system The required data are provided by the administrator of the SMTP server SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Illustration amp ODS Parameter System and Job Parameter eMail Notification Mirroring LDAP Parameter Country Preferences Password SMTP Host Port 25 Administrator Mail Address Username and Password Username Password Ready eMail Settings Parameter Description SMTP Host IP address or name of the server for outgoing mail Administrator Mail address of the Oc PRISMAproduction Serv
144. root Script Process The information shown during execution of u prismapro bin modpcname is intuitive Please follow these instructions as shown below After changing the name of a PRISMA server all jobs are in valid Are all PRISMA jobs finished y n q uit Y On n or q the script will be terminated Are all PRISMA windows closed y n q uit Y If you are logged in as an Oc PRISMAproduction Server user the following message is displayed and the script is terminated Otherwise the script continues to stop the system Chapter 1 Installation 51 Change IP Address Host and Domain Name PRISMA user ID is logged in Logout all PRISMA users and restart the command please Stopping PRISMA Stopping Explorer server Explorer server stopped Stopping resource manager Stopping comminication processes Delete message queues for communicator processes Ok i370 channel driver already unloaded Stopping UCD snmpd At this time the Suse Linux configuration tool YAST is started with the Network cards configuration Ty YasT2OnoT0222 ope oce net ey Use NetworkManager to La Network Setup Method have a desktop applet manage connections for all interfaces It is well suited to switching among wired and multiple wireless networks Use the Traditional Method with ifup if you do not run a desktop environment GNOME or KDE or need to us
145. same time as the original jobs Default 12h Hold Locked Jobs Number of hours after which locked jobs will be deleted from h the server If you enter o h the locked jobs are not deleted at all Hold Log Files Use this field to specify how many days the ODS log files d u prismapro diag are to be kept If you enter o d the log files are not deleted at all The default setting is 2 days Min Free Enter the minimum amount of disk space in percent of the Diskspace Threshold value Free Diskspace planned disk space in MB to be kept free on the ODS server for the u and root file system This value applies to all servers of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network If you enter the value o the free disk space will not be monitored In the event that the free space on both file systems falls below the threshold value you have indicated ODS will not accept any further jobs on the respective server until there is more space again or the lock is released manually Default and recommendation 15 If the available diskspace reaches the value set for the minimal free diskspace see above the threshold controls when jobs will be accepted again by the system Example Min free diskspace is 15 threshold is 3 gt ODS will accept jobs again if the free diskspace is 18 Setting a threshold value avoids switching the job acceptance permanently on and off if the diskspace oscillates aro
146. settings for the Unity RIP in the LP Input Queue Template are always ignored Orientation Translate Statement directly gt Take orientation from input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Orientation Portrait gt Take portrait setting Landscape gt Take landscape setting Ignore Statement gt Take portrait setting Fonts Translate Statement directly gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 211 DPconnect Appendix Take font name and size from the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Font Name Selection of default font for PostScript Level 1 and 2 gt Take alternative font name Font Size points IInteger from 4 to 1000 gt Take alternative font size Ignore Statement gt Courier grade 10 will be selected Chapter Start Translate Statement directly gt Take chapter starts from the input ticket Ignore Statement gt No chapter starts Halftone Quality Translate Statement directly gt Select source of the Halftone Quality Specification for all page ele ments Halftone Line Frequency for Graphics Halftone Line Frequency for Images Halftone Line Frequency for Text Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action gt Take lpi setting from Job Ticket Template Ignore Statement
147. standard error from the script are normally read and when errors occur they are shown as part of the daemon error message The message size of the script standard output and standard error is limited so please use this with care Not all daemons handle this correct yet but will do this in the future It is also possible to write messages into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server message view by using the ppmsg program See also chapter Command Line Interface gt Messages gt Send Messages section in the Technical Reference Manual Syntax ppmsg m Module j Jobid MsgId Insert1 Insert2 Parameter Description m Module Name of the message sender for example the name of the script j Jobid Job identifier Msgld Message identifier for static message text in scripts use the fol lowing message identifiers 98000000 Info type 98000001 Warning type 98000002 Error type 98000003 Log entry 98000004 Question Note It is not recommended to use questions in an automated workflow because this may lead to a number of prob lems If the names or the path of the Default Ticket and the OCT contain blanks special handling is needed especially for the job submission program pjm Note Do NOT te direct the output of the pjm program Otherwise the cause of the job submission problem cannot be seen in the user messages Also do not write too much text to the stdout or stderr file descriptors
148. status is false since at least one action has to be defined for a rule Chapter 7 Configuration 421 TicketRules Main Window Description Italic black The activation mode is Sub Rule and the sub rule is true A rule with activation modus Sub Rule can only be used by other rules and can not be requested itself A sub rule itself can not refer to other sub rules Therefore a sub rule is only applied if it is referred by another rule which is Active Since a sub rule may be referenced by different rules with different activation modes and the reference may also depend on conditions it is not possible to define a general activation mode Active or Inactive for a sub rule Italic red The activation mode is Sub Rule and the sub rule is false Right Mouse Button in the Lists 422 If you mark an entry in the lists and click it with the right mouse button the effect is the same as clicking the Edit button in the tool bar the Edit dialog of the selected element opens The only exception is the Activation column in the rule list If you click on a marked entry multiple selection is also possible a context menu appears where you can quickly activate or deactivate rules or where you can transform a rule into a subRule Rules Parameters Variables Value Tables Activation Name a Description Used in Rules Active Change Printer Nan E pa ni Active Change
149. the HotDirWinClient path and the needed options The selected file names are added to this command line when the menu item is executed When the HotDir server is configured and running on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server it should be possible to send print jobs Chapter 7 Configuration 507 LP LP Introduction 508 The line printer protocol also known as LP is a standard way of sending data to a printer The standard is defined in the RFC 1179 and allows printer sharing between several computer and or operating systems in a network The Oc PRISMAproduction Server LP package is designed to replace the traditional UNIX LP package and spools the print jobs into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server spool This package allows creating jobs using the standard LP client software delivered with all UNIX and Windows systems Also MVS mainframe clients exist The LP printers are logical printers which can be mapped to a real printer using the Default Ticket See the Configuration section below for details Parameter priority The Oc Custom Ticket OCT parameters are defined by several sources When multiple sources define the same parameter the source priority defines which value is taken The following parameter sources and priorities exist priority increases from left to right Default Ticket gt Data file parameter gt LP control file Note When the LP control file Job or File Copies parameter is not set o
150. the backup was suc cessfully completed or failed and a failure log file will be created in u prismapro diag backupEdgeConnector stopPrisma This script must be called in file etc edge start to stop Oc PRISMAproduction Server BEFORE starting the backup At time of execution the script opens a popup message window to all Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer windows Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 593 Connectivity to Oc PRISMAproduction Server i 594 Note The message request window is opened on ALL more than one if opened for example by the Launcher Explorer windows The first person to answer the request will shut down Oc PRISMAproduction Server or cancel the Backup or whatever action can be selected Please make sure not to interrupt any running jobs from other users It is NOT possible to use script stopPrisma WITHOUT any parameter An empty parameter set will only create an error for a missing parameter The possible parameters are Parameter Description a MIN Automatic Stop of Oc PRISMAproduction Server and start of backup in MIN minutes s Interactive user is allowed to stop directly the timeout C Interactive user is allowed to cancel the backup only in combi nation with a or s t MIN Timeout if no user response in MIN Minutes only in combi nation with c but not with a w SMIN Interactive user is allowed to shift stop and wait of extra MIN
151. the download daemon removes trailing bytes after the AFP record a No Job grouping and Job sequencing is supported It is not possible to generate output with the IBM RDW LCDS Data When a LCDS data stream is received the Parameter OutputDataStructure should be set to the value PassThrough The tickets starting with LCDS_ are example default tickets DefaultTicket for this data stream See the LCDS documentation for more details Parameter to OCT Conversion The following table shows the MVS JCL and Download header to Oc Custom Ticket OCT parameter conversion MVS Download Parameter Mapping Table MVS JCL PRISMA Default Values Description Parameter Ticket Chapter 7 Configuration 475 Download 476 MVS JCL PRISMA Default Values Description Parameter Ticket ADDRESS2 receiver Rec_ZIP Address2 text ADDRESS3 receiver Rec_City Address3 text ADDRESS4 receiver Rec_Country Address4 text BUILDING receiver Rec_Building eo building text CHARS UCS files Fonts use Printer Default Chars up to 4 Font names for Linedata CKPTSEC 7 No Checkpoints Seconds between checkpoints userinfo Host_Class 1 char Host Job Class gt gt job Job_Class switchable mapping in PRISMA Job_Queue COPIES job Copies 1 255 copy count BLOCK UN Reporting of print po DATACK BLOCK DCB OPTCD J files Pdserc DCB RECFM files Pdscc DEPT receiver Rec_Company T QUEUE TRC userinfo Host_Dest
152. the sections is arbitrary as they are selected according to keywords and not according to the sequence In addition to the header section each process has to have its own section Keywords and parameters are case sensitive for example the name Subcat is NOT identical with SUBCAT or SubCat or similar combinations At the moment a legible text file is used as the Job Control File It can therefore be edited with standard editors In the event that a different file format is used in future the necessary tools for working on this new format will be supplied Note i Only the system administrator should be allowed to edit the JCF for example to set trace levels Parameters changed incorrectly can cause critical system problems A JCF has the following general layout Header information delimited by Begin Header End Header which contains global process wide assignments Section information delimited by Begin lt section gt End lt section gt which consists of the following three parts 1 General assignments specific for the defined process This part is optional 2 ComInfo information delimited by Begin ComInfo End ComIn fo which defines the communication interface and serves as con stancy verification in the LCDS Module 3 One or more subsections delimited by Begin lt subsection gt End lt subsection gt which define the sub process task and the control data for this sub process
153. the ticket type is part of the job ticket Request a job id Returns a new PRISMAproduction job id to be used in a sub sequent job submission see id option Job id that is to be used in the current submission It is assumed that the jobid has been requested by a previous PJM call using the getid option Default generated implicitly for current submission Chapter 8 PJM Command Line PJM Command Line Parameters Information Pa rameters quiet wait force Meaning Run in quiet mode Do not display formatted messages on STDOUT and STDERR Display a code instead and optional a list of parameters depend ing on the code This parameter is supposed to be set when the PJM Command Line is used in shell scripts Error handling should be much easier when dealing with codes and parameters instead of for matted language dependent messages See more detailed de scription below Default verbose Wait until the job is ready to print PJM command line does not return any values until the job is ready to print or is aborted with an error or is deleted Returncode If the waiting state of the command line is finished because the job is aborted with an error the return code is 12 otherwise it is o Default do not wait return after job has been accepted Accept job anyway If you force a job it is submitted anyway The job appears in the list of jobs despite of missing important options From there
154. translation rules which control the transformation of the input job ticket to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server job ticket can be modified using the DPconnect translation table You can use the DPconnect user interface in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer to set up or modify the appropriate param eters This GUI will be available on all servers of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network as soon as a DPconnect license is installed and activated at least on one of these servers The DPconnect converter however only runs on servers which actually process an acti vated DPconnect license Master DPconnect consists of a main module DPconnect and a service module DPconnect service Both modules write a start and finishing message which will be displayed in the Message window There is a combo box on the DPconnect configuration user interface named Sort Order of Tabulator Media Sets This is only valid for VarioPrint 5 1xx compatible printers and has to be set according to the sort order of an tabulator input media set actually loaded into the printer According to this the page sequence of the whole job will be reverted by the Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow if necessary For a description of the user interface see DPconnect User Interface Overview on page 159 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 151 DPconnect Functionality Installation Requirements DPconnect can be licensed as
155. try to add an input bin which exeeds the selected number For cutsheet printers you can choose a number between 1 and 16 MAIN Number of stockbin used as MAIN input bin for example DJDE FEED MAIN you may insert a comment on the type of paper used for this bin AUX Number of stockbin used as AUX input bin for example DJDE FEED AUX or using the conditional processing command RAUX you may insert a comment on the type of paper used for this bin FEED Equivalent to XEROX operator command FEED If FEED MAIN the settings of the active table are used For FEED AUX or lt n gt only the stockbin AUX or lt n gt is used and the settings of the active table are overridden Entries This is the section where you define the combination of stock names and input bins for the selected table It is also possible to modify an existing table by activating or deactivating the stockname bin combinations Column Titles name stockname As a stockname you can choose any name for example the color of the paper with a maximum of 6 characters number number of the input bin With the VP5000 a number can also represent a combination of input bins cluster active single entries of a list can be activated or deactivated This feature enables you to adjust a table for different applications comment insert a comment for the entry in the list for example physical input bins type of paper
156. types of printer attachments are supported SCSI TCP IP 370 channel Multiple instances of the AFP2IPDS backend may be running in parallel The number of them is only restricted by the resource limitations of the system Chapter 7 Configuration Linedata Printer Driver LCDS Linedata Printer Driver LCDS Introduction i The license LCDS_Driver 4 0 is required to use this driver With this package you can receive LCDS line data jobs typically from an IBM host via TCP IP download and pass them through to a Xerox DocuPrint via TCP IP or 370 channel Note For details concerning the print parameters see Oc PRISMAproduction Server Technical Reference Guide chapter Print Parameter Functionality The functionality is similar to IBM s Job Entry System insert an FCB record prepend 2 header and append 2 trailer banner pages convert any type of carriage controls ANSI IBM3211 NONE into IBM3211 drive the physical printer No ifilter xfilter AFP IPDS is involved in this Printer Configuration Open Configuration gt Printer and create a new printer with the Xrx LCDS Driver When you choose DocuPrint as the printer name you will have the advantage to run the demo job see below and MVS download jobs without any modification of a job ticket After clicking Save the Data Format XEROX LCDS will be predefined in the general printer settings Complete the configura
157. userinfo Host_Dest IP BLOCK BLKCHAR BLKPOS YES NO gt 110 A M sitioning and character errors table reference charac ters carriage control type department text printer pass through Destination Name printer pass through IP address or Name files Pdsduplx use Formdef value FORMDEF files Formdef F1 use System Default job Print_Form INTRAY IBIN use Formdef value job Intray Chapter 7 Configuration sides and plex form definition printer pass through Form Name printer pass through Paper Tray ID 1 255 Download MVS JCL Parameter PRISMA Ticket Default Values Description JOB_ID job Reference_Id MVS Job ID job Job_name MVS Job Name JOB_NAME NAME NOTIFY receiver Rec_Name userinfo Host_Notify OFFSETXB files PdsOfEXB use Formdef value name text user IDs whom Download notify x image shift back side OFFSETXF iles PdsOfEXF use Formdef value x image shift front side OFFSETYB iles PdsOfFYB use Formdef value OFFSETYF iles PdsOfFYF use Formdef value y image shift back side y image shift front side OUTBIN OBIN OVERLAYB iles BackSideOvls OVERLAYF files FrontSideOvls PAGEDEF FCB files Pagedef P1 PORT PR PROGRAMER NAME job Outtray userinfo Port_Number userinfo Program mer_Name use Formdef value us
158. warning dialog will be displayed when the user tries to cancel the backup process Should a backup fail a diagnostic dialog is shown This diagnos tic dialog provides the user a way to analyze the cause of the backup creation failure Chapter 7 Configuration 331 Backup Restore Window Icon Description Restore the select Restores a selected configuration backup A system backup can ed backup only be restored if the following conditions are satisfied The amp condition check is performed in the order as described in the list m The number of hosts in the configuration backup must match the number of hosts in the current system m The hosts IP addresses of the configuration backup must match those of the current system and the other way around m The master IP address of both the configuration backup and the current system must match m The configuration backup must be a valid Oc PRISMAproduction Server V3 xx or higher configuration backup See The type of a slave in the backup whether it is a standard slave ora print slave is also checked The user must take care of restoring the backup only in a configuration with matching slave types If one of the conditions described here are not satisfied the configuration backup cannot be restored The restore function ality will be disabled in this case the backup icon will be gray In case not all components could be restored a diagnostic dialog is sho
159. will be copied and added to the list Now you can edit the following columns Illustration Fel ah l Exe General Automatic Saving Automatic Answers Triggers Message Suppression Message Id Modulename Questiontext Answer Active 08010030 all Startposition parameter m 12000100 YP5000 FOR 0 MOUNT FORM 1 CONTINUE k Automatic Answers Table Column Description Message Id Double clicking this entry opens a drop down list which con tains all numbers of messages which can be answered automat ically by the system Modulename Opens a drop down list with all modules which generate mes sages Select the a module for which the message should be an swered automatically or select all modules Questiontext Displays the text of the question delivered by the message Answer From a drop down list select the answer the system is to provide automatically Active This column allows you to create a master list and to activate those entries only which are required in a certain situation Note The system generates automatic answers only if this check box is enabled Chapter 7 Configuration 309 Message System Automatic Answers You can also use the question dialog itself to add entries to the list If a question which can be answered automatically pops up you can check the Next time reply automatically box at the bottom of the dialog
160. window and change the following parameters Parameter Value Description Trace channel o Defines the port where application socket traces lt Download are made The value o disables this feature Also Port gt the trace flags must have at least the ox00000200 flag set Trace flags oxffficf9 Traces are written with performance information oxffficfb no print data files are collected Standard trace oxfffiefb Traces as well as data files are collected Data trace Traces data files as well as data socket traces are made Socket data trace Set the parameter Trace Channel to the port from which the Socket Data Trace is to be captured Trace level 4 Highest trace level Chapter 7 Configuration Download Behavior in Error Situations The Download daemon saves only one previous copy of the trace file Older trace files are deleted With each Download reset or Oc PRISMAproduction Server reset a new Download trace file is created Data trace files however are not overwritten and must be deleted manually when they are not needed anymore Even if the lowest trace level o is used errors are always written So if an error occurs and the trace level is o this trace file still contains traces so please also save this file and send it in with the trace files which are additionally created If the traces have been created and the error can be reproduced prismadiag can be used to collect the inform
161. 2 or 3 04 into version 3 10 or 4 0 a UserHomesPlugin with the home directories of all selected users in the cluster a MiscellaneousPlugin with the configuration data of u prismapro cfg Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 597 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Tasks and Components Important This plug in is very special regarding the impact of the data it deals with The data it backs up are considered as cannot be restored or imported directly The reuse of the data is planned to be done manually Client The Client package installs the Graphical User Interface The GUI is a graphical repre sentation of the command line client of the server and must therefore like the server also be installed on the master of a cluster For technical reasons this GUI cannot be used with Oc PRISMAproduction Server V3 00 598 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Installation and Workflows Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Installation and Workflows Installation Server Install the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Server package by using the rpm utility Step Action ca copy the RPM oce sys prismabackup rpm to a temporary directory change to the temporary directory and call rpm ihv oce sys prismabackup to install the package rpm e oce sys prismabackup to remove the package After having successfully installed the package you ll find a directory usr local prismaback
162. 24 Variable format x or y value equal o are rejected at Note User error the GUI Action Correct input file Not possible 26 Input file is equal to output file Note User error Action Correct call parameter settings 146 28 Compression algorithm not supported Note User error Action Generate PCL file with permitted compres sion algorithm 147 29 Resolution 600 dpi not allowed low end Note User error Action Generate a PCL file with a permitted res olution 154 36 Cannot open file resource file Note Internal error Action Report error to systems consultant Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Troubleshooting Error No Error writing file resource file Note Internal error Action Report error to systems consultant Invalid access on resource file Note Internal error Action Report error to systems consultant PJT parameter not complete Note Internal error Action Report error to systems consultant Output trays not possible in AFPDS Resolution frontend backend not equal o O Penbo ona C per Msn sue e w o Me O E Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 129 TIFF Converter Concept TIFF Converter TIFF Converter Concept Introduction This chapter gives general information on the TIFF Converter software product It de scribes the tasks performed by the converter and outlines ways it can be used There is also a survey of necessary components
163. 3 User IDs and Access Rights User IDs and Access Rights m advanced access to the configuration applications m manage print resources via the user interface User role admin m full access to all configuration applications Licenses Backup Restore Printer Config uration modify all settings of the operating system work with diagnostic tools like analyze User role service m work with additional tools create and delete user scripts Chapter 3 User IDs and Access Rights 65 User IDs and Access Rights 66 Chapter 3 User IDs and Access Rights Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Print File Manager PFM Print File Manager Print File Manager PFM Introduction 68 The Print File Manager PFM is the component of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server system that you use to store printer data in either native or print ready format You can store this data in the Print File Library or in a permanent archive Currently the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server system supports only the PFL for file storage By keeping data you can save time because the files do not need to be reprocessed if you want to reprint them and you have an absolute guarantee that the document will look exactly like the original The PFM has three main functions it records data manages data and transfers data to and from other media At present the PFM can manage only IOCA data so it is available only for the POD Modi
164. 4 Each level higher produces more detailed informa tion and includes all the information of the lower levels Level Level Name Description Only when errors occur Section messages Main section enter exit info Function messages Function enter exit with return code info Info messages Important variables information Detail messages Detailed variables and other information Large Trace File Trace Flags The trace flags are used to control the behavior of the trace file Input Filter The following trace flags are available Special Flags Name Description Collects special performance information and writes this into the trace file Ox00000001 Performance oxooo00002 Copy I O data Creates a copy of the output files in the diag direc tory Only when errors occur trace info is written into the trace file This includes also traces which hap pen just before the error occurs OxO0000004 Error only flag 0x00000008 Time flag Time info is added for each trace line Chapter 7 Configuration HotDir Behavior in Error Situations Special Flags Name Description OxO00000010 OxO00000020 Ox00000100 Section flag Buffer trace flag Buffer data trace Socket data trace Input Status trace PJM protocol trace PJM cmd trace Program section and source code id class are added for each trace line The trace info is buffered until t
165. 485 Download Behavior in Error Situations Trace level The trace level can be set from o to 4 Each level higher produces more detailed informa tion and includes all the information of the lower levels Level Level Name Description o Error messages Only when errors occur Section messages Main section enter exit info Function messages Function enter exit with return code info Info messages Important variables information Detail messages Detailed variables and other information Large Trace File Trace Flags The trace flags are used to control the behavior of the trace file Input Filter The following trace flags are available Special Flags Name Description oxooo00001 Performance Collects special performance information and writes this into the trace file oxoooo0o0002 Copy I O data Creates a copy of the output files in the diag direc tory oxoo000004 Error only flag Only when errors occur trace info is written into the trace file This includes also traces which hap pen just before the error occurs 0x00000008 Time flag Time info is added for each trace line oxo0000010 Section fla Program section and source code id class are 8 8 added for each trace line oxoo000020 Buffer trace The trace info is buffered until the buffer is full flag and then written to the trace file By NOT setting this bit the trace information is written line by line to the tra
166. 57819 Barcodetype 25industrial Esc s24650T 34872 PJL Backend See also PCL Module Syntax of the Native PCL Filter on page 242 Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation 235 PCL Module Native Workflow Supported and Unsupported Spool Job Commands The Backend supports the following spool job commands in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server All Jobs application Continue Restart The Backend does not support the following spool job commands Halt Reposition absolute and relative reposition cannot be used Instead use the page range to reposition Interrupt Don t use the spool interrupt command with PJL Backend Due to possible buffering of many jobs in the printer for which the error recovery is made in the printer the behavior of this command would be ambiguous in several situation and the delay between entering the command and the reaction on it might be very long To interrupt a printing job use the cancel job button in the printer control panel After this the print job is interrupted and the printer is deactivated To continue printing activate the printer again Print Ranges For partial job printing only one page range from to is supported Additional Information for the Separator Pages 236 You can use the Personal Information dialog in the PJM to add detailed information on the reciever to the separator pages T
167. APIC Disabled Installation Safe Settings Rescue System Memory Test Boot Options autoyast usb instmode cd 18 Chapter 1 Installation Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Step Action Depending on the installation method insert either the USB stick or the in stallation floppy Press lt Return gt to start When using certain hard disk types the system may detect by mistake a raid system If this error message see below appears you may ignore it SSS aa Error WARNING This system has at least one hard disk with a RAID configuration presented by the BIOS as RAID that is in fact a software RAID The following disks were detected as part of such a RAID dev sda The Linux kernel 2 4 supported some of these systems like Promise FastTrack and HighPoint RocketRaid but the Linux kernel 2 6 does not support them at all If you install onto these disks your RAID configuration and any data on the RAID will be lost Refer to http portal suse com to learn how to migrate to a Linux software RAID Chapter 1 Installation 19 Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Step Action 4 The installation now stops at a breakpoint which allows to review all settings a Installation Settings Click any headline to make changes or use the Change menu below Overview Expert System System FUJITSU SIEMENS PRIMERGY TX150 55 Processor
168. Aproduction Server CD with licenses for the Oc PRISMAproduction Server POD Module and the PPML Module Installation is described in chapter Oc PRISMAproduction Server Installation Deinstal lation Update in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Administration Settings and Tasks Guide A demo application is installed on installation into the DEMO directory You can check if the installation was successful by printing this demo application Deinstallation is performed via the install prisma script deinstallation of a component of Oc PRISMAproduction Server Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 143 PPML Converter Overview Basic Functionality The PPML converter represents a program which runs under Linux The program reads a PPML file and converts it to AFPDS which then can be printed on Oc printers with bundle 5 functional code Additionally to the PPML file a DTD description of the XML structure of PPML is needed and also all external resources belonging to the PPML file The program analyzes the PPML file and converts the layout to AFPDS while keeping the original structure The PPML objects will be converted to one PDF container per page These containers are then rastered and printed by the printer The program is integrated into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow an can be used after installation if the correct license is installed Benefits and Restrictions of the PPML Converter 144 The basic benefits of the p
169. Basic Concept Backup Restore Backup Restore Basic Concept Introduction With the Configuration gt Backup Restore function you can save the configuration of the system and restore it later It can be useful to generate a backup of the current configuration before an update installation and to restore it after the installation This function is available for users service and admin only A message confirms the end of a successful saving or restoring procedure In case the saving or restoring procedure was not successful enhanced diagnostic information on the failure is given This helps the user to efficiently analyze the cause of the failure All Oc PRISMAproduction Server servers of a cluster have to be up and running in order to save or restore the Oc PRISMAproduction Server configuration To restore a previous saved configuration the system configuration has to be identical This means same number of slave systems same IP addresses If the current system configuration differs from the backup configuration the restore feature cannot be executed This is illustrated in the list of available backups by a grayed out backup icon i Note Every time a restore of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server configuration was performed a Reset Oc PRISMAproduction Server is necessary to initialize Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server with the restored configuration This reset is automatically done on all servers A status w
170. Bd ITCAvantGard BK Ob Times It CG Omega Bdlt ITCAvantGard Db Times Bd It Garamond Antiqua ITCAvantGard Db Ob ZapfChancery Md It Garamond Krsv ITCBookman Lt Zapf Dingbats Garamond Hlb ITCBookman Lt It Kanji Mincho Garamond KrsvHlb ITCBookman Db Kanji Gothic Courier ITCBookman DB It Line Printer Roman 8 Courier Bd CourierPS Line Printer PC 8 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 111 PCL Converter Fonts and Bin Control Courier It CourierPS Ob Line Printer PC 8 D N Courier BdIt CourierPS Bd Line Printer IBM 850 LetterGothic CourierPS Bd Ob Line Printer ECMA Latin 1 LetterGothic Bd Helvetica Line Printer Legal If the PCL file references fonts which are inaccessible at the time of the conversion the PCL Converter selects fonts in accordance with the usual PCL conventions At present it is not possible to pre load other fonts in addition to the 53 internal standard fonts All the fonts that the job requires must be present in the print file as inline resources Control of In and Output Bins To control the input bins use the following escape sequences AFPDS max 8 input bins lt Esc gt amp 120H gt Bin 1 lt Esc gt amp l21H gt Bin 2 lt Esc gt amp l22H gt Bin 3 lt Esc gt amp l23H gt Bin 4 lt Esc gt amp l24H gt External lt Esc gt amp l25H gt Bin 5 lt Esc gt amp 126H gt Bin 6 lt Esc gt 8l27H gt Bin 7 lt Esc gt amp 128H gt Bin 8 lt Esc gt am
171. ComposerResourcesPlugi IMPSETS n includes only the composer subdirectory plus all files in the logical directory 620 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Properties Files In contrary to the files listed in Basic configuration files see chapter before these files are not part of the distribution but are generated dynamically when preparing a System Backup The background for these files is that it has been decided to have Oc PRISMAproduction Server not running on the Master server when performing the backup This ensures that there is no interference and that a backup can be created even of Oc PRISMAproduction Server is not operational In contrary to the backup process itself Oc PRISMAproduction Server must be running on the Master server when these to files are to be created Some parts of the configuration database and of the job database are extracted into these properties files As a fallback the files can also be built manually with the help of a simple text editor systeminfo properties This property file contains the basic information about the current Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server system which is necessary to be able to run a backup These are m the current Oc PRISMAproduction Server version m the servers in the current cluster m the libraries on each server of the cluster Example prisma_version 3 04 00 ak s
172. D lt 1 gt 00036736 Esc c5 F Make Soft Font Perma nent 00036741 Esc 1X Primary Soft Font Select ID1 00036745 This is a Matura Font 00036769 EscE Printer Reset Description of the commands 1stcom Esc 12345X This PJL command forces the converter to terminate the mand active printer language and to tranfer control to PJL 2nd PJL JOB Start of the PJL Job com mand 3rd PJL DEFAULT DISKLOCK OFF DISKLOCK has to be set to OFF com otherwise the hard disk cannot be written mand 4thcom PJL FSMKDIR NAME o fonts With this command you create the mand directorx fonts in the current working directory You can use o or 1 as volume which has no effect on UNIX systems but still has to be present sthcom PJL FFDOWNLOAD FORMAT BINARY NAME mand o fonts Matura_MT SIZE 36496 This PJL command initiates several steps First it specifies the binary data format Secondly it contains the directoryname o fonts and the file name to be saved Matura_MT Thirdly it specifies the number of bytes of this font SIZE 36496 The following contains the font data in the Mass Storage Font Format Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 117 PCL Converter Saving Resources on Hard Disk 6th 7th com mand Esc 12345X PJL ENTER LANGUAGE PCL Use both commands to switch back to PCL 8th com mand gth com mand 10th com mand 11th com mand Esc c1D Assignes ID 1 to th
173. DS printers Document interleaved graphics if the job contains any are temporarily stored in u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt priv Inline resources with PURGE are stored in u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt priv 380 Chapter 7 Configuration Overview of LCDS Module Processes Spool Job This module generates the print job entry in the OPS PRISMA spool It accepts input from the X Filter and from the Sample Sample The Sample is a utility to create sample printouts of resources such as fonts images logos or forms Chapter 7 Configuration 381 LCDS Parameter Configuration Job Control Files JCF LCDS Parameter Configuration Job Control Files JCF Introduction Each data type of the LCDS PJM ticket and each LCDS Explorer application has variable parameter fields which are filled in by the user In the background a JCF Job Control File belongs to each window These JCFs are located in the directory u prismapro lib uimng jcf When a process is started for example Copy all selected parameters like Input Device or filename are written in a temporary Copy JCF which is handed over to the appropriate program s for example Ifilter and XRC for further processing After these processes have been ended this temporary Copy JCF is deleted but the original is still existing In the following table you can see the combination of an application data type or window and the JCF JCF Overvie
174. E 75 Unity OVEN VOW iiss secesccccencunsey cueseescececsteasceutdetes salen sc ceecesanscurbtee eas toeeen 75 Unity User Resources and FOnts ccssccsssccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeesseesssees 77 Unity Customizing for Specific Applications ccccceeeeeeeeee 82 Unity Color S paration ccccccccccsssssssseessssnssneeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 84 Workflow Extended AIMS Conce pt ccccccceceeeeeeseeeesssesesssnnennenees 91 Unity Enhanced Functionallity cccccccceecesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeees 93 UNITY CONVElFS1 ON asise oieee eanan aaa a a aaa 94 Unity TrouDleSNOOting cceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeesseaaees 95 Unity Unity Plus Graphic Arts_PIUS ccccccccccceceeeceessseessseseeses 96 Unity GetTiff Service Integration ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaees 100 JODrEQUIFEMENL 00 0 ceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeee nnani iiien 101 Jobrequirement Functional MOdule ccccccceeeeessssssseeeeeeeeees 101 PCL CONVENE waccccccecnerscncceccnaunecenncessdenunas sueiivaccenvesicsunvesabbsadeenedestauedscocend 108 PCL Converter COnCe pt ccccccesscesseeseeesnnceneeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeesseess 108 Contents PCL Converter Fonts and Bin Control cccccscccccccccceceeeeeeeesssesessees 111 PCL Converter Saving Resources on Hard Disk 0000000ee 113 PCL Converter Operation ccccccccesscesssseesesen
175. EMAPrO 2 MyOatabase pfladmin Postgres 1x010222 ops oce net 5433 PRISMAPro In the Archives window first activate the Database links tab or click on to start the configuration wizard The wizard guides you through the following steps m Enter a Name for the link m Selection of the Database System Postgres MySQL DBz Firebird MS SQL Oracle SAP_DB or Document Manager Postgres Default Enter the Port number for the connection and the Server or IP which holds the database If you select the Document Manager no port value is preset a Enter the Database User select a login account of an Oc PRISMAproduction Server user from the list and a Database Password at least six characters The name of the selected user must be identical with the user created on the external server Chapter 7 Configuration Archives Database Links Document Manager Cache m Select the Document Transfer specification of the network filesystem The transfer types are described in detail in Network Filesystems selectable for the Data Transfer a Display of a Conclusion of your settings If you click Finish the database link will be added to the list After creating a database link you can create an archive which can be connected to this database See Archives PFL Archives on page 443 Create Document Manager Cache From version 3 10 the configuration of a cache archive as P
176. EN English Change the directory to the one representing your server Change the directory to USB Copy the files from the directory to the ROOT directory of the USB stick Verify the content it should contain the following files Mount the stick and list the content The number of files can be different in different versions m version m autoinst xml Chapter 1 Installation 17 Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Introduction For preparing the installation and for the installation procedure the original DVD SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 and the configuration floppy or the USB stick for this particiular server model will be required Note i All preparation of hard disks regarding the partitions as needed in SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP1 are NOT needed anymore in SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Caution A Installation of LINUX will definitely ERASE ALL DATA on the server Installation Steps Step Action Insert SUSE SLES 10 SP2 DVD and boot the server from DVD 2 Select Installation when the boot manager is displayed and enter one of the additional boot options Installation with internal 3 5 inch floppy disk autoyast floppy instmode cd Installation with USB floppy drive or USB stick autoyast usb instmode cd Boot from Hard Disk Installation Installation ACPI Disabled Installation Local
177. FL archive for example mount t nfs jupiter data u prismapro data archive Default The NFS directory can also be mounted permanently by adding it to the etc fstab After mounting the directory the docu ments are written into the external directory instead of the local PFL Chapter 7 Configuration 455 Archives Appendix SMBEFS Server Message Block File System like Samba The administrator has to mount a directory form the Samba server or from a Windows computer which inherently supports this file system on the PRISMAproduction server On the Windows computer or the Samba server The respective directories must be released with write permission for the user root On the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master The directory of the PFL archive has to be indicated as mount point The basic path of the PFL archives is u prismapro data archivel When mounting you have to add the directory of the PFL archive for example mount t smbfs o rw fs user name root fmask o0 dmask o windows data u prismapro da ta archive Default The Windows directory can also be mounted permanently by adding it to the etc fstab After mounting the directory the documents are written into the external directory instead of the local PFL cifs type mount in For mounting file systems shares on Windows 2000 and later stead of smbfs type replace the used connection type form smbfs to cifs Instead m
178. FL cache for external archives is only possible for the Document Manager as external database system m Inthe Archives window activate the Database Links tab and select menu Database Links Configuration gt Document Manager Cache Configuration X PFOArchives Database links Administration Name User Database System Server or IP 1 DEFAULT pfladmin Postgres 127 0 0 1 2 MyDatabase pfladmin Postgres 1x010222 0ps oce net 5433 PRISMAPro m Anew tab Document Manager Cache appears which allows you to create the cache provided the connection to the Document Manager server is active Create Document Manager Cache Document Manager Cache Database links Administration Name Cache Cleanup Method Cache Threshold m8 Cache Cleanup 1 m Select menu Document Manager Cache Configuration gt Create Document Man ager Cache The following dialog opens Chapter 7 Configuration 447 Archives Database Links Document Manager Cache 448 Name PFL Archive Cache Threshold MB Maximal available size on partition Current used size on partition Cache Cleanup Cache Cleanup Method Database Link DocumentmanagerCache PfiDocumentManager v 8000 8404 MB 5586 MB 80 Date z DocumentManagerDB v Ui Element Description Name Free form
179. FP_PrintResourcesPlugin gt lt q lt servertype type Master rootpath u prismapro resources gt lt fileset dir logicaldir gt lt include name gt lt exclude name composer gt lt fileset gt lt servertype gt lt servertype type Slave rootpath u prismapro resources gt lt fileset dir logicaldir gt lt include name gt lt exclude name composer gt lt fileset gt lt servertype gt lt servertype type PrintSlave rootpath u prismapro resources lt fileset dir logicaldir gt lt include name gt lt exclude name composer gt lt fileset gt lt servertype gt lt plugin gt lt plugin identifier POD ComposerResourcesPlugin gt a lt servertype type Master rootpath u prismapro resources gt lt fileset dir composer logicaldir gt lt include name gt lt exclude name gt lt fileset gt lt fileset dir logicaldir S IMPSETS gt lt include name gt lt exclude name gt lt fileset gt lt servertype gt oF lt plugin gt lt backuptemplate gt 1 It s the template for version 3 00 Plugin directory composer 2 The plug in collects the AFP resource data it s called AFP_PrintResources 3 On each type of Oc PRISMAproduction Server server all files in path u prismapro resources are collected except the subdirectories files in sub 4 In contrast the entry for the POD_
180. GB m suffix hpraid HP Smart Array Controller First logical disk for swap and root partition Second logical disk for u filesystem The generic types of the Floppy disk images are for installation of servers running Oc PRISMAproduction Server 4 x which are not officially supported by Oc The suffix describes the used hard disk controller in the same way as for the FSC servers When using Chapter 1 Installation 15 Create Server Configuration Media a floppy created for the wrong hard disk controller the installation will fail with a message of unsufficient hard disk space Creating Floppy Disks from the Server Configuration CD 16 First you have to detect the type of server to be installed The hardware installed must be certified by Oc The disk images are available for multi language installation and are located in subdirec tories de for the German en for the English nl for the Dutch it for the Italian fr for the French es for the Spanish version These directories contain subdirectories for the different server types which themselves contain the disk images and programs to create floppy disks See also the file SLES Installation xxx txt xxx represents the language either English or German on the Server Configuration CD for a short description of the handling and installation of floppy disks Note The installation language of the operating system is independent of the
181. Germany Edition 2008 10 Introduction to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Administration Settings and Tasks Manual Introduction to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Adminis tration Settings and Tasks Manual This manual mainly addresses users who install configure and administrate Oc PRISMAproduction Server Server It also covers the configuration of the POD APA LCDS OLDS and PCL Module In detail the following subjects are described in this manual m Installation of the Operation System and of Oc PRISMAproduction Server m Overview of the different user roles and permissions which are predefined in Oc PRISMAproduction Server m Setup and configuration of the different POD Module components Unity DPconnect Jobrequirement tool PCL TIFF PPML converters Configuration of the LCDS Module Configuration of the OLDS Module Configuration of the PCL Module Description of all configuration interfaces in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Description of the parameters of the Oc Custom Ticket OCT Description of the different backup solutions for Oc PRISMAproduction Server Integration of the Oc Document Designer in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Contents Contents Chapter 1 Installation niini actin i ad 11 Installation of SUSE LINUX OVErVieW cccccceseeeeeesssssssteanneeeeceeeeeeeeeeess 12 Installation of SUSE Linux Preliminary Notes cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 Create Server Configuration
182. HOST you have to insert the hostname under Server If you select PFL_TAPE you have to insert the device under Physical device for example dev sto Options Use Options gt Search to search documents in the archive using defined search criteria The following search dialog appears Search Dialog Search arguments OCA _AND_ tT mp User _ List of archives DEFAULT RIP_only RIP_and_IMP Search As search pattern you can use regular expressions like A Za z You can also combine these criteria by terms AND_ OR_ or _AN OT_ Additionally you can search documents of specified users If there is an external archive connected see Configuration of an External Database System on page 339 you can use the Search extern entry in the Options menu The dialog allows you to narrow down your search according to different aspects which are presented on five tabs Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Print File Manager PFM Archives E DEFAULT E RIP_onty Selection E RIPLand_iMP Attributes Document Job into Job Info Client Job Info Receiver inputfile Size Greater than KB Smaller than KB v Last access From date Please choose a date To date Please choose a date Hits More than Less than Creation date From date Please choose a date To date Please choose a date Results 10 w Start sea
183. ISMAproduction Server This is done by DPconnect automatically and can not be inhibited Define one LP input queue for each printer in Oc PRISMAproduction Server and assign a ticket template to it which holds as destination printer name the name of that printer which it belongs to For each printer do the appropriate adjustments both to the translation table and the ticket template so that they suit to the printer and to its printer post process ing For example the printer attached postprocessing machine requires a specific PDC impositioning and a specific UP3I setting both has to be set up in a ticket template After doing this each printer is accessible through his LP input queue and jobs printed through this input queue on each of these printers are printed in a way that represents the printers capabilities and the attached printer post processing capabilities In order to take advantage of these different Oc PRISMAproduction Server print paths from within Xerox DigiPath you should act as follows For each Oc PRISMAproduction Server print path LP input queue ticket template printer postprocessing you are going to use with DigiPath define a logical printer in terms of Xerox DigiPath that is the destination of each of these logical printers is one of the LP input queues on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server print server see LP on page 508 Now you are able to print all DigiPath documents with that kind of job processing and prin
184. In sequence Color Foreground Color replace value 0 by 1 m a maa TA D Replace sequence 10 by sequence 0 24580 16602 In sequence replace value 24580 by 16602 ra Onen uses Before sequence Page Control Paper Media Source O insert sequence gag a gis Replace sequence Job Control Duplex Page Side Selection by sequence arp Delete sequence pX 300 amp aH 720 21 Replace sequence 300 by sequence 720 21 EaD After sequence append sequence Job Control Unit of Measure Operation Replace sequence Old sequence Job Control Duplex Page Side Selection Color Foreground Color Job Control Duplex Page Side Selection Job Control Job Separation New value Job Control Long edge Offset Registration Job Control Number of Copies Job Control Output Bin Media Bin job Control Short edge Offset Registration Old value New sequence The following operations are supported each designated by a single operation command character Operation Com Description mand Charecter Replace the value within the PCL sequence with a new value lt PCL Sequence gt lt old value gt lt new value gt Replace entire PCL sequence with a new PCL sequence lt PCL Sequence gt lt old value gt lt new PCL Sequence gt lt new value gt Delete PCL sequence lt PCL
185. Internal toner number Description The description Oc System Toner cannot be edited If you create a new toner you can edit a description here Color Names The predefined color name of an Oc System Toner connot be modified but you can add other names if you wish see above For user defined colors the entire field is editable 324 Chapter 7 Configuration Consumables Configuration Column Description Color This column shows a sample view of the selected toner color Red Green Blue values are shown as tool tip The setting is used by the Professional Document Composer to display the color With user defined toners you can click the Select Color button to open a dialog which helps you to enter the correct values for your color Clicking OK transfers the values to the column The same dialog opens if you select Color Selection from the contex menu or if you double click on the color faa ooo SSS Recent mm a mi EERE mj m EEI PEEEEREE j j GO a Sample Text Sample Text om _ a oO Sample Text Sample Text Cancel If you try to edit the color of an Oc System Toner an error message is displayed which informs you that you are not allowed to do so Available for Mark the check box if the entry should be available in the Maintenance Printer Pool Printer Maintenance dialog See chapter Prin
186. M dia ccccccccccccceeeeceeeeseeessssesssenesenneees 15 Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 ccccccsceeeeeees 18 Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 cccsccssccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 Configuration of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 c cccssceeeeees 32 Security ANA SErViCS cccessssessssssceeeeeceeeeeeceeaeessseseeeeeeeseeeeeausaaaaeseeees 39 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Installation Deinstallation Update 45 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Lic NnSe S ccccccceeeeessssssseeseeeeeeeees 49 Change IP Address Host and Domain Name sssssssssnsssnseeeeeees 51 Modify Adaptec Bios Settings for older Tape Drives ccccceeeeeees 54 Chapter 2 Remote Access to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer 55 Access with the Explorer Launchel ssscsssscccscceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeessees 56 Chapter 3 User IDs and Access Rights ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeseneseeeaeeeeey 61 User IDs and Access RiQhts 2 cccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeseaaaees 62 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation cccccceessesessssessseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneessesssesssssaasaaaaaaed 67 Print File ManaQerr ceccecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeacaaeeeeeeesaaaaeeeeeeeseaeaaeeeeeeeeaaad 68 Print File Manager PFM c cceesseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenaaaeeeeeeeesaeaees 68 OaE A EE E EA E A
187. Media Assignment to PrinterS cccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 583 Workflow LCDS iiiccc cc ccccccccseeescssccceeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeesscsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaueuneessesseeeeeess 586 Chapter 11 Contents Backup Solutions srauni noaeo aaia KEES 589 Microlite BackupEDGE V2 1 cccscccsssecceceeeeeeeeeeeceeesessssseesssnneeenseeeseeess 590 BackupEDGE Installation and Configuration eeeeeeee 590 Connectivity to Oc PRISMAproduction Servel cccccssccccccceeees 592 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Additional Software 596 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Tasks and Components 596 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Installation and Work PLOW S essienieviceccewcctadeda best onecieicecedees desea esas dutiastaceetdesdedadagedeasese iacuesetied 599 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client 603 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup GloSSary csseceeeeees 623 Mirror Print JODS nossen aa aE 625 Mirror Print Jobs INtrOdUuCtiOn sssssseessseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseees 625 Mirror Print Jobs Prerequisites and Functionality 00000 627 Mirror Print Jobs WoOrkflow csceeeceeeeeceeeeesssseseeeeeeeeeeeeesees 629 Chapter 12 Oc Document Designer Integration in Oc PRISMAproduction Server 633 Oc Document Designer for Oc PRISMAproduction Server 634 Contents 10 Chapter 1 Installation Install
188. Minutes only in combination with a or t m MAX Extention to w MAX times shift can be done Minimum Parameter SET is at least a MIN or s Parameter lt MIN gt is the time in minutes to wait for confirmation by the user The parameter sets within the script are based on two different methods in handling All sets based on parameter a will automatically stop Oc PRISMAproduction Server and start the backup while all sets based on parameter s will NOT stop Oc PRISMApro duction Server automatically and therefore not start the backup there will have to be a dedicated interaction to do so Also there are additional parameters and sets of to allow better control and handling and also reduced permissions Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Connectivity to Oc PRISMAproduction Server Parameter Sets and their Effects Parameter a will AUTOMATICALLY stop Oc PRISMAproduction Server after lt MIN gt minutes if NO USER ACTION was done and start the backup process It is possible to combine parameter to a lt MIN gt s to allow users to stop Oc PRISMAproduction Server and proceed with backup IMMEDIATELY Parameter a lt MIN gt c will allow users to cancel the timeout and to skip the backup for this scheduled item Parameter set a lt MIN gt sc will allow the user to choose between both options It is also possible to create an extra delay with parameter w which will allow users to shift the oper
189. Oc PRISMAproduction Server language settings Step Actions to create floppy disks under Linux Login as user root Mount the Server Configuration CD ROM Change to the directory lt CD path gt lt language gt lt server model gt 4 Insert an empty disk into the 3 5 floppy drive Execute the script create linux sh Step Actions to create floppy disks under Windows Insert the Server Configuration CD ROM into the CD ROM drive From the Windows Explorer select the appropriate folder in lt CD path gt lt language gt lt server model gt Execute create windows bat Verify the floppy it should contain the following files Mount the floppy using msdos filesystem and list the content The number of files can be different in different versions m version m autoinst xml Chapter 1 Installation Create Server Configuration Media Creating a USB Stick Installation Media from the Server Configuration CD i Note The USB stick must contain a Windows or Linux compatible filesystem and can contain files Only files named autoinst xml or version must not be stored as they will be over written The following steps will be required Step Action Detect the type of server you want to install Insert the CD in your drive and open the CD Root directory Change directory to the desired installation language for example DE German
190. Oc PRISMAproduction Server network You can also use this configuration interface to assign the job queues to the printers Illustration t iB Xala Ge Number e Description Lock jobs after printing Default class 7 a 2 Print in the night im 3 Print on monday a 4 Xerox Queue Column Titles Column Description s sSY Number This is the number with which the job class is identified in other interfaces The job class must be a number between 1 and 999 Description The description is a text of your choice that briefly profiles the class for example Print in the night Lock jobs after When this column is enabled a job in this class will remain in printing the list of active jobs until it is explicitly deleted It receives the status finished locked This function can be used for test printing the results can be checked before the full run is printed If Lock jobs after printing Hold is active for a job queue this will be displayed in the PJM job properties dialog and in the filter dialog Chapter 7 Configuration 375 Job Queues Configuration Jobqueue Menu and Tool Bar Menu Entry Icon Description Add new Queue Adds a new job queue to the list The default queue name will P be Job Queue serial number Modify name and description by double clicking the corresponding fields If you click the small a
191. Oc PRISMAproduction Server version are collected from the servers of the cluster and written to a storage device at the moment only a mounted network drive is supported The data to be collected is defined specifically for each server type Master Slave and PrintSlave During runtime data may be excluded from the backup process m either by including only certain plug ins command option plugins only the data supported by the plug ins listed will be included a and or by including only certain users for the UserHomesPlugin command option users As for data integrity reasons the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Master server must be shut down before performing the backup the information about the current configuration and status needed for the backup process is read from a properties file It is named system info properties and contains information about the Oc PRISMAproduction Server ver sion the cluster the logical library paths and users This file is created automatically during the preparation step for a backup but it can also be created manually by any text editor The latter allows the creation of emergency backups in case the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system is not fully operable Summary The backup process is performed in two steps Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Step Action Remarks 1 PrepareBackup The properties file is created and Oc PRI
192. Oc User Manual Oc PRISMAproduction Server Administration Settings and Tasks Copyright Copyright 2001 2008 Oc All rights reserved including rights of translation reprinting reproduction by copying or any other method of this document as a whole or parts thereof Offenders will be liable for damages All rights including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design are reserved Delivery subject to availability right of technical modifications reserved All hardware and software names used are trademarks of their respective owners PRISMA production and Oc CustomTone are registered trademarks of Oc Adobe Acrobat Reader and Distiller are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated PostScript 3 is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft Windows Windows XP Windows Server 2003 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Java and all Java based trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Mi crosystems Inc in the United States and other countries SUSE Linux Enterprise is a registered trademark of Novell Inc For this product we also offer seminars at our International Training Center in Poing Information Phone 49 8121 72 3940 Fax 49 8121 72 3950 Oc Printing Systems GmbH ITC Postfach 1260 85581 Poing
193. Only when errors occur trace info is written into the trace file This includes also traces which hap pen just before the error occurs 0x00000008 Time flag Time info is added for each trace line Chapter 7 Configuration 527 LP Behavior in Error Situations 528 Special Flags Name Description Ox00000010 Section flag Program section and source code id class are added for each trace line Ox00000020 Buffer trace The trace info is buffered until the buffer is full flag and then written to the trace file By NOT setting this bit the trace information is written line by line to the trace file lower performance O0x00000100 Buffer data When this flag is set a buffer data trace is written trace 0x00000200 Socket data When this flag is set an application socket data trace trace is written oxoo000400 Input Status When set it writes the Input Status protocol trace trace oxooooo800 PJM protocol When set it writes the PJM protocol trace trace oxoooo1000 PJMcmdtrace When set it writes for each PJM command a sepa Chapter 7 Configuration rate file with the used parameters LP Windows Client LP Windows Client Introduction The LP Windows client can be used in two different ways The first is to use the command line command Ipr the other is to configure an lpr printer To be able to use the lpr command line command no configuration is needed to send an LP job to your Oc
194. P Temporary user file binary Default 1 TSK TST System task image file binary Default o RTEXT object file ASCII Default 1 Chapter 7 Configuration 401 LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters Note These parameters are optional Other file types may be included into XresEx port JCF XResImport parameters are identical to XResExport parameters 402 Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Online Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Online Configuration Introduction For online connection to the host some customer specific changes have to be made after the installation All changes are made in the file u prismapro lib uimng jcf PrintLCDS JCF The following settings in the online section of this file should be checked and corrected if required Illustration Begin If INPUT_DEV ONLINE Begin Device Chanaddress 0x3E ChanAddressl 0x3E ChanAddress2 0x3F ChanAddress3 0x40 ChanAddress4 0x41 ChanBandID OxF9F2FOF2 ChanBufsize 32000 ChanChkPos o ChanCondCode OFFLINE ChanDEDelay o ChanEmulation 3211 ChanStartTime 300 ChanTimeout 60 ChanTimeoutAct ion CLOSE_CHAN ChanTransNode DeviceName DeviceNamel DeviceName2 DeviceName3 DeviceName4 DeviceType FCBIgnore HIGHSPEED dev i370 chan0 cua dev i370 chanO cua dev i370 chan0 cua dev i370 chan0 cua dev i370 chano cua 370 o 0 check d
195. P Parameter Lpr Option K M m lt string gt OCT Parameter J lt string gt J job Job_name K lt number gt files File_Copies job Active_Notification Description Job name File copies Mail notification o lt keyword gt lt value gt P lt printer gt T lt string gt T P W w lt number gt Originator Send ing_Param_O lt nnnn gt originator Receiv ing_Input_Channel originator Sending_Ti tle U lt string gt originator Sending_Us er originator Send ing Param_W Special options LP printer name Job title Remote user Page width Not sup ported In case of an error the following return codes and messages are used Unknown LP parameter LP parameter value problem LP socket connection problem Internal LP client problem occured Problem occurred during executing command Getting Spool Queue Information with pq 512 The lpq command is used to get job details of the LP jobs in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server spool By specifiying the LP printer name all jobs are seen which are submitted to this printer By using the all keyword all LP jobs can be seen The command can be used for local LP printers lpq P lt printer gt as well as remote printers lpq P lt print er gt lt host gt Note when the Oc PRISMAproduction Server LPD processed the command The Ipq com
196. PCL Data m PCL Converter During job processing PCL data are converted into AFP code with embedded TIFF containers by the PCL Converter The generated data can then be printed via an IPDS or a PostScript backend m Do not convert RAW PCL data are not converted The data can be printed via a generic backend Default PCL Converter Default PCL Converter Remove InputJob m Active Ticket from PCL A possibly existing job ticket preceeding the data is removed Data m Not active only relevant for A possibly existing job ticket preceeding the data is not re RAW processing moved Raw data with or without Xerox job ticket can be printed on Xerox printers or via Oc PRISMAproduction Server with DPconnect PDF Data a PDF Unity RIP During job processing PDF data are converted into AFP code with embedded TIFF containers by the Unity RIP The generated data can then be printed via an IPDS or a PostScript backend m PDF Graphic Arts Plus During job processing PDF data are converted into AFP code with embedded PDF containers by the Graphic Arts Plus Normalizer The generated data can then be printed via an IPDS or a PostScript backend m Do not convert RAW PDF data are not converted The data can be printed via a generic backend Default PDF Unity RIP Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab Item Description Remove Input Job Active Ticket from PDF A p
197. PCLFILTER PJL_MACROS Description Multiply input PCL filter commands may be specified separated by PJL_FONTS Multiply font file names may be specified Font1 sfs Font2 sfs separated by Font3 sfs Multiply macro file names may be speci Usual Dependencies Especially interesting for fanfold printers like for VS9o00 and VS10000 Both printer and application dependent Printer dependent Printer dependent Both printer and application dependent Both printer and application dependent Printer dependent Printer dependent Printer dependent Especially interesting for fanfold printers like for VS9o000 and VS10000 Example string my 2 a 3 gdz Macro1 pcl Macro2 pcl fied separated by Macro3 pcl Please note that the example string is for reference analyze purpose It is not necessary for a user to understand the syntax of the strings in the PJM Ticket With the properties dialog you can build these stings in an easy and user friendly way The semicolon separated lists of values may not have spaces for example before or after the or character A space character as part of the PCL escape sequence itself with the quotes is obviously allowed Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation PCL Native Workflow in the PJM PCL File Properties Replacement Tab Replacements Fonts Macros oh Xie Code Description mS o 1
198. POD Module Operation 199 DPconnect Appendix Take message from input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Message String length 100 gt Take this alternative message Ignore Statement gt Use system default if available Document Plex Mode Translate Statement directly gt Take plex mode for the document from input ticket Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action gt Take plex mode from the ticket template Edit File Properties Convert Paper Layout Ignore Statement gt Use system default if available Image Rotation for Document Translate Statement directly gt Take image rotation for document from input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Image Rotation Integer 0 90 180 270 gt Alternative rotation will be selected Ignore Statement gt No rotation Collating Translate Statement directly gt Take collate mode for the document from input ticket Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action gt Take collate from the ticket template Job Parameter Copies combo box Ignore Statement gt Use system default if available Exception Plex Mode 200 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Appendix Options Translate Statement directly gt
199. PRISMAproduction Server server Syntax Ipr S lt Server gt P lt Queue gt lt Data file gt Name or IP address of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Name of the logical printer queue configured on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Data file Name of the data file to be printed The option o I a lowercase L can be used for defining binary transmission when bi nary postscript etc files are sent i Note No data conversion is done before the data is sent Make sure the file has the correct format before the data is sent or that the receiving server can convert the data when this is needed If the correct licenses are available and the logical LP printer is configured properly data conversion PostScript PDF Linedata can be done by Oc PRISMAproduction Server The RAW windows format however cannot be converted The other way is to create an lpr printer and configure this printer to send the data to the Oc PRISMApro duction Server server LP queue The data output format can be one of the following output formats a AFP free driver available an extended version with more features can be bought m PCL free driver available an extended version with more features can be bought m Postscript Configuration of an LPR Printer under Windows XP 1 Select Start and then Printers and Faxes 2 Double click the Add Printer icon to start the Add Printer Wizard Click Ne
200. Param_ osep originator Sending_Param_ os eparator Specifies if separator pages are printed between the job copies Values y es n o osfo orchfo originator Sending_Param_ osfo Specifies one or more path which orchfontlib originator Sending Param_ or are searched for fonts required chfo by the job originator Sending_Param_ or chfontlib otre files Pdstre occ yes and otrc yes then Pdstrc 1 occ yes and otrc no then Pdstrc o occ no then Pdstrc o oti otitle originator Sending_Title Specifies the job title Max 90 characters otr otrailer originator Sending_Param_ otr originator Sending Param_ otrailer Specifies whether trailer page is printed Values y es n o ous ouserid originator Sending User Specifies the user name Max 20 characters Chapter 7 Configuration 519 LP IBM Option OCT Parameter Description and limitations Specifies the X offset of the oxo oxoff originator Sending Param_ oxo pages set originator Sending_Param_ ox nnn nnn ilm i inch m millime offset ter pels without Specifies the Y offset of the pages nnn nnn ilm i inch m millime ter pels without oyo oyoff set originator Sending_Param_ oy offset originator Sending_Param_ oyo LP Daemon Configuration 520 For a description of the Input Modules
201. Parame Info Page Parameter LP Parameter ter odi odistribu originator Send tion ing _Param_ odi origina tor Sending Param_ odistribution odo odoc JOB_NAME job Job_name JOBNAME2 name ojobn ojob name odu oduplex DUPLEX files Pdsduplx PDSDUPLX of oformdef FORMDEF files Formdef FORMDEF2 OFILEFOR originator Send MAT ing_Param_ OFILE FORMAT oh oheader originator Send ing Param_ oh originator Send ing _Param_ oheader oipdest DEST IP oin job Intray omsgc omsg originator Send count ing_Param_ omsgc originator Send ing_Param_ omsgcount ona oname NAME receiver Rec_Name REC_NAME2 ono onodeid NOTIFY userinfo Notify ooffxb OFFSETXB files PdsOfEXB PDSOFFXB2 ooffxf OFFSETXF files PdsOfFXF PDSOFFXF2 ooffyb OFFSETYB files PdsOffYB PDSOFFYB2 ooffyf OFFSETYF files PdsOffYF PDSOFFYF2 oou ooutbin OUTBIN job Outtray PDSOBIN OBIN oovy ooverlay OVERLAYF files FrontSideOvls FRONTSIDEOVLS oovlyb OVERLAYB files BackSideOvls BACKSIDEOVLS 470 Chapter 7 Configuration Input Modules Overview IBM Option MVS JCI HotDir HotDir OCT Parame Parame Info Page Parameter LP Parameter ter opa class CLASS originator Send HOST_CLASS2 SYSOUT ing Param_class QUEUE job Job_Class opa destina DEST originator Send HOST_DEST tion QUEUE ing_Param_ optr queue opa originator Send opassthru ing Param_ opa originator Send
202. Parameter Operator Interven tion Run Job on One Host Description Computers which are not part of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network but which need to access a computer in the network have to be registered as trusted hosts For instance computers which access a remote Oc PRISMAproduction Server network via the PJM command line or Oc PRISMAproduction Server file server each have to be registered in this way Trusted hosts do not need to be defined in the server table as Oc PRISMAproduction Server servers in the ODS network Format IP addresses for example 160 111 13 27 Click the Add button to open a dialog which allows you to enter an IP address in the correct format You can also use a wildcard after the second dot as termination for example 160 111 160 111 1 160 111 14 160 111 14 2 This allows an easier access to many computers in a domain This is especially useful for the Windows Printer Driver Use the Update button to modify a marked IP address With Remove the marked address is deleted from the list Description When you check Operator Intervention jobs that are submit ted in the PJM require operator acknowledgment They are set to interrupted and processing has to be initiated manually Default not active When you check this option the system will attempt to execute the entire job on a single print server Of course this is only possible if the services
203. Pdscc 16 Pdstrc o ocd ocdp originator Sending Param_ occd ASCII input codepage values 437 850 860 Portuguese 863 French Canadian 865 Nordic Specifies the number of copies of the job Range 1 255 Determines what type of errors create error messages Values block blkchar blkpos unblock Specifies the type of data stream Values as cii af pds db csascii d itroff gif jpeg I ine mo dcap pc 1 pdf p o s tscript ppml sap tiff Specifies department name Max 90 characters Specifies distribution name Max 90 characters Chapter 7 Configuration 517 LP 518 IBM Option odo odoc name ojobn ojob name OCT Parameter Description and limitations job Job_name Specifies document or job name Max 90 characters odu oduplex files Pdsduplx Specifies is the job prints on one or both sides and how the pages are ordered Values y es n o t umble OFILEFOR MAT of oformdef oh oheader oin originator Sending Param_ OFILEFORMAT files Formdef originator Sending_Param_ oh originator Sending_Param_ oheader job Intray Value record Specifies the name of the form which is used for the job Specifies if a start page is printed before the job Values y es n o Specifies the job input tray omsgc omsg count Ona Oname originator Sending_Param_ omsgc originator Sending_Param_ omsgcount
204. Permissions special rights can be set to protect the mirroring of jobs and the actions to control the mirrored jobs These rights are only visible if the above mentioned license is installed Under Print Job Manager Settings Allow to mirror jobs Under Job Viewer Job Modification Settings Allow to release mirrored jobs Allow to delete mirrored jobs Allow to pass control of mirrored jobs to mirror Functionality If the mirror function is enabled the jobs are mirrored when they are created i e on job submission they are also transferred to the indicated mirror server When a mirror job is successfully submitted it has been generated on the original server and at the same time on the mirror server On the mirror server the mirrored job gets the state exception mirrored The user can pursue the jobs in the appropriate job lists The job states are exchanged between the two servers The state of the remote job is reported in the tooltip of the local job Mirrored Jobs The mirrored job remains on the mirror server at least until the job is finished on the original system You can modify the hold time in the system configuration of the mirror server The mirrored job has the status Exception mirrored on the mirror system To avoid double printing the job can only be activated if m the original server is not available and m the user has the permission to release the job and m the job on the original server is
205. Printer Nal RE Rec Sub Rule Copy Check Copy rule Change Delete rule Edit rule properties Set selected rule to active Set selected rule to inactive Change selected r The change is only done for rules which allow the change For example you cannot change an active rule superRule which refers to a subRule into a subRule Chapter 7 Configuration TicketRules Definition of Rules TicketRules Definition of Rules Introduction Rules can be defined in the rules definition window below the rule list Rule Definition Window and Tool Bar To add or delete an action you can use the appropriate button in the tool bar Before an action can be added a node or another action has to be selected For every action you can choose whether it should be inserted before or after the marked element After clicking the Add button the appropriate window to select an existing action or to define a new action in detail is opened see TicketRules Definition of Conditions Settings Messages and Return Exit on page 425 If you have finished the definition this action will be added Already defined actions can be modified if you click the selected action element with the right mouse button or if you click the Edit icon in the tool bar By clicking on a selected action with the right mouse button the appropriate action defi nition window for this action is opened and the selected action can be edi
206. RISMAproduction Server database This allows you to apply these settings to other printers by selecting the Chapter 7 Configuration 373 Printer Configuration Gray Curves 374 respective entry from drop down list next to the icons You are asked to enter a name for the greyscale setting before it is saved To delete the settings again click the delete button X If you select Default you can always reload the default settings It is up to the proficiency and the experience of the user to find matching values for his task Sometimes several tests have to be performed to achieve acceptable results Note This procedure can only be applied to documents with a color depth of more than 1 bit images and graphics with more than one gray shade Because UnityRIP transforms the gray values based on the list of values you have created you can use this function only with this converter TIFFs or bitmaps which have been created by the DocSetter and have been saved as PDF are simulating gray shades already with a raster They only have a color depth of 1 bit black and white Such documents cannot be changed anymore using the transfer curve because the gray shades have already been transformed to raster dots Chapter 7 Configuration Job Queues Configuration Job Queues Job Queues Configuration Introduction Select Configuration gt Job Queues to configure the job queues to be used in this
207. RNAL Interconnectivity 4 0 INTERNAL LCDS Driver INTERNAL ManualReprint_000 1pt INTERNAL PCLeonverter 4 0 INTERNAL PCL Module 4 0 INTERNAL PPML2AFPconvert 4 0 INTERNAL PPS BackupEdge INTERNAL PPS_ODD_Connector 4 0 INTERNAL PPS_SLES 10 0 INTERNAL PRISMALPFM 4 0 INTERNAL APA Module 4 0 INTERNAL LCDS Module 4 0 INTERNAL OLDS Module 4 0 INTERNAL POD Module 4 0 INTERNAL PRISMAproduction Server Y4 Tier 8 INTERNAL PS PDFoutput 4 0 INTERNAL TiFFconverter 4 0 INTERNAL 463 464660060 066666060000 6600500 Expiration Date Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 Apr 10 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 Instances 1x010222 License Manager Window The license configuration window displays a table of all available CmStick licenses includ ing their corresponding properties Further columns for each Oc PRISMAproduction Server server are added for license assignment Currently three possible actions can be performed Chapter 7 Configuration 313 Licenses Tool Bar Menu Fe Edit gt Apply Description All license modifications will be stored in the database and the corr
208. SECTION PARAMETER VALUE where SECTION is defined as the OCT section the PARAMETER as the parameter in this section and the VALUE the value this parameter should be set to The character is not allowed as part of the value See MVS manuals for more information about Download user Exits Compressed encrypted data stream When on the MVS system the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Host Router from now on called Router product is used it is possible to send compressed data to the Oc 474 Chapter 7 Configuration Download PRISMAproduction Server server For this setup a special configuration for the MVS as well as the Download daemon is needed Also some restrictions exist at the moment which are listed below Please refer to the Router manual for the settings needed on the MVS system The following download configuration settings must be set to the specified values Download configuration parameter Value JobSequencing NO OutputDataStructure NoRDW PrgJobSubmission download_unzip script Restrictions At the moment restrictions exist when receiving compressed download data In future releases most of these restrictions will disappear Currently the following restrictions exist m No mixed data AFP and linedata in the same data file is supported m The AFPparameters the special parameters in the first AFP No op can not be read by the download daemon m The AFPTrim feature cannot be used so that
209. SMAproduction Server is shut down 2 CreateBackup The system state is checked If okay Oc PRISMAproduction Server is down on Master server and up on all Slave PrintSlaves the data is collected and stored by the storage manager A backup can be created in all versions of Oc PRISMAproduction Server 3 00 3 02 3 04 3 10 4 0 Description of the PrepareBackup options No options Description of the CreateBackup options Option Parameter Meaning Description name lt string gt Name of the backup description lt string gt Description of the backup plugins lt string list gt List of plug ins The backup is only creat ed for the plug ins defined in this list Default all plug ins jobs all The complete job data base is included for example only all or nothing Default No jobs are backed up all lt string list gt all The home directories of all users visible in Configuration gt User are backed up if the individual directory actually exists lt string list gt The home directories of the users listed are backed up if the individual directory actually exists Default No home directories are backed up Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 605 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client 606 Parameter Meaning Description haltonerror true false true The backup process is stopped w
210. See LP Job Submission for Mirroring and Ticket Rules chapter for LP mirroring and Ticket Rule examples For an example of the job submission script please see the file u prismapro cfg jobinput bin jobsub_example script Chapter 7 Configuration Input Modules Overview Input Parameter to Info Pages Mapping IBM Option MVS JCI LP Parameter Oac OaC count HotDir OCT Parame ter Info Page Parameter receiver Acc_Cus tom_Id oaddress1 receiver Rec_Street ADDRESS 12 oaddress2 receiver Rec_ZIP ADDRESS2 oaddress3 receiver Rec_City ADDRESS 32 ends ADDRESS ete Comey ADDRESS INTRAY IB job intray IN obu obuild BUILDING ing PDSIBIN receiver Rec_Building BUILDING DCB RECFM OCC originator Send ing _Param_ occ occtype DCB RECFM files Pdscc ocd ocdp ocod ocode page originator Send ing Param_ occd originator Send ing Param_ occdp originator Send ing Param_ ocod originator Send ing Param_ occdepage CHARS UCS ochars OCHARS COPIES ocop ocopies originator Send ing_Param_ OCHARS COPIES job Copies odatac odat DATACK ack files PDSDCK odatat odatatype ode odepart DEPT ment files DataT ype receiver Rec_Company DEPARTMENT Chapter 7 Configuration 469 Input Modules Overview IBM Option MVS JCI HotDir OCT
211. Sequence gt lt value gt gt lt Append add a new sequence AFTER this one lt PCL Sequence gt lt value gt gt lt new PCL Sequence gt lt new value gt Insert a new sequence BEFORE this one lt PCL Sequence gt lt value gt lt lt new PCL Sequence gt lt new value gt lt PCL Sequence gt means a 3 character string containing only Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation 239 PCL Native Workflow in the PJM m The Parameterized character m The Group character or a character a The Terminating character use upper case letters For example sT or vS In order to define one replacement rule you may follow these steps For example Step Action 1 Add a new rule clicking the icon in the tool bar 2 Choose an Operation for example Replace Sequence 3 Choose the Old Sequence you want to replace 4 Choose the New Sequence you want to use The other operations work respectively Unused fields are grayed out For example for the operation Delete the fields New Sequence and New value cannot be used You may define several replacement rules Each line of this table represents one rule Note You need a certain PCL knowhow to use this feature On purpose there is no checking for the range of parameters values because the PCL code of the input file may not be within the specification and therefore a parameter check may n
212. TDERR List of messages describing the problems one message per problem Quiet mode lt code1 gt lt error text 1 gt lt codeN gt lt error text N gt 12 Job submission error 544 Chapter 8 PJM Command Line PJM Command Line Parameters Return code Meaning Is set when the PRISMAproduction server doesn t accept the job This can happen for two reasons m A problem in the negotiation process between the PJM client and server which files are to be transferred not the transfer itself would raise a File Transfer Error The job cannot be passed to ODS for execution Returncode 12 is also set if the waiting status of the of the PJM command line is terminated by an error STDERR Message describing the job submission problem Quiet mode 1 gt lt server error message gt 2 gt lt termination error message gt only possible if the wait option has been specified 13 Status display error Is set when the PRISMAproduction server can t return the status of the given job s STDERR Message describing why the status has not been re turned Quiet mode 1 gt lt server error message gt 14 Job cancel error Is set when the PRISMAproduction server can t cancel the given job s STDERR Message describing why the job s has have not been canceled Quiet mode 1 gt lt server error message gt 15 Resource delete error Is set when the PRISMAproduction server can t
213. This PJL command forces the converter to terminate mand the active printer language and to tranfer control to PJL 2nd com PJL SET RESOLUTION 600 Sets the resolution to 6oodpi mand 3rd com PJL DEFAULT DISKLOCK OFF DISKLOCK has to be set to mand OFF because otherwise you cannot write on the hard disk 4th com PJL FSMKDIR NAMEs o pcl macros Use this command to mand create the directory pcl macros in the actual working directory You can use o or 1 as volume which has no effect on UNIX systems but still has to be present 5th com PJL FSDOWNLOAD FORMAT BINARY mand NAMEs o pcl macros macro res SIZE 16 lt LF gt Downloaded macro This PJL command contains the following steps 1 The format of the data to be saved is binary 2 It sets the directory name 0 pcl macros and the file name macro res 3 It specifies the number of bytes of the macro SIZE 16 Finally follows the macro itself in this case the text Downloaded macro 6th 7th Esc 12345X command PJL ENTER LANGUAGE PCL Use this command to switch back to PCL again After the print data This is the downloaded macro the macro will be executed 8th com Esc amp cf1 Y mand The macro ID command sets the ID of the actual macro to 1 gth com Esc amp n10W 2macro res mand The alphanumeric ID command assignes the string ID macro res to the actual macro ID You have to use the same string name as in the FFDOWNLOAD command The alphanumeric ID command has to know how ma
214. Ticket Templates eeeeee 177 DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries 178 DPconnect Configuration Example cccccsccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 189 DPconnect Maintenance Programs cccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaes 193 DPconnect APPe Nndix ccccceeeeeesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaaaaeeeeeneas 196 Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation ccccccceseeeeeseencsencinneeeeeeeeeeneeensessssseneesseeeased 213 LCDS Module New Catalog ceecccecceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeeeeas 214 LCDS Module Organization Of RESOUICES ccsssccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 215 LCDS Module LCDS R SOUrCES ccccceeeeeceeesseesssensssnnaneeeeeseeeeeenss 217 LCDS Module Stockset Configuration TOOI ccceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 223 Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation ccccceeeseeessseseseeeseeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseensssesessneeaaaeeeaea 231 PCL Module General Features cccccccccccccecceessseessssssssensanseeeaneeeesees 232 PCL Module Native Workflow cccccccccccccsscceceesesesessessssssnsssnseeaeeeeeeees 234 PCL Native Workflow in the PUM cccccccceeeceeeseeeessesesseeaneeeeeseeeeeeess 231 PCL Module Syntax of the Native PCL Filter c ccccscccssceseeeeeeeeeeees 242 PCL Module Print ParameterS cccccccccccccceeceeessseessssssssessseneeeaneeeeeees 245 Chapter 7 CONTIQUIATION sissies ionnan iania aaiae
215. TicketRules ParaMeters ccccccccccssssecceeeeeeceeecceeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeuseeeees 429 TicketRules Variables cccecccssccssssecceeeeeeseeeeeeesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeees 430 TicketRules Define Foreach LOOP cccccccccceceeeeceeeeeeeesssesssesseeees 435 TicketRules Value Tables cccccscccscseeeesesseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeanseeees 437 TicketRules Save and LOQ cccceceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeneeaes 439 TicketRules Activate for LP Download and HotDir 0 440 VPA IW OS E A A E TT 441 Archives OVErViICW cccccccccccesccssscessseececeeeeseeeeceeecseseeseeeeeeeeseesseeees 441 Archives PFL Archives cccccccsccssssecccseeecesseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaseeeees 443 Archives Database Links Document Manager Cache 445 Archives ACAMINiStration cccccccccscceesesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeanseeees 451 Archives Search FUN Ction cccccssccscceesssesseeeesseeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeseeees 453 Archives Appendia nininini anaana anaana iaa 455 INPUT MOdUI S iors scesesecesecececeensuied iaiia knaar aia 460 Input Modules OVErViW cceeeesceseseneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeseneeeeennees 460 DOWNIOAG aiscesiis sadtsceassiwed E A EE 474 Download Behavior in Error Situations ccccccessseeseseeseeeeeeees 484 TOLD uigcadas ctusestauatheanctcaesancdehweueeut eduadacucust O 488 HotDir Behavior in Error Situations ccc
216. User s Guides Select this entry to define forms which are assigned to a job via the PJM Job Attributes gt Print dialog All available tabs are described in this table These tabs are provided fpr tab printing in the PJM You have to select the type which has the same number size and sorting as the tabs inserted If you select User defined Paper you can define the following parameters for each paper Column Paper Name Weight Description Freeform name to identify the paper Choose some standard names from a list box if you click into the name field Maximum length 40 characters Paper weight Integer values from 40g m to 200g m 414 Chapter 7 Configuration Paper Configuration Tool Column Description CSY Color Any color of the paper Some colors are offered in a list box Transparent switches Type to transparent film Max length of the field 40 characters For every color in the combo box a defined hex code will be inserted in the data stream For other colors which you insert manually a special hex code for Custom Color is inserted Additionally you can use so called color prefixes clear light or dark where clear can be combined with light or dark Example Possible combinations of the color red red clear red light red dark red clear light red clear dark red Type Standard Transparentfilm Precuttabulator
217. Version Numbers A script Icdsver is included in the package This gives the version numbers of the crucial modules for example xdl xfilter XRC This service tool can be started from the command line A script prismaver is included on the CD under tools_linux This gives the version numbers of all rpm packages and selected modules like with the release notes This service tool can be started from the command line Implementation of Bicolor Shadings in LCDS The following table defines the determination of the colors of a shading up to version 3 04 the color was defined depending on the ratio of color black if there was more color than black only color was printed and the other way round Black 0 Color o gt Black Black 0 Color gt o gt Color Black gt o Color o gt Black Black gt o Color gt o gt Bicolor shadings are printed on top of each other Black and Color To print the two layers the XRC converter switch has to be set to RASTERICT see Copy Parameters in LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters on page 387 Highlight Color Support 406 Highlight color support is based on the alternate color concept In this case BLACK and K100 and related gray shadings like K32 within the XRC are converted into AFP Black color oxo8 all other colors into AFP Brown Alternate Color 0x10 This option is used for the CustomTone o switches for PrintLCDS JCF Data and inline
218. Windows 2000 OS only use 11 TCP ports When more than 11 connections are needed it waits until the first port is available again This can take up to 3 minutes There is a description from microsoft which shows how to edit the registry to fix this problem http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb EN US 179156 Chapter 7 Configuration Chapter 8 PJM Command Line PJM Command Line Mode Overview PJM Command Line Mode Overview Introduction Besides the graphical user interface the Print Job Manager also provides a command based interface which can be called on all systems that have the PJM GUI Client installed The PJM command line can also be installed separately The executable version of the command line is supported on LINUX usr bin pjm and Windows spjm exe in folder CD tools_win The executable is small and fast on the client as the Oc PRISMAproduction Server socket interface is used and most of the work is done on the server The Windows user has to install the Windows command line version on the windows system by hand The description for the command line is valid for all incarnations PJM Command Line Features 534 The PJM command line enables you to execute print jobs by entering a command string Also a few maintenance functions can be performed especially regarding Print File Li braries In general some form of a Job Ticket is defined and merged with other command line options This results in
219. a m Export database accounting and import the exported records into another database for migration of database structures Illustration General Database Permissions Legacy Files Status Database Name Version Host Owner Password Vv Files ace Legacyfiles localhost root PostgreSQL PPACC Version 1 localhost accadming gaes PostgreSQL PPACC V2 Version2 localhost accadmin ernw Delete accounting records automatically E Delete all completed records if they are older than 12 daily at E 0 Sj o clock The delete action is completed by a possibly complex compression of the database content To avoid preformance issues it s better to run this action during system s idle time PRISMAproduction Job Id Pool E Restriction for creating new job ids Configuration modified Storage of Accounting Records i Note To use the accounting database a license Accounting 4 0 is required Chapter 7 Configuration 317 Accounting Administration General Settings Column Description Active Activates Deactivates the storage of the accounting records either as legacy files or in a PostgreSQL database For PostgreSQL you can select the normal version 1 or the enhanced version 2 which also stores for example color informa tion Note Two active databases may have an inpact on the system performance Status Reflects the status of the database Ok
220. a from the database Discard all changes Job Notification Printer Table The area below the toolbar displays all configured printers in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network Each entry shows 6 columns 340 Printer Name Printer Model Printer Driver Printer Type Server Name This icon calls up a dialog which allows you to configure the Active Notification Interface for jobs For further details see below Description Name of the printer For Oc printers exact model name of the printer Type of print data processing facility described in New Print er Continuous Cutsheet Twin or Triplex The Name of the server the printer is connected to The Status of the printer can be Status Description 3 Spool daemon is down for all printers on the server Spool inactive amp Spool is active the printer is inactive Spool active Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration Overview Status Description 3 Printer is printing or at least waiting for a job Don t reconfig Printer active ure the printer in this state Printer Configuration Area The configuration area is divided into 9 tabs where each tab offers some special settings for a separate topic Application Description General General printer settings Printer Configuration General on page 349
221. a submission ticket which is transferred to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system along with the print data as far as necessary The resulting ticket controls the print process on the server site In particular you can m Specify a Oc PRISMAproduction Server system on which the print job should run a Define either a local or reprint Job Ticket as basis for a print job optional along with a custom ticket OCT for modifications of the original ticket Specify a job class printer the job name copy count and form Specify a page definition and form definition for APA jobs Select a composer set to impose chained files Replace local files and or files from a Print File Library in the list of files already defined in the original ticket Delete documents in a Print File Libraries and Resource Libraries Display the status of a job or a list of jobs Cancel a job or a list of jobs Request a jobid and use it in a subsequent job submission Chapter 8 PJM Command Line PJM Command Line Mode Overview All options regarding Print File Libraries are applicable to Oc PRISMAproduction Server systems with the language module POD only Same applies to the composer set name The option regarding page and form definition is applicable to Oc PRISMAproduction Server systems with the language module APA only Chapter 8 PJM Command Line 535 PJM Command Line Parameters PJM Command Line Parameters Introduction You call the PJM Co
222. aaae 249 Overview and Usage of the Configuration InterfaceSs eesseeeeeee 250 Configuration OVeErvViW ccccceeesscceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesnaeaeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 250 General Usage of the Configuration Applications ccc00 256 Contents User Manageme nt sssssssssssccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseesseesseseenaaenseauseeeneeees 258 User Management OVervieW cccssccssccccseeeceeseeeeeeeseeessesesseees 258 User Management LDAP SUppPOSt cccccccccceeseeeseeeesssesessereeees 262 User Management USE csscsssssssscenneeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeseees 264 User Management USer INf0 c cccsccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeesssseeseees 269 User Management User Info for operator and applic 270 User Management User PermisSiOns cccccsceeseeeeeeeseesseneaes 271 CIUSTOM exeaadeinaessdunsaliesadtandschddedeacesanivakandenwns cividawesddeelieidtsaatantieiadededancaents 276 Cluster COnfiQuration ccccccsceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 276 ol Bo Ys 0 ae eeemeneemereererceerery ites Meee reennre rr erst ae E 278 d Eororo l ans ME n E E EAE A A eee de es Ae eee 278 EVENTS irriaren aeiaai iad aea ai aaa ea 280 Events ConfiQuration ccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeaeneeeeeeenseees 280 EEEE E ON E A EEE ET A E AT E F 281 System Configuration OVErVieW cccccs
223. abilities of all real destination printers attached to your Oc PRISMAproduction Server system Manual Ticket Parameter Setup Upgrading a normal job ticket with a jobrequirement step requires the following m Open the job ticket file with an ASCII editor The folder where you find it is u prismapro cfg jobinput ticket m Add a new ticket section named jobrequirement This has to be done in a separate line the section name has to be enclosed with jobrequirement m After the section line insert the line _Service jobrequirement m Putall the jobrequirement parameters after the service line and set their values as you need them m Search for the job section and insert somewhere in the job section the line Pre_Print_Steps jobrequirement m Close and save the job ticket file Controlling jobrequirement information output The job ticket section jobrequirement contains a set of parameters which control both the amount of information and for some information also its appearance in the popup window Parameters are Default values are bold Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 103 Jobrequirement Functional Module 104 outputInJobView yes no Show all job requirement information in the All Jobs view outputInMessageView yes no Show all job requirement information as an information message in the Messages window showMediaRequirements yes no If the following input media attributes are requested they will be display
224. abled files will be located also in path u prismapro lib backupEdgeconnector in any case Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Connectivity to Oc PRISMAproduction Server Description of the Preconfigured Backup Sets of Oc Two scripts will be provided by Oc PRISMAproduction Server itself These scripts have the functionality to start and stop Oc PRISMAproduction Server The scripts are installed in directory u prismapro lib backupEdgeConnector Note li If you want to use the preconfigured backup sets with BackupEDGE software running in DEMO mode please copy all files with name beginning with edge located in u prismapro lib backupEdgeConnector to the etc directory and edit them for your requirements Then the scripts will be used the same way as if the Oc license is installed Also all changes to these files will be preserved if the Oc license will be installed after wards Detailed description of the provided functionality of the scripts startPrisma lt f p gt This script just checks for Oc PRISMAproduction Server running and if not it will be started and a message is sent to Oc PRISMAproduction Server It has to be inserted ex ecuted in both scripts etc edge passed Oc PRISMAproduction Server and Jetc edge failed The parameter MUST be set to f in file etc edge failed and p in file etc edge passed This will create a single Oc PRISMAproduction Server message if
225. ackup Restore Import Mount Point Where data has been stored retrieved from Result of Operation Whether the operation was successful or an error occurred Example console output for a History call root isny prismabackup prismabackup py History 2005 07 04 15 13 45 1120482825821 backup usr local prismabackup mountdir Successful 2005 07 26 17 18 19 1122391099308 backup usr local prismabackup mountdir Successful 2005 08 02 08 42 32 1122964952130 backup usr local prismabackup mountdir Successful alt 2 3 4 5 Three backups have been created on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system 1 Date and Time 2 Backup ID 3 Operation performed was backup creation 4 Mount point was default 5 All backups have been created successfully Locate Backups 614 Backups are identified by their Backup ID generated internally when the backup is created If find out the Backup IDs in an unknown environment or because the backups have been created a long time ago the SearchBackups function has been implemented The search operation starts with the mount point to which the backups are written this path can be configured in the configuration file config xml see below As backups or directories containing backups can also be relocated manually an optional search directory can be defined for the search so to speak as a temporary mount point rearranging directories is possible but not recommended Description of the Se
226. add a server click the tool bar icon or right click on the table Select Insert in the context menu The following dialog is displayed IP Address Server Type Lote Slave v Slave jave UI Element Description IP Address IP address of the computer which should be added Chapter 7 Configuration Master Slave Configuration UI Element Server Type Options Menu Menu entry Logfiles Description Slave Server which is either used as Printserver or as RIP server see chapter Servers in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server User s Guides PrintSlave Server which is only used to drive printers see chapter Servers in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server User s Guides Rave Name Version Status oce pp license 3 10 01 oce pp account 3 10 15 oce pp afp2ipds_oknd 3 10 01 oce pp afp2ps 3 10 26 oce pp backuprestore 3 10 06 oce pp communicator 3 10 14 oce pp config_paper 3 10 03 oce pp config_sys 3 10 04 oce pp configuration 3 10 05 oce pp database 3 10 03 oce pp explorer 3 10 11 loce pp i370 3 10 03 oce pp inputmodules 3 12 00 oce pp mailNotify 3 10 06 oce pp messages 3 10 09 oce pp ods 3 10 06 oce pp odscontrol 3 10 12 oce pp pdv3 3 10 02 oce pp pfm 3 10 16 Description Generate logfiles to control the following processes a Activating and deactivating the host m adding and removing a host m stopping processes Components Returns a list displa
227. agetext Displays the text of the message Trigger Com Opens a list with all available programs scripts in the mand u prismapro bin ani directory Select the program to be exe cuted if the message is generated Active o Switch the program execution on or off Chapter 7 Configuration 311 Message System Message Suppression Message System Message Suppression Introduction This dialog allows you to suppress the display of messages in the message window If you click the Add new entry button either if the list is empty or no entry is marked the first valid message number will be entered in the list or if there are entries in the list and one entry is marked this entry will be copied and added to the list Illustration Gh l X amp General Automatic Saving Automatic Answers Triggers _ Message Suppression Message id Modulename Messagetext Suppress 99030000 backupedge PRISMAproduction will be stop w 61000001 ExplorerServer User 0 from 1 has discon w 15000009 resManager Program module name 0 i Message Suppression Table Column Message Id Description Double clicking this entry opens a drop down list which con tains all numbers of messages which can be answered automat ically by the system Modulename Opens a drop down list with all modules which generate mes sages Select the a module
228. all four separations CMYK are printed one over the other the image is complete A separa tion on its own only contains components relevant for this color Separating images in only two colors therefore leads to falsifications and alienations of the contents of the image Example In this example you can see very clearly that the yellow separation contains most of the image information If you print this separation with a darker CustomTone and Black the complete image may appear to be too dark Example image Color separation Cyan Magenta Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 87 Unity Color Separation 88 Example image Color separation E Black Fonts and graphics are usually not affected because they are mainly created using pure colors Prerequisites m All colors needed should be created in one single color space i e CMYK The use of more than one color space in one document makes separation extremely difficult Advantages a Targeted and simple separation of color channels a All color shadings within a separation will be reproduced correctly m No knowledge of single color values is necessary Problems m Single color separations represent only a part of the entire image Consequently images differ from the original According to the separation you choose the image appears to be more bright or dark m Graphics like pie charts with different color shades are not separat
229. ally uses the correct File ready trigger type When the HotDir is mounted it uses the FileSizeExtendedCheck other wise the ProcessOpen FileCheck This value doesn t work for exported directories FileSizeExtendedCheck gt Checks if the file size increases When this doesn t happen for the amount of seconds defined with the keyword FileSizeDelay and some other checks the file is marked as being complete ProcessOpenFileCheck gt Checks if the file found in the monitored directory is still opened by a running process See the keyword ProcScanType which defines which processes are checked Job Sequencing Parameters Parameter Possible values Description JobGrouping SingleFileJobs Specifies how grouped jobs are GroupedFileJobs submitted 496 Chapter 7 Configuration HotDir JobSortSe quence Off gt No file sorting is done Alphabetically gt The files are sorted alphabetically using the system locale and sub mitted using this sequence Alphanumerically gt The files are sorted alphanumer ically and submitted in this se quence Leading zeros are NOT needed Example of a sorted se quence 1 2 10 12 100 FileTimeStamp gt The time the file is created is used to define the sequence of the jobs Since the accuracy of this value is in seconds the job creation must be at least one second apart OCT Parameters DefaultTicket Parameter P
230. alog offers the possibility to analyze the cause of the failure Chapter 7 Configuration Backup Restore Convert old Backups Backup Restore Convert old Backups Introduction System backups of an Oc PRISMAproduction Server V3 00 07 system first need to be converted into Oc PRISMAproduction Server V3 02 20 backups In order to do so execute the script u prismapro bin convertBackups from the command line immediately after the installation of Version 3 02 20 The script checks the system for old system backups and converts them accordingly The Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer Backup Restore application reports the 3 00 Backups as not restorable After having saved these converted backups they can be used in Oc PRISMAproduction Server V4 00 without further conversion Conversion Process The convertBackups script performs 2 functions a Syntax ConvertBackups check Checks all backups found on the system for example the contents of path u prismapro bak A list is displayed where the state of each backup is specified up to date or damaged or not convertible or convertible Of interest are the convertible backups Damaged backups should be deleted manually by the Backup Restore application Non convertible are some early 3 02 Backups which haven t been stored with double byte code encoding yet m Syntax ConvertBackups noreset Converts all backups stated as conver
231. amps are to be printed YES Print with stamp Default NO Print without stamp Defines the trace level for the sample component Permitted values are 0 1 2 3 4 The next higher level always includes all lower levels Parameter is optional o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information TraceFlags ComIn fo Sample specific GCI communication interface trace flags De fault FFooo00000000000 Parameter is mandatory TraceLevel ComIn fo Defines the trace level for the GCI communication interface during the sample application The next higher level always in cludes all lower levels Parameter is mandatory o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information Spooljob Section SpoolJob_Trace Flags Com Info StartSPS specific GCI communication interface trace flags Default FFooo00000000000 Parameter is mandatory SpoolJob_TraceLev el Com Info Defines the trace level for the GCI communication interface during the StartSPS part of the sample application The next higher level always includes all lower levels Parameter is mandatory o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information Chapter 7 C
232. an be used with this software a DigiPath V1 2 V2 0 V2 1 V3 0 V4 0 FreeFlow Makeready V2 0 V3 0 V4 0 V5 0 DSM Document Scan and Makeready Production printing of RDO data Printing of RDO data via printer drivers see below QuickPrint Production printing of RDO data Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 147 DPconnect Functionality 148 PostScript PDF PCL ASCII Tiff Xerox Printer Drivers for Windows The following types of drivers are supported PostScript driver PCL driver Xerox job ticket generation may be switched on or off With print jobs for the DocuPrint 48xx NPS hightlight color substitution actions are not available Xerox XDS XDS Plus is not supported The following data types are supported for each printer model Printer default PostScript PDF PCL ASCII TIFF Xerox FreeFlow Print Manager The following data types are supported for each printer model Printer default PostScript PDF PCL ASCII TIFF Print jobs from standard LP clients DPconnect accepts print jobs submitted by a standard lp client such as the Windows or LINUX lpr Also Window printer drivers using the lp protocol are accepted The following data types with or without Xerox job ticket are supported Printer default PostScript PDF PCL ASCII Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Functionality TIFF AFP IOCA PostScript and PCL data
233. an optional module belonging to the POD language module The following components are required for the installation of DPconnect Oc PRISMAproduction Server POD Module V4 0 Professional Document Composer V4 0 Unity or Unity Graphic Arts Plus Workflow V4 0 PCL converter only if you want to print PCL data V4 0 The installation procedure is only performed on an Oc PRISMAproduction Server master It creates all required directories and files on the system After installation you have to configure the system 152 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Configuration and Job Submission DPconnect Configuration and Job Submission Configuration on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Server Insert the IP address and name of the computer with the Xerox print job submitter in the file etc hosts Before you can use DPconnect set up the following configuration using the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer m Define at least one printer with at least one input bin and one output bin Configu ration gt Printers m Define at least one job queue Configuration gt Job Queues 3 queues are predefined when Oc PRISMAproduction Server is shipped m Define at least one LP printer queue Configuration gt Input Modules In this di alog box set up the following parameters Parameter Description Selected Profile Select one ticket template name from the combo bo
234. an specify attributes of the input file like Name Format none IOCA PCL TIFF PDF Unity PS Unity ImpScheme and ImpSetname Chapter 7 Configuration 453 Archives Search Function After you have selected the search criteria and after clicking the search button the search result is displayed in the upper part of the window If the default settings on a tab have been modified the caption of the tab turns red The output of the results is also influenced by the number of results you have specified and the File type filter 454 Chapter 7 Configuration Archives Appendix Archives Appendix Network File Systems Selectable for the Data Transfer File System Description Local File transfer as in previous Oc PRISMAproduction Server versions Oc PRISMAproduction Server data transfer with master slave configuration NFS Network File System The administrator has to mount a direc tory from the NFS server on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server On the NFS server The file etc exports must contain the path server and access rights of the server which accesses the NFS server Example usr data archiv 192 168 0 7 rw root_squash On the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server You have to indicate the directory of the PFL archive as mount point The default path of the PFL archive is u prismapro data archive When mounting you have to add the directory of the P
235. and an outline of the working procedure Definition Many of today s desktop publishing programs output their print files in TIFF format With the TIFF Converter you can convert your TIFF documents into the AFPDS or PCL command languages of printing systems The files can then be output as finished publications ready for distribution Ways of using the TIFF Converter 130 Dedicated Conversion Server To provide more scope for individual solutions with the TIFF Converter the software can also be run on a dedicated system completely separate from the print server In this type of installation the TIFF Converter can be started by command line entry You can m Shift the conversion workload from the print server to a different PC a Activate the conversion automatically via your own programs or shell scripts This approach is recommended a For applications that always print the same documents without changes to the contents Since conversion is a separate process you only have to repeat it when the contents or form of the document change a Ifprinting is slowed due to the print server s conversion workload you should conduct the conversion as a completely separate process from printing The conversion can be carried out at a different time and or in a different place For example conversions can be carried out at night when the server does not have to handle the same workload or you can convert files on a PC other than the print
236. any of the following AFP items will be displayed Pages Images Barcode simpleOutput yes no This switch affects display of the medium formats and the printer postprocessing device names If set to no Medium formats are displayed in the fomat Length mm x Width mm Printer postprocessing requests are displayed in the fomat lt Device name gt lt Operation name gt lt Reference edge Reference corner gt If set to yes Medium dimensions are translated according the following table into medium format names and these will be displayed instead of the medium dimensions Medium Length mm Medium Width mm Medium Format Name 216 279 US Letter 216 356 US Legal 279 432 US Ledger 420 594 A2 297 420 A3 305 430 A3 uncut 210 297 A4 215 305 A4 uncut 149 210 As 250 353 B4 157 364 JIS B4 All other medium dimensions are shown as with simpleOutput no Printer postprocessing requirements are translated outgoing from the technical terms device name operation name and reference to a simplified descriptive name accord ing the following table Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 105 Jobrequirement Functional Module 106 Device Name Operation Name Reference Simplified Postpro cessing Name UP3I Staple Corner staple Top left Single portrait sta ple upper left UP3I Staple Corner staple Bottom left Single landscape staple upp
237. aper format The variable paper format is composed of three parameters the measuring unit cm or inch the x extent and the y extent Dimension in cm Dimension in inches Page size x extent Page size y extent Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 135 TIFF Converter Operation Control Parameter H lt color gt K U lt R gt W lt G gt Y lt B gt Description Enables highlight color Default off Extracted color 1 red 2 green 3 blue 4 red green 5 red blue 6 green blue 7 red green blue Separates the highlight color image and the black and withe images optional Default off Threshold value red 0 255 Threshold value green 0 255 Threshold value blue 0 255 These options must be used in conjunction The TIFF converter supports Custom Tone for TIFF files Rev 6 0 Palette color images and RGB full color images Tag Handling The tags listed below are those supported by the program The tags encountered in the file are logged in STDOUT when the parameter n is not specified If parameter a is specified the ASCII strings in the TIFF file are output to STDOUT The tags are output as follows TAG Tag is supported and parameter s is are correct TAG Tag is supported parameter s not correct 2 TAG Tag is not supported TAG Unknown tag 254 oxFE 255 oxFF New Subfile The parameter value must be o Subfile Type The param
238. aper size on the server setdefpaper a4 sets default paper size to A4 The default paper size can be changed to legal letter ledger B4 or A3 The default paper size applies to all customer catalogs To initialize the standard formats PCC and code tables you can start the program initlcds in a UNIX window after logging in as root initlcds initializes standards in all catalogs on the server The standards apply to all customer catalogs if no customer catalog is given The catalog parameter restricts this setting to one catalog initlcds DEFAULT sets standards in the DEFAULT catalog only For compatibility reasons the script setpapersize is left as a combination of setdefpaper and initlcds with the same parameters setpapersize lt paper size gt lt catalog gt This script is started with every installation of the LCDS module Suppressing Information Pages If you are printing jobs with numerous reports it is possible to suppress the printing of Oc PRISMAproduction Server information header separator and trailer pages in order to save paper Message pages are not suppressible Every new report starts on a new sheet You may get up to three blank pages if you print duplex and two up To suppress the printing of information pages deactivate the Print Header Trailerpage button in the PJM Chapter 7 Configuration 405 LCDS Parameter Configuration Special Functions and User Scripts Verifying the
239. aple substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices if right side portrait staple is re quested in the input ticket All UPSI devices selected here are used Ignore Statement gt No stapling is done Right Side Landscape Staple Translate Statement directly gt A UP31 Stitch Corner Staple Bottom left corner command is put to the job only if stapling is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take right side landscape staple substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I De vices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring right side landscape staple only gt Take right side landscape staple substitution action from the ticket tem plate Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices if right side landscape staple is requested in the input ticket All UP3I devices selected here are used Ignore Statement gt No stapling is done Right Side Dual Staple Translate Statement directly gt A UP3I Stitch Edge Stitch left edge command is put to the job only if stapling is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 209 DPconnect A
240. ar to the Replacement alteration type described above The differ ence is that the search string is regarded as regular expression This gives you the possibil ity to impose any complex filter criteria for the search Chapter 7 Configuration 433 TicketRules Variables Field 434 If you select alteration type field a definition dialog appears in the lower part of the window The Delimiter character divides the value of a key into fields excluding the delimiter itself If the delimiter is not set then each character becomes a field If the value starts with the delimiter the first field is empty and the second field starts after the first delimiter If there is no other character between two delimiters the generated field is empty but counted The Delimiter has a maximum size of one character The entries From Field and To Field define the range of fields which are extracted from the value The fields are numbered in increasing order from left to right starting with 1 and in decreasing order from right to left starting with 1 This is illustrated in the following example with empty delimiter each character is one field The delimiter is placed between each selected field The Example and becomes text fields show how a given text is changed by the current field definition These text fields are directly adapted to the definition if this is changed It s also possible to type in
241. archBackups options Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Parameter Meaning Description lt string gt Base directory for the search Regarding the storage manager this would corre spond to changing the mount point The following parameters are displayed for each backup found Parameter Description Version Version of Oc PRISMAproduction Server in which the backup was created Name of backup short description of the backup Detailed description of the backup User who created the backup Date and time at which the backup was created Example console output for a SearchBackups call root isny prismabackup prismabackup py SearchBackups 1 1122391099308 gt Version 3 00 07 Name BackupTemplate 3 00 Description Backups created from template 3 00 User root Date 2005 07 26 17 18 19 1119610944434 gt Version 3 00 07 Name testbackup Description First Test Backup gt 2 Uger root Date 2005 07 30 13 02 24 1122964952130 gt Version 3 00 07 Name Foo Backup Description Is a foo Backup User root Date 2005 08 02 08 42 32 The default mount point of the storage manager is searched Three backups are known to the storage manager Most important information are the backup IDs as they are the unique identifiers to be used in the restore import commands but also backup names and descri
242. art the backup of the selected components Note If Oc PRISMAproduction Server Configuration is selected as a component you will be asked to check if an configuration backup is already existant You have to confirm this dialog with OK Under User Home Directories you can only select users which are Oc PRISMApro duction Server users and at the same time have a Linux account When you start a backup a message informs you that Oc PRISMAproduction Server is shut down You have to confirm the message to proceed Prepare Backup Eo ks If you proceed PRISMAproduction will be stopped Proceed Yes No During backup a progress bar is displayed Depending on the amout of resources to be saved this process might take a while Progress SD fan Progress Current action step halle ops de LCDS APA Print Resources Action list Prepare Backup BACKUP STARTED 2006 05 11 12 12 32 LCDS_APA PrintResourcesPlugin halle ops de creating 114 If the backup is finished the progress bar turns green You have to close this dialog with OK or you can check the details of the process in this window Restore a Backup Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 601 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Installation and Workflows To restore a backup you have to perform the following steps m Select the Backup path You don t have to indicate mountdir in this case a Under
243. ase Instead of a lt new PCL sequence gt lt new value gt the replacement can be a string starting with X and containing text or hexadecimal bytes each starting with x and having exactly 2 hex digits for example x1B up to 255 bytes This string may NOT be used as a search string on the left side of an operation character For example to replace job separation lt esc gt 8 amp l1T with the complex UP3i command for a UP3i stacker n amp IT n 1 W X x1B u15 W xoo xo1 xoo xoD xo3 xoo xo8 xoo xo1 xFF xoo xoo xoo xoo xoo 244 Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation PCL Module Print Parameters PCL Module Print Parameters LI Logical Interface Section Parameter De fault Value DUMMYDEV o0 TRACEFILE u prismapro di ag printers lt Print ername gt trc Description Enable or disable the internal printer simulator o Printer simulator disabled 1 Printer simulator enabled Filename of the trace file The name must be unique for each configured printer Printer name is the logical name of the printer TRACE FLAGS 0x012F TRACELEVEL 0 Flags to turn on tracing of categories individually Errors are always logged regardless of this setting oxoo01 network 0x0002 printer oxo004 page description language 0x0008 spool 0x00 10 parsing of readback 0x0020 job parameters 0x0040 verbose printer messages 0xo100 dump printer data stream to file Tracelevel o errors only 1 warnings
244. ata against FCB 1 do not check End Device End If Online Configuration Parameters ChanAddress An address between 0 and 255 decimal in Hex 0x00 to 0xFF The Host will address the PRISMAproduction server with this value ChanCondCode Corresponds with ChanTimeoutAction ONLINE channel will not be closed host receives the message Not Ready OFFLINE Channel is closed CC 3 on the host system ChanStartTime Zero run infinite ChanTimeout Zero no time out after stopping to receive data ChanChkPos Defines the byte position for the length byte and enables 370 data checking if set to a value gt Default o Chapter 7 Configuration 403 LCDS Parameter Configuration Online Configuration 404 ChanAddress ChanBufSize ChanTimeoutAc tion ChanDEDelay An address between 0 and 255 decimal in Hex 0x00 to 0xFF The Host will address the PRISMAproduction server with this value Specifies the channel buffer length This can be used to slow down I Filter in connection with Online_Channel_device_delay see ChanDEDelay The delay is executed after a buffer of the specified size Smaller buffer mean more frequent delays Value in bytes Default 3 2000 Defines what happens after ChanTimeout SEND_REND Always sent end record close report CLOSE_CHAN Default Always close channel DIALOG Default if parameter not present Opens a dialog box m Finish current repo
245. ate Partition or System to Update system Partition Architecture File System Label SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 dev sda2 i386 Linux native reiser R Note If there are mount points specified in the etc fstab file which are NOT accessible for example a removable storage device an error message window occurs Please ensure that there is no problem with the server and the missing storage device is not necessary If there is no problem please press button continue to con tinue with the update If there is ANY problem here choose cancel cancel the whole update process and fix the problem within etc fstab file first and then restart the update Chapter 1 Installation Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Step Action Now all partitions are mounted and the installed software packages are examined After that all Installation Settings are shown If there is any conflict or not matching issue there will be a warning message in RED color Please check for any error issues to solve and restart the update process again from the very beginning Installation Settings Click any headline to make changes or use the Change menu below System a System FUJITSU SIEMENS PRIMERGY TX300 S4 GS01 e Processor Intel R Xeon R CPU X5460 3 16GHz Main Memory 4 GB Installation Media SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Update Options
246. ation Note li Beware of the hard disk space when data traces are written Data traces generally are very large and generate a large number of files When traces are written the following files can be found in the u prismapro diag down load directory lt JobId gt _pjm_cmd out The command used to call the job submission script All_ISS_ The protocol of the Input Status View command exchange All_PJM_ The protocol of the PJM socket commands Download_Data Socket data trace file Trace_ dnld_ lt jobid gt _ The data file s belonging to the job dnid_ lt jobid gt _ lt port The job specific Oce custom ticket to control the print job no gt oct download err down The Download daemon error and log files load log Dependent of the trace flags set not all of these files is created Trace Level and Flags details This chapter is only useful for users who want to know more details In most cases the options described in the previous chapter will be sufficient Download has a trace level and trace flags which control the behavior on how the trace file is written Using theses levels and flags it is possible to control the amount of data and when the data is written The flags are used bit wise which means each trace flag mode can be set separately Normally the TraceLevel should be set to 3 or 4 to get enough trace details this will produce large traces Chapter 7 Configuration
247. ation 389 LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters I Filter Section FrmShadeColor Specifies how colored shadings will be converted referring to the color m MIXED Bicolored shading is converted to black or color depending on color saturation For example if there are more color pixels than black pixels the whole shading will be completely in highlight color CustomTone m ALL BLACK All toned pixels no matter if they are colored or black are converted to black pixels m ALL COLOR All toned pixels no matter if they are colored or black are converted to colored pixels RASTER ICT Bicolor shading is converted into two layers black and HC CustomT one FrmShadeModify Specifies special processing for shading m o no modification of shades Default 1 close gaps between m2 boxes with the same shade to avoid thin white lines FrmShadePosition Specifies the positioning shading m o like FRM Default E 1 absolute from o o and adjust shade box borders 390 Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters I Filter Section FrmShadeType Specifies the type of shading applied m o Xerox like shades coarse shades Shades are taken from FORMS FNT Default 1 Special shades fine shades designed by OPS 6 Ink color shades RASTERICT For bi color shadings INK FONT Shading representing ink catalogs will be used as fonts in the MCF s
248. ation dialog appropriate to the attached UP3I device You may do here some device specific settings Generally in a DPconnect environment there are two sources for Up I postprocessing requests a Input job ticket m Job ticket template The available DPconnect translation rules for all printer postprocessing requests are the same a Translate Statement directly a Substitute Statement with an other Action Apply to all Jobs Apply to Jobs requiring lt certain postprocessing gt only m Ignore Statement Because there are interdependencies between translation rules for different postprocessing requests the determination of the resulting printer postprocessing is based on the rules shown in the following table Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries Resulting Printer Condition Postprocessing No postprocessing For each postprocessing request the following is valid a Translation mode is Ignore Statement OR Translation mode is Translate Statement directly AND The corresponding postprocessing request is NOT present in the input ticket OR Translation mode is Substitute Statement with an other Action AND Apply to Jobs requiring lt certain postprocessing gt only is AND The corresponding postprocessing request is NOT present in the input ticket Only postprocess Rule no 1 does not apply AND for at least one postprocessing ing taken out of
249. ation files for the Adobepss PostScript driver and the product specific PPD PostScript Printer Definition files This driver and these PPDs should be used exclusively for creating PostScript and PDF files This is the only way to guarantee that only those function calls are generated which can be processed by the Unity Software 94 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity Troubleshooting Unity Troubleshooting If the conversion job is not completed properly you must find out the reason why and correct the problem To identify problems you will need to know a little more about how the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master and the Unity work together The ODS master sends the file to be converted plus the job ticket to the Unity The Unity reports the status of the job back to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master at regular intervals for example it might notify the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master that the job is in progress When the conversion is completed without any errors it sends back the converted file In the event of an error the Unity reports the status completed with errors plus a return code indicating the type of problem The Unity also keeps two files of its own in the installation folder to log the progress of conversions Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 95 Unity Unity Plus Graphic Arts_Plus Unity Unity Plus Graphic Arts_Plus Introduction Multilevel Gra
250. ation for lt SMIN gt minutes for a single appearance With additional param eter m lt MAX gt it is possible to allow multiple times to shift for lt SMIN gt minutes but only for lt MAX gt times Parameter s will allow the user to start the backup manually The pop up displayed will remain and wait FOREVER and it is NOT possible to CANCEL the operation This is intended for use to allow only a manual start of the backup The parameter set sc will also create a popup window FOREVER but will allow to cancel the operation completely The parameter sct lt MIN gt will add a timeout to the operation If the backup is NOT started MANUALLY within lt MIN gt time the backup will be canceled AUTOMATI CALLY It is also possible to create an extra delay with parameter w which will allow users to shift the operation for lt SMIN gt minutes for a single appearance With additional parameter m lt MAX gt it is possible to allow multiple times to shift for lt SMIN gt minutes but only for lt MAX gt times A set of examples for possible combinations is located in the file etc edge start which can be used by just removing the comment character Note Li It is ONLY possible to use a single combination so MAKE SURE to have ONLY a single command active at a time Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 595 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Tasks and Components Oce PRISMAproduction Server Backup Additional Software
251. ation of SUSE Linux Overview Installation of SUSE Linux Overview Introduction The following chapters describe the installation of the operation system SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 which is the basis for Oc PRISMAproduction Server Server V4 0 Installation Chapters a Installation of SUSE Linux Preliminary Notes on page 13 m Create Server Configuration Media on page 15 a Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 on page 18 a Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 on page 23 a Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 on page 32 a Security and Services on page 39 12 Chapter 1 Installation Installation of SUSE Linux Preliminary Notes Installation of SUSE Linux Preliminary Notes Introduction This chapter describes the prerequisites for the installation of the Linux operating system Attention A BEFORE installation of Oc PRISMAproduction Server V 4 0 or higher it is definitely required to reinstall the print server operating System with SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Unattended Installation Otherwise the Oc PRISMAproduction Server software cannot be installed Installation Package for Linux The installation package for LINUX contains the official DVD from Novell SUSE and a Server Configuration CD which contains the configuration floppies or files for all recommended Fujitsu Siemens Servers see Create Server Configuration Media on
252. ays for the same password Minimum number of days for the same password iS Expiration date liz Password Complexity Min length of password K Min number of numeric characters S Min number of special characters H Ready Password Aging Some parameters depend on each other To avoid contradictive values the values are adjusted automatically Selection Box Days before pass word expiration to issue warning Days after pass word expires with usable login Maximum num ber of days for the same password 296 Chapter 7 Configuration Description The user will get a warning a certain number of days before the password expires Select the number of days The user can decide whether he wants to change the password immediately or firstly continues to work Default is a blank no warning will be displayed Select the number of days during which the user has still the possibility to log on In this period of time the user also has to create a new password to be admitted to the system Default is a blank no login is possible after the password has expired Maximium number of days for which the password is valid After this period of time the password expires Default is a blank the password never expires System Configuration Password Selection Box Description Minimum number Minimum number of days a password is valid During this pe of days fo
253. backup views area must be loaded again after the refresh has finished As described under Restoring a backup the state of a configuration backup is depending on the current system configuration Therefore the backup selection table needs to be updated whenever the system configuration changes for example a slave is being added to or removed from the system In this case the user is being informed about the refresh which will be performed Backup Selection Table Columns Column Description Indicates by an icon if the configuration backup can be restored on the current system or not successful backup which can be restored backup with problems incompatible backup successful restore 4 restore with problems See Restoring a Backup for more details about the conditions for restoring In case the configuration backup cannot be re stored on the current system a tooltip text will provide the user with possible causes The name is created automatically when you start the backup It consists of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server version and a serial number after the dot Short description of this backup version You create this descrip tion on the start of a new backup Chapter 7 Configuration 333 Backup Restore Window Column Version Created at Created by Last restored at Backup Viewer Tabs
254. batch file script file or as a post process from a data converter data generation program If the Windows Explorer is used to submit the data files to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server the Explorer SendTo menu item can be configured The SendTo directory is located under Documents and Settings lt User name gt on the partition where the windows operating system is installed There is also the directory All Users which is for used for configuration entries for all users If the SendTo directory does not exist you have to create it Create a link to the HotDir WindowsClient in this directory Open the link with the right mouse button and click on Properties On the Shortcut tab the path and name of the HotDirWinClient exe in the Target text field should be extended with the needed options The Start in value should be set to the di rectory where the HotDirWindowsClient program is located Example configuration of the SendTo shortcut a Tab General Oc HotDir Mount DataOnly a Tab Shortcut Keyword Target C Program Files Oce inputmodules exe Hot DirWinClient exe MultiFile Grouped TransType SMB N tmp hdtesto1 a Tab Shortcut Keyword Start in C Program Files Oce inputmodules exe Chapter 7 Configuration HotDirWinClient Features of the HotDirWinClient Program Usage m The data can be transferred using the ftp protocol instead of shared mapped folders This reduces
255. ber specified pages The count of o pages means that there was no page count specified with the job The print queue number of the print job The status of the print job PREPARE Preparing READY Ready to print PRINTING Printing OUTPUTCONTROL Output control FINISHED Finished ERROR Error INTERRUPT Interrupted LOCKED Locked after printing HOLD Locked manually DELETED Deleted Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration General Printer Configuration General Introduction In this window enter the basic settings for the printer selected in the printer table General Tab UI Element Description Data Formart Specification of the data type which is accepted by the printer For the Generic Driver you can select all data formats because no data conversion is performed a AFP Applies to IPDS printers as well as to printers which work with the Postscript Driver and Postscript Driver non oc printers because these drivers convert to AFP PCL Printer works with the PCL emulation AFP PCL PS PDF TIFF LCDS LDT With the Generic Driver no data conversion is performed therefore all possible formats can be printed Speed Printer speed in ppm pages per minute The speed setting is required to check if the printer usage is covered the the class which is available via Oc PRISMApro duction Server 4 0 license The printer speed is also requeste
256. ble is used additional to the normal LP to map the parameters from the LP control file to the OCT a The OutputDataStructure parameter must be changed to change the incoming 2 byte record length fields to for example a 4 byte length field OutputDataStruc ture VAR Special Windows Printer Driver Issues When the data is generated with the windows printer driver it generates OCT parameter into the data file Therefore the parameter ExtractParameters must be set to the value AFPParameters Chapter 7 Configuration LP Behavior in Error Situations LP Behavior in Error Situations Introduction i The behavior of the LP daemon in error situations is situation dependent to make sure that the least interference of the normal workflow is achieved This section explains what happens if a certain situation appears If the configured default ticket can not be found on the hard disk no jobs using this LP printer can be submitted Therefore a user message will be created and the LP printer will be disabled If problems occur during the job submission retries of job submission are done in the following four cases before the next job for this port is submitted when the printer is enabled again or when the LP daemon is restarted Then it is possible for the user to manually modify the system and make sure the job can be submitted Note After 3 days the not submitted data files of the jobs will be removed fro
257. bmission program is u prismapro bin pjm t Ticket oct OCT force id JobId user Username tr TicketRule mirror MirrorServer mp MirrorPolicy mnd Parameter Description force Always accept the job and spool it into the Oc PRISMApro duction Server spooler even when minor errors occur id JobId The Oc PRISMAproduction Server job identifier Don t change this parameter mirror Mir Name or IP Address of the mirror server Must be the same as rorServer specified in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server System config uration dependent on the interconnectivity license Parameter only exists when Input Channel has mirroring configured Chapter 7 Configuration Input Modules Overview Parameter Description mnd Input Modules has mirrored the job data files already The fol lowing PJM call will only exchange the job Ticket and activate the job with the correct status on both servers This Parameter is dependent on the interconnectivity license This Parameter only exists when it is configured for this Input Channel WARNING Don t mirror the job data file with the Input Modules when the job submission script changes the data files This causes problems when the job has to be printed on the mirror server mp MirrorPolicy Defines the error handling when the mirror server is not avail able Parameter is dependent on the interconnectivity license Parameter only exists when
258. butes is required Paper Request Message details Additional Information Media requested by the Printer Color Type Size Weight Order white 210 x 297 0 Holes Media ass gned to Input Trays Type Size Weight Order Holes Plain 297 0 x 420 0 80 0 Plain 210 0 x 297 0 80 0 z Unit of Measure arves gt Next Operator has to assign the correct input tray where the requested input media is loaded Note Mapping table is empty or deleted during installation and restore of backup During restore of a backup the actual paper loading of the printer must not be restored 92 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity Enhanced Functionality Unity Enhanced Functionality Since all relevant information concerning input media and finishing requirements are concealed within the PostScript data stream the Unity has been enhanced to translate PostScript finishing commands into corresponding AFPDS commands The UP3I extension to AFPDS MFC has been chosen to function as a common interface to the adjacent backend modules IPDS ps and xrx backend If this functionality is used the subsequent use of the Professional Document Composer may discard all added information by the Unity In general the Unity generates portrait afpds pages no matter whether the input media selection specifies landsca
259. by the MVS system and passed via router and download input In normal use cases it is recommended to use this function Header Trailer FCB This functionality includes header trailer and FCB s The FCB s must be present in the System like LCDS driver for example using the FCB configu ration The header trailer uses the same LCDS driver templates in u prismapro cfg banner startlend txt LCDS Collect Utility The LCDS collect tool may be called via LCDS gt collect from the main Oc PRISMAproduction Server menu It can be used for resource handling and error handling is supplied It is available for the user service Chapter 7 Configuration 411 LCDS Parameter Configuration Special Functions and User Scripts In case of an error the error should be reproduced and the service department must be provided with the necessary resources and material In order to get the most important material the collect tool may be started and run parallel to a Print Job which has this error It collects parameter files and all resources needed to reproduce the print in the headquarter for analyzing purpose The result is a compressed file u prismapro col lect tgz This file may be sent to the service department For further questions contact the service department as well Choose the Collect tool and start the collection with option c and follow the listed procedure Choose b to begin Start one or mo
260. c PRISMAproduction Server Explorer to import resources into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system and to distribute the resources to other computers in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network f i m if IEO SER 5 SRESOURCES LOCAL x010222 ops 0ce net l ae ex XGA DEVICE x fd roo aeon oza npsocesne File name Type Size Last modified Access OO oni Directory 2 entries 8 20 07 11 37 AM riw HOME a E ies 8 20 07 11 37 AM rj IMPSETS JOBINPUT TICKETS LCDS Ix010222 0ps oce net UNEDATA TABLE 0DDA OUTPUT SPFL PREPRINTS RESOURCES LOCAL Ix010222 ops RESOURCES SHARED RESOURCES SYSTEM 1x010222 ops SHARED TARGET XDATA DEVICE XPDC XxPDC_DEFAULT XRESOURCE Ix010222 0ps oce net The computers of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network appear in the Server Files application in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer RESOURCES lt server name gt You can use the copy and paste function to copy and move resources Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity User Resources and Fonts Fonts Print files may or may not include fonts Courier is used by default if no fonts are provided The following 136 industry compatible Adobe fonts are provided in the Unity AdobeSansMM GENEVA MonaLisa Recut AdobeSerif MM GillSans Bold NewCenturySchlbk Bold AlbertusMT Italic GillSans BoldCondensed NewCentu
261. cccccceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeees 500 HotDirWinClient ccccccccesesseseeceessseesceeeeeeseeeeeacseeeuseeaaseeeeeeeaneeees 504 TP E A oot cotetcsat 508 LP Behavior in Error Situations ccccccccsessccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 525 LP Windows CLi Nt cceccccccceeecceeeceeessececeeeseeeeeeeeaeeseeeseeeeeeeseeesseeees 529 LP Windows TOOIS ccccccccccceeeeeeeeceeessececceeseeeeeeeuasseceeeeceeueseaeseeeees 531 Chapter 8 PIM Command Litne cccccccccesccsssecceeeessesueeeeeageuseeeeaceeuueeeeaageeeeeeeuseeneseeaaas 533 PJM Command Line Mode Ove rview ccccccccsccessseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeees 534 PJM Command Line Parameters ccccccccccsesseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeees 536 Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket ccccsscceceesssseeeeeceuseeeeeeeaceeeeeeeeuaeeeeeeeauseeueeeeuaaeeeeesageeeees 547 Oce CUSTOM TICK EES ives sesisicvcicncdciettaniide casa svabsbselGa doledeasiaddesiscdatianceandedaadeed 548 Chapter 10 WOFKTlO WS wicecescreesaka vasa ceeck eee ei enced acta edee ees sananene vies canto ee didar 567 Workflow Tab Printing cccccccsceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeaeaees 568 Workflow UP l Devices cscssescsssscsesssescssssssessesssesessescesssssesssetseecesseesees 571 Workflow Color Selection ccccccccccccsssseseceeeeecseseceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeseaseeeees 578 Workflow for scaling PDF fileS ccecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeees 581 Workflow
262. ccess rights and other system activities If you select one of the three network file systems when creating an external archive you should mount the PFL archive on the external server as soon as you create the PFL archive which should be connected to the external archive Default Database System PRISMAproduction PostgreSQL With the version 4 0 a PostgreSQL database system is installed In contrast to the default settings the base directory of PostgreSQL is located in u prismapro data postgres base and as port 5 433 is used Thus previous installations of PostgreSQL databases will not be disturbed Database users postgres and pfladmin are created In the configuration files the postgres user will be granted full local access to the database system and the pfladmin user is granted local and external access to a database called PFLEXT Every access action or transaction on this database will be recorded in the file u prismapro diag postgres log The PFLEXT database will be created on installation and initialized with the SQL script u prismapro data postgres share PFLEXT postgres In Oc PRISMAproduction Server an external archive called DEFAULT is always created The PFL archive DEFAULT is connected to the external archive of the same name After a restart a PFL archive DEFAULT exists which contains the documents locally on the master whereas the meta data of these documents are stored in the external archive Chapter 7
263. ce also the case with print jobs for the Xerox DocuTech 135 Thus print data can stored in advance anywhere on an Oc PRISMAproduction Server print server Then you only have to send the job tickets from a local server or from any remote client to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server print server via the LP protocol These job tickets contain links to the stored print data You can print the same data in different ways using different job tickets The print data can be stored on local discs on removable storage devices or on mounted network devices Further more you can control via the job ticket ifthe print data should be deleted after printing or not The following Xerox job ticket commands are used for this function ASCII Jobticket XRXsourceFile lt full qualified Unix file path gt and XRXdeleteSource True False Dir XPIF Jobticket lt xpif operation attributes gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 149 DPconnect Functionality 150 lt document uri syntax uri gt full qualified Unix file path lt document uri gt lt xpif operation attributes gt See also the Xerox documentation on job ticket programming a Receiving Print Jobs via HotDir Job input via HotDir is possible in almost the same way as via LP input Xerox jobt tickets are supported Be aware that all Xerox job submitter programs mentioned above use the LP protocol and therefore they are not suitable to feed an Oc PRISMAproduction Server HotDir S
264. ce file lower performance OX00000100 Buffer data When this flag is set a buffer data trace is written trace oxooo00200 Socket data When this flag is set an application socket data trace trace is written 486 Chapter 7 Configuration Download Behavior in Error Situations Special Flags Name Description oxo0000400 Input Status When set it writes the Input Status protocol trace trace oxooooo800 PJM protocol When set it writes the PJM protocol trace trace oxoooo1000 PJM cmd trace When set it writes for each PJM command a sepa rate file with the used parameters Chapter 7 Configuration 487 HotDir HotDir Introduction The HotDir Input Module makes it possible to submit print files automatically into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server print system Special directories are monitored if there are new data files and checked if these data files are complete transmission is fin ished The data can be transferred via the network using FTP Also mounted directories are supported such as NFS and SMB When the data file is already on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server they can be copied linked or moved to these Hot Di rectories For Microsoft Windows the add on tool HotDirWinClient can be used to submit the job using ftp or a mounted network drive See the HotDirWinClient chapter for more details see HotDir WinClient on page 504 For this tool only li
265. ces have to be loaded Which clustering commands should be im plemented in the stockset configuration You can open these ASCII files by double clicking them in the LCDS and GCI file system which is accessible via the Server Files application in the Explorer Save and Restore Chapter 10 Workflows 587 Workflow LCDS In order to save or restore directories or single files esp whole LCDS catalogs you can use the tarscript command in the following way u prismapro bin tarscript_HD lt dir_name gt lt HD file name gt SAVEIRESTORE Example u prismapro bin tarscript_HD u prismapro data cat DEFAULT tmp examle tar SAVE This HD file can easily be copied ftp etc to other computers or USB DVD media 588 Chapter 10 Workflows Chapter 11 Backup Solutions BackupEDGE Installation and Configuration Microlite BackupEDGE V2 1 BackupEDGE Installation and Configuration Introduction Microlite BackupEDGE is the recommended backup tool within systems running Oc PRISMAproduction Server software BackupEDGE is capable of running scheduled backups as well as a fully featured disaster recovery BackupEDGE was extensively tested and is fully compliant to run on Oc PRISMAproduction Server systems Installation 590 Installation of BackupEDGE Microlite BackupEDGE needs to be installed on every server on which backups should be made All necessary steps to be performed for a full installation are
266. chanism of filtering patches will NOT work any more 6 After the complete finish of the update a reboot of the system is required to take all updates into effect Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 to a Higher Service Pack Level 24 Novell releases Service Pack Versions of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 on a regular schedule These Service Packs contain all bug fixes and corrections found before the release of the corresponding Service Pack Novell also decided to have all Service Pack levels to be seen as different versions of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server This means that patches made for Service Pack version 1 WILL NOT install on Service Pack 2 version and vice versa As for this issue after the release of a new Service Pack all bugfixes will be released for the latest and also the previous version of the Service Pack level But the support of the previous Service Pack level will terminate after some time so that all users of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server will have to update their systems to the latest Service Pack level Chapter 1 Installation Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 In order to simplify installation issues the Service Pack DVD is also the latest version of a full installation DVD to be used for full installation from scratch Note There is NO possibility for an UNDO of this upgrade If there is an absolute need to have the previous version installed it is necessary to fully install the previo
267. chemes m Printer 2 is a cut sheet printer which is driven in 1 up mode The input bins are se lected by media attributes 10 copies are to be printed of every job independent of the copycount set in the input ticket Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 189 DPconnect Configuration Example 190 Printer 3 also is a cut sheet printer It s input bins are selected by bin numbers Docu ments are to be printed in 2 up mode or booklet mode thus different impositioning schemes are required To easily select these print functions from DigiPath you have to do the following It is supposed that printer 1 2 and 3 and the PPP 1 and 2 are installed and configured DPconnect translation tables 1 2 and 3 are set up automatically with practical default values DPconnect translation tables 1 2 and 3 have to be modified to match the require ments of the example In translation table 2 the translation mode for the copy count has to be modified from Translate Statement directly to Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action Thus the copy count 10 in ticket template 3 will be effective Queue Template Action Thus the copy count 10 in ticket template 3 will be effective You have to set up ticket templates 1 2 3 4 and 5 and to modify them according to the requirements of the example Templates 1 2 4 and 5 need a PDC impositioning scheme copy count in template 3 has to be 10 Take care that the correct targe
268. chother a The RAW processing of jobs which contain multiple files of different data types is not allowed because the subsequent processing of such mixed data is not reasonable PostScript Jobs with External Files The RAW processing of PostScript jobs with external files is not allowed because the further transport of all files which belong to the job is not possible with the Oc PRISMAproduction Server backend Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 171 DPconnect Input Job Ticket Translation Tab DPconnect Input Job Ticket Translation Tab Illustration io 9 8 Configuration for Printer YP5000 Job Processing Jobticket Statement Input Job Ticket Translation Barcode Translation Mode Disposition Delete Source Data Plex Mode Document Plex Mode Exception Plex Mode Image Rotation Image Rotation for Document Image Rotation on Exception Pages Image Shift Document Image X Shift Front Side Document Image X Shift Back Side Document Image Y Shift Front Side Document Image Y Shift Back Side Exception X Image Shift Exception Y Image Shift Image Generation Halftone Quality Highlight Color Input Media Document Input Medium Exception Page Input Medium Front Cover Page Input Medium Back Cover Page Input Medium Separator Page Input Medium Slipsheet Input Medium Data has been changed Substitute Statement with an other Action Input Medium Color Whi
269. cify fields in the data filename The field is then used as value for the section and keyword in the OCT which is specified in the HotDir configuration The field termination character can be changed to allow a more flexible usage It is also possible to ignore or skip a certain field When a multi data file job is used with field names and these fields are assigned to global not file specific section and keyword only the first value found is read The other values are ignored When a file specific section and keyword is specified however it is possible to specify different values for each data file of the grouped print job A combination of an OCT and field names is allowed Another possibility to control the print job can be used if AFP data are sent Parameters can be extracted from the first noop of the data file by the HotDir program and put into the OCT When a certain OCT section and keyword value is provided by more than one source the following priority rule is used to define which value is used the highest number wins 1 Default ticket gt 2 Data file parameter extraction gt 3 OCT gt 4 File name param eters Configuration Examples Windows Explorer and HotDir When multiple data files are copied or moved at the same time to a HotDir directory a special handling is needed to print these jobs in the same sequence The cause of the problem is that the explorer doesn t pass the filenames in the same sequence with which the
270. cket of incoming jobs can be defined The definition of this sequence is similar to a program definition like a shell script The sequence of actions form a rule On how to define rules see TicketRules Definition of Rules on page 423 Condition Variable and Value Definition A condition or variable checks the actual value of a ticket parameter at the time it is ex ecuted This can be a value modified before by another action of Ticket Rules execution This behavior is similar to the behavior of a script execution A condition compares the value of a key against a defined value via operators like equal greater contains etc If the condition is true the underlying actions will be performed Instead of a reverse condition also an else can be used A value used in the Ticket Rules can be a constant value or a variable which depends on other values The definition of a variable is done globally and is evaluated at the time the variable is used in a rule Each variable must have a unique name The variables are referred by this name General Workflow 1 Definition of the ticket rules in the Configuration gt TicketRules application see below 2 Configuration of the input modules Here a configured ticket rule can be applied to the jobs which enter the system via an input channel 3 Configuration for mirror jobs a specific ticket rule can be applied in the System Config uration or in the PJM
271. command There is a non UP3I stitch command which may be put into a LP input queue ticket template This stitch command may be used for simple stitch devices which do not un derstand UP3I commands On the logical level in Oc PRISMAproduction Server this command may be combined with any other UP3I postprocessing settings in the ticket template The customer has to decide if doing so fits the requirements of his postprocessing devices This command is invoked in the PJM GUI by clicking the Edit Compose Op tions button A new dialog window named Properties for new files opens Select here the Compose tab then select the Compose file before Chaining radio button uncheck the Store job ticket with linked set check box and then press the right most button to open the Professional Document Composer window Open the Options menu and check the Stitch check box The PDC stitch command becomes effective under the same conditions as all the other UP3I commands in the ticket template are effective That is if the translation rules for one of the postprocessing requests in the input ticket require to take a UPI postprocessing out of the ticket template the PDC stitch command if available in the ticket template will be performed too Using PDC Impositioning Schemes If you have defined a PDC impositioning scheme in the job ticket template that is assigned to that LP input queue which is receiving the print jobs this impositioning scheme
272. configure a printer specific mapping table for the selected printer using the predefined paper names m Media attributes defined in PostScript or DigiPath documents are preserved by the Unity DPconnect Professional Document Composer and preserved incorporated in the AFP data which are spooled in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server spool a During printing the IPDS backend scans the APF data for required media and com pares the required media with the media already loaded on the printer This loading is represented by the mapping table you have created for the printer on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system This table is obviously empty after installation or new definition of a logical printer m Ifthe backend finds the required material in this mapping table the respective tray number is invoked via IPDS m Ifthe required paper is not found in the mapping table the required attributes are displayed in a message window see below the operator loads the paper in one of the input bins of the printer and defines documents this in this message window This is done by simply choosing the input bin for the required paper No retyping of the at tributes is necessary Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 91 Workflow Extended AIMS Concept Date Time Message Id job id User iost Module Sep 18 2008 17002077 2 46 46 PM 00000389 lt autostart gt wolga ops oce net 600dummy Description A list of input bins with attri
273. ct one of the following formats HTML Format for Web Browser CSV file for Spreadsheet Plain text Additionally you can select the language in which the messages should be saved Message infos to Here you can decide which parts of a message should be saved save check or uncheck the boxes The small tool bar on the right allows you to select all items with one click and to deselect them again Additionally you can invert your selection Chapter 7 Configuration 307 Message System Automatic Saving 308 UI Element Create a new ex port file Chapter 7 Configuration Description In saving directory Insert the path to the directory where the messages should be stored When at least X messages are written The maximum number of messages after which a new file is written normally 10000 or 20000 When at least X minutes are gone Additionally you can set a time value after which a new message file is written And always after the day change This is a default setting which cannot be changed Message System Automatic Answers Message System Automatic Answers Introduction Here you can collect messages with questions in a list which should be answered auto matically by the system If you click the button either if the list is empty the first valid message number will be entered in the list or if there are entries in the list the marked entry
274. cuted a possibly already existing property file is renamed to lt property file gt bak so that it s not overwritten by the new one Note The functionality of this command is implicitly called by the Prepare command which sets up the environment for a system backup CreateSystemInfo No parameters for the content of the file see chapter Properties Files below Basic Configuration Files 618 The Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup framework is highly configurable both in its behavior and in the components involved It is implemented in Java all components which can be referenced by the configuration files must also be implemented in Java config xml In this configuration file the basic file paths and the storage managers are defined In detail these are m The name and path of the history file Default u prismapro cfg prismabackup history xml m The name and path of the plug ins configuration file Default ust local prismabackup cfg plugins xml a Type and basic parameters of the storage manager s Note In the current version of Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup one type of storage manager is supported the MasterMountTar storage manager This storage manager tars data via the tar command and stores the data in a mounted network drive on the Master server plugins xml In this configuration file all plug ins are listed and for each plug in the reference to the technical implementation m Name of the clas
275. d Following characters are only allowed Description iy alphanumeric character _ and between section and key a dot is requ he name is test test_test Used in rule s Cancel Chapter 7 Configuration 429 TicketRules Variables TicketRules Variables Introduction If you click on the Variables tab a list with all variables which have been defined before is displayed Use the icons in the main tool bar to add copy modify and delete variables If the variables are designed to alter existing values in job tickets the Alteration Type can be configured in detail in the lower half of this window Note li All variables which you define here are globally known over all ticket rules and must therefore have a unique name 430 Chapter 7 Configuration TicketRules Variables Illustration Parameter Alteration Type Used in Rules job Job_name Replacement Show_rule job Copies Calculation job Job_name No 2006 00679 job Job_name No job_name Show_rule job Print_Form No another_var Show_rule job Copies Calculation Test_Rule This variable is altered by A numerical value can be altered by a calculati his operation requires an operator which car rh Or he selected operator is following calculation definition Calculation mae Allow change of type E This function can be applied to int
276. d Monitor to setup required configuration Please see the SuSE Admin Guide for further details Chapter 1 Installation 37 Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Adding Computers to an Oc PRISMAproduction Server Cluster After a successful installation of the system you can add other servers to build up a cluster To do this use the Master Slave application in the Configuration menu of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer Before adding a server you have to check the following m The IP address of the first network card is the address which is used by Oc PRISMAproduction Server check this with etc sysconfig network ifcfg eth id lt mac address gt This address must be accessible in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network m Job acceptation and job processing must be switched off m The etc hosts file of all servers Master and Slaves must contain all servers of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network Please take care for the correct syntax Example 160 120 20 111 charly ops de charly Note Li With SuSE Linux the Printer Spooler System CUPS is installed as a system requirement The complete system is unconfigured and the service is disabled by default Configuring or using the CUPS Printing software WILL DAMAGE AN INSTALLED Oc PRISMAproduction Server installation which may remain unusable Therefore it is strictly FORBIDDEN to configure or use CUPS 38 Chapter 1 I
277. d The window contains control buttons for deleting or renaming selected files The listed documents are referenced by their names job tickets If the list contains several documents with the same name each of the identical names is numbered Exported documents The right section of the control panel also consists of a standard file selection box and additional control elements This file selection box displays the following elements retrieved from the external medium A folder list that displays all archives on the external medium only 1 tape device A folder list that displays all documents in the selected archive A filter determining which documents are displayed Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Print File Manager PFM If your external medium is a host you can organize the exported documents in folders folder is a cpio tar archive Use the create symbol to create a new folder If your external medium is a host you can create new folders using the Create symbol Double click a folder to display a list of the documents it contains Note If you have documents which are exported to a tape you should stick a real label on the recorded tape so that you can identify the medium whenever you wish to import files You select documents you want to import to a PFL from the list When you select docu ments the system will check whether a link for this document exists in the PFL If not the selection will be reject
278. d from the printer directly and this value overwrites automatically the speed which was specified manually The Dummy and TrueProof printers are not checked for the speed license Additionally you can select if the speed setting should be valid for A4 pages per minute or for Letter pages per minute Resolution Resolution of the printer m 240 dpi m 300 dpi m 600 dpi a MRM Multiple Resolution Mode Toner Stations Count of installed toner stations in the logical printer e g Twin 2 stations Triplex 3 The symbol of selected printer model is displayed only for in formation The same image is used in the Printer Pool win dow Chapter 7 Configuration 349 Printer Configuration General UI Element Description SNMP Connec Optional hostname or IP address of printer s snmp manage tion ment or printer panels Connection UI Element Type Description The connection type depends on the printer driver selected For the different connection types see Printer Configuration Add a new Printer on page 342 Scan connected Printers 4 This button is enabled only for SCSI and 370 connections It opens an application which scans the system and displays all found SCSI and 370 devices on the appropriate server If at least one device is found you can select Set 1st to automatically take over its connection settings into the next selection fields
279. d by the currebt Oc PRISMAproduction Server system DPconnect provides automatic procedures to solve both types of problems see Job Processing Tab Job problems can be discovered either during the DPconnect start step or during the DPconnect service step In both cases the job is interrupted In the job list the job is marked with lt Icon gt Double click on it to read the associated message for details on the problem If the job has been interrupted by the DPconnect start step you can continue it with the rerspective button in the message box If the job has been interrupted by the DPconnect service step you must click the Continue button in the tool bar In the message boxes you are asked to confirm the solution for the problem which DP connect proposes automatically This avoids unexspected results in the output The original job messages are issued together with the DPconnect problem messages If the job is processed to the end the DPconnect messages are deleted and only the original job messages remain in the message window Setting of Printer Input and Output Trays The effective setting of the printer input trays and output trays depends on the settings in the PJM GUI Job Attributes Print Input Tray Output Tray and the settings in a potential PDC impositioning scheme m Setting of Printer Input and Output Trays The effective setting of the printer input trays and output trays depends on t
280. d job so that this job is printable on the mirror server For example you can select another printer for the printout of the mirrored job Configuration gt User Permissions m On the original server Allow to mirror jobs PJM Default service and admin yes applic and operator no Allow to pass control of mirrored jobs to mirror Default service and admin yes applic and operator no 630 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Mirror Print Jobs Workflow see Transfer Job Control in Mirror Print Jobs Prerequisites and Functionality on page 627 a On the mirror server Allow to delete mirrored jobs If the user has this permission the mirrored jobs can be deleted manually Otherwise the deletion is performed automatically time delay can be set in the System Configu ration of the mirror server gt Hold Finished Jobs h Default service and admin yes applic and operator no PJM gt Menu Job gt Transfer Mode To invoke the mirroring of jobs in the PJM window you have to open the Transfer Mode dialog in the PJM Here you can select the configured mirror server the mirror policy and the ticket rule which is only performed on the ticket to be mirrored Print data will be copied to the Server Create links to the print files if possible Copies files if they are not on the ODS master Do not change the files until the job is finished Mirror Jobs during Submission Mirror Server s
281. d to a setpagedevice command using the default pagesize as PageSize and MediaType as tray identifier Example for changing to the second input tray The old command statusdict begin 2 setpapertray end is replaced by lt lt PageSize 595 841 MediaType tray2 gt gt setpagedevice Here up to 9 trays are supported To use this feature you have to select Use medias from document on the Media tab in the PJM File Properties window for POD files The effective tray assignment can still be changed later on when the job is to be printed See also Workflow Extended AIMS Concept on page 91 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 83 Unity Color Separation Unity Color Separation Introduction Basically color spaces are separated due to the way of their usage Conventional printing methods i e Offset mainly use CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Kontrast Black CMY and La b RGB Red Green Blue color space is most suitable for display with electronic devices i e TV Computer displays beamers Note RGB additive dithering R G and B result in white when overlaid CMYK subtrac tive dithering C M Y and K result in black when overprinted Each printing color therefore substrates part of the light reflectance until the paper white disappears Nowadays print data are mainly created digitally This implies a particular problem The data are displayed on the screen for modification u
282. d_P_TUM A4 uncut 21 5x30 5 cm LET_P_SIM LET_P_DUP LET_P_TUM LETTER LED_P_SIM LED_P_DUP LED_P_TUM LEDGER LEG_P_SIM LEG_P_DUP LEG_P_TUM LEGAL Hit return to continue E Special help for command line mode part 1 here converting PCL to 6oodpi AFPDS To view the special options press the Enter Carriage Return key Special help for command line mode part 2 here converting PCL to 6oodpi AFPDS Press Enter again to view the settings for the variable paper formats Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 121 PCL Converter Operation 122 Print edge to edge OCE compatible Missing resource s error message exit Missing resource s warning message continue Only E or W possible Red is highlight color Green is highlight color Blue is highlight color Red green blue is highlight color Cyan is highlight color Magenta is highlight color Yellow is highlight color Cyan magenta yellow is highlight color zmo z a Z lt zODanwD x Only one of the highlight color flags possible To select more than one add them together i e RGBH All other switches are ignored Hit return to continue E Special help for command line mode part 3 here converting PCL to 6oodpi AFPDS The next window shows the special options for the variable paper formats VARIABLE PAPERFORMAT pc lab input_file I M Measure in inch cm paper size x direction Example 21 0 or 21 paper size y direction Examp
283. de a new complete barcode statement has to be put into the used LP input queue ticket template The barcode settings can be found in the PJM user interface in the Composer window under Marks gt Barcode All barcode pa rameters have to be specified here for example position height width etc DPconnect will recognize this barcode statement and then it will replace the barcode string which functions here as a place holder with that string obtained from the source selected with the barcode controls So DPconnect has to distinguish between normal barcode statements which have to be processed as they are and this special DPconnect place holder barcode statement for which the barcode string has to be modified In order to let DPconnect recognize this special DPconnect barcode statement it has to meet some requirements Description Required Val Barcode type mandatory Number of 11 place holder will be replaced by DPconnect with fields actual data place holder will be replaced by DPconnect with actual data Field range Data type constant string mandatory Content DPCON place holder will be replaced by DPconnect with NECT actual data Note Remember that if any of the above requirements is absent this barcode statement will become a normal barcode statement and will be printed in every case with the place holder string if present regardless of the settings of t
284. delete the given resource s STDERR Message describing why the resource s has have not been deleted Quiet mode 1 gt lt resource name gt 2 gt lt resource name gt lt server error Message gt lt Job Status gt is composed of more detailed information in the following format lt Main Status gt lt Detailed Status gt lt Additional Status gt Chapter 8 PJM Command Line 545 PJM Command Line Parameters lt Main Status gt and lt Detailed Status gt are defined explicitly whereas lt Additional Status gt is optional and not definitely defined lt Detailed Status gt must not be used for a logical decision Main Status Detailed Status Meaning processing The job is busy no operator intervention required information only transfer files are being transferred work a job step is active converting printing the print data is being printed prepintr the print has been interrupted but the printer is still printing for example copies wait The job waits for a resource or an event no operator interven tion required Job continues when event occurs or resource be comes available outputctrl job has been printed but there are still pages in output tray print wait until a printer becomes ready to print job event wait for an external event to occur service wait for a service to become available time wait for starting time to occur exception The job is in an e
285. dian Chapter 7 Configuration 1 Filter Device Section LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters I Filter Traces Section ChanAddress ChanAd dress1 2 3 4 Defines the channel address under which the printer emulator is addressed by the host Online Channel address in oxFF Hex Format Default ox3E Defines the channel address for the channel1 selection in PJM LCDS XDATA_DEVICE Analogously ChanAddress2 to ChanAddress4 address channel2 to channel4 for parameterisa tion of up to five different input channels for possible parallel input DeviceName Online channel device Default dev i370 chano cua ChanStartTime ChanTimeout Defines the time in seconds after which the input filter stops waiting for the first data block in a session Online Channel start time must be gt 20 Default 300 Defines the time in seconds after which the input filter stops waiting for data from the channel after the last data arrived Online Channel time out must be gt 20 o No time out Default 60 ChanChkPos ChanBufSize Defines the byte position for the length byte and enables 370 data checking if set to a value gt Default o Specifies the channel buffer length This can be used to slow down I Filter in connection with Online_Channel_device_de lay The delay is executed after a buffer of the specified size Smaller buffer mean more frequent delays Value i
286. ding order Descending Use this setting if a tabulator media set is to be used which is sorted in a descending order Default Ascending Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 161 DPconnect Job Processing Tab Description Ask at Job Prob Checked lems The job will be halted and the operator may watch the job in consistencies in a message dialog started from the job view Possible job problems are m Collisions between cover pages and separator pages m Collisions between cover pages and chapter starts m Job requires tabulator media to be printed in duplex or tumble mode m Job requires a media weight below 40 g qm or over 200 g qm m Job requires a specific printer postprocessing device connect ed to a specific printer output tray but the device is not connected to that output tray m Job requires a specific printer postprocessing device but the device is not connected to the target printer m Several different print media which are ordered in a different way are requested a The PDC impositioning schema contains contradictive media requests for the whole document and or for parts of the document A job ticket command was found which is not supported A print job requests being processed over an LP Input Queue which does not exist The operator now is asked for the way he wants to proceed There are two choices m Press Start in order to let DPconnect eliminate the problems and continue t
287. documented in the official manual located on the Microlite BackupEDGE CD which should be read before installation as some default parameters have to be set up during installation but it is possible to redefine all configuration after installation Update BackupEDGE If you have already an older installation of BackupEDGE use the update mechanism of the installer Deleting BackupEDGE causes a complete lost of all preconfigurations and also the connection to Oc PRISMAproduction Server If this happened remove the Li cense PPS_BackupEDGE in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server License Manager save Licenses and add the License again BackupEDGE License Oc Printing Systems GmbH offers a special license agreement with Microlite to the customers of Oc PRISMAproduction Server This means the license for BackupEDGE will be installed and handled by Oc PRISMAproduction Server The license for Back upEDGE can be ordered like any other license for Oc PRISMAproduction Server and will be installed in the same way The required license string is PPS_BackupEDGE V2 0 This license also enables the integration of BackupEDGE with Oc PRISMApro duction Server software automatic start stop Oc PRISMAproduction Server when performing scheduled backups Demo License Chapter 11 Backup Solutions BackupEDGE Installation and Configuration After installing BackupEdge it will work 60 days as an evaluation copy with FULL FUNCTIONALITY For pe
288. e Files are collected according to UNIX conventions Example tiffconv w X A tif wildcard afp The inverted commas must be included in the command p Generates just a page without page description Default print file x arg x offset in dots Default o Note Negative values are not permitted for PCL y arg y offset in dots Default o Note Negative values are not permitted for PCL 134 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation TIFF Converter Operation Control Parameter Description Turns screen output of tags off Default On a m arg i arg Activates the output of the ASCII strings in the TIFF file Default Off Defines the page layout Duplex m d Tumble m t Default Simplex Selects the input tray Tray A i o Tray B i 1 Tray C i 2 Default No input tray 0 arg Selects the output tray Tray B o 1 Sample tray o 2 Default Output tray A u f arg Paper format A4 uncut Default A4 Note Old parameter now replaced by f arg Selects the paper format A4 fo Aguncut f1A3 f 2 A3uncut f 3 B4 f 4 not for PCL Letter f 5 Legal f 6 Ledger f7 A5 f 8 not for PCL 19x24 cm f 9 not for PCL 13 97x21 59 cm f 10 not for PCL X arg Selects the printer data stream AFPDS X A PCL X P Default AFPDS M I A arg B arg Variable p
289. e Leading zeros are NOT needed Example of a sorted se quence 1 2 10 12 100 FileTimeStamp gt The time the file is created is used to define the sequence of the files in the jobs Since the accuracy of this value is in sec onds the file creation must be at least one second apart Better use the TicketRules for this functionality here it will be disabled in the future Defines which field value is as signed to which OCT keyword in the specified section Using the FieldSeparator the filename is divided into fields Each of these fields can be as signed to a keyword in a defined section For using a field to set the default ticket see the Default Ticket parameter description The field separator which is used to divide the data filename into fields See also Field1 Field8 Default is the dot Determines the sequence of the data files in the job Used only for jobs with multiple data files if no data files are specified in the OCT or when a trigger file is used Chapter 7 Configuration HotDir Parameter Start MVS Class Possible values Description First PRISMAproduction queue o lt Number min o max 950 gt Job Submission Parameters Parameter MirrorPolicy Possible values Mandatory gt A job is not accepted on this server when it can not mirror the job Optional gt A job will always be accepted in dependent of the mirror job sta tus MirrorServe
290. e Formdef value use Formdef value use System Default output bin overlay back side overlay front side page definition Download Port programmer text PRMODE userinfo PR_Mode SOSI SOSI2 SOSI3 aaaaaa shift out shift in PRTQUEUE job Printer_Name print queue name RESFMT job DPI P240lP300 font resolution ROOM receiver Rec_Room room text SEGMENT SEGMENTID SYSOUT userinfo Segment_Id no segmentation Not transmitted page count to segment data number to indicate the position of the seg ment printer pass through alternative param for Class and Form Chapter 7 Configuration 477 Download MVS JCL PRISMA Parameter Ticket USERID Description infoinfo Host_User MVS Job Creator Note Not used parameters are omitted in the list See the document Print Services Facility MVS MVS Download Guide for a full description of the various parameters i Configuration For a description of the Input Modules configuration window see Input Modules Overview on page 460 Global Download Parameters In the menu bar global Download parameters can be set in a dialog To open this dialog press the items Edit gt Edit global parameters gt Download The following parameters can be set The bold values are the default values Parameter Connection Time out Maximum Client Connections Trace
291. e Level and Flags details This chapter is only for those users who want to know more In most cases the options described in the previous chapter will be enough LP has a trace level and trace flags which control the behavior on how the trace file is written Using theses levels and flags it is possible to control the amount of data and when the data is written The flags are used bit wise which means each trace flag mode can be set separately Normally the TraceLevel should be set to 3 or 4 to get enough trace details this will produce large traces Trace level The trace level can be set from o to 4 Each level higher produces more detailed informa tion and includes all the information of the lower levels Level Level Name Description fo Error messages Only when errors occur Section messages Main section enter exit info Function messages Function enter exit with return code info Info messages Important variables information Detail messages Detailed variables and other information Large Trace File Trace Flags The trace flags are used to control the behavior of the trace file Input Filter The following trace flags are available Special Flags Name Description oxoo000001 Performance Collects special performance information and writes this into the trace file oxoooo0002 Copy I O data Creates a copy of the output files in the diag direc tory oxooo00004 Error only flag
292. e Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket Rule Configura tion first before it can be selected in the list Chapter 7 Configuration 483 Download Behavior in Error Situations Download Behavior in Error Situations Introduction i The behavior of the Download daemon in case of an error depends on the situation to make sure that the least interference of the normal workflow is achieved This section explains what happens if a certain situation occurs The port will be closed in case of an error only if job sequencing is used for a port and a grouped job is send from the mainframe In all other cases the job will be saved inter nally by the Download daemon Internally saved jobs can be re submitted by enabling the port after it has been previously disabled in the Input Status View Also a daemon reset causes these jobs to be re submit ted Note The data files which have not been submitted are removed from the system after 3 days to prevent the hard disk from filling up Generating a trace file 484 The trace file is generated by the Download daemon and shows the function call se quences as well as main values of used variables This file can be used by the development department to solve an error in the Download daemon To create a trace file select menu Edit gt Edit global parameters gt Download in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Input Modules configuration
293. e a unique name Illustration Heth x e ae Rules Parameters Variables Value Tables Name Description Used in Rules Customers_Address Customer table in order to set job classes Show_rule Customer_Accounts Customer table for job priority W ae Ra Bitella Bitella Create Import Tables Click the Add button in the main tool bar to create a new table insert unique name and description Use the icons in the table details window below to build up the value table The icons can also be used to modify existing tables Note It is not possible to delete rows which are used in a rule Chapter 7 Configuration 437 TicketRules Value Tables Click the Import button c4 in the main tool bar to import a value table If the value table with this name already exists the system checks whether the table is used In this case at least the column names used in rules must be present in the value table to be im ported In every case the table will only be imported if it is well defined especially unique names must be used for every row title 438 Chapter 7 Configuration TicketRules Save and Log TicketRules Save and Log Save Backup and Restore If you click the Save button or if the application is closed and the question to save the changes is confirmed with Yes the ticket rules are saved as xml file in the directory u prismapro cfg ticketRules
294. e administration is done via POD APA LCDS OLDS PCL configuration PP internal Oc PRISMAproduction Server internal connection not con figurable Chapter 1 Installation 43 Security and Services 44 Abbreviation Column Status needed Description Service is needed for basic functions and can not be closed not available Must not be used optional Service used for specific Oc PRISMAproduction Server features only usable Can be used if required it must be installed configured and or started Column Default describes the Status after installation OS and PP NI Not installed per unattended installation closed Closed service configured already configured service not configured no configuration is done during installation not started service in inactive started service is running Chapter 1 Installation Oc PRISMAproduction Server Installation Deinstallation Update Oc PRISMAproduction Server Installation Deinstallation Up date Introduction Before installing Oc PRISMAproduction Server the Linux server has to be fully config ured above all Hostname IP address and network The installation of Oc PRISMAproduction Server has to be done with the install prisma script delivered on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server CD Installation changes including Package update and Undo will cause loss of con figuration se
295. e aen ena 625 Prerequisites and Functionality ccsc008 627 Workflow aerians na 629 N Network Configuration Network Configuration 0 32 Network Settings Network Settings ssesseirssesiresriesersssresirsisesvresrss 33 O Oc Document Designer Integration into PRISMAproduction 634 P Paper Configuration Tool Paper Configuration Tool eee 413 Passwords Aging Parameters siiicar 296 Complexity reprenien nean 297 PCL Converter CONCEP sisisssessessistisssastsiosedesatsenessiercrsets 108 Conversion under Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ease apa is biasiddsd oacsessesedeaesesstasssiacdebeaseatanseassesaess 124 Fonts and Bins ccsesssseeeseteeeeeeseteeeeeeeeaeeeees 111 Operaatiota nearr OAE 119 Resource Handling oo eeeeeeeeeeeeees 113 Troubleshooting sa ststiictesssecastaseusieeasvicenicon 126 PCL Module Pritit Parameter siistcssesssicvcisscistarsevtenverisnences 245 PCL Module General Features Native Workflow Index Permissions Rerimissions wera EE EROA 271 Permissions editable Permissions editable ccccscessesseseeseeseees 272 PPML Converter PPML Converter c ccsssccsssccesssecsseeceseees 143 Workflow scccccsccsscoscssssscsovssaccsessesocssvesssancasanes 145 Print File Manager Media Configuration sssssssssssssssesresiesrerrssrsses 298 Print File Manager PFM Print File Manager PFM uc 68 Printer Configuration Add a new Printer c ccccsccscessessessessesseseeese
296. e closed Remote Execution server Rexec 512 usable NI OP Remote execution facilities with authentica tion based on user names and passwords PP Not used Remote Login server Rlogin 513 usable NI OP Remote login facility with authentication based on privileged numbers from trusted hosts PP Not used 42 Chapter 1 Installation Security and Services Service Description Port Control Status Default Remote Shell server Rshell YaST E OP remote execution facilities with authentication based on privileged numbers from trusted hosts PP Print File Manager PFM PP V3 00 only Some specific DocuTech features RPC portmapper YaST needed started OP Convert RPC program numbers into DARPA protocol port numbers Used by networking clients like NFS or NIS Samba Windows File Server smbd 137 138 139 optional not started OP SMB server for network services to SMB 445 clients including MS Windows OS 2 Linux PP Audit NT RIP ServerView RAID Manager Command Line optional Only available if hardware RAID controller is in stalled in the server Telnet Protocol Server OP The DARPA telnet interactive communica tion protocol PP Not used TFTP Service YaST not available weer jii Abbreviations Abbreviation Description Operating System Oc PRISMAproduction Server Client Column Control KDE Service administration via KDE Control Center PP Servic
297. e created with read only access to the database in order to allow accounting analyzing tools to read information from the database Illustration Bolt mh XIZ General 3tabase Permissions Legacy Files Usera Password IP Address IP Mask Authentication Local access eea ial 127 0 0 1 255 255 255 0 Clear password w Permissions Table 320 The table on this tab contains adjustments required in the postgres configuration file u prismapro data postgres database pg_hba conf All entries in this file which are related to the accounting database are always automati cally adjusted with the configuration settings in this table More information is available in the postgres administration documents Note These users get only a read access to the database If a user with the same name is defined for multiple ip adresses the same password is synchronized for that user automatically for all rows Write access to the database is possible only with the command ppacc a Chapter 7 Configuration Accounting Administration Legacy Files Accounting Administration Legacy Files Introduction The Legacy Files tab can be used to manage the old accounting files which are created in the u prismapro account directory on the master server Illustration Blt ch X 2 a General Database Permissions Legacy Files Accounting file lt Date F
298. e font Esc cs F Use this command to identify the font with ID 1 as permanent Esc 1X Use this command to identify the font with ID 1 as primary Esc amp n10W 2Matura_MT The alphanumeric ID command connects the current font ID to the font with the string ID Matura_MT The string name has to be the same as in the FFDOWNLOAD command The alphanumeric ID command has to know how many bytes follow the terminating W in this case 10 The symbol represents the control byte with the decimal value of 01 12th com mand Esc c1D Assignes ID 1 to the font 13th com mand 14th com mand 15th com mand Esc cs5 F Use this command to identify the font with ID 1 as permanent Esc 1X Use this command to identify the font with ID 1 as primary the print data follow This is a Matura Font EscE Printer Reset command 118 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Operation PCL Converter Operation Introduction This chapter explains how to operate the PCL Converter It explains how to control the program and outlines measures for correcting possible problems Customizing for Oc PRISMAproduction Server All necessary customizing is carried out during the installation of the Oc PRISMApro duction Server system Notes on Running Fanfold Printers The page length pagelength parameter on fanfold printers is entered in increments of 1 6 Consider that the page lengt
299. e gt lt newval ue gt 242 Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation PCL Module Syntax of the Native PCL Filter Operation Change the primary symbol set U 10 N o 10U PC 8 to oN ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 Replace Horizontal Cursor Posi pX 300 amp aH 720 01 tioning Input lt esc gt p 300X Output lt esc gt amp a 720 01H from PCL Units to decipoints Examples to delete PCL sequences General syntax lt PCL Sequence gt lt value gt edz Remove PL Example for appending adding a new PCL sequence AFTER this one General Syntax lt PCL Sequence gt lt value gt gt lt new PCL Sequence gt lt newvalue gt Operation Add a Unit of Measure com E gt 8 amp uD 600 mand Note empty value field after the E AFTER every lt esc gt E reset Input lt esc gt E Output lt esc gt E lt esc gt amp u600D Example for inserting a new PCL sequence BEFORE this one General Syntax lt PCL Sequence gt lt value gt lt lt new PCL Sequence gt lt newvalue gt Operation If you want to replace the VEL X 12345 lt E AND strip the PJL PJL it will only work if you use the This insertes before every UEL lt esc gt 12345X insert sequence command lt the lt esc gt E and removes the PJL commands Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation 243 PCL Module Syntax of the Native PCL Filter Special C
300. e manager within the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer to install all licenses from the dongle Login as user root service or admin and select the menu item Configuration gt Licenses in the Explorer window If a new li cense is added the product will be available after logout and relogin You can also import all licenses for all slave computers in the cluster on the master Before you do so you have to configure all slaves on the master Exceptions for separate software CD s including additional license a Third party backup software Microlite BackupEDGE m Oc Document Designer Advanced Oc License Manager Before the licenses of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server modules can be activated the CmStick has to be configured unsing the configuration application Licenses in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer See Licenses on page 313 License or Dongle Update The system detects a dongle update or exchange In case all assigned licenses are fitting to the new dongle context the configuration is automatically updated Otherwise a new configuration must be created by using the menu entry Edit gt Reconfiguration in the License configuration application The CodeMeter software is installed as a part of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server in stallation To update or add new licenses you have to perform the following steps Chapter 1 Installation 49 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Licen
301. e multiple interfaces at once O User Controlled with NetworkManager Network Setup Method Traditional Method with ifup After selecting the Network Setup Method click Next and the Edit to modify the settings of the IP address and hostname in a separate window for the selected network card Gy SOn ops oce net ey Network Card Overview Network Card Configuration Overview Obtain an overview of installed network cards Additionally edit their ARPES configuration i cP Adding a Network Card Press Add to configure a new network card manually Editing or Deleting Choose a network card to change or remove Then press Edit or Delete as desired Fujitsu Siemens 82801DB PRO 100 VM LOM Ethernet Controller not connected Device Name eth id 00 30 05 52 bd 73 Started automatically at boot Add Edit Delete Back Click Next to confirm and finish your modifications The following messages are issued on the screen 52 Chapter 1 Installation Change IP Address Host and Domain Name Test Test own entry in etc hosts e0eeeee Ok Test masters entry in etc hosts es005 Ok Test the local network sissies seisisesisieaiecsie eesleanere ok West free disk PEDESE TAEDE Ok Changes done successfully etc hosts was only changed for the local system Check this file for additional network c
302. e print job properties in order to set the physical destination printer a The destination printer which has been specified before has to be activated earlier so the print job now automatically continues and is printed Oc PRISMAproduction Server does not allow to start a print job without having specified a destination printer So in cases like this where the concrete destination printer becomes known only while processing the job you have to specify the name of a virtual printer which acts as a placeholder The job ticket templates JOBREQUIREMENT TIC and JOBREQUIREMENT TIC shipped with the jobrequirement installation package include such a placeholder printer name This name is SelectPrinter So you have to establish a virtual printer with this name in your Oc PRISMAproduction Server system This printer has no physical repre sentation This printer must not be activated If it is activated the printroom manager has no possibility to reroute the job to another real destination printer because the system would immediately try to print the job on the virtual printer which would fail In order to avoid the possibility of activating this printer by mistake it is recommended to use the printer pool filter mechanism to eliminate this printer from the printer pool view Print Resolution The Oc PRISMAproduction Server printer configuration requires specification of the printer resolution So specifying a destination printer for a pri
303. e selected Before the details of a configuration backup can be shown it backup is necessary to load the configuration backup The loading process takes a little while and cannot be canceled A warning dialog will be displayed when the user tries to cancel the load process During the loading process a progress dialog is displayed indicating the status of the loading process To load a configuration backup you have to select it in the backup selection table and to start the load action in the Edit menu the pop up menu the icon bar or by double clicking on the table selection The backup selection table shows for each configuration backup the information described under Backup selection table columns in the next table When a configuration backup is loaded the lower part of the Backup Restore GUI will show a tabbed pane with the views mentioned above In one of the following tables the several views of a configuration backup will be described in detail Start a new back Starts a new configuration backup After a confirmation dialog up you will be asked to provide a short description of the backup for admin and ser This description cannot be empty vice users only When all necessary information is provided the configuration backup creation process will begin A progress dialog is shown during the backup process indicating the status of the process The configuration backup process cannot be canceled A
304. eate Server Configuration Media Introduction A The Oc specific configuration will be made by a configuration file contained on a 3 5 inch floppy disk both internal or USB floppies or any USB stick The Server Configuration Floppy can be created on any PC running Linux or Windows Attention Installing the server using this configuration floppy will ERASE ALL DATA ON ALL HARD DISKS Available Server Configuration Files The names of the directories on the CD are created by using a prefix and a suffix The prefix is the exact type of the server and the second names the configuration of the hard disks The Server Config Floppy Images are available for the following server hard disk config urations The suffix describes the used hard disk controller m suffix 1xscsi One single SCSI hard disk is required min 36GB m suffix 2xscsi First hard disk for swap and root partition min 18GB Second hard disk for u file system min 18GB m suffix mylexraid Mylex Raidcontroller First logical disk for swap and root partition Second logical disk for u file system m suffix 1xlsiraidraid LsiLogic Raidcontroller First and only logical disk for all swap root and u partition Root partition is 50GB in size m suffix 2xlsiraidraid LsiLogic Raidcontroller First logical disk for swap and root partition Second logical disk for u filesystem m suffix ide Single IDE hard disk configured as Primary Master ist required min 36
305. econ verted with the convert option of the LCDS resource win dow XFilter_TraceLevel Defines the trace level for the XFilter component The next higher level always includes all lower levels Parameter is option al o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information XFilter_TraceLev Defines the trace level for the GCI communication interface el Com Info during the XFilter part of the print application The next higher level always includes all lower levels Parameter is mandatory o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information XFilter_Trace XFilter specific GCI communication interface trace flags De Flags Com Info fault FFooo00000000000 Parameter is mandatory SpoolJob Section SpoolJob_Trace StartSPS specific GCI communication interface trace flags Flags Com Info Default FFo0000000000000 Parameter is mandatory 396 Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters I Filter Traces Section SpoolJob_TraceLev Defines the trace level for the GCI communication interface el ComInfo during the StartSPS part of the print application The next higher level always includes all lower levels Parameter is mandatory o no trace information Defau
306. ected to each other So selecting a specific message type will automatically select the appropriate messageID and vice versa Then you have to type in at least a Short Text and a Long Text to get a valid message You can also use parameters and variables in the message text For example it would be possible to display the job name in the message To do this use the Paste to text field Here you can select a parameter or variable and paste it into the other text fields at the cursor position The different parts of the message text string user defined text and pasted elements are separated by a Description Each Message requires a lol Message Id 82000001 T Long text can be any cornbil parameters variables or co T Enter free text at cursor pog Message T Warnin 1 ge Tyee aming z Enter a reference at cursor Shon Text warning for client Client Name he Paste To Value list and he long text is Long Text The job fob Job_name has been changed The job job Job_name 4 Name warn_exit Optional Text Paste to text jJob Job_name Used in rule s Back Il Finish Cancel The definition of a message is always checked for consistency If there are inconsistencies for example if the message name already exists the font color is red and a tool tip shows the cause If the message is well defined the font color turns in
307. ection On this tab you find a list with all toner colors currently available from Oc as well as the user defined toners which you configure under Configuration gt Consumables see chapter Consumables Configuration in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Administration Settings and Tasks Guide For the selected printer check the boxes of the desired toners under Available for Printer BD ah X Printer Name a Model Printer Driver Printer Type Server Name ub vP5000 VarioPrint_5 160 IPDS Driver Cutsheet Printer 1x010222 ops oce net 4 ys7000_PCL VarioStream_7400 PJL PCL Driver Continuous Feed Printer 1x010222 ops oce net Ehyssooo YarioStream_8550 IPDS Driver Continuous Feed Printer Ix010222 ops oce net 4 ys8000_Twin VarioStream_8750_Twin IPDS Driver Twin Printer 1x010222 ops oce net General Print Parameter Job Queues Cluster Toner Stations Input Devices Output Devices Printer Notification Gray Cur gt TA ma E Auto Insert colors from printer Available for Printer Toner name Color Color names C009 B15 C10 ER 0053002 C009 B25 D10 EE 0053002 C010 B815 C10 N 0CT 43001 C010 825 D10 007 43001 C011 B15 C10 sooceico1 C011 B25 D10 NN soocT61c01 CU01 B15 C10 EE 0055002 U01 B25 D10 ER 0055002 Companygreen EE Companygreen Companyred EE Companyred G001 B15 C10 EE 0CT 4201 G001 B25 D10 007 42601 a a a o a O a a Z a a O R15 C10 conf
308. ed By clicking the down arrow a pop up menu is shown where the changed Input Module types to be re loaded can be selected Filter Services By clicking the main icon the filter will be applied for the cur rently selected Input Module type By clicking the down arrow a pop up menu is shown where the Input Module type to be used as filter can be selected Open PJM with selected Default Ticket amp Open the default ticket with the Print Job Manager Please note the following points when opening a default ticket mw Default tickets must not contain any print file names but file defaults a Default tickets must be stored in the predefined directory JOBINPUT_TICKETS u prismapro cfg jobinput tick et Within this directory you can create one subdirectory m Default tickets which are delivered with the system can be distinguished by the leading in the file name These tickets should not be modified because they will be ignored by a configuration backup restore and will be overwritten if you update the system These files serve as examples which can be modified and saved under a different name without a leading The menu Edit contains an additional entry Edit global parameters If you select this entry a dialog opens which allows you to configure global parameters for each type of input channel Such parameters are for example trace level and flags
309. ed Medium color name Medium type name Medium set size Medium format Medium weight Medium predrilled hole count showUP3IMediaNames yes no Ifa UP3I coded medium name is requested this name will be displayed showAFPMediaNames yes no If an AFP coded medium name is requested this name will be displayed showContainerType yes no Shows the type of page content e g image PDF container showTrays yes no If an output tray is requested AND there is no printer postprocessing request the output tray number will be displayed showPPPRequirements yes no If the following printer postprocessing details are requested they will be displayed Device name Operation name Reference edge Reference corner showHighlightColorRequirements yes no If the print data of a job requires any other than the default color in AFP terms all of these colors will be displayed in a list routing yes no Not implemented showTonerRequirements yes no If a specific toner is requested its corresponding color ID will be displayed showInterposerRequirements yes no If some input media has to be drawn out of an interposer tray this request will be displayed showBarcode yes no If a job prints barcode a list of used barcode types will be displayed showProposal yes no Not implemented showResolution yes no Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Jobrequirement Functional Module A list of any print resolutions required by the print data for
310. ed just as it is rejected if the PFL does not exist in the ODS network As with documents in a PFL documents with identical names have a consecutive number appended to the end of their names to distinguish them You can delete empty folders using the Delete symbol Buttons Button Description 1o Rename a marked document in the archive x Delete selected documents Select Deselect all documents in the archive Export Import gt Pressing the export button right arrow will export the documents selected in the docu ment list to the desired medium Pressing the import button left arrow will import the documents selected in the folder of the external medium into the PFL they were originally exported from The progress of the current task is indicated on the status bar Messages on the status bar log each of the processing sequences This is particularly im portant for tasks that take a long time due to the length of the documents Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 73 Print File Manager PFM Example When creating a list of the contents of a tape the system will first create the table and then read the label information There will be no visible changes on the screen in the period between the output of the list and the evaluation of the label file After an export or import operation the system always updates the document lists the link symbols are appended to or removed from the selected file names
311. ed and can be modified immediately To copy a user m select from the menu User gt Copy or m select Copy from the context menu or m click on the toolbar icon a For an explanation of the other toolbar icons see the following reference General Usage of the Configuration Applications on page 256 Delete User i 268 Note Ifa user with Authorization Auto is deleted the home directory for this user on the linux server u ppuser lt user gt is NOT deleted Chapter 7 Configuration User Management User Info User Management User Info Introduction Here the data for the user who is currently logged in are displayed Illustration Login Username First Name Last Name Settings Password Language Country Prefs Default Contact Phone Email Person Job Title Company Address 1 Address 2 P O Box Zip Country User Info Window The information in this window can also be viewed by users who have no permissions for the user management If the user who is logged in is an LDAP user this window displays the data which is managed by LDAP as long as the data can be assigned to Oc PRISMAproduction Server fields see User Management LDAP Support on page 262 Every user can make or modify the settings fo
312. ed and cannot be chosen The filename under which the resources are stored can be chosen at will 03 Selects the font with the given string ID fonts as secondary i Note There is no resource management If a resource file already exists it will be overwritten The resposibility for managing resources is only to the user Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 113 PCL Converter Saving Resources on Hard Disk Example 1 00000000 Esc 12345X Universal Exit Language 00000009 PJL SET RESOLU TION 600 00000032 LF Line Feed 00000033 PJL DEFAULT DISKLOCK OFF 00000058 LF Line Feed 00000059 PJL FSMKDIR NAME o pcl macros 00000092 LF Line Feed 00000093 PJL FSDOWNLOAD FORMAT BINARY NAME o pdimacos maao es SIZE 16 00000161 LF Line Feed 00000162 Downloaded macro 00000178 Esc 12345X Universal Exit Language 00000187 PJL ENTER LAN GUAGE PCL 00000210 LF Line Feed 00000211 This is the downloaded macro 00000242 Line Feed 00000243 i Carriage Return 00000244 Line Feed 00000245 Macro ID lt 1 gt 000002 50 Esc amp n10W Alphanumeric ID Com mand 00000266 Esc amp f2X Execute Macro 114 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Saving Resources on Hard Disk 00000271 EscE Printer Reset 00000273 Esc 12345X Universal Exit Language Description of the Commands 1st com Esc 12345X
313. ed as intended if they are composed of different pure colors and are separated to one of these m Single color separations cannot be clearly created from documents containing color components in different color spaces This is because for example an RGB Red doesn t exactly match with CMYK Red even if there is no difference on the screen To separate color ranges RGB you have to select the respective function in the POD file properties in the PJM see the description of the POD File Properties gt Select color range RGB Mode in the POD User s Guide Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity Color Separation Collect Separate Colors Compose Separation Method Select color range RGB Mode Media Halftone and Raster elx B Color Printer Colour Red Green Blue Frequ Angle beparati sRGB Unity Turquoise 0 0 255 0 259 0 106 45 Autom Off Orange 209 0 114 0 36 0 106 45 Autom Off Click on Add to create a new RGB color definition with a color range The printer currently supports a maximum of 2 HLC Cancel Color Names A common way to add color to documents is the usage of color names These color mixing systems are provided as color sequences color palettes or color guides Known color guides are e g PANTONE HKS FOCOLTONE TOYO TRUEMATCH and more In addition to the predefined colors many illustration programs offer the possi
314. ed in which data file manipu lation steps are done MirrorPolicy Mandatory gt Defines the job acceptance on A job is not accepted on this this server when the mirror serv server when it can not mirror the er doesn t accept the job To be job able to use this feature the Inter Optional gt connectivity license is needed A job will always be accepted in and the MirrorServer must be dependent of the mirror job sta defined for this port tus MirrorServer Name or IP address of the mir lt IP Address gt ror server Only available when the Interconnectivity license exists and the mirror server is defined in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Sys tem Configuration Chapter 7 Configuration 523 LP 524 Parameter Possible values Description PrgJobSubmis pjm This program or script is used to sion lt Another executable script or submit the job into the Oc binary gt PRISMAproduction Server sys tem See section The job submis sion in Input Modules Overview on page 460 TicketRule as Name of the Ticket rule to use lt String gt when the job is submitted The Ticket Rule must be defined in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket Rule Configura tion first before it can be selected in the list Special IP PrintWay Issues When the job is send using IP PrintWay the following points need to be addressed a The IBM specific OCT conversion ta
315. ed to enhance the result oft the RIP process for every printer individually If you are converting and printing PS or PDF files you can modify the gray curves using the slide buttons on this tab This enables printer specific corrections to be made to the gray values If this parameter is not set grays that are adapted to the Oc printing systems are used instead of the default grays of the UnityRIP It is possible to make corrections to gray values which are read from a file The correction file contains 21 values with one value per line Values can be between o and 100000 The value 100000 corresponds to a PostScript gray of 1 0 i e an intensity of 100 the lightest value The 21 values begin with a substitute for o gray and end with the 21st value for 100 gray Ina file of 21 values the increment between the gray values on each line is 5 When printing digitally these variations in the printer hardware do not have such a big effect However you can use this function to modify documents with problematic brightness and or contrast in the images Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration Gray Curves Illustration General Print Parameter Job Queues Cluster Colors Input Devices Output Devices Printer Notification Gray Curves gray correction for UnityRIP Default v b E 0 10 20 30 _ 40 50 _ 60 70 80 90 100 foo sze 25 22 448 f4z ea 532 e256 raz 12 oss 00 0 Q
316. eeeeeeeeeaaes 370 OD QUCU CS zasa aa a a Stanseechaeecscaanaes a E 375 Job Queues COnfiQuration c ceccceceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 375 SIG Be cers hates E A N E E osessaesex A A E 378 FCB COnTiQUuratlo nyircriecceesecetvstetnndenrteredien eevee arheidlenens 378 LCDS ODS n E disc eridviers E E A A 379 Overview of LCDS Module Processes ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 379 LCDS Parameter Configuration Job Control Files JCF 382 LCDS Parameter Configuration LCDS Jobs Window 385 LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parame DOS sce aaa OEE e ia EER T 387 LCDS Parameter Configuration Online Configuration 403 LCDS Parameter Configuration Special Functions and User SCE S iaaea e e a a e aaa A a aA 405 PA DON Se svsstese se ctecesacwsesddcacessdeucedshbansssigdante didesswececeotcaaueedeaetececssavessdvedwececuenees 413 Paper Configuration TOO ccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeas 413 MMIC KG CIRRUS irana aaia aA aa aaa aAa 416 TicketRules Introduction sssssssessssssnsnessssnnnnersrrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnennnn 416 TicketRules Main Window cccccesesecceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeees 418 TicketRules Definition Of RUICS cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 423 Contents TicketRules Definition of Conditions Settings Messages and Re CUPP EX h AEE A E E T EE E E 425
317. eger values float values or hexadecimal integer values only Otherwise the operation is not executed Example 10 becomes jaa Add Variable Description Name Copies_plus_10 Each Variable has a unique name which has to 6 Following characters are only allowed Parameter job Copies y alphanumeric character and _ he name is Alteration Type Calculation X Used in rule s Click the Add button to create a new variable Ul Element Description Name Enter a unique name because all TicketRules can reference the variable Chapter 7 Configuration 431 TicketRules Variables UIl Element Description Parameter Variables can refer to a parameter or another variable which has been defined before The variables can be used in the ac tions like parameters Here you can select all known job ticket parameters as well as variables which have been defined before Alteration Type The alteration types Calculation Field Replacement and RegEx Replacement can be selected see below If you select No the variable is not altered Alteration Types The alteration types alter the value found in the current ticket for the referred parameter in different ways Calculation 432 If you select alteration type calculation a definition dialog appears in the lower part of
318. eletion period is set to 7 days There is one more log file named administration log This file logs while installing updating and uninstalling DPconnect It is not deleted by dels After DPconnect has been uninstalled the file is moved to tmp administration log Temporary data kept by the k switch is stored in the path u prismapro tmp dpconnect Data stored here also will be deleted with a period of 7 days spj spj show print job may be used to show the page and sheet properties of the resulting AFP file of a print job which is processed successfully and is staying in the spool queue Additionally postprocessing commands and barcode data is shown spj is good for checking whether page impositioning highlight color processing barcode processing and UP3I command settings are correct The output of this program is ASCII text which is written to the stdout device Because the output lines are very long it is recommended to direct the output into a text file and view it with a text editor with horizontal scroll abilities The program invocation is spj n lt job ID gt s c lt column separator character gt e lt empty field character gt v Options Option Description n lt job ID gt Specifies the job ID no leading zeros needed s Puts the job ID into the output c lt column separa Alternative character for empty fields in the output file tor character gt e lt empty files Al
319. elimiter Default RecordConstant specifies record delimiter APA Settings gt Options gt Record delimiter specifies fixed record length RecordLength APA Settings gt Options gt Record length SkipBytes bytes at the beginning of the file to be skipped APA Settings gt Options gt Skip offset will be added to APA Set tings gt Options COMP38MO Compatible 3800 Media Origin off or on o off Default 1 on Additional parameter 1 APA Settings gt Custom Settings Use for POD and LCDS only with Oct Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket 561 Oce Custom Ticket Description of the corre sponding GUI option Parameter General Description __ Description Options and Syntax De fault Additional notes Additional parameter 2 Additional parameter 20 maas CS 562 JDL_Name JDE_Name File_From Printer Typ SC_Table Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket Name of JDL used for start command of this LCDS job Name of JDE used for start command of this LCDS job Tape Cartridge File to be printed from Tape Cartridge input only Default 1 File to Default o All Files Printer type from LCDS JSL DJDE STOCKSET handling point of view Fanfold Fanfold Printer Stockset is ignored SCT SCT Tool is used to define input bin numbers in resulting AFP print file MediaName Medianames Stocknames are used
320. enseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 119 PCL Converter Conversion under Oc PRISMAproduction Server 124 PCL Converter TroubleShOOting c ccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenees 126 IPE CONVGMG Mivcsiniedcdeseisiedesseeteey bantes ehesssttaledeshansssinsesececsetsacetstedaattiebexs 130 TIFF Converter COnCEPt ssssssssssecsneeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseessssseseees 130 TIFF Converter Operation ccccccceccessceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaaaees 132 TIFF Converter TroubDleShOoting ccccccesesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 140 PPML Converte sainan aana aaia aaa a ETNA 143 PPML Converter OV rvieW cccccccccssssessensessneanseeeseeeeeceeeeeeeneeeseeess 143 PPML Converter WorkflOwW cccssscssesssesseecsneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 145 DPCONNGC E mera enaner aa Aa E A aa iaaa a raaa aaia 147 DPconnect FUNCTIONAL ILY cccceeecessseeeessnreneeeeaeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeess 147 DPconnect Configuration and Job Submission ceceeee 153 DPconnect User Interface OVErVieW s ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenees 159 DPconnect Job Processing Tab c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 160 DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab ccceseesseeeeeeeeeeeees 164 DPconnect Input Job Ticket Translation Tab c 0sssseeeee 172 DPconnect Barcode Tab cccccccccsscessseeeessnnsneeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeess 174 DPconnect Hints for using
321. er administra Mail Address tor Serves as sender address in the E mails 286 Chapter 7 Configuration System Configuration eMail Notification Parameter Description Username and If the SMTP server requires an authentication you have to ac Password tivate this option User name of the SMTP server Password for the SMTP server Chapter 7 Configuration 287 System Configuration Mirroring System Configuration Mirroring Introduction For a detailed description of the mirror concept see chapter Backup Solutions gt Mirror Print Jobs Introduction on page 625 In this section you can define the global parameters for mirroring print jobs on another Oc PRISMAproduction Server master server mirror server Some of these settings can be overwritten in the PJM Illustration ODS Parameter System and Job Parameter eMail Notification Mirroring LDAP Parameter Country Preferences Password Mirror Server 10 53 76 32 Username admin Password Mirroring Policy Mandatory Ticketrule CHG_PRT_ON_MIRROR Mirror Parameters Parameter Description Mirror Server Sever name of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master which receives the mirrored print jobs Username User name under which the mirrored job is generated on the mirror server future owner of t
322. er entry in the Toner table The Color column shows a sample view of the toner color Now you can copy the entry with the Copy button i and modify the color name for the toner To define a new toner color click the Add button or select Add New Entry from the context menu A new line is inserted in the table All columns of the toner table see description below are editable for this new entry For the already existing Oc System Toners you can add a user defined color name to the existing Color Name via a dialog box x Color Names a Companygreen New_Color To open this box you have to mark the entry which should be modified an then click the modify button in the tool bar 2 or select Color Names from the context menu Chapter 7 Configuration 323 Consumables Configuration right mouse button or from the File menu The dialog also opens if you double click the column Color Name of the selected entry For Oc System Toners you are not allowed to change the RGB values or the description If you still want to modify the color value you first have to copy the respective entry a Assign Toner Colors to Printer You can use the Toner Station tab in the Printer Configuration to assign Oc Toners and or user defined toners to printers see Printer Configuration Toner Stations on page 366 Toner Table Columns Column Description Toner
323. er job tickets Configuration on the server with the Xerox print job submitter Insert IP address and name of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server which is to receive DigiPath jobs in the file lt Windows installpath gt system32 drivers etc hosts The different kinds of Xerox print job submitters have to be configured in the following way a DigiPath FreeFlow Makeready On the Xerox DigiPath Workstation set up at least one symbolic printer with the following properties Parameter Description Print Server Name of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Server Insert the name only and not the IP address Print Queue One of the LP printer queues previously defined on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Printer type Any printer type is allowed The printer types mentioned in DPconnect Functionality on page 147 are recommended Server type Any server type is allowed Print manager Any print manager is allowed Standard production printing path is recommended Network type TCP IP a Xerox Printer Driver for Windows The installation of Xerox printer drivers on a Windows systems has the following properties 154 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Configuration and Job Submission Parameter Description Name or address Name of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server of the host which provides LPD Name of the One of the LP printer queues which have been configured be prin
324. er left UP3I Staple Corner staple Bottom right Single landscape staple upper right UP3I Staple Corner staple Top right Single portrait sta ple upper right UP3I Staple Edge stitch Left Dual portrait staple left UP3I Staple Edge stitch Top Single portrait sta ple upper left UP3I Staple Edge stitch Bottom Dual landscape sta ple left UP3I Staple Default Default Staple UP3I Stack Deliver Stack Default Deliver Stack UP3I Stack Altern Offset Default Offset Stacker Stack UP3I Stack Default Default Stack UP3I Bind Default Left Binding left UP3I Bind Default Right Binding right UP3I Bind Default Default Binding UP3I Bookletmak Default Default Bookletmaker er AFP corner staple Top left Single portrait sta ple upper left AFP corner staple Bottom left Single landscape staple upper left AFP corner staple Bottom right Single landscape staple upper right AFP corner staple Top right Single portrait sta ple upper right Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Jobrequirement Functional Module Device Name Operation Name Reference Simplified Postpro cessing Name AFP edge stitch Dual portrait staple left AFP edge stitch Bottom Dual landscape sta ple left AFP corner staple Staple All other printer postprocessing requirements are shown with simpleOutput no AFP edge stitch Top Single portrait sta ple upper left Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 107 PCL Converter Concept PCL Con
325. er server who is already able to work with the Linux system after logging in has also the authorization to work with Oc PRISMAproduction Server without an extra login dialog this means the login procedure to Oc PRISMAproduction Server is performed automatically Authorization Auto On the contrary the access to Oc PRISMAproduction Server must not be automatically allowed when logging on to the operating system of the workstation via the network The Oc PRISMAproduction Server system administrator is able to define if the user is allowed to login to Oc PRISMAproduction Server automatically or not when creating Chapter 7 Configuration 259 User Management Overview the user with the option Authorization Auto If the account should only be used in the network the option should be set to External Authorization Auto Auto Login Authorization Auto means that the logon to the operating system automatically implies the logon to Oc PRISMAproduction Server Auto login is generally possible on all computers of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system Master and Slave if the Linux user is registered in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server data base as Oc PRISMAproduction Server user This is the case m with all four default users on Master and Slave servers admin service applic operator m on the Master if the account was created with the option Authorization Auto in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server user adminis
326. er set For the incoming job name lower case characters are converted to upper case all other forbidden characters are substituted by a period 176 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Hints for using Ticket Templates DPconnect Hints for using Ticket Templates For those statements which provide an alternative action this action either is described by a translation table entry or by a ticket template entry So a complete set of alternative actions consists of two parts one from the translation table settings and one from the LP input queue assigned ticket template settings Please pay attention to this m Each printer which is defined in Oc PRISMAproduction Server should be assigned one translation table m Each LP input queue which is defined in Oc PRISMAproduction Server should be assigned one Oc PRISMAproduction Server job ticket template The destination printer for a print job is specified by the printer name entry in the ticktet template of that LP input queue which receives the print job For DPconnect jobs this printer name entry also specifies the translation table to be used with this job And finally this translation table says which entries in the specified ticket template are to be used for alternative action So the best way to handle with DPconnect translation tables and LP input queue ticket templates is the following one Let DPconnect create one translation table for each printer in Oc PR
327. er weight with this Predrilled Hole Count number gt Substitute paper hole count with this Ordered Input Media Set Size number gt Substitute order count with this Medium Name String length 30 gt Substitute medium name with this Ignore Statement gt i No slip sheets are processed Document Image X Shift Front Side Document Image X Shift Back Side Document Image Y Shift Front Side Document Image Y Shift Back Side Translate Statement directly gt Take shift for the document from input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Front Back Page Image Shift in X Y Direction value mm gt Use this shift value Ignore Statement gt No shift is done Binding Translate Statement directly gt iz A UP3I Bind Default command is added to the job only if binding is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 203 DPconnect Appendix 204 Ignore Statement gt LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take binding substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring binding only gt Take binding substitution action from the ticket template Job At
328. ermission group can be deleted or modified Ifa user logs in with a basic user name or belongs to a basic permission group he consequently always works with the same permissions The following users and permission groups are predefined in the system The basic users are configured in such a way that the rights of the user operator are most restricted The users applic and admin have more rights whereas the user service has all permissions Basic Permis Description sion Group Basic User has only permissions to monitor and operate the print process m access to the configuration operator Operator Printer Opera tor components is restricted m cannot access the LINUX operating system Chapter 3 User IDs and Access Rights User IDs and Access Rights Basic User Basic Permis Description sion Group applic Application additional permissions compared Engineer to user operator m extended access to the config uration components System Admin additional permissions compared istrator to user applic m access to almost all Oc PRISMAproduction Server components as well as access to the operating system service Service Service Engi additional permissions compared neer to user admin m access to all Oc PRISMAproduction Server components and diagnostic tools To realize a more flexible user concept the administrator can create additional u
329. erred by a rule is missing in the value table to import the im port action is canceled See TicketRules Value Tables on page 437 Export value table This button is only enabled if the value table tab is selected a The user is asked to define the exact csv format Then a file se lection box opens and the value table is stored in a file with the defined csv format Only value tables that are correctly defined can be exported Color Codes and Activation Modes in the Rule List Only well defined rules with status true and an appropriate activation modus can be applied if requested by the input module or mirror configuration The status of a rule is reflected by different colors in the list Color Description The activation mode is Active and the rule is true Red Implies the status false which means that there is an inconsis tency in the rule definition This can be a condition with no action following below the usage of a not defined variable the reference to a not well defined sub rule etc Light gray The activation mode is Inactive and the rule is true A rule with activation modus Inactive will never be applied and is ignored Choosing this modus will switch off the rule By that way it is possible to define a rule for later use Light pink The activation mode is Inactive and the rule is false Ifa new rule is added the default activation modus is Inactive and the
330. ers who use Oc PRISMAproduction Server only occasionally All user data are managed within Oc PRISMAproduction Server Auto Indicates that an automatic login on the Oc PRISMApro duction Server master is performed for this user All user data are managed within Oc PRISMAproduction Server and within the operation system If you activate the auto login a system user of the same name will be created If you deselect this option the system user will be deleted on the master Ldap The user has an LDAP account The general user data are kept on the LDAP server Additional Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server specific settings have been made for this user in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Otherwise this user won t appear here See User Management LDAP Support on page 262 You can modify this setting also for basic users Here you set the Oc PRISMAproduction Server user language for this specific user The Oc PRISMAproduction Server Sys tem with all its applications is started in this language If the user language is set to System the current Oc PRISMAproduction Server system language will be used as Oc PRISMAproduction Server user language This Oc PRISMAproduction Server system language is set under Con figuration gt System Chapter 7 Configuration 265 User Management User Column name Description Country Prefs You can modify this setting
331. erted to Oc PRISMAproduction Server page segments Multi color logos will be accepted FRM Forms FRM are transferred from input media and converted to Oc PRISMAproduction Server overlays Color substitution lists I lists will be processed in GRAPHIC and LOGO state ments INK inkref1 inkref2 IMG Images IMG are transferred from input media and converted to Oc PRISMAproduction Server page segments Multi color images will be accepted JSL JSL s JSL are transferred from input media and converted to Oc PRISMAproduction Server internal formats They have to be compiled in order to use them for data conversion i Note Other types of resources are ignored Resources can be loaded onto the server from the following media m 9 track tape a IBM Cartridge 3480 3490 m 3 5 disk 1 2 MB format m Hard disk Copy Convert Workflow Before you can start copying you must perform the following steps in the Resources section of the LCDS Resources application 218 Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation LCDS Module LCDS Resources UI Element Description Input device Select an available input medium from a list Tape Hard Disk Cartridge or 3 1 2 Floppy If the device Harddisk is chosen files with extension JSL are checked for the existence of line feed characters in the first 400 bytes If there are such characters the file is assumed
332. erter Concept Operating system SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Processor Intel Pentium recommended gt 2 GHz CPU performance RAM Recommended gt 1 GB RAM for 300 dpi and gt 2 GB RAM for 600 dpi resolution Product components The product package consists of the following components m PCL Converter m Shell scripts for generating the required output formats m Internal Fonts 110 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Fonts and Bin Control PCL Converter Fonts and Bin Control Fonts PCL files may or may not include fonts The system works with internal PCL fonts if none are included in the files The following 53 industry standard compatible fonts are provided in the PCL Converter CG Times LetterGothic It Helvetica Ob CG Times It Albertus Md Helvetica Bd CG Times Bd Albertus Xb Helvetica Bd Ob CG Times Bdlt Clarendon CdBd Helvetica Nr Univers MD Coronet Helvetica Nr Ob Univers MdIt Marigold Helvetica Nr Bd Univers Bd Arial Helvetica Nr Bd Ob Univers Bdlt Arial It NwCentSchlbk Rmn Univers CdMd Arial Bd NwCentSchlbk It Univers CdMdIt Arial Bd It NwCentSchlbk Bd Unviers CdBd Times New NwCentSchlbk Bd It Univers CdBdIt Times New It Palatino Rmn AntiqOlive Times New Bd Palatino It AntiqOlive It Times New Bd It Palatino Bd AntiqOlive Bd Symbol Palatino Bd It CG Omega Wingdings SymbolPS CG Omega It ITCAvantGard BK Times Rmn CG Omega
333. erver 1 Master foomaster ops de 10 53 35 01 lt 4 2 server 2 Slave fooslave ops de 10 53 35 02 4 3 library_l server_1 S SHARED u prismapro data shared N library 2 server_1 XDATA_DEVICE u prismapro cfg 1lcds xdata_dev library _3 server_1 XRESOURCE 1 u prismapro data resimport 1cds library _4 server_1 S TARGET u prismapro data pjm target gt 4 library_5 server_1 OUTPUT u prismapro data pjm output library_6 server_1 UP3I u prismapro cfg pjm up3i 7 library _21 server_2 SRESOURCES 1 u prismapro resources library 22 server_2 RESOURCES LOCAL 1 u prismapro resources local gt s5 library 23 server_2 SRESOURCES SYSTEM 1 u prismapro resources system library_24 server_2 IMPSETS u prismapro data xpdc impsets H 1 Version of current Oc PRISMAproduction Server is 3 04 00 2 The Master servers hostname is foomaster ops de and the IP address is 10 53 35 01 3 The one and only Slave servers hostname is fooslave ops de and the IP address is 10 53 35 02 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 621 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client 4 Logical physical library name mapping on Master 5 Logical physical library name mapping on Slave Format of the Backups of Mount Storage Manager Backups are identified by a unique Backup ID which is generated when the backup is created This ID is the one and only identifier for a backup therefore it is not important in whic
334. esponding Oc PRISMAproduction Server modules will be activated Edit gt Discard Edit gt Reconfig uration Discards license changes and displays the currently stored con figuration of the database Deletes existing license assignment of the database and initializes the database by rereading the licenses from the CmStick Result is that no license is assigned to an Oc PRISMAproduction Server server The Licenses table provides the following columns Column Title State Description ie License is ok License Name Consists of the product and the version Activation Date Expiration Date Displays the date of the activation of the Emergency dongle Displays the expiration date of the licenses no entry means the license has no expiration date Available In Displays the number of free licenses which are not yet assigned stances to servers The count is deminished by the number of instances you assign to the servers It the count is o all instances are as signed the server s Product Code Describes the internal product number Server Name Shows the number of activated licenses for this server For each new server which is added to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster an additional column will be inserted with the server s hostname as title License Information
335. etailed in the description of the PJM user interface Example for an Oc Custom Ticket job Store yes St_Native yes St_Native_Dest Target Message yes Message_Text This is an example job Message_Type dislpay files File u test deckblatt ps Format PS ft_setname u test deckblatt imp files File u test list ps Format PS ft_setname u test twouplist imp ft_extra vdfile COMPOSER kunder var Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket 565 Oce Custom Ticket 566 Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket Chapter 10 Workflows Workflow Tab Printing Workflow Tab Printing Introduction 568 With tab printing you have to specify a tabset You have to select a tabset which corre sponds to the size number and sorting of the tab sheets inserted The name of the tabset describes also its properties a Example 1 A4Tabo3E1n A4 Tabs with 3 Sheets Single Flag 1 n a Example 2 LetTabo7Win Letter Tabs with 7 Sheets Waterfall 1 n Tab printing is supported in two modes Printing without resource file The document contains all information to insert tabs on the correct positions There are two possibilities a Information on the position of the tab pages is available in the document Setting From Print Data m The tab pages are available in the data stream and are identified by their size Setting From Print Data using Size of Tab Pages Printing with resource file setting Explicit
336. eter value must be o Image Width The parameter in the tag is transferred to the Image Data Descriptor 256 0x100 image x extent The parameter value must be on a byte boundary Image Length Provided the image is not divided into strips the parameter in the 257 0x101 tag is transferred to the Image Data Descriptor image y extent ple 258 0x102 Bits per Sam The parameter in the tag must be 1 136 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation TIFF Converter Operation Compression 259 0x103 Depending on the parameter the Image Encoding Parameter field is set to the following value 1 no compression 2 G3 MH compression one dimensional 3 G3 MR compression two dimensional 4 G4 MMR compression two dimensional Photometric The parameter value must be o Interp 262 0x106 Fill Order 266 If the parameter is set to 2 the bits in each byte of the output file ox10a swap positions as follows bit o swaps with 7 bit 1 with 6 bit 2 with 5 bit 3 with 4 Image Descrip The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set tor 270 ox10e Maske 271 The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set ox10f Model 272 The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set ox110 Strip Offsets 273 0x111 Orientation 274 0x112 Both Pointer to Image Data and Pointer to Offsets are supported 8 The parameter value m
337. eues Introduction A printer can print jobs from different job queues All job queues are configured with the Job Queues Configuration tool see Job Queues Configuration on page 375 On this tab the administrator has to specify which of the configured job queues 1 999 should be allowed to be used by the printer In further processing the operator will be able to select only the allowed queues for the printer in the Printer Pool window Illustration General Print Parameter job Queues Cluster Toner Stations Input Devices Output Devices Printer Notifica gt G f E Auto Selection i o m ct Number Description Lock 1 Default class 2 Print in the night 3 Print on monday Y 4 Xerox Queue E R ER Job Queues Tab The list shows all available job queues in the system To allow or forbid the usage of a certain queue for the displayed printer the checkbox in the first column has to be de selected Use the tool bar icons to select or deselect all entries in the list If the check box Auto Selection is activated all entries in the list will be selected auto matically If you click the icon amp a window is opened which allows you to add or to configure job queues The functions in this window are the same as described in Job Queues Configu ration on page 375 364 Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration Cluster
338. evel ComInfo PrintLCDS Parameters 392 I Filter_TraceFlags I Filter_TraceLevel I Filter_Trace Flags Com Info I Filter_TraceLev el Com Info I Filter Traces Section Defines the trace level for the convert component Permitted values are 0 1 2 3 4 The next higher level always includes all lower levels Parameter is optional o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information Convert specific GCI communication interface trace flags Default FFooo00000000000 Parameter is mandatory Defines the trace level for the GCI communication interface during the convert application The next higher level always includes all lower levels Parameter is mandatory o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information see Copy parameters see Copy parameters see Copy parameters see Copy parameters I Filter Action Section these two parameters are only processed if you print from hard disk and if Host gt BARRPC SkipBytes ByteOrder To change the length of introducer change the SkipBytes in the Harddisc part of the PrintLCDS JCF Default o The byte order of RECLEN can be changed here Default Bi gEndian may be LittleEn
339. ever are not overwritten and must be deleted manually when they are not needed anymore Even when the lowest trace level o is used errors are always being written So when an error occurs and the trace level is o this trace file still contains traces so please save this too and send it in with the trace files that are additionally made When the traces are made and the error is reproduced prismadiag can be used to collect the information lt JobId gt _pjm_cmd out The command used to call the job submission script AlLISS_ The protocol of the Input Status View command exchange All_PJM_ The protocol of the PJM socket commands LPD_DataTrace_ Socket data trace file Ipd_ lt jobid gt _ The data file s belonging to the job lpd_ lt jobid gt _ lt port The job specific Oce custom ticket to control the print job no gt oct Ip err lp log The LP daemon error and log files lpc err lpc log The lpc client log files use D option lpq err lpq log The lpq client log files use D option Ipr err lpr log The lpr client log files use D option Iprm err lprm log The lprm client log files use D option Dependent of the trace flags set not all of these files is created Note Beware of the hard disk space when data traces are written Data traces generally are very large and generate a large number of files Chapter 7 Configuration LP Behavior in Error Situations Trac
340. evices Configuration Devices Devices Configuration Introduction The configuration interface provides functions for configuring devices tape drives floppy drives network connections and the like which means making them known to Oc PRISMAproduction Server Once a device has been registered with Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server it is shown in the Directory Viewer Illustration E Yit gh Xei Device Type Format Physical Devices Server Name XFLOPPY_525 FLOPPY LCDS_Resources 5_1 4_floppy 1x010222 o0ps oce net XFLOPPY_35 FLOPPY LCDS_Resources 3_1 2_floppy 1x010222 ops oce net XRES_TAPE TAPE LCDS_Resources tape 1x010222 ops oce net XRES_CARTRIDGE TAPE LCDS_Resources cartridge 1x010222 ops oce net XRES_QIC TAPE LCDS_Resources QIC 1x010222 0ps oce net TAPE TAPE APA Printdata TAPE 1x010222 0ps oce net QIC TAPE APA Printdata QIC 1x010222 0ps oce net CARTRIDGE TAPE APA Printdata CARTRIDGE 1x010222 ops oce net PFL_TAPE PFL_TAPE PFL_CPIO idev sto x010222 ops ace net PFLLHOST PFLLHOST PFL_TAR Ix010222 ops oce net Columns Columns Description Device namen in the system Device type e g TAPE PFL_HOST PFL_TAPE Device Type Format Language module dependent data format resources or print data Physical Devices The physical name of the device as used by the operating sys tem for example dev rsto Server Name The computer to wh
341. ew on page 460 data file Off gt No parameter extraction is done 480 Chapter 7 Configuration Download Parameter Possible values Description TicketParame MVSHeaderOverwrites Defines the ticket parameter terPriority NoopParameter gt source priority MVS Download header parame ters overwrite the AFPParameter in the Noop of the data file s NoopParameter OverwritesMVSHeader gt The AFPparameters from the Noop overwrite the MVS Download header parame ters StartMVS o lt Number min 0 max 950 gt First Oc PRISMAproduction Class Server queue which is used as base to add MVS alphabetical class value to it Job Submission Parameters Parameter Possible values Description JobSequencing No gt Specifies how grouped jobs are Each data file of the grouped job submitted is submitted as a separate job the sequence of these is NOT defined SEQ_ONLY gt Serialized data file receiving Each data file is submitted as a separate job the file job se quence is kept SEQ GROUP gt Each grouped job is submitted as a single job with multiple data files Chapter 7 Configuration 481 Download Parameter Possible values Description Mirror Yes gt Defines the time when the data DataFile Mirror data file s with Down files are mirrored To be able to load while receiving them on use this feature the Interconnec the fly
342. f SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 with Oc Patch DVD The patch DVD contains all available and well tested patches for the Linux operating system SLES10 released by Novell The focus of the tests are the packages installed with an unattended installation and used in an Oc PRISMAproduction Server environment All packages which are released by Novell are contained but not tested Packages causing errors in Oc PRISMAproduction Server will not be available for installation on the DVD It is recommended always to use the latest available patches Note Li ONLY install patch DVD for Service Pack 1 on Service Pack 1 installations for Service Pack 2 installations ONLY use the patch DVD for Service Pack 2 and so on Note Li To install additional software packages on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server the YaST software installer will ALWAYS choose the latest version of the software package As the latest version is located on either the latest Patch DVD or on the instal lation DVD it is DEFINITELY REQUIRED to have at LEAST the original installation DVD AND the latest Patch DVD available Note Li It is ABSOLUTELY REQUIRED to update the system always after any change of in stalled system packages Oc PRISMAproduction Server Software may fail if you miss the update at this time Note i The installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Service Pack 2 patches may need more than one installation run to be finished The second and fol
343. f applicable Includes Excludes List of files directories inside the Physical Directory which have been included excluded Example console output for a GetPluginContents call root isny prismabackup prismabackup py GetPluginContents gt plugin LCDS_AFP_ResourcesPlugin I 1 backupID 1122964952130 LCDS_APA_PrintResourcesPlugin isny ops de gt type Master ip 10 53 35 91 rootpath u prismapro data Py dir cat logicaldir includes excludes pave dir resimport leds logicaldir includes excludes 4 bogen ops de gt type Slave ip 10 53 35 87 rootpath u prismapro data dir cat logicaldir includes excludes gt 3 dir resimport lcds logicaldir includes excludes 4 1 The content which the plug in for LCDS resource data has backed up in the backup with the given ID is to be displayed 2 On the Master server the directories u prismapro data cat and u prismapro data resimport Icds have been included 3 The same directories have been included on the Slave server Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 617 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Utility Functions The following utility function allows creating the properties file involved in the backup process by request CreateSystemInfo creates the property file systeminfo properties When this command is exe
344. f parallel LCDS Process chains is supported in V3 10 Two typical use cases may be given here to explain the usage and advantages a Use Oc IPDS twin fanfold system print while spooling both in the twin configuration one process chain supported in V3 0X and 2 parallel process chains in a two single configuration m Process Copy Compile and Print sequentially production data on a production catalog Parallel a new test catalog may be created and resources may be copied and converted JSLs may be edited and compiled and test print done This test actions may be per formed parallel to print process on production catalog without interfering with each other For details concerning the use of this function for multiple process chains please see also the following chapters a LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters on page 387 for example Keyword DeviceName1 2 3 m Server Files Device in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server User s Guides User Script Drain_Channel Usecase If the LCDS 370 input via channel has an infinite channel time out a stop of the process chain job in the spool ods queue may result in unwanted data loss To stop all infinity channels for example during an operator change due to shift changes or at the end of the day a userscript Drain_channel is provided Executing this script will change the handling of all running ifilters and these processes will now use the finite channe
345. f the response is positive we will extend these kind of features in the future Starting Ipq from the menu To start the pq command from the menu two small files are needed The first is a batch file which shows a command line window starts the lpq command and waits until the user clicks a button to close the window The used path should be C Program Files Oce inputmodules exe The second file is a shortcut which calls the lpq batch program and can be for example put in the Windows directories which contain the start menu entries C Documents and Settings lt user gt Start Menu Programs Oc LP lpq lt user gt must be replaced by the user using this tool Server Name or IP Address of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Queue Name a configured LP queue on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server The listing displayed is the listing of all the print jobs which are received by the LP pro tocol At the moment no distinction is made via which logical LP queue the print job has entered the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system This behavior will change how ever in a future release so that only the jobs from the specified logical sprinter can be seen Starting Ipr from the SendTo menu To start the lpr command and send data files to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server two small files are needed The first file is called LprWinClient exe and is an exe cutable which checks the parameters writes a small
346. fic permissions to the correct LDAP user Mapping LDAP Attributes to Oc PRISMAproduction Server Fields Every LDAP data pool which is used for user administration usually contains a number of predefined attributes according RFCs 2798 2256 These attributes mainly conform to the fields in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server user administration The attributes of the RFC are assigned to the matching Oc PRISMAproduction Server fields per default If the LDAP scheme of the customer differs from the default it is possible to assign not matching attribute names This can be done with the Mapping function in System Configuration gt LDAP Parameter If you call the mapping function a connection to the LDAP server is established This is only possible if a valid user name and password is provided Therefore the mapping function uses the test user name and the test password to set up the connection an to re quest the data The data of the test user are then displayed The modification of the LDAP values is of course valid for all LDAP users Oc PRISMAproduction Server uses the detected LDAP values only to display the user data of the user who is currently logged in in the User Info window A modification of the user data can only be performed by the LDAP administrator Chapter 7 Configuration 263 User Management User User Management User Introduction i Use this application to create and admin
347. file Conversion of a POD file into PostScript Number or media based tray selection will be translated to PostScript accordingly Accounting records will be written for the media transferred Some backends VP2110 Xerox 6180 CPS900 are able to monitor the print process The printers can be driven by two input data streams By PostScript prepared for the printers These files have to be spooled in using the so called PJM RAW format By POD AFP In this case the backend converts the POD AFP into PostScript All parameters of the Professional Document Composer are preserved and transferred to PostScript Note For details concerning the print parameters see Oc PRISMAproduction Server Technical Reference Guide chapter Print Parameter Configuration of the Backends 360 The backend is ready to print after setting up the IP address of the printer and the name of remote queue on the General tab in the Printer Configuration Oc PostScript printer not CPS Here the queue will not be analyzed By default LP is set as queue Xerox DocuTech The queue will be analyzed You have to define a new print queue on the Xerox Do cuTech or you have to set an existing queue and to activate this queu on the printer The insert the name of this queue in the general backend parameters Otherwise the printing will be aborted with an LP error CPSxxx The queue will be analyzed Each queue has its own properties By default the
348. file Verify that the requested file exists Error 02 Cannot open input file Verify that the requested file exists Error 03 Memory allocation failed System error consult your system administrator Error 04 Reading input file Report the error to your system consultant Error o5 Resolution X Y Create TIFF file with the correct resolution 300 or 600 dpi Error 07 No TIFF file Error 08 Wrong page layout Call the converter with the correct layout m d or m t Error 09 Wrong intray Call the converter with the correct input tray Error 10 Internal inconsistency Internal error Report the error to your system consultant Error 11 Wrong outtray Check and correct the command line entry Error 12 Data stream not sup ported Check and correct the command line entry Error 13 Wrong parameter in command line Check and correct the command line entry Error 14 Image scanline data not at byte boundary Error 15 Compression algo rithm not supported Note Applies only to LIP controller The error cannot occur with the SRA controller Create a TIFF file with the correct compression algorithm Error 16 Writing output file Error 17 No valid license for TIFF Converter Report the error to your system consultant Obtain a license Error 18 No output file in the command line Check and correct the command line entry
349. for which the message should be an swered automatically or select all modules Messagetext Displays the text of the message to be suppressed Suppress This column allows you to create a master list and to activate those entries only which are required in a certain situation Note The system suppresses the display of messages only if this check box is enabled You can also add entries to the list if you right click a message in the Message window and select Suppress Message from the context menu A dialog appears and asks you to choose one or all modules for which the messages should be suppressed 312 Chapter 7 Configuration Licenses Licenses Licenses Introduction Oc PRISMAproduction Server V4 licenses are stored on a CodeMeter dongle CmStick a small USB device which must be plugged in at the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master server Before activation of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server modules the li censes of the CmStick must be configured with the Licenses application under Config uration i Note Only the users root service and admin can save configuration changes Illustration Dongle Name 1 1192415 state License Name Accounting 4 0 INTERNAL AFP2PS 4 0 INTERNAL CIS 4 0 00c7 INTERNAL Composer 4 0 INTERNAL Digimaster_Driver 4 0 INTERNAL DocuTech_Driver 4 0 INTERNAL Download 4 0 INTERNAL DPconnect 4 0 INTERNAL GraphicArtsPlus 4 0 INTE
350. g with a dot are not valid printer names and are not printer di rectories The content of a template directory in u prismapro cfg printers system XXX YYY is copied into the created directory The same procedure is repeated for the directory u prismapro cfg printers custom XXX YYY but only if it exists At last the contents of the directory u prismapro cfg printers custom PRTNAME is copied into the new printer directory too only if the directory exists At last the content of the directory u prismapro cfg printers PRTNAME is also copied into the new printer directory this directory always exists This directory is useful for the customer to store infopages resources for special printers Description of XXX YYY and PRTNAME XXX is the internal name of the general backend type for example afp for AFP2IPDS Backend 362 Backend IPDS Backend gen Generic Backend PostScript Backend PJL PCL Backend xdp LCDS Backend Linedata Printer Driver LCDS Backend Linedata Printer Driver YYY represents the supported resolutions Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration Custom specific Infopages and Resources for Configured Printers Resolution 600 600 dpi and MRM Printer PRTNAME has to be the name of the created printer Chapter 7 Configuration 363 Printer Configuration Job Queues Printer Configuration Job Qu
351. gt Resources gt Preloaded Fonts APA Settings gt Resource Libraries gt Common Li braries APA Settings gt Options gt No of Pages Detect APA Settings gt Resource File Extension gt Coded Font Suffixes Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket Oce Custom Ticket Parameter EXT_CODE_PAGE EXT_FONT_CHARSET EXT_FORMDEF EXT_OBJECT_CON TAINER EXT_OFF EXT_OUT LINE_FONT EXT_OVERLAY EXT_PAGEDEF EXT_PAGESEG LIB_COMBINE General Description Options and Syntax De fault List of individual Resource File Name Extensions of code pages List of individual Resource File Name Extensions of font character sets List of individual Resource File Name Extensions of formdefs List of individual Resource File Name Extensions of XXX use or ignore File Exten sions o use 1 ignore Default List of individual Resource File Name Extensions of outline fonts List of individual Resource File Name Extensions of overlays List of individual Resource File Name Extensions of pagedefs List of individual Resource File Name Extensions of pagesegments overwrite or add defined Libraries in Printer Config uration o overwrite 1 add Default sponding GUI option Additional notes APA Settings gt Resource File Extension gt entries of Code Page Extension APA Settings gt Resource File Extension gt entries of Font Character Set APA Se
352. guration Password System Configuration Password Introduction To increase security certain requirements can be defined for passwords These require ments refer to the expiration Password Aging and to the complexity of passwords Password Aging If you use the Password Aging parameters a periodic change of the password can be en forced The starting point is always the date of the last change of the password From this point on a number of days can be defined for which the password is valid After this pe riod of time the password expires A period of time can be defined before the password expires in which the user is informed that the password will soon not be valid anymore After the password has expired another period of time can be defined in which the user is still allowed to log on but has to change the password immediately Aging parameters can only be set up for the Authorization External see User Manage ment User on page 264 Aging parameters for Authorization Auto are set under LINUX and for Ldap under LDAP Here in Configuration gt System gt Password the aging parameters are set globally and are valid for all External users In the User Management it is possible to modify the settings for individual users Password Complexity Use these parameters to define the required length of a password and the characters of which it must consist Com
353. guration data a di agnostic dialog is displayed after the backup has finished in order to analyze the cause of the failure In this case NO backup will be created an incomplete backup makes no sense Phases Just like the backup action a restore action also causes certain triggers to be executed on all plugged in components Below a summary is given of all triggers that are executed when a restore is being requested m Cancel Restore Initialization Phase Notifies a plugged in component that a configuration restore will be started The component must stop its processes that will influence the restore process immediately For example the ODS will cancel any running job The canceled ODS jobs must be reactivated again by the user after the restore has finished m Postupdate Restore Phase Notifies a plugged in component that it can start restoring its configuration data which is part of the selected backup m Uncancel Restore Finalizing Phase Notifies a plugged in component that the configuration restore has been finished The component can now start to operate normally again Note If one or more plugged in components fail in restoring their configuration data a diag nostic dialog is displayed after the restore has finished in order to analyze the cause of the failure In this case the failed component s can contain incomplete or inconsistent configuration data It is up to the user to configure the failed components by hand
354. h can be different from the global settings in Configuration gt System Note Li The Authorization settings cannot be modiefied here 270 Chapter 7 Configuration User Management User Permissions User Management User Permissions Introduction This tab displays which permissions are available for the Permission Group marked The name and the permissions of the four basic Permission Groups operator applic admin and service cannot be modified To built an individual set of User Permissions you have to create a new Permission Group by copying an existing group You can immediately modify the default name created Single permissions for the group can be switched on and off Note li Copying the Permission Group copies also the characteristic attributes of the user role in the new Permission Group which you cannot modify later User IDs and Access Rights on page 62 Permissions can be viewed in a tree structure which groups the entries according to their meaning the permission either refer to the Jobs Viewer the PJM the Messages System and so on You can also switch to a simple list view using the tabs at the bottom of the window Attention A The name and the permissions of the four basic Permission Groups operator applic service and admin cannot be modified Chapter 7 Configuration 271 User Management User Permissions I
355. h location a backup is stored it can always by found by means of the ID Technically the ID is used as a directory name all data which belongs to a backup is stored in this directory It s just plain files and a mix of the actual backup data and XML files which describe the creation of the backup 622 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Glossary Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Glossary Term Description Backup data types The possible types of data which are supported in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup are AFP Resources LCS Resources POD Composer Resources POD Unity RIP Resources Operating System Configuration Oc PRISMAproduction Server Configuration Jobs Print File Libraries User Home Directories Backup ID The Backup ID is a unique internally generated number which identifies a backup throughout its lifetime It s recommended to specify a descriptive name when creating a backup so that it can be found more easily if the ID has not been registered somewhere Cluster An Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster is the sum of all servers in a customer configuration There is always one Master server and up to 12 Slave servers in a cluster Same cluster regarding backup restore means Same number of servers same host names same IP addresses Configuration Oc PRISMAproduction Server has all its configuration data Backup stored in a central database When the configurati
356. h must always be at least as large as the output size generated in the PCL file since otherwise PEMs Print Error Marks will be printed Example 11 4 6 29 63 cm but length A4 29 7 cm Stand Alone Conversion in Command Line Mode Selecting the Control Procedure When the PCL Converter is run as a separate process the conversion job is submitted via a custom defined statement A number of these statements are available to choose from The required statement is either selected by the user or integrated into a custom defined shell script This customizing is performed by the system administrator using operating system utilities You can display a list of the available conversion statements by entering the command pcl The following summary is shown on the screen PcL Converter Output Shellscript for Resolution Format 600 dpi 300 dpi AFPDS pela6 pela3 TIFF n files with 1 page pelt6 pelt3 TIFF Multi image tiff file pelmt6 pelmt3 root pel root E General help for command line mode From this list locate the shell script you need by combining the output data format with the resolution Example you want to convert a PCL file for a 600 dpi printer into AFPDS format As indicated by the following table you should use the shell script pcla6 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 119 PCL Converter Operation 120 AFPDS full page image per page TIFF n files with one page TIFF multi image tiff file
357. h the button next to the field to the value field The Used in rule s field is not editable and is filled automatically if the action is inserted in the rule The definition ofa condition is always checked for consistency If there are inconsistencies for example if the condition name already exists the font color is red and a tool tip shows the cause If the condition is well defined the font color turns into black Only if all ele ments of the condition are correct the Finish button becomes active and you can add the condition to the sequence of actions Add setting Dialog 426 Description Name Set The Printer Name ach Setting has a unique name which has to be not empty 4 ollowing characters are only allowed Parameter job Printer Name alphanumeric character and and E Overwrite E Delete E Ignore empty value Value FPrintera Paste to value Used in rule s Finisn _ Cancel Each setting contains a Name a Parameter an Overwrite flag and a Value The name of the setting must be unique because all conditions are globally known over all rules The Parameter for the setting is selected in the same way as for conditions If the setting should overwrite an already existing section key entry in the ticket the Overwrite flag has to be selected The default status of the overwrite selection box is checked Chapter 7 Configuration Ticke
358. hanAddress2 Ox3F l Fiter Device ChanAddress3 0x40 Filter Device ChanAddress4 0x41 Filter Device ChanBufsize 32000 l Fiter Device ChanChkPos 0 l Filter Device ChanCondCode OFFLINE Fiter Device ChanDEDelay o l Fiter Device ChanStanTime 300 l Filter Device ChanStopTime 20 l Fiter Device ChanTimeout 60 l Filter Device ChanTimeoutAction CLOSE_CHAN l Fiter Device Deletelnput o Fitter Device DeviceName fdevfi370 chan0 cua I Fiter Device DeviceName1 fdev i370 chan0 cua l Fiter Device DeviceName2 devji370 chanO cua I Filter Device DeviceName3 devji370 chanO cua E efines the action after channel timeout LOSE_CHAN Channel is closed set to not ready DEFAULT END_REND Input Process send Report End command TALOG Open Dialog window with choise Close Report End Continue 50 entries 1 selected PrintLCOS parameters loaded from 1x010222 ops oce net The LCDS Jobs Table The functions of all tool bar icons are also accessible via the Parameters menu Chapter 7 Configuration 385 LCDS Parameter Configuration LCDS Jobs Window Tool Bar Icons and Description Entries Select a server Select a server in the ODS network on which the JCF you want Sener 105361217 to modify is located Select a job LCDS Jobs allows you to view and change the application pemes E parameters for six different jobs see image on the left At any Cony e given time the parameters shown are those for
359. hanges please Network changes are active after reboot reboot the system now y n q uit Note After the reboot the new settings become valid Remember that all modifications affect the local server only You have to modify the etc hosts and if required etc hosts allow individually on all other servers which will be connected to this Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Chapter 1 Installation 53 Modify Adaptec Bios Settings for older Tape Drives Modify Adaptec Bios Settings for older Tape Drives Introduction Steps a fw YN fF nN For older tape devices changes needs to be made in the Adaptec host adapter BIOS These are devices which have a 50 pin instead of a 68 pin wide SCSI connector Examples Most M4 Data cartridges and tape drives QIC tape drives up to 1 2 or 8 GB The new QIC tape drives with 50 or 100 GB have a wide SCSI connector and do NOT need any changes Reboot system When SCSI adapter is seen press Ctrl A Select SCSI device configuration For all SCSI id s where older tape devices are connected repeat step 5 and 6 Set Max Sync Transfer Rate MB s to 10 MB s or when Initiate wide Negotiation is NO then to 5MB s Set Initiate wide Negotiation to NO Max Sync Transfer Rate now changes from 10 to 5 MB s Save and leave Adaptec bios settings menu and reboot system 54 Chapter 1 Installation Chapter 2 Remote Access t
360. hapter 7 Configuration 371 Printer Configuration Gray Curves changes and gaps in the gradient the curve is usually shaped as an S or a bow with smooth transitions Examples Low contrast The difference between bright and dark are not so distinct the image seems to be a bit flat Brighter in the middle 372 Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration Gray Curves Darker in the middle Such a curve turns every positive pattern into a negative Pal The normal image The gray shades are converted 1 1 If you are converting and printing PS or PDF files you can modify the gray curves using the slide buttons on this tab This enables printer specific corrections to be made to the gray values If this parameter is not set grays that are adapted to the Oc printing systems are used instead of the default grays of the UnityRIP It is possible to make corrections to gray values which are read from a file The correction file contains 21 values with one value per line Values can be between o and 100000 The value 100000 corresponds to a PostScript gray of 1 0 i e an intensity of 100 the lightest value The 21 values begin with a substitute for 0 gray and end with the 21st value for 100 gray Ina file of 21 values the increment between the gray values on each line is 5 Click this button Sto save your settings on this master in the Oc P
361. hare PFLEXT postgres creates the required tables and fields for the PFLTEXT database This script does not work for other database types for example because other databases use different names for data types Nevertheless this script should be a hint how the PFLTEXT database can be used on other systems after some modifications Create table PFLDOCUMENT Create table PFLINFILE Create table PFLROOT Create table PFLMAXID Create index entries for fast database access Initialization set start values for PFLMAXID INSERT INTO PFLMAXID VALUES o o Hints for the data types used in PostgreSQL 458 Chapter 7 Configuration Archives Appendix TEXT Variable length character string without limitation SMALLINT Integer 2 bytes INT Integer 4 bytes BIGINT Integer 8 bytes Chapter 7 Configuration 459 Input Modules Overview Input Modules Input Modules Overview Introduction The Input Modules Download HotDir and LP receive print jobs for the Oc PRISMAproduction Server print server These jobs are processed enhanced with server specific job information and spooled The print jobs can be provided with information in order to control the print job Note i The terms Input Modules and Input Channels are identical The Input Status view shows the print jobs when they are being received when they are submitted successfully or when an error occu
362. he DPconnect barcode controls The DPconnect Barcode of course is completely independent from any other normal barcode statement defined in the LP input queue assigned job ticket template So a DPconnect Barcode may be combined with any other barcode statement The DPconnect Barcode controls function as follows Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Barcode Tab Description Source of DPcon None nect Barcode DPconnect Barcode is switched off Neither job name nor Barcode Text is printed as barcode A DPconnect Barcode statement defined in the LP input queue assigned job ticket template has no effect All the other barcode statements in this ticket template will be processed Job Name The job name of the incoming job is printed as barcode Barcode Text The text in the edit field Barcode Text is printed as barcode Default None Begin of the Job When the source is Job Name it is possible to select a section Name Section out of the whole job name string to be used This edit field specifies the position of the first character of the section End of the Job When the source is Job Name it is possible to select a section Name Section out of the whole job name string to be used This edit field specifies the position of the last character of the section Barcode Text When the source is Barcode Text this text has to be entered here Add a Barcode Add no Extra Sheet
363. he current one may be imported Plug ins The separation of the different data types in an Oc PRISMAproduction Server system and the possibility to let the developers teams in charge program the actual backup restore operations is the heart of the concept This has been achieved by building a robust framework which allows to plug in whenever necessary when creating a backup when restoring im porting in the Java server in the client The generic plug in solution in Version 1 Doesn t support a GUI and is based on templates that describe which data is to be backed up for which Backup data type Restore A backup can be restored or imported Restore means the Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster has not changed Operation System Oc PRISMAproduction Server configuration and Oc PRISMAproduction Server version are identical Restore is in tended to be used to rebuild a cluster after a serious crash Therefore not much flexibility has been built in Storage Manager All archive data in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup is routed through a storage manager module It is crucial not to bind plug ins client and Java server functions to any external devices directly The storage manager encapsulates this access and therefore the support of additional storage devices can be added without changes in the basics 624 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Mirror Print Jobs Introduction Mirror Print Jobs Mirror Print
364. he directory u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt rds where lt catalog gt is the current catalog If you ftp resources from an MVS or Elixir system be sure that all files are in upper case If the LCDS Module has been installed with the default settings the original resources will be deleted after successful conversion Otherwise they will be moved to u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt FNT_conv FRM_conv IMG_conv LGO_conv respectively After completion of the conversion a status report is displayed in the Messages window showing how many files have been read and converted successfully or unsuccessfully When conversion is complete the Copy Convert button is available again Cancel Operation Aborts the current Copy Convert operation Button After a successful conversion the Xerox resources can be deleted or kept optional If needed the resources can then be converted again without reading them from tape once more In any case the backups of all Xerox resources must be saved in the original Xerox tape format on tapes or diskettes Deletion Mode Depending on the Deletion_mode you set with the LCDS Jobs tool in the Configura tion workspace of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer see LCDS Parameter Configuration gt LCDS Jobs in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Administration Settings and Tasks Guide every single element every single resource will be processed in the following way
365. he Oc PRISMAproduction Server Master server must be shut down before performing the import the information about the current configuration Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client and status is read from the systeminfo properties file This file is created automatically during the preparation step for the import but it can also be created manually by any text editor The latter would allow an import in case the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system is not fully operable Summary The import process is performed in two steps Preparelmport The properties file is created and Oc PRISMAproduction Server is shut down Import The system state is checked If okay Oc PRISMAproduction Server is down on Master server and up on all Slave PrintSlaves the data is collected and stored by the storagemanager Step Action Remarks Description of the PrepareImport options No options Description of the Import options Option Parameter Meaning Description backupID lt string gt Identifier of the backup as generated when the backup was created mode keep files keep files Don t overwrite existing files Default overwrite files plugins lt string list gt List of plug ins The import is only creat ed for the plug ins defined in this list Default all plug ins servers lt string list gt List of Oc PRISMAproduction Server servers
366. he buffer is full and then written to the trace file By NOT setting this bit the trace information is written line by line to the trace file lower performance When this flag is set a buffer data trace is written When this flag is set an application socket data trace is written When set it writes the Input Status protocol trace When set it writes the PJM protocol trace When set it writes for each PJM command a sepa rate file with the used parameters Chapter 7 Configuration 503 HotDirWinClient HotDirWinClient Introduction The HotDirWinClient is a Windows file submission tool To better integrate the MS Windows Operating System with the Oc PRISMAproduction Server print server the SendTo menu item of the Windows Explorer can be used This menu pops up if you select one or more files in the Windows Explorer and click them with the right mouse button The Send To menu has a sub menu By extending the sub menu with entries which allows the user to transfer data to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server HotDir directory it is very easy to submit print jobs Behind this sub menu entry is a shortcut which calls the program HotDirWinClient which takes care of interpreting the specified parameters and transferring the specified file names to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server HotDir directory See also the HotDir description in HotDir on page 488 Overview 504 The HotDirWinClient program can be used in a
367. he currently installed version Note All servers of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster have to be up and running as the backup is automatically done for the whole cluster Ifa Windows computer running the UnityRIP is part of the cluster you have to shut it down and disconnect it before backup creation Installation Update Undo Uninstallation Installation from the Oc PRISMAproduction Server release DVD m Insert the Oc PRISMAproduction Server DVD The DVD is mounted automatically m Change to the DVD directory which is located at path media lt DISK ID gt a Execute install prisma m Select Installation from the menu m After the installation is finished execute cd otherwise the umount command will not work a Unmount the DVD with umount media lt DISK ID gt if the auto open feature of the DVD is disabled all disks will be mounted anyway but there will be no notification But the path media lt DISK ID gt will be created in any case Installation from hard disk a Copy all files provided to an empty directory m Execute cd lt directory gt m Execute install prisma m Select Installation from the installation dialog Installation of AddOn packages m Change to the DVD directory a Execute install prisma m Select Installation of AddOn packages from the menu m Select the desired packages in the list of available AddOn packages Update a Execute install prisma
368. he e mail address of the user Once the combination FTP server user password is used the password can be removed Specifies where the data file must be copied transferred too This can be defined in the command line or as value from pa rameters in the OCT The meaning of the value depends on the TransType setting Possible options lt Path gt SMB only Specifies target directory where data files must be created or copied to lt Server gt lt User gt lt Passwd gt lt Remote directory gt FTP only Specifies Oc PRISMAproduction Server server to connect to remote user password and the remote directory where to put the data because the MS Windows operating system stores this Chapter 7 Configuration HotDirWinClient Configuration The receiving HotDir directory must be configured with the option FileType Data Trig gerFile if no Oc Custom Ticket OCT is sent with the data or with the option File Type Data Oct TriggerFile if an OCT is sent with the data First copy the HotDirWinClient exe program from the Oc PRISMAproduction Server software CD in the directory tools_win HotDir to the directory C Program Files Oce inputmodules exe Then create a new short cut of the HotDirWinClient program and put it in the directory C Documents and Settings lt user gt SendTo The lt user gt part must be replaced with the user s who use this feature In the shortcut tab the target must be set to
369. he job 162 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Job Processing Tab Item Description Elimination of the problems means respectively m Separator pages are ignored when colliding with cover pages Chapter starts are ignored when colliding with cover pages Tabulator media is being printed in simplex mode The media weight requirement is set to 40 g m2 respective 200 g m2 The job is redirected to the output tray which the required postprocessing is connected to The required printer postprocessing is being ignored for this job The ordered material which has been requested first will be used as well for all other requests for ordered material Only the first request for print material which is valid for the whole document is considered a The job ticket command is ignored a The print job is processed according to the ticket template which belongs to the receiving LP Input Queue Unchecked No message is generated for the job view All Jobs DPcon nect eliminates the problems automatically and continues the job Default Unchecked Note Li If a job problem occurs always a message is generated for the message window Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 163 DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab Introduction The data processing mode describes the way how the different types of print data are to be converted 164 Chapter 4
370. he job displayed in the joblist This user must exist on the mirror server Password Password for the user above 288 Chapter 7 Configuration System Configuration Mirroring Parameter Description Mirroring Policy Mandatory If this option is selected the system only creates the job if mir roring was successful In other words the job is created on both systems or it is not created at all Optional In this case the system tries to mirror the job but if this is not successful the job will be submitted on the original server any way You can also set the mirror policy in the PJM menu Job gt Transfer Mode The PJM policy always overrides the setting in the System Configuration window If you set the policy in the PJM to Default the setting in Configuration gt System becomes valid Ticketrule Select a Ticket Rule which has been configured to modify the ticket of the mirrored job so that this job can be submitted on the mirror server You can set this parameter here and or in the PJM gt Transfer Mode The Ticket Rule which is set in the System Configuration is only applied ifthe Ticket Rule setting in the PJM is set to Default Chapter 7 Configuration 289 System Configuration LDAP Parameter System Configuration LDAP Parameter Introduction On this tab you configure the parameters for the connecti
371. he length of the source field nothing will be transferred to JOBNAME length represents the length of the information to be transferred If length offset are higher than the length of the source field the information up to the end of the source field will be transferred It is not possible to transfer more than 64 byte to the JOBNAME field the rest of the information will be cut The single values in JOBNAME are separated by one blank each 1 Trailing blanks in the resulting string are truncated so that no is to be seen in the Jobname column of the All Jobs window type Description Max length o No source no values will be transferred 1 JDE name 6 2 JDL name 6 3 HRPTNA BANNER or RSTACK HRPTNA 16 4 HJOBNO BANNER 6 5 DEPT ACCT 31 6 ACCTINFO RSTACK 64 7 Tape file name or hard disk file name without path 65 64 8 Complete hard disk file name 255 64 9 PJM Job ID 6 10 PJM job name 64 11 Start JDE 6 12 Start JDL 6 13 Report number beginning with 0000 displayed 10 with at least 4 digits 14 VSN VSN represents the volume serial number 6 ofa tape VOL record 6 bytes from byte no 5 10 This value does obviously only make sense for tape cartridge jobs with VOL record as volume definition of a tape Example 1 408 Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Special Functions and User Scripts Begin Xfilte
372. he settings in the PJM GUI Job Attributes Print Input Tray Output Tray and the settings in a potential PDC impositioning scheme a Using a PDC impositioning scheme Input and output tray control is always disabled If input tray selection is set to Default the effective input and output tray selection is taken from the PDC impositioning scheme If input tray selection is not set to Default the effective input and output tray selection is as selected here Using UP3I Devices Each UPI device is connected to a specific output tray of the printer This connection has to be configured in the printer configuration To do this open the Printers node in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer tree Select the appropriate printer and open the Output Devices tab Here set the correct number of output trays and specify their Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 185 DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries 186 physical numbers Double click the type column of that output tray the UP3I device is connected to Then select the required device out of the shown list To put this device into a template in order to make it a job processing property open the appropriate job ticket template with the PJM GUI and then open the Job Attributes Print dialog Here select that output tray to which the UP3I device is connected to By doing this the UP3I Devices button becomes active Clicking on this button opens a configur
373. hen an error occurs The data already collected will be accessible but may be incomplete false The backup process continues with the next plug in when an error occurs The backup data of the plug in in error may be incomplete i Note Errors are reported on the con sole and logged in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup log file Example console output for a Backup run in Oc PRISMAproduction Server V 3 00 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client root isny prismabackup prismabackup py Prepare 4 al prismabackup Prepare File systeminfo properties has been created 1 1 prismabackup Prepare File jobinfo properties has been created 1 2 prismabackup Prepare Stopping PRISMAproduction 1 3 prismabackup Prepare PRISMAproduction stopped root isny prismabackup prismabackup py CreateBackup lt 2 name Foo Backup template cfg backuptemplate 300 xml BACKUP STARTED 02 08 05 08 42 32 LCDS _APA_PrintResourcesPluginG isny ops de creating 11122964952130 isny ops de LCDS_APA _PrintResourcesPlugin tgz 02 08 05 08 42 44 LCDS_APA _PrintResourcesPlugin isny ops de plugin total ti 02 08 05 08 42 44 LCDS_APA PrintResourcesPlugin bogen ops de creating 11122964952130 bogen ops de LCDS_APA PrintResourcesPlugin tgz 02 08 05 08 42 47 LCDS_APA PrintResourcesPlugin bogen ops de transferring 4 2 3 11122964952130 bogen ops de
374. herefore select the Job menu in the PJM and click on Information Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation PCL Native Workflow in the PJM PCL Native Workflow in the PUM Introduction The properties dialog for the PCL workflow provides the ability to modify PCL data to correct problems caused by older applications or PCL data designed for different printers The properties window for PCL files can also be used to send PCL fonts and macros with PCL data stream if they are not available in the printers and to replace PCL escape se quences These steps are performed depending on the job settings defined by the PJM in the job ticket The enriched and changed PCL data stream is then spooled in the system Attention A In V3 10 06 the configuration file u prismapro lib pcl_filter config txt had to be edited on a command line basis and the user was able to set PCL replacement commands only on the system level With version V4 00 the user is now able to define the PCL re placement commands with the job specific PJM GUI In V4 00 the PCL file properties dialog replaces the configuration file The config txt file is not used anymore For the definition of the special PCL Filter commands PJL DFF and complex UP3 I replacement commands please use the second PCL Filter based in the PJL driver This filter uses the configuration file u prismapro cfg backend_filter config_out txt This configuration file has explicit inline de
375. his combo box describe in which order the above mentioned information sources are searched m Custom Ticket Ticket Template Rules shown below First search the custom ticket for a converter setting If there is none search the ticket template for a converter setting If there is none take te rules shown below m Custom Ticket Rules shown below First search the custom ticket for a converter setting If there is none take the rules shown below m Ticket Template Rules shown below First search the ticket template for a converter setting If there is none take the rules shown below m Rules shown below Take the rules shown below Default Custom Ticket Rules shown below Note Application of the rules shown below requires that DPconnect can properly determine type of the received print data Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab Item Description ASCII Data PostScript Unity RIP ASCII data are converted to PostScript code by DPconnect During job processing they are afterwards converted into AFP code with embedded TIFF containers by the UnityRIP The generated data can then be printed via an IPDS ora PostScript backend PostScript Graphic Arts Plus ASCII data are converted to PostScript code by DPconnect During job processing they are afterwards converted into AFP code with embedded PDF containers by the Graphic Arts Plus Normalizer
376. his property will be processed as it is If there is a mark too in column Template and the corresponding switch in the DPconnect translation table is set to Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action the value of this property will be taken from the LP input queue template instead from the Input job ticket There are several properties which only can be supplied from the input job ticket so these properties are always taken from there There are several properties which only can be supplied from the LP input queue template so these are always taken from there Note Those LP input queue HotDir template properties which have no mark in the column Template or don t appear in the following table at all don t have any effect when processing DPconnect jobs so it s not necessary to set them at all Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket In Tem DPconnect put plate Tick Menu Ticket Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket In Tem DPconnect put plate Tick e New POD Ticket Menu Job Transfer Mode All settings available here Information User Name Company Street Zip Code Country Country Tel Fax Add Info Q 3 gt lt Receiver Name Company City Street Zip Code Country Tel rri Add Info Shipment Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 179
377. ht Helvetica TimesNewRomanPS BoldMT Bookman Lightltalic erText Black TimesNewRomanPS ItalicMT CARTA erText Blackltalic TimesNewRomanPSMT CHICAGO Clarendon Bold Clarendon Light erText Italic HoeflerText Regular Univers Bold HoeflerText Ornaments Univers BoldExt o Univers BoldExtObl Clarendon JoannaMT Bold Univers BoldOblique CooperBlack Italic JoannaMT BoldItalic Univers Condensed CooperBlack Copperplate ThirtyThreeBC Copperplate Thirty TwoBC Coronet Regular JoannaMT Italic JOANNAMT LetterGothic Bold LetterGothic BoldSlanted Univers CondensedBold Univers CondensedBoldOblique Univers CondensedOblique Univers Extended Courier Bold LetterGothic Slanted Univers ExtendedObl Courier BoldOblique LetterGothi Univers Light Courier Oblique COURIER Eurostile Bold LubalinGraph Book LubalinGraph BookOblique LubalinGraph Demi Univers LightOblique Univers Oblique UNIVERS Eurostile BoldExtendedTwo LubalinGraph DemiOblique Wingdings Regular Eurostile ExtendedT wo MARIGOLD ZapfChancery MediumItalic Eurostile MONACO ZapfDingbats Installation of additional Type 1 fonts Additional Type 1 fonts can be installed on the local hard disk of the conversion computer The font files must be in the folder named fonts relative to the search path of the con verter see cha
378. ia Color String length 30 gt Substitute color with this Custom Defined Media Type String length 30 gt Substitute prefinish with this Paper Length mm gt Substitute paper length with this Paper Hight mm gt Substitute paper height with this Paper Weight g m gt Substitute paper weight with this Predrilled Hole Count number gt Substitute paper hole count with this Ordered Input Media Set Size number gt Substitute order count with this Medium Name String length 30 gt Substitute medium name with this Ignore Statement gt Use system default if available Copy Count Translate Statement directly gt Take copy count from input ticket Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action gt Take copy count from the ticket template Job Parameters Copies Ignore Statement gt Use system default if available 1 Disposition Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Disposition Print gt The only way to process input Jobs is to print Delete Source Data Translate Statement directly gt Handling of Print Job Data after Printing without Specification in the Job Ticket 198 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Appendix Options Delete Source File gt If the print job data are linked to one main file only the main file will be deleted Delete Source D
379. ic Saving Introduction On this tab you can define how to save messages in an external file You can save the messages in HTML format recommended or as plain text files HTML will preserve the message colors and you can easily view the messages with any HTML browser You can also select the language in which the messages should be saved and the type of message information which is to be saved Under Create a new export file you specify the param eters for the files in which the messages are exported Illustration 2 B X amp General Automatic Saving Automatic Answers Triggers essage Suppression Saving Format Message infos to save Saving disabled oe lx Message Type N Time Save in HTML format for Web Browser amp Z Jobid Sawe as CSY file for Spreadsheet Tools lt gt Modulename Sawe as plain text for Text Editors J Short description E Answertext E Date E Hostname 4 User E Message Id 4 Detailed description Saving Language English en Create a new export file In saving directory u prismapro data custom msg When at least X messages are written 25000 When at least X minutes are gone 60 And always after the day change Configuration modified Window Functions UI Element Description Saving Format Here you can switch off the backup of messages completely or sele
380. ices inanan 571 642
381. ich the device is connected Double clicking opens a list of all computer names in the system Configuring Media for the Print File Manager When configuring media for the Print File Manager via Configuration gt Devices you have to use special keywords 298 Chapter 7 Configuration Devices Configuration Columns Text PFL_HOST or PFL_TAPE computer or tape device PEL_TAR or PFL_CPIO If you select PFL_TAPE you have to insert the device under Physical device for example dev sto Chapter 7 Configuration 299 Devices Configuration APA LCDS Devices Configuration APA LCDS Introduction The configuration interface provides functions for configuring devices tape drives floppy drives network connections and the like which means making them known to Oc PRISMAproduction Server Once a device has been registered with Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server it is shown in the Directory Viewer Illustration j B i XA Device Type Format Physical Devices Server Name XFLOPPY_525 FLOPPY LCDS_Resources 5_1 4_floppy 1x010222 o0ps oce net XFLOPPY_35 FLOPPY LCDS_Resources 3_1 2_floppy 1x010222 ops oce net XRES_TAPE TAPE LCDS_Resources tape 1x010222 o0ps oce net XRES_CARTRIDGE TAPE LCDS_Resources cartridge 1x010222 ops oce net XRES_QIC TAPE LCDS_Resources QIC 1x010222 0ps oce net TAPE TAPE APA Printdata TAPE 1x010222 ops oce net QIC TAPE APA Pri
382. igure Printer VP5000 on Server Ix010222 ops oce net Toner name and Color names of the selected toners are also displayed in the Printer Settings dialog of the Printer Pool application Here you can mark those colors which should be checked before printing vs9000 Job check Toner Colors Job Selection Checks L o E Form Name B126 C65 G10 OCTS3B04 E Resolution E Companygreen Companygreen Printer Name i Companyred Companyred L M105 C65 G10 OCTS6M06 E Job Queue E V101 C65 G10 OCT45801 i Toner Colors E Yuo1 c65 D10 O0CT88Y01 E Data Type Printer Automation E Printer Start Stop E Printer NPRO Questions from Printer w Restrict to Users Cancel Chapter 10 Workflows 579 Workflow Color Selection Action In the PJM in Job Attributes gt Print dialog you can now select the toner color for the respective toner station of the active printer in the Color Selec tion section Printer Color z Printer Color OCT53B04 OCT56M06 OCT45801 ocT88yo1 Companygreen Companyred Color Selection The color allocations configured in Configuration gt Printers gt Toner Stations are offered here The number of list boxes shown depends on the toner stations installed in the selected printer If you submit this print job the color names also appear in the Color col umn of the All Jobs applica
383. iiisiisieisiasarrsn ia iiiad 321 OVERVIEW csssscsssseeeseteocsetsscss essostessesessesiesiaces 316 Authorization Pa Ti Ce EIEE nese eek otbade TE 258 External 5 sescsscssssstancasssesvesteatcisdstescecssevassttees 258 Vila pyrsestssesdssidaidescbssivascnssssevaeesssdevssescdsen ese2s3s 258 Authorization Modes Authorization Modes sssr 264 B Backup Restore Basic Concept siasssiiestecsscssassdesssasessessonsessesbess 327 Convert old Backups ccccssesseseseseeeees 335 Window Functions ccceceeseseeeeeeeeeeees 330 Cc Cluster Configuration Cluster Configuration wo ccc 276 Cluster Type Jobsplitting sissies 276 Printer Cofiguration Backup Restore wias cisssssssssssvonsessvesscasesesseannses 327 Configuration Accounting Administration sss sssssssesseesseess 316 Backup Restore Cluster nosses Consumables isisisi isiad irinen DEVICES ai iiioasrienisis orst REEE Ri Ent Events POB ssestecesstdsdasssssendscesscoserstobocniaterstenee sis General Usage of the Applications 1256 Job QUEUES sscci kits iusrerinienpracacidaveates 375 ICS JOBS secseteacderstnsatsceszsdeatestentecadeausas tecaes 385 library Paths AE RI TA 337 EE 52 idee T des deastise 313 Logging 10278 Master Slave 1 301 Message Systemics dusen aen 304 Overview of Applications 0 250 Papet ssie a Printers System User Management sccicscisicsccsespesnaseoteotstensensee 258 Consumables Consumables cssiseisccsccscsstsessrstsaze
384. ile size 20071018 acc Thursday October 18 2007 711 Byes 0 Kbyte 20071022 acc Monday October 22 2007 100 Bytes 0 Kbyte The following actions are possible with the legacy accounting files m Delete X stored accounting legacy files deletion is restricted to the users admin and service a Export all selected legacy accounting files into a single output file This output file can be stored on windows clients running the Launcher interface too Chapter 7 Configuration 321 Consumables Configuration Consumables Consumables Configuration Introduction The Consumables configuration application is used to pre configure the consumables with unique names and a description After you have saved the entries the names of the consumables can be selected in the Printer Maintenance dialog in the Printer Pool window see chapter Printer Pool gt Maintenance Report in the Oc PRISMApro duction Server User s Guides The Consumables are organized in different tables Toner Developer Brush Corotron Strip Filter Blade Other which are accessible via tabs within the application Some Consumables are already preconfigured in these tables The Toner table also provides a complete list of all color toners which are available from Oc 322 Chapter 7 Configuration Consumables Configuration Illustration awe Blit aX L alale Toner_ Develioper_ Bru
385. in the database Any server changes that you have made via the interface are discarded if amp you do not save them prior to executing this function 442 Chapter 7 Configuration Archives PFL Archives Archives PFL Archives Introduction The PFL Archives list displays all archives which are configured on the servers of the POD system List of archives The Archives list displays all archives which are configured on the servers of the POD system Column title Description Name Name of the archive The name must start with a character Only numbers and characters are allowed Type Final cache Print jobs that are ready and that can be reprinted anytime are stored in the final cache These jobs can no longer be modified however Files stored under the same name are not overwritten and are assigned with an internal number Preprint cache Stores data which have to be saved for further processing for example converted IOCA files which are not yet imposed The Preprint Cache is also used to prepare a job You should use this function if you want to test several PDC settings for one print job To do this you should create a job ticket for which you have not yet made Composer settings The system will then run the files of the print job through the corresponding converters and store them on the server After this is done you can load these print jobs edit them with the Composer and view the
386. indow is opened to see the progress of the reset The Explorer will be closed and reconnected automatically Details of the backup can be viewed using the backup viewer To load a backup into the viewer select the backup from the list of available backups and choose the option View After a successful saving procedure the new created backup will automatically be loaded into the backup viewer i Note It is not possible to cancel a saving or restoring procedure The user must wait until the saving or restoring procedure finishes Note i Session files contain stored sessions suffix psn and are not part of the Backup Restore component They have to be saved manually Chapter 7 Configuration 327 Backup Restore Basic Concept Definition The Backup Restore component of Oc PRISMAproduction Server is in fact a framework enabling all other Oc PRISMAproduction Server components to backup or restore their configuration The figure below illustrates this concept As can be seen in this figure the Backup Restore framework delegates the backup restore action to so called plug ins like the Database component the Explorer component the Ticket Rules component etc The storage of the data which each component is backing up or is restoring is managed by the Backup Restore framework Illustration Se a Backup Data As mentioned before the Backup Restore framework delegates the backup or resto
387. indows using a batch file or by using the HotDirWinClient For more details on the last option see section A Windows file submission tool for HotDir The directories which the HotDir daemon monitors are named as defined in the HotDir configuration and located as subdirectories of the path u hotdir If you want to group multiple data files to a single print job you can use either an OCT only or a trigger file or you can use both With each of these possibilities the data files belonging to a print job must be located in a sub directory and the OCT and or Trigger file must have the same name as this sub directory plus the used file name extension for each Example for a job with multiple data files using an OCT Directory 12345 Data file1 12345 file1 Data file2 12345 file2 OCT 12345 0ct An Oc Custom Ticket OCT may contain only the needed print job parameters The file name entries are only necessary if a special data file sequence is needed which cannot be achieved with an alphabetical or numerical sort algorithm or if for each data file dif ferent parameters are necessary in the file section It is not allowed to specify only a few but not all data files belonging to this job Note Be aware that the path specified in the OCT for the data files is ignored The data file name is used together with the sub directory name as is described above 490 Chapter 7 Configuration HotDir It is also possible to spe
388. ined Paper Standard Paper Form Tab Paper Name weight Color Yinch size 80 White 11 693 30 Red 7 65 80 Blue 11 693 80 Green 11 693 80 White 11 0 E Master siave 80 White i 14 0 Cl Message System 80 White 17 0 80 White i i 16 535 41_Druckerpark Papier BF Bes tree on ju x8 A adminewoga Al Chapter 10 Workflows 585 Workflow LCDS Workflow LCDS Introduction The following chapter provides a short overview on the basic steps to print an LCDS file Illustration Tape Cassette alc Floppy 54 43 Harddisk 1370 Channel CMD Viewer a Input Process JSL IFILTER Compile Process XDL XRX Conversion Process XRC FNT _Conv FRM_Cony IMG Conv LGO_Conv SSS Degg arvaret LOPARAM XFILTER RDS LE Form Sample m Process Oc and IPDS Printer PDS SAMPLE other Driver Standard m IPDS Printers SPS_NET Step 1 Create a New Catalog See LCDS Module New catalog on page 214 See LCDS Module Organization of Resources on page 215 Step 2 Copy and or Convert Resources See LCDS Module LCDS Resources on page 217 Step 3 Compile JSLs See LCDS Module LCDS Resources on page 217 586 Chapter 10 Workflows Workflow LCDS Step 4 Print LCDS Process You can start the print process with the PJM Expl
389. ioStream_8550 Printer Driver IPDS Driver connected to Server x010222 ops oce net canes Printer Attributes Here you have to specify the main printer attributes Printer Name up to 20 characters The Printer Model the list contains all Oc models Non Oc printers generic printers and their appropriate symbol a The appropriate Printer Driver The selection here depends on the selected Printer Model m The server which the printer is connected to The following drivers are available if the respective licenses are installed Printer Driver Connection Printer Model Licenses IPDS Driver Network Sends all kind of AFP Line IPDS_Driver 4 0 Network for ATwin for and Mixed data in IPDS to CT win Oc and Non Oc IPDS Gol littertace printers SCSI Interface for ATwin T for CTwin 3 370 Channel intercom 3 370 Channel intercom for ATwin for CTwin 342 Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration Add a new Printer Printer Driver Connection Printer Model Licenses Postscript Driver Network with LP Protocol PS_Driver 4 0 for Oc 3 Network with Socket Port printers DocuTech_Driver 4 0 for Xerox Docutech printers Digimaster_Driver 4 0 for Digimaster Canon printers Chapter 7 Configuration 343 Printer Configuration Add a new P
390. ion PFL Database Configuration of a connection to the database Link Wizard Set the user name password and IP address of the server on which the external archive is located By default the PostgreSQL database which comes with Oc PRISMAproduction Server is connected see Archives Appendix on page 455 You can use the administration application described below only with this database Still it is possible to connect other types of databases see Archives Appendix on page 455 Create Document This dialog creates the link between PFL archive and the Doc Manager Cache ument Manager database Set the PFL archive Configure also the threshold for the begin ning of deletion the amount of data to be deleted and the deletion method From version 3 10 the configuration of the cache archive as PFL cache for external archives is provided for the Document Manager as external database system only see Archives Database Links Document Manager Cache on page 445 Create Database Links 446 Before you can connect a PFL archive to another database as the default database you have to create a database link in the system an save this link under a specified name Create database link Delete database link ase links Administration Document Manager Cache Configuration Name User Database System Server or IP Reload data from server 1 DEFAULT pfladmin Postgres 127 0 0 1 S433 PR
391. ion Parameter Meaning Description lt string gt Name of the plug in for which the con tent is to be displayed The names of the plug ins available are listed by the GetPlu gins command backupID lt string gt Identifier of the backup for which the plug in content is to be displayed dir lt string gt Base directory in which the backup is lo cated Corresponds to a temporary over write of the mount point The following plug in specific information is displayed for the backup given 616 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Parameter Description Type Type of Oc PRISMAproduction Server server the data has been backed up for Master Slave or PrintSlave IP Address IP address of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Root Path Physical root path from which the file sets listed below have been taken Set group of file subdirectories in a directory which are logi cally related As there could be more than one such group in a directory an exclude mechanism is necessary to be able to define different views on the content of the directory Filesets List of file sets which have been included in the backup respec tively have been excluded from the backup Each file set is de scribed by following parameters Physical Directory Physical path of the file set inside the Root Path Logical Directory Name of logical path i
392. ion Server Backup Command Line Client backupID Parameter lt string gt Meaning Description backupID plugins servers lt string list gt lt string list gt List of plug ins The restore is only creat ed for the plug ins defined in this list Default all plug ins List of Oc PRISMAproduction Server servers The restore is only performed for the servers defined in this list Default all servers jobs all The complete job data base is to be re stored for example only all or nothing Default No jobs are restored Note jobs and servers options are mutually exclusive Reason the job information is distributed among all servers Therefore jobs can only be restored into an identical Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server cluster users all lt string list gt all The home directories of all users in the backup are restored lt string list gt the home directories of the users listed are restored lt string list gt The home directories of the users listed are restored Default No home directories are restored Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 609 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Parameter Meaning Description haltonerror true false true The restore process is stopped when an error occurs The directories files al
393. ion Server POD Module you can only create PFL archives which are connected to a database Documents of externally connected PFL archives are always exported to this external archive This means that the document data are always kept together with the meta data on one server The connection to a Document Manager database on a Windows server is a special case only in this case a cache can be created and only in this case the document data are stored directly in the database If the physical disk space of the PFL archive is running short some documents will be deleted according to a specified threshold and method Documents stored on an external archive are not affected by this procedure In this way the PFL archive can be regarded as a cache If you need again documents which have been deleted from the PFL archive they will automatically be retrieved from the external archive Note Li To ensure that the algorithm for deletion of documents in the PFL archive works properly you should assign an own partition to the externally connected archive for ex ample for u prismapro data archive Default The threshold which controls the deletion of documents always relates to the disk space of the whole partition Configuration There are two dialogs in Oc PRISMAproduction Server which allow the configuration of this feature Chapter 7 Configuration 445 Archives Database Links Document Manager Cache Dialog Descript
394. ion of the JCF Parameters Copy Parameters I Filter Section I Filter_TraceFlags Contains the trace flags for better differentiation of the traces in the input filter The trace flags should always be set to FFFFFFF8 Only for data tracing at the highest level trace level 4 the trace flags must be changed to FFFFFFFF Warning data tracing will produce huge data trace files which take up hard disk space Trace parameters are optional When they are used they should be positioned at the beginning of the section I Filter specific trace flags Default FFFFFFF8 I Filter_TraceLevel Defines the trace level for the I Filter component The next higher level always includes all lower levels Parameter is option al o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information Filter_DeleteIn Defines for the Hard Disk input case if imported files should put be deleted usually from u prismapro data resimport Icds o No Deletion Default 1 Delete Input File I Filter_Trace I Filter specific GCI communication interface trace flags De Flags ComInfo fault F Fo0o000000000000 Parameter is mandatory I Filter_TraceLev Defines the trace level for the GCI communication interface el ComInfo during the I Filter part of the copy application The next higher level always includes all lower levels Parameter is mandatory o no
395. ip13032 o0ps de z Mirror Policy Default z Ticket Rule Defaut lv E Force Mode The Ticket Rule selection offers three possibilities select one rule from the list of defined Ticket Rules select Default if the rule defined under Configuration gt System should be valid select none if no Ticket Rule should be applied to the mirror ticket The settings you make in this windows remain valid for all jobs until they are changed again These settings are not part of the job ticket Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 631 Mirror Print Jobs Workflow Mirror Jobs via the PJM Command Line You can also mirror jobs via the PJM command line which offers the same functionality as the graphical interface You find the respective parameters in chapter Command Line Interface gt PJM in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Technical Reference Manual Mirror Jobs via Download To be able to Mirror Jobs using the Download Input Module the global mirror config uration must be performed in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Configuration gt System After this is done the mirror server can be selected in the Download port configuration The print data files are mirrored using the Download daemon if MirrorDataFile Yes see the figure Mirror Print Jobs Introduction on page 625 option 2 This setting can be used only when in the job submission script no print data files are modified since this
396. ippers in the cluster a OS_ConfigurationPlugin with the Operating System configuration data Important This plug in is very special regarding the impact of the data it deals with The data it backs up are considered as cannot be restored or imported directly The reuse of the data is planned to be done manually for example think of the conse quences of the replacement of the etc hosts file a ConfigurationPlugin with the Oc PRISMAproduction Server configuration database backups all configuration backups are included in the system backup Important The current version of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup only saves and writes back configuration backups already created from the Configuration Backup Restore Selecting the ConfigurationPlugin in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup does not create a configuration backup When restoring or importing with Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup the configuration saved with the Con figuration Backup Restore is only written to the respective directory on the master Before you create a new backup with Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup it is advised to create a new configuration backup in Oc PRISMAproduction Server This ensured that the system backup contains the current configuration data a JobsPlugin with the jobs currently spooled in may be included in the backup ma PFL_ArchivesPlugin with the Print File Libraries in the cluster currently no import is possible from versions 3 00 3 0
397. irectory gt If the print job data are linked to one main file the directory with the linked data will be deleted Do not delete Source Data gt Nothing will be deleted Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Handling of Print Job Data after Printing Delete Source File gt If the print job data are linked to one main file only the main file will be deleted Delete Source Directory gt If the print job data are linked to one main file the directory with the linked data will be deleted Do not delete Source Data gt Nothing will be deleted Handling of Print Job Data after Printing without Specification in the Job Ticket Delete Source File gt If the print job data are linked to one main file only the main file will be deleted Delete Source Directory gt If the print job data are linked to one main file the directory with the linked data will be deleted Do not delete Source Data gt Nothing will be deleted Ignore Statement gt Nothing will be deleted Job Start Message Translate Statement directly gt Take job start message from input ticket Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action gt Take job start message from the ticket template Job Attributes Message Message Text Ignore Statement gt Use system default if available Message Translate Statement directly gt Chapter 4
398. is printed Optional C Set class string Optional max 300 characters D Switch debugging on Optional trace is written into file u prismapro diag lp lpr log i Ident output by n characters Optional not supported by the Oc PRISMAproduction Server LPD J Set job name Optional K Set number of file copies the number of copies of one file are printed first before the next file is printed Optional m Send notification mail to lt mail gt Optional 0 Set options can be use multiple times Optional Example oOpt 1 Note Be aware that keywords as listed in the table IBM spe cific OCT conversion see below are automatically converted as OCT parameter as described in this table Example obu building2 P lt printer gt LP printer lt host gt LPD host Optional lt port gt LPD port Optional F Set job title Optional U Set user only allowed for root Optional Chapter 7 Configuration LP Operator Description s CSY w Set output width Optional not supported by the Oc PRISMAproduction Server LPD Normally the Ipr lpr P lt printer gt is used to send a job to the local Oc PRISMApro duction Server LPD If the job has to be forwarded to a remote LPD the generic lp backend is used If the data needs to be passed as it is the Oc PRISMAproduction Server data type Raw Mode has to be used In this workflow the job can be monitored with the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ex
399. is stopped for the oncoming Backup run Actual Backup step it s a backup for version 3 00 the appropriate template is requested could also be omitted as the default is the template for the cur rent version The LCDS resources plug in is the first called and backs up the data on the Master server The time needed to create the tar library and to write it to the external storage device is reported 6 The LCDS resources are also collected on the Slave server 7 There is an additional information line here in the console log reporting the transfer of the tar library This occurs only for backups in version 3 00 as the automatic routing of the tar output directly to the Master server doesn t work and the tar library must be intermediately stored on the Slave 8 The overall time needed to create the backup is reported Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 607 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Restore a Backup 608 The directories files collected in the backup are restored to a system with identical Op eration System the identical Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster and the identical Oc PRISMAproduction Server main version Identical cluster means host names and IP addresses must be identical A backup is identified by its Backup ID which is generated internally when the backup is created To scan for existing backups use the SearchBackups command described below As default all data in the
400. istrate Oc PRISMAproduction Server users The table lists the basic data of a user and allows you to make modifications concerning permission group authorization Language and the Country Prefs If you create a new user or if you want to modify all user data a separate dialog is opened Note Only users in the user roles admin or service are allowed to create new users or to modify existing users Illustration ah xX B User Name First Name Last Name Permission Group Authorization Language Country Prefs operator operator Auto System Default applic applic Auto System Default admin admin Auto System Default service service Auto System Default docsetter operator External System Default operator_restricted operator External System Default Columns 264 Column name Description Name of the user which is used for Oc PRISMAproduction Server login First Name Last Name Personal information on the user max 64 characters Permission Group Double clicking on this column allows you to assign a Permis sion Group to the selected user Chapter 7 Configuration User Management User Column name Authorization Description You can modify this setting for existing user names with the Authorization mode External or Auto You can select three different modes a External For external us
401. itched off The etc hosts file of all servers Master and Slaves must contain all servers of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network Please take care for the correct syntax Example 160 120 20 111 charly ops de charly Illustration x B IP Address Hostname Type Operating System 127 0 0 2 x010222 ops oce net il Master Linux Column Titles Columns Description IP Address The IP address of the server If you want to The symbolic name of the server The type of computer master client or PrintSlave Operating System The server operating system Menu and tool bar functions see General Usage of the Configuration Applications on page 256 Chapter 7 Configuration 301 Master Slave Configuration Add a Server Before adding a server you have to check the following 302 a The IP address of the first network card is the address which is used by Oc PRISMAproduction Server check this with etc sysconfig network ifcfg eth id lt mac address gt This address must be accessible in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network m Job acceptation and job processing must be switched off see chapter Servers in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server User s Guides m The etc hosts file of all servers Master and Slaves must contain all servers of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network Please take care for the correct syntax Ex ample 160 120 20 111 charly ops de charly To
402. iven all jobs beginning with lowest existent job ID up to lt end job ID gt will be shown Program versions There is a console program named dpconnectver which shows the program version of all DPconnect programs The program invocation is dpconnectver Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 195 DPconnect Appendix DPconnect Appendix Translation Rules for Input Job Ticket Statements General pattern Input Job Ticket Statement Translation Mode Alternative Arguments Range of values gt Effect Job Name Translate Statement directly gt Take job name from input ticket Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action gt Take job name from the ticket template Job Parameter Job Name Ignore Statement gt Use system default if available Document Name Translate Statement directly gt Take document name from input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Document Name String length 100 gt Take this alternative doc ument name Ignore Statement gt Discard document name Accounting Translate Statement directly gt Take account string from input ticket Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action gt Take account string from the ticket template Job Information Shipment Account 196
403. ked with Internal use only cannot be changed Default The area next to the Key Value list displays the default value 9 and a short description for the selected keyword Click this icon to reset all values to their defaults Description Apart from the description on the screen the parameters are explained in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Administrators Guide Tuning Sets oa Click this button to enable predefined tuning sets which allow you to easily modify the print parameters of AFP Linedata printers e g to enable traces or to drive non Oc printers For details see also Oc PRISMAproduction Server Technical Reference Manual chapter Print Parameter gt Available Tuning Sets At the moment the following tuning sets are available Enable all Job Infopages Disable all traces Activate media name mismatch MMT message Disable all Job Infopages Non Oce Printers Host and APA controller adjustment 240 DPI Chapter 7 Configuration 353 Printer Configuration Print Parameter Enable full traces Enable SCSI interface Deactivate MMT adjustment Enable all File Infopages Non Oce Printers 300 DPI e g LCDS gt XEROX Non Oce Printers 600 DPI MRM e g gt IBM Disable all File Infopages Activate media attribute mismatch MMT message Disable SCSI interface Example for enabling full traces for IPDS printers TRACE TRACEFILE_LIMIT 1900000 TRACEFLAGS oxFFFFFFFF 354 Chapter 7 C
404. kload you should perform the conversion as a process completely separated from printing The conversion can be carried out at a different time and or in a different place For example conversions can be carried out at night when the print server does not have to handle the same workload or you can convert files on a PC other than the print server After conversion files are available to users in the format required for further processing for example for printing or archiving As well as this integrated approach the PCL Converter can also run as a stand alone process Stand Alone Conversion The PCL Converter can be used separately from Oc PRISMAproduction Server This provides more flexibility for custom solutions with the software A PCL conversion statement command line is provided with the PCL Converter for stand alone processing This enables you to activate conversion automatically via your own programs or shell scripts Integration of a dedicated conversion PC into the production workflow has to take place on site so no facilities can be included in the product package It is up to you to decide how the conversion process can best be integrated to suit your needs We have included a few suggestions in this manual but these are not part of the products functionality as shipped Prerequisites for PCL Conversion PCL conversion requires the following hardware and software Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 109 PCL Conv
405. l The LDAP protocol used LDAP v2 and LDAP v3 are support ed Distinguished Name Defines the point of entry into the LDAP data The hierarchically structured LDAP data tree is searched from this point on All sub nodes of the Distinguished Name will be searched to find the user names with their at tributes Test Connection To ensure that the configured LDAP server settings are correct you can set up a test connection to the LDAP server If no connection is possible or if the auhtentification fails the admin istrator gets significant error messages to correct the settings On the real log in of a user via the log in dialog the reason for the failure is not reported for security reasons To establish a successful connection a test Username and a test Password are required LDAP Integration Properties The following describes the properties with which the LDAP users who are not configured in the user management are integrated into Oc PRISMAproduction Server The following default values are valid for these users Parameter Description Permission Selection of the permission group Group Chapter 7 Configuration 291 System Configuration LDAP Parameter Parameter Description Opens an information window which shows the LDAP at tributes according to the RFC standard assigned to the Oc fields in the User Info application Mapping User Info LDAP Attributes Accoun
406. l time out value defined with the parameter ChannelStopTime The recommended ChannelTimeoutAction should be Close_channel The user script is provided for the user service If it should be available for other users service personal can copy this script in the general or user specific folder User Script reset_LCDS 410 In case of LCDS procedures XRC xd ifilter xfilter being in a hang situation of running in an endless loop these processes may be stopped killed via the delete option in the ODS job queue or the cancel button of the LCDS resource window In case this is not possible for some reason a user script is provided in order to stop the individual executables or delete internal files for example lock files which may be responsible for this hang situation Ifyou call this script user scripts gt service a Linux consol window is opened Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Special Functions and User Scripts displaying a list of the actual running processes using unix ps process status command and displaying the unix process ID and files With y you have the possibility to kill these processes for each type of executable individually delete these files This script like other reset commands as well should be called with special care LCDS Online Jobs via TCP IP Download PRISMAproduction LCDS module is compatible with a Xerox printer In the On
407. le line spacing 64 Default as defined in printer configuration Specifies default table ref erence character oxoo No TRC present oxo1 IBM TRC present oxo2 OCE TRC present Default as defined in printer configuration APA Settings gt Options gt Carriage Control Char acter APA Settings gt Options gt TRC Byte Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket 557 Oce Custom Ticket 558 Parameter Pdsduplx General Description Options and Syntax De fault Specifies default Sim plex duplex information 1 use information from FORMDEF o Simplex 1 Normal duplex 2 Tumble duplex 3 Rsimplex 4 Rnormal duplex 5 Rtumble duplex 6 Zigzag normal 7 Zigzag tumble 9 Rzigzag normal 10 Rzigzag tumble Default as defined in printer configuration Pagedef SPSLib AFP_PageCount EXT_CODED_FONT Form Definition Default F10101 Page Definition Default PiSTD3 List of the default fonts if no other fonts are speci fied List of individual resource paths enables disables count of pages only if pages are not specified yes no Default no List of individual Resource File Name Extensions of coded fonts Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes APA Settings gt Options gt Page Sequence APA Settings gt Resources APA Settings gt Resources gt Form Definitions APA Settings gt Resources gt Page Definitions APA Settings
408. le 29 7 SIM DUP TUM Simplex Duplex Tumble Hit return to continue E Special help for command line mode part 4 here converting PCL to 6o0odpi AFPDS Example 2 for fixed page size Conversion Command into output format AFPDS pela with resolution 600 dpi pcla6 PCL file t1 bin pcla6 t1 bin pcla6 t1 bin D4 pcla6 t1 bin D4_P_SIM pcla6 t1 bin D4_P_SIM t1 af6 with page size A4 and layout simplex into output file t1 af6 Example 3 for variable page size Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Operation Convesion into output format TIFF with resolution 300 dpi PCL file t2 bin pelt3 t2 bin with variable page size in inches pelt3 t2 bin I of 10 3 in X direction of 13 8 in Y direction pelt3 t2 bin I 10 3 pelt3 t2 bin I 10 3 13 8 and layout duplex pelt3 t2 bin I 10 3 13 8 DUP into output file t2 af6 pelt3 t2 bin I 10 3 13 8 DUP t2 af6 Error messages are output on screen via STDERR Standard Error Highlight Color To extract highlight color use 1 2 or 3 for lt special gt 1 extracts red 2 extracts green 3 extracts blue Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 123 PCL Converter Conversion under Oc PRISMAproduction Server PCL Converter Conversion under Oc PRISMAproduction Server Introduction The PCL Converter is integrated into Oc PRISMAproduction Server currently POD Modu
409. le only by way of the Print Job Manager This subject is dealt with in detail in the section describing the Print Job Manager Workflow You control the PCL Converter workflow and define conversion parameters via the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Print Job Manager This creates a job ticket based on the settings you specify and sends the ticket to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master Using the details in the job ticket the master then directs the distribution of the work packages sends instructions to programs and monitors all the stages in job handling This is done in a way that maximizes the data throughput and distributes the workload evenly within the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system PJM Jobticket __ i PCL Converter PRISMApro System z x IOCA Files Workflow when PCL conversion is integrated into Oc PRISMAproduction Server Creating a Conversion Job with the Print Job Manager 1 Working in the Print Job Manager select the PCL file you want to convert and place it in the job list called the List of Files amp Workflow Definition with the data format PCL You can make certain settings for the PCL format in the File Properties window 124 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Conversion under Oc PRISMAproduction Server W In this window select the print format in the Paper size box on the Media tab A4 A4_uncut A3 A3_uncu
410. le you can set the job range on the original Oc PRISMAproduction Server master to 00000001 to 69999999 and on the mirror server from 70000000 to 99999999 User Info BILAG h X Z a General Database Permissions Legacy Files B cluster Active Status Database Name Version Host Port Owner Password E Logging w v Files ace Legacyfiles localhost 0 root Gi Events 7 PostgreSQL PPACC Version 1 localhost 5432 acad pereemes B System 7 PostgreSQL PPACC_V2 Version2 localhost 5432 accadmin etree Devices Master Slave Message System Accounting e Consumables Backup Restore Library paths Delete accounting records automatically E Printers Job Queues E Delete all completed records if they are older than E days me daily at oo K By LCDS Jobs ical Paper al o clock The delete action is completed by a possibly complex compression of the database content To avoid preformance issues it s better to run this action during system s idle time Archives EP Input Modules PRISMAproduction Job Id Pool E DPconnect 4 Z Restriction for creating new job ids 00000001 Z 69999999 Configuration modified Configuration gt Ticket Rules Generally you use Ticket Rules to modify an existing job ticket Ifa Ticket Rule is selected as mirror parameter in the PJM or in the system configuration this rule should modify the ticket of the mirrore
411. lected target printer 146 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Functionality DPconnect DPconnect Functionality Introduction DPconnect enables you to print jobs which have been sent from a Xerox print job submitter to an Oc Oc PRISMAproduction Server system with the POD Module DPconnect can be installed as a license dependent option for the POD Module DPconnect allows you to replace the following Xerox printer types Xerox DocuTech 61xx Xerox DocuTech 1xx HighLight Color Xerox DocuTech 135 Xerox DocuPrint 4635 NPS Xerox DocuPrint 48xx NPS Xerox Nuvera DPconnect emulates the interface between a Xerox print job submitter and the Xerox print server Therefore the known Xerox workflow is not changed Via DPconnect Xerox print jobs will be received converted transferred to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server ODS process chain and executed At this point the print job is a normal Oc PRISMAproduction Server print job No operator interventions are required Additionally DPconnect is able to print jobs which have been created by standard LP clients These jobs may or may not have a Xerox job ticket Also jobs created by Windows printer drivers and by LP programs belong to this type DPconnect Functions DPconnect supports the ASCII ticket format and the XPIF ticket format The following Xerox print submitter software can be used with Oc DPconnect The above mentioned printer types c
412. les each for one application For a description of the workflow see the following chapter Functions of the SCT Window To open the editor window open the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Menu and click on Stockset Configuration The Table Menu Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation 225 LCDS Module Stockset Configuration Tool Menu Entry New SCT DAT Save Exit Description Creates a new SCT DAT file The old SCT DAT will be deleted A warning is displayed asking you to confirm the oper ation Gs B Create new file lt SCT DAT gt Old file lt SCT DAT gt will be lost Nes 2 Please input new tablename Cancel Saves the modified SCT DAT file Exits the program You are prompted to save changes Save changes Ne Cancel Buttons on the Main Window UI Element Table Description Use the arrow button to open a list with all defined tables stored in the SCT DAT file to select from The following tables are predefined when you start the Stockset Configuration Tool STANDARD This table is always locked and therefore cannot be modified or deleted Activate this table when printing an application without stockset definition to show the entry STANDARD in the print queue window TEST This table cannot be locked and should therefore only be used for testing reasons FFi Default table for fa
413. lete value in dots x coordinate 0 value in dots y coordinate 0 protocol off on display work flow off no protocol output ascii strings off d duplex t tumble simplex intray 0 Tray A 1 Tray B 2 Tray C Outtray 0 Dy 24 ees A4 uncut Ad obsolete 0 Ad 1 Aduncut 2 A3 3 A3uncut 4 B4 5 Letter 6 Legal 7 Ledger 8 AS 9 19x24cm 10 13 97x21 59cm A AFPDS P PCL AFPDS The options may appear in any order but must be separated by a blank more fj Highlight color options H lt color gt K U lt R gt W lt G gt Y lt B gt H lt color gt K U lt R gt W lt G gt met SRS Enables highlight color off Extracted color 1 red 2 green 3 blue 4 red green 5 red blue 6 green blue 7 red green blue Separates the highlight color image and the b amp w image off The highlight color image is printed on the first page the baw image is printed on the second page R threshold value red 0 to 255 G threshold value green 0 to 255 B threshold value blue 0 to 255 These options must be used in conjunction except the K option and must be separated by a blank more fj Variable paper size options M or F A arg B arg Example measure in cm measure in inch paper size x direction paper size y direction tiffconv I A 5 0 B 6 0 in out l l 6 inch in y direction
414. lgorithms DataFileSortSequence Ticket or print job control Using fieldnames Field1 Field8 Incomplete data file submission can occur None as long as the trigger file is only when written when previous steps were success ful OCT amp Trigger file File Effects Multiple data files job Yes using subdirectories Data file s must be specified No only when a special sequence of the data files is needed Multiple data files sequence control By specifying sequence in OCT or By activating a sort algorithm DataFileSort Sequence Chapter 7 Configuration 489 HotDir Ticket or print job control Using OCT and or fieldnames Field1 Field8 Incomplete data file submission can occur when None as long as the trigger file is only written when previous steps were success ful The best way to submit the data file s into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system is to use trigger files This prevents the submission of incomplete data files caused by crashing programs or failing networks It also reduces the HotDir overhead because no check is needed to see if a file is still being transferred If the Ticket or print job control is also required the OCT and Trigger file combination can be used The disadvantage of the trigger file is that an additional file needs to be created after the data file or OCT has been written successfully This can be done by a script on Microsoft W
415. line case the Xerox default value and use case for example via MVS Jes is the PCC TYPE IBM3211 It is strongly recommended to use IBM3211 machine code PCC s as input for the LCDS converter module For the use case of download via TCP IP for example PRISMArouter there may be MVS files with ANSI PCC s or no PCC s In order to import these files for example also several MVS Steps which result in several file sections in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server download module in a Jes 370DocuPrint like manner the Download import script LCDS_DL_input is provided This example script should help to simulate the Jes 370 process It is located in u prismapro cfg jobinput bin It should be copied to a customer version and customized using changing the parameters to be found in the head of the script Here the functionality is also defined The script uses functions of the LCDS driver Passthrough package After an update installation it is recommended to compare the customized script with the newly released example provided in a new release enhancements Each parameter serves a certain functionality Merge Merge several files section to one file section to emulate the constant data stream of a 370 channel with no file boundary in between MVS steps In normal use cases it is recommended to use this function PCC Normalize the PCC s 1BM3211 ANSI no PCC to IBM3211 using the PCC type information provided
416. line data in the LCDS line coded data stream on a DocuPrint without data con version Can also be used to print general IBM3211 based line data on line data printers which use the 370 IBM3211 protocol Sends all kind of data to other systems or printers via differ ent protocols Ip or ftp Re places former ftp and lp Backend No data conversion is per formed Licenses PJL_Driver 4 0 LCDS_Driver 4 0 No license required Up to 32 printers can be configured per server The selectable Connection depends on the Printer Model The table lists the maximum connection for each Printer Driver Chapter 7 Configuration 345 Printer Configuration Job Notification Printer Configuration Job Notification Introduction Job Notification is an open interface in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Spool which can be used to either integrate Oc PRISMAproduction Server into customer environments where monitoring tools are in use or for example notify users via E mail after their job has been printed Oc PRISMAproduction Server supports two types of notification 2 a Notification on any printer status changes Printer Configuration Printer Notification on page 369 a Notification on any job status changes of a print job It s currently not available for ODS preprocessing jobs Internally Oc PRISMAproduction Server executes some user configurable pro grams scripts on the app
417. ll as main values from variables which are used This file can be used by the develop ment department to solve an error in the HotDir daemon To create a trace file select Edit gt Edit global parameters gt HotDir in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Input Modules configuration window and change the following parameters Chapter 7 Configuration HotDir Behavior in Error Situations Parameter Value Description Trace flags oxfff cf9 Traces are written with performance information oxfff1cfb no print data files are collected Standard trace Traces as well as data files are collected Data trace Trace level 4 Highest trace level The HotDir daemon only saves one previous copy of the trace file Older trace files are deleted With each HotDir reset or Oc PRISMAproduction Server reset a new HotDir trace file is created Data files however are not overwritten and must be deleted manually when they are not needed anymore Even if the lowest trace level o is used errors are always written So if an error occurs and the trace level is 0 this trace file still contains traces so please also save this file and send it in with the trace files which are additionally created If the traces have been created and the error can be reproduced prismadiag can be used to collect the information Note Beware of the hard disk space when data traces are written Data traces generally are very large and
418. llustration B th X Permission Groups Permissions ae General Explorer settings Explorer session settings Default session m Allow to create change sessions 4 Allow to rearrange workspaces job settings Job modifications Job execution Job mirroring Filter related permissions Confirmation for reprintable jobs J Control jobs of other users E Delete jobs of other users View jobs of other users Print Job Manager settings Media assignments settings Printer Status Viewer settings Tree view List View Ready Columns Column Description Permission Names of the Permission Groups available The permissions Groups can only be modified for user defined groups If one of the basic Permission Groups is marked the permissions cannot be channged Permissions Displays the status of the permissions for the permission group selected You can switch between a list and a tree view In the list view the values can be set to yes allowed or no not allowed In the tree view you can accordingly check the boxes for the permissions which should be allowed for the group selected Editable Permissions Accounting server settings a Configure accounting Explorer session settings 272 Chapter 7 Configuration User Management User Permissions Allow to create change sessions Note Without this permi
419. lowing runs have to be started manually as the tray icon shows You should repeat this until the tray icon shows green only optional updates remaining which you should not install or shows a globe which means that all updates are installed Installing SLES10 Patches from DVD Chapter 1 Installation 23 Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Step Action 1 Insert the SLES 10 SP X DVD into the drive X must be replaced by the respective installed Service Pack Level Cancel any automatic action from the operating system 2 Open YaST Software Patch CD Update 3 Press Next to load all available updates YaST automatically detects which updates are installed on the system and which need to be installed so there is NO manual interaction needed to select updates All security and recom mended bugfix updates are selected automatically for ALL installed software packages 4 Press Accept to start the update 5 On update of certain packages YaST will prompt an additional message for explicit installation for example system libraries kernel which must be accepted Note i Some packages must be installed exclusively In those cases only the exclusive patches will be installed Please repeat the update process in order to install all other patches Note i It is ONLY allowed to use the official Oc Patch DVDs to update the system If any other even the official Novell update is used the me
420. lso LCDS Parameter Configuration LCDS Jobs Window on page 385 Compile Parameters XDL Compiler Section CaseMode Specifies whether the XDL allows lower case characters in the JSL STD lower case is not allowed Default LOWER lower case is allowed LineMode Specifies the number of columns per line STD up to 72 columns Default LONG up to 256 columns For use with the STOCKSET FEED and STOCKS commands in the OUTPUT statement as well as the FEED and STOCKS DJDE XEROX FanFold Accepts and ignores all syntactically correct FEED and STOCKS ET statements FEED AUX and Con ditional Processing RAUX and RFEED but uses input tray 1 for example fanfold input media only LCDS CutSheet Accepts and processes FEED and STOCKS ET statement Default TraceFlags Contains the trace flags for better differentiation of the traces Com Info in the compile process Compile specific GCI communication interface trace flags Default F Fooo00000000000 Parameter is mandatory Defines the trace level for the GCI communication interface during the compile application The next higher level always TraceLevel Com Info includes all lower levels Parameter is mandatory o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information Chapter 7 Configuration 387 LCDS Parameter Configuration Descript
421. lt 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information PrintWhileSpool Enables disables print while spooling ing o Disable jobs get status prepare status ready to print after conversion is ready 1 Enable Default UpdFileDelete Specifies the time SpoolJob deletes the accounting update files o Never 1 After every read access Default 2 After the last read access WaitTime Sleep time in seconds for SpoolJob influences performance Default 5 Please use a smaller value in case the majority of the jobs are small Data check Specifies data checks overwrites the same printer config value Pdschck 1 Printer ignores printing outside of the printable area Default o All data checks are reported by the printer 2 Data check printable characters switched off 3 All datachecks switched off Will increase TCP IP perfor mance during printing data transfer to printer Parameters to be changed manually by editing the PrintLCDS JCF FCB Ignore Indicates whether the online print data will be checked against the FCB o or not 1 The default is o Infopages Indicates whether info pages should be printed YES or NO are valid Chapter 7 Configuration 397 LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters Sample Parameters Sample Section Stamp TraceLevel Defines whether the data time host st
422. lt ticket is specified in the HotDir configuration file In this case all print jobs will have the same problem therefore this HotDir directory will be closed A message appears that the Default Ticket is not found The default ticket is specified as part of the data file name field names In this case the problem is print job specific therefore this print job is moved into the HotDir error directory see section Re submission of error jobs for more details and a message is displayed No Job identifier is provided by the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system In this case the HotDir daemon waits until it gets a correct Job identifier Job Submission problems occur When after a few retries the jobs still could not be submitted HotDir directory is closed and a message is displayed Normal print job processing for the other directories continues Job submission problems when a blank exists in filename or path If a customization script is used to check that the job submission call parameter has the correct syntax See section The Job Submission Script in Input Modules Overview on page 460 for details Re submission of error jobs To re submit error jobs solve the problem and enable the HotDir directory in the Input Status View Also a HotDir reset can be used to re submit these jobs Generating a trace file 500 The trace file is generated by the HotDir daemon and shows the function call sequences as we
423. m the system to prevent the hard disk of filling up Generating a trace file The trace file is generated by the LP daemon and shows the function call sequences as well as main values from variables which are used This file can be used by the development department to solve an error in the LP daemon To create a trace file select menu Edit gt Edit global parameters gt Download in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Input Modules configuration window and change the following parameters Parameter Value Description Trace channel o Defines the port where application socket traces lt LP Port gt are made The value o disables this feature Also the trace flags must have at least the ox00000200 flag set Trace flags oxfffi cfg Traces are written with performance information oxfff1cfb no print data files are collected Standard trace oxfffiefb Traces as well as data files are collected Data trace Traces data files as well as data socket traces are made Socket data trace Set the parameter Trace Channel to the port from which the Socket Data Trace is to be captured Chapter 7 Configuration 525 LP Behavior in Error Situations 526 Parameter Value Description The LP daemon saves only one previous copy of the trace file Older trace files are deleted With each LP reset or Oc PRISMAproduction Server reset a new LP trace file is created Data trace files how
424. m with the PDV if you wish You can repeat this process until you are pleased with the results If you store modified files under the same name the old files are overwritten The advantage of this mechanism is that there is no need to repeatedly convert the files of the print job Description More detailed description of the archive Server Displays the server on which the archive is located Chapter 7 Configuration 443 Archives PFL Archives Column title Description Database links Displays the database type the local archive is connected to Except for the preprint archives all archive are connected to a database The default connection is to the PostgreSQL database which ships with the Oc PRISMAproduction Server software DEFAULT Ready Indicates that the archive is stored correctly and ready to use This might take a while if you mirror archives of many megabytes You can only use archives in the PJM which have the status Ready Create a PFL Archive 444 Click the Add button or select menu PFL Configuration gt Create library to create a new PFL archive a Inthe followin dialog enter a Name for the new archive only alphanumeric characters are allowed Select as archive Type Final cache or Preprint cache This selection depends on the type of data you want to save see description above After entering a more detailed Description of the archive
425. mand only shows Jobs which are submitted from the same node as the lpq command is executed Be aware that when a Network Address Translation Table NAT is used between the lp clients and the LPD all the computer systems behind the NAT are seen as one node This means that all these nodes can see each other LP jobs and also can delete these see description of the lprm command Chapter 7 Configuration LP Syntax u prismapro bin lpq D P lt printer gt lt host gt lt port gt l u prismapro bin Ipq V Operator Description Switch debugging on Optional trace is written into file u prismapro diag lp lprm log lt printer gt LP printer lt host gt LP host Optional lt port gt LPD port Optional Long status information Optional V Lpq version The output of the Ipq command is determined by the LPD implementation which answers the request The following output examples are the output which is generated by the Oc PRISMAproduction Server LPD Output example u prismapro bin Ipq P lptesto1 short format Hostname Owner GECI Jobld Job Name a Status Size Files nn752257 0 root 68325527 wait 680K fat_i bugs_d RBT600 pees aaa fee meee eee meee edad eee fe eee eres nn752257 0 root 68325530 6oodpi_wit 1 wait 952 etc hosts In case of an error the following return codes and messages are used m Unknown LP parameter a Problem connecting to LPD server
426. may contradict the impositioning required by the incoming job The decision on which impo sitioning overrides the other one is made in the DPconnect configuration GUI with the check box Input Job Ticket overrides Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket In case the PDC impositioning scheme should take effect this check box has to be switched off If the incoming job impositioning should take effect this check box has to be switched on Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Configuration Example DPconnect Configuration Example Introduction If configuring LP input queues printers printer postprocessing combinations in Oc PRISMAproduction Server as well as defining logical printers on the DigiPath you have to take care of some assignment rules These help to avoid operating errors and cause a simplification of workflows The following figure shows an example on how to achieve a reasonable assignment It shows three different printers 1 2 3 on which print jobs from DigiPath can be printed in five different alternatives General The LP input queues serve as input channels for the DigiPath print jobs Every input queue is dedicated an own ticket template This template contains information on how the print jobs received via this queue should be printed for example booklet print Printers are the receivers of the print jobs Each printer is assigned a DPconnect transla tion table This table contains information on how
427. may be used to switch SPS header and trailer pages on or off m The PJM parameter Print Header Trailer 2 The PrintLCDS JCF parameter Infopages YES NO if LCDS print window is used 3 The JSLACCT USER NONE BIN parameter in XEROX case used to switch XEROX accounting page on or off in LCDS it may be used to switch SPS header trailer pages on or off if used in start JDL JDE NO SPS trailer pages with accounting information are printed as stated in JSL ACCT USER command DEFAULT Parameter 3 YES SPS trailer pages with accounting information are printed as stated in JCF or PJM parameter Parameters 1 and 2 Defines which information is to be transferred into the field JJOBNAME in the spool window The format is type offset length Default 1 0 6 2 0 6 3 0 1034 0 16 for details see chapter Specific Notes OffsetSecndRod OtextOff see Copy Parameters o default Normal default behavior 1 WAIT Option for OTEXT will be ignored 2 OTEXT will be completely ignored Chapter 7 Configuration 395 LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters I Filter Traces Section SaveXRX m O default handling like v3 02 4 Downloaded resources DJDE FILF are not stored in original xerox format m new Downloaded resources DJDE FILE are actually stored in original xerox format in subcat s fnt_conv img_conv frm_conv lgo_conv to be eventually r
428. mirrored job so that this job can be submitted on the mirror server You can set this parameters in Configuration gt System and or in the PJM gt Transfer Mode The Ticket Rule which is set in the system configuration is only applied if the Ticket Rule setting in the PJM is set to Default Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Mirror Print Jobs Workflow Mirror Print Jobs Workflow Introduction There are some user interfaces in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer which allow to make your settings for mirroring the print jobs on a different Oc PRISMAproduction Server master server All settings have to be done on the original server except for the permissions to delete release mirrored jobs see below Basic Mirror Settings in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Configuration gt System In the section Mirroring you can define the global settings for this function some of these settings can be overwritten in the PJM Mirroring Mirror Server berlin ops oce net User Name mirror_user Password eeccccece Mirroring Policy Mandatory Z Ticketrule CHG_PRT_ON_MIRROR M UI Element Description Mirror Server Sever name of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master which receives the mirrored print jobs User Name User name under which the mirrored job is generated on the mirror server future owner in the joblist This user must exist on the mirror server
429. mited support exists Operation The data files can be provided in four different ways Each of these ways allows a different amount of Ticket print job control Here is an overview of the possible variations and the effects they have the corresponding parameter names are written in parentheses Data file File Effects Single data file job Multiple data files job Data file s must be specified Multiple data files sequence control Ticket or print job control Using fieldnames Field1 Field8 Process crashes or Network mounts are used Incomplete data file submission can occur when ij OCT Single data file job Yes 488 Chapter 7 Configuration HotDir File Effects Multiple data files job o data files Multiple data files job o Yes using subdirectories Yes using subdirectories subdirectories Data file s must be specified No In OCT only when a special se quence of the data files is needed Multiple data files sequence control By specifying sequence in OCT or By activating a sort algorithm DataFileSortSequence Ticket or print job control Using OCT and or fieldnames Field1 Field8 Incomplete data file submission can occur Process crashes or Network mounts are when used Trigger file File Effects Single data file job Yes Multiple data files job Yes using subdirectories Multiple data files sequence control By activating the sort a
430. mmand Line with the following command pjm parameter Parameters All parameters are optional and can be entered in any order Information Pa rameters or no parameter v Connection Pa rameters s lt server name gt user lt user name gt Ticket Parameters t lt ticket name gt oct lt oct name gt Meaning display all parameters available There is no processing action in this case display version number There is no processing action in this case Meaning server to which the job or command is to be sent Default the local system user name under which the PJM command line connects to the PRISMAproduction server Default the current user Meaning Path of the local Job Ticket Job ticket containing default parameters Default no job ticket Path of the Oct Oc Custom Ticket is used to modify the local Job Ticket or the Reprint Job Ticket or the empty Job Ticket if none has been defined Default no oct 536 Chapter 8 PJM Command Line PJM Command Line Parameters Information Pa rameters r lt reprint name gt tr lt ticketrule gt Print Parameters jn lt job name gt Meaning Logical path of reprint ticket data The reprint job must be specified as follows can be replaced by as the use of the character is restricted in some operating systems U PFL Archive User Document for private or PFL Archive User Document for public job
431. mplete data file is received It is also Chapter 7 Configuration 465 Input Modules Overview 466 possible to specify grouped jobs where multiple data files are submitted as a single print job The print job submission is done by calling the pjm program with the Default ticket OCT and some other specified parameters By specifying a script name instead of the pjm executable a special customer specific modification can be done The better way of customization is using the Ticket Rules to modify the parameters of the ticket during the pjm submit process instead of a submit script Another possibility is to use a customization script which calls the pjm program to submit the job after the OCT modification or data file conversions are done This is no longer neccessary if only ticket parameters have to be modified as the TicketRules application provides a sure maintainable in the workflow well documented and high performant solution for this task Note Be aware that during the execution of the customization script the HotDir Input Module daemon is waiting for the script to finish The longer the script needs to be executed the higher the risk is to loose the print job So please make it fast and short The customization script is called with the same parameters as the syntax of the job sub mission program The scripts must be saved in the directory u prismaproduc tion cfg jobinput bin The syntax of the job su
432. mport accounting records with time stamp use the import button 4 The import is done like normal sending accounting records to the accounting server so parsing the records may take a longer while This task is to be done once after installation and activa tion of a new database structure Delete accounting records automatically i Here you can define the number of days after which the old and completed accounting entries will be deleted automatically at system startup Additionally you define here a daily deletion time Files old files are simply deleted Database entries which are referenced by entries from other tables are not deleted Unfinished entries TIME_OUT is still NULL are not deleted Note The delete button in the tool bar X can be used to call the cleanup procedure imme diately PRISMAproduction Job Id Pool Restriction setting for creating new Oc PRISMAproduction Server job ids This feature can be used to exchange jobs between primary servers without job id conflicts as long as the job id range is limited to the range 1 99999999 Chapter 7 Configuration 319 Accounting Administration Database Permissions Accounting Administration Database Permissions Introduction The configuration of the PostgreSQL database only allows access to internal user accad min This user is the owner of the database and he has full access to it On this tab additional users can b
433. n Example u prismapro bin lpc enable lptesto1 In case of an error the following return codes and messages are used m Unknown LP parameter m Problem connecting to LPD server m Problem occurring executing LP command LP Daemon The LP Daemon LPD receives local or remote jobs using the LP protocol This means that it must be able to communicate with other LP clients as well as other LP daemon implementations Since the LP protocol is not accurately defined a lot of variations of the protocol exist Most of the time this is also the cause of the LP problems i Note MS Windows The LPR byte counting enabled check box by the printer port configu ration is no longer needed This speeds up spooling the print job Chapter 7 Configuration 515 LP LP Protocol to OCT Conversion Internal LP Parameter Multiple en tries or OCT Parameter Description job Copies Job copies Default 1 C job Job_Class Job queue when number gt o and lt 999 originator Sending_Param_C Job class originator Sending_Param_I Ident spaces Not supported job Job_name Job name job Active_Notification Mail notification Originator Send Special options ing Param_O lt nnnn gt originator Receiving_In LP printer name put Channel originator Sending_Title Job title originator Sending_User Remote user originator Sending Param_W Page width Not supported 1 Not supported by Oc
434. n and inhibit the further processing in the Unity Thus a AFPDS document is generated that misses the contents of those TIFF files In a second step the reference file is read and the TIFF files will be converted into IOCA resources within a new AFPDS file Next this file will be merged with the AFPDS file previously generated by the Unity This is done together with include commands at those places in the file being captured in the reference file list This will minimize the rendering efforts of the Unity and optimize the resulting AFPDS file by reusing common TIFF objects as resources Requirements 100 GTS has the following requirements a Unity_RIPR 4 0 license a Unity_GTS_Extension 4 0 license To use this feature the PostScript source file has to use a Get Tiff macro with a file name as input parameter to the macro For example StandardLetter tif GetTiff Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Jobrequirement Functional Module Jobrequirement Jobrequirement Functional Module Introduction The jobrequirement functional module has been designed to better meet requests coming from printroom environments in particular to enable a printroom manager to route jobs to suitable printers Definition The basic task of the jobrequirement module is to scan a POD print job for its require ments which have do be fulfilled by the printer this job will be printed on Therefore jobrequirement may be integrated as an addi
435. n be defined byname These Color Names must match those in the source file Separations may be used each as a separate plane or can be merged to one single plane Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Workflow Extended AIMS Concept Workflow Extended AIMS Concept Introduction With the Oc PRISMAproduction Server version 3 02 18 a new extended Attribute based Input Media Selection is introduced This concept helps to overcome the following restrictions with the Oc VarioPrint printers m Color and mediatypes are predefined on the printer Custom defined names for color and media types are not possible m Tab Ordered Material restrictions With this extended AIMS concept settings which before you had to perform on the printer itself are now performed on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Printer hardware related functions like clustering and tab printing must also be defined on the printer itself With this concept it is also possible to run pure input bin number oriented printers like Oc Pagestream 75 55 or only medianame oriented printers like the Oc Pagestream 156 via IPDS Workflow m Inthe Configuration gt Paper application you may define the media types with all respective attributes You can enter any paper color you want for example sky blue or blossom white If you click on Media Settings in the Printer Pool application tool bar icon or menu entry you can
436. n bytes De fault 3 2000 ChanDEDelay ChanCondCode This parameter defines the delay in milliseconds between the end of I Filter processing a received ccw and the device end set by the I Filter Setting a delay time gt 0 may be useful when the channel operates in daisy chain mode and other network traffic is running parallel Defines the status of the channel after channel close command ONLINE Channel goes not ready OFFLINE Channel goes offline Default Chapter 7 Configuration 393 LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters I Filter Traces Section ChanTimeoutAc tion DeleteInput Defines what happens after ChanTimeout SEND_REND Always sent end record close report CLOSE_CHAN Default Always close channel DIALOG Opens a dialog box m Finish current report a YES like SEND_REND a NO m Close Channel like CLOSE_CHAN Defines whether the input file is to be deleted after processing o input file will not be deleted Default 1 input file will be deleted Device Name1 2 3 4 Defines the channel device for the channel1 selection in PJM LCDS XDATA_DEVICE Analogously DeviceNamez to DeviceName4 address channelz to channel4 for parameterisa tion of up to five different input channels for possible parallel input X Filter Section X Filter section AlignScan AlignDot Specifies whether the xrx input files should be deleted afte
437. n executable for the MS WINDOWS platform m Asa JAR archive for all operating systems Advantage of the Executable version a The Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer Icon is associated with the executable a The Java Runtime System is automatically located The JAR version is a pure Java archive and therefore platform independent On the SuSE LINUX and MS Windows platform JAR files are automatically associated with the Java Runtime via the file extension mechanism in case a Java Runtime has been installed If the download is targeted to the desktop the Explorer can started afterwards by just double clicking on the icon Note i The proposed file name for the Launcher is Oc PRISMAproduction Server lt mas ter gt lt jarlexe gt It could be renamed in the save dialog or later on but the extension must be kept 58 Chapter 2 Remote Access to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer Access with the Explorer Launcher Configuration i The Launcher must always be downloaded from the appropriate Oc PRISMAproduction Server master as it is configured automatically on the server dependent on the current client connection It should never be copied directly among client hosts The configuration becomes part of the JAR respectively EXE file and is not applicable to modifications on the client site If any configuration parameters change at the moment just the host name or IP address the current versio
438. n media 15 OVERVIEW EE TEIE ES 12 Prerequisites sorencsanenmerna unian 13 Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 WD annia e A e aae 18 IP Address change IP Address change srnsnmnesneiinetsnn 51 J JCF Job Control Files JCF Job Control Files ccceeeceeeeeeeees 382 JCF Parameters JCF Paratneters prisioneroen iioi 387 Jobrequirement Jobrequiremicht sssiseciniiiiiianacdicsien 101 L Launcher NEE hatel ot care peeneene terre re iinn a er ter prrers 56 LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters Job Control Files JCF oe a LCDS Jobs Window nsss Online Configuration wo Special Functions and User Scripts LCDS Module New Catalog suiii 214 Organization of Resources 215 Stockset Configuration Tool wo 223 LDAP Parameter LDAP Paramete ices niacrdasiea ans 290 Library Paths Library Paths seia ERE 337 Licenses Licenses anaran nomie e REENA 313 Logging Configuration Logging Configuration ccccceeseeseeeeen 278 Login Dialog Logi Dialog iss issctsess sesesssasievcssescieseideedeiasess 260 640 M Master Slave Configuration Master Slave Configuration occas 301 Message System Automatic ANSWETS ccccceeesseessesessessseeees Automatic Saving General Settings Message Suppression OVERVIEW esserserieieiviecixe WAS CCS a E NEERA Mirror Print Jobs Introduction s zena e
439. n of Conditions Settings Messages and Return Exit Introduction There are dialogs to add a condition a setting a foreach action a message a subRule a return exit command or a comment to a rule All these dialogs contain a list of previously defined actions and offer the functionality to use existing create new or to copy elements The genaral procedure to define these actions is as follows m Click the appropriate Add before or Add after button of the desired action in the rule definition tool bar to open the corresponding action definition window a Ifyou click Use existing in the action definition window the selected action will be added to the sequence of actions at the selected position Click the Copy button to copy and modify an existing element Click the Add new button to open the definition windows for conditions and settings Click the Cancel button to close the action definition window without changes General features and conventions Errors in any field for example if the name inserted is not unique turn the text in this field into red and a short description of the error can be seen in the tool tip Add condition Dialog Description Name FileSize Each Condition has a unique name which hi sa Following characters are only allowed Parameter files File_Size iy alphanumeric character and _ he name is Operator alpha numeric equals Filesize Value
440. n of the entries you can make in this dialog Apart from the settings described in this table you can add contact and address information for the new user For the E mail address only letters numbers and special characters _ at symbol underscore dot hyphen are allowed For the password settings refer to System Configuration Password on page 295 Be aware that the default values in this view are preset by the values which have been set in the System Configuration Password Aging parameters cannot be edited for users with Authorization Auto For LDAP users neither passwords nor Password Aging param eters can be changed Chapter 7 Configuration 267 User Management User Edit User You modify users using the same dialog as described above The only difference is that you cannot modify the user name field To edit a user m select from the menu User gt Edit or m select Edit from the context menu Edit Selected Users Via multi selection the administrator is able to perform the following modifications for more than one user at the same time a User with Authorization Auto Change password a User with Authorization External Modify password and password aging parame ters Copy User You can copy the currently selected user in the table to create a new user All settings apart from user name and password are copied in this case The user name is automatically creat
441. n or the Launcher must be deleted and a new one must be downloaded Note When a Launcher is deleted its Cache is also to be deleted About where the cache is located see chapter Caching below Miscellanous Caching The Oc PRISMAproduction Server Launcher also uses a caching mechanism to speed up the loading process The application is downloaded once cached and later on only newer versions are downloaded again The cache is located in the users home directory under prisma launcher cache http lt master gt Sexplorer explorer jnlp When the Launcher is downloaded again because the lt master gt address has changed the subdirectory http lt old master gt Sexplorer explorer jnip should be deleted Compatibility Issues As the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Launcher is installed locally there is a compatibil ity issue when the server environment changes To avoid user inconvenience the following policy will be pursued the interface between client and server will be kept downward compatible that means if the user doesn t need any upcoming extensions he can stay with the current version A new version must only be downloaded in case of a necessary bugfix a name IP address change or when requesting a new feature Chapter 2 Remote Access to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer 59 Access with the Explorer Launcher 60 Chapter 2 Remote Access to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer
442. n process writes the system configuration and after that the Release Notes of the new Service Pack Level of the operating system are shown Please click Next to continue 30 Chapter 1 Installation Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 i Action Last the Installation Completed window is shown Please disable the check box Clone This System for Autoyast and click Finish to boot into the upgraded system g Installation Completed Congratulations The installation of on your machine is complete After clicking Finish you can log in tothe system Visit us at http www novell com linux Have a lot of fun Your SUSE Development Team C Disable ZMD Service C Clone This System for Autoyast Note If additional software is installed by the customer this behavior can be different to what is described in this document and can require additional actions to upgrade customer software as well But it is NOT possible to have any information or documentation here for any of these issues Chapter 1 Installation 31 Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Introduction A 32 The following chapter explains basic configuration settings for the Linux system like the configuration of the network and the setting of date and time Attention If the files for the network configuration a
443. name contains ABC Main Tool Bar and Ticket Rules Menu Menu Entry Icon Save all elements fea Discard all changes amp Create a new ele ment sb Copy selected ele ment rE Delete selected ele ment x Description All changes done in the GUI are saved and become valid Changes done in the GUI are not applied to tickets of incoming jobs before the save button is pressed If the application is closed before saving the changes the user will be asked to save the changes All changes since the last save are discarded and the rules and other elements are reloaded from the server again Opens a dialog to create a new rule parameter variable or value table A unique name is required for all these elements Opens a dialog to copy and modify selected elements First you have to enter a different name The system automativally pro poses the existing name plus a numbered extension You are asked for confirmation before the element is deleted 420 Chapter 7 Configuration TicketRules Main Window Menu Entry Icon Description i Import value table This button is only enabled if the value table tab is selected A 4 file selection box opens and a value table stored in a file with csv format is imported The user is also asked to define the exact csv format If the value table to import already exists the user is asked if it shall be overwritten Ifa column header that is re f
444. name of the Document Manager cache Only use alphanumeric characters PFL Archive Select the desired PFL archive for example PflArcho1 Cache Threshold Value from which the deletion of documents in the PFL is MB started This value must not exceed Maximal available size on partition Maximal available size on pattition Current used size on partition Size of the partition on which the PFL archive is located Currently used size of the partition on which the PFL archive is located Cache Cleanup Percentage value between o and 100 It defines how many per cent of the data in the PFL archive are to be deleted if the threshold has been exceeded A document which is deleted from the PFL has the size 1 This means this document is not stored locally anymore but only on the external server Cache Cleanup Method Opens a list of available methods Date Deletion depends on the date Oldest documents first Size Deletion depends on the size Smallest documents first Match Deletion depends on a pattern Wildcards like or are allowed All documents which match the pattern are deleted NonMatch Same as above but all documents which do not match the pattern are deleted Database Link Select the external archive which should be connected to the PFL archive selected above Chapter 7 Configuration Archives Database Links
445. ncel job s listed Cancels a job a list of jobs The jobid is the 8 digit number displayed when a job is submitted Name s of Reprint Resource Delete documents in Print File Libraries and Resource files You have to add the fully qualified logical path can be re placed by as the use of the character is restricted in some operating systems If you are logged in as admin root or system you can replace the userid in the filename by the wildcard Example PFL Archive User Document for private reprints 1 OVERLAYS User Document for public overlays Meaning mirror lt server name gt Server on which the job should be mirrored during submission The mirror server must be defined under Configuration gt System on the original server Respective option on the GUI PJM gt Menu Job gt Transfer Mode gt Mirror Jobs during Submissionand Mirror Server Default no mirroring of jobs mp lt policy gt Mirror policy optional mandatory Respective option on the GUI PJM gt Menu Job gt Transfer Mode gt Mirror Jobs during Submission and Mirror Policy Default The value set in Configurtion gt System Chapter 8 PJM Command Line PJM Command Line Parameters Information Pa rameters mtr lt ticket rule gt muser lt user name gt mpw lt password gt Meaning Mirror no data The data must exist on the mirror server to print the job Respecti
446. ne configuration view called Input Modules In the upper window section an overview of the already defined input channels Down load ports HotDir directories and or LP printers is displayed The columns of the lower window show the main settings of the input channel s After having selected one entry in the upper window the parameters of this input channel can be modified in the lower left window section When a parameter is selected the lower right window section shows the parameter defaults and a description Input Modules Tool Bar Icon Description Save l Save the Input Module changes For each changed Input Module type a question pops up whether this Input Module is to be restarted Nothing happens when no changes have been made Create new Input Channel ob Copy selected In put Channel a Chapter 7 Configuration By clicking the main icon the same Input Module type is created as currently is selected By clicking the down arrow a pop up menu is shown where the Input Module type to be created can be selected Create a copy of the currently selected input channel Input Modules Overview Icon Description Delete selected In Delete the currently selected input channel put Channel x Reload configura tion amp By clicking the main icon all changed Input Module configu rations are discarded and the previous settings are reload
447. nee 342 OU SHEE ss aerer REE Ea 365 Custom specific Infopages and Resources for Con figured Printers 1 362 General Tab 1349 Gray CURVES uorotean riais 370 Input Devices keneen aT caease 367 Job Notification cccccceseeeseeesseeteeseeseneees 346 JOB Ques nri dsini as 364 Output Devices 368 Overview s s 339 Postprocessing Devices 368 Print Parameters iseisceieessstedisdessectescscavecexssecees 352 Printer Drivers Backends csccsceseeseseees 355 Printer Notification Toner Stations ern RE A E PRISMAproduction Backup Command Line Client cccceceeseeseeeseeees 603 CGOSSary sasinen nee EE a 623 Tasks and Components s sssssssssssssssssissessesees 596 Properties for PCL file PCL Native Workflow c cccesesessessersereeee 237 S Services Table Services Table c cccccccccsccsecssscsecsseessessseeseees 39 System Configuration Country Preferences sesser 293 eMail Notification cccccceccesecsseesseesseeeseeees 286 JObsParamieten cacsctssicsfasacescsbcatestestusdsescevaseeses 285 LDAP Parameter 290 Mirroring s es 288 ODS Parameter 282 OVERVIEW criias irisean iaie iS 281 PassWord cccccscsssscesscesscssscesecssecsscesecssesseeaes 295 System Parameter s cccsccssessceesceeeeenceeeeeees 284 T Tabs Pabsiset oii sisissesciki esa Gas cacti 414 TicketRules Activate for LP Download and HotDir 440 CONAIONS sser earra E a 425 Definition of rules
448. nfirm the action Result When setting up a new catalog the sub catalogs rds and xpar are created automatically See also LCDS Module Organization of Resources on page 215 214 Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation LCDS Module Organization of Resources LCDS Module Organization of Resources Introduction JSLs in Unix ASCII text format and AFP resources especially resources already created by XRC process of other LCDS systems may be put into the respective sub catalogs jsl and rds of the target catalog For this purpose the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer Server Files application with service or admin rights may be used With this file manager recommended is the use of the GCI file system of the respective server JSLs and converted AFP resources within rds may be copied from one catalog subcat into another catalog or from the local server file system to a catalog subcat Copy Resources li 1 W Transport for example using ftp the files to a local source directory for example to u admin Note In case of ftp transfer of text files from DOS Windows system please use ascii transfer mode In case of transfer of binaries print resources please use bin transfer mode In this local directory or for example in the jsl or rds subcat of the source catalog mark select the files left mouse button which you want to copy Note Please note
449. nfold printers only one input bin CS1 Default table for cutsheet printers 226 Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation LCDS Module Stockset Configuration Tool UI Element ACTIVE LOCKED Description Checking this box will activate the table shown in the SCT window This table will be used and locked by the x filter when printing an application If you use the Print Job Manager to submit LCDS print jobs you have to insert the name of the table which should be used in the LCDS File properties window in the field Active SC Table This will have the same effect as checking this box If this box is checked either by the user service or admin or by the system the table shown in the window cannot be modi fied New name Changes the name of an existing unlocked table Show actual This button enables you to view the actual settings of the table assigned to the job which is currently printing This may be helpful if the active table has been modified in the meantime During job conversion the used table is locked and cannot be modified A form message text will be generated for this job displaying the table name which is valid for the initial paper loading This valid and unchanged table is shown in the SCT window Show active Displays the active table if present New Creates a new empty table Define the maximum number of input bins up to
450. ng attributes with name type and length PflPath String PflSearch String 1024 PflVersion Integer m Under Console Root gt Oce PRISMAarchive Administration gt Document Admin istration gt Document Templates create a template with the name PFLDOCUMENT which contains the attributes PflName PflPath PflVersion and PflSearch m Under Console Root gt Oce PRISMAarchive Administration gt Document Inter faces gt Profile create a profile in the Business Domain Defaullt with the name PFLEXT and the owner pfladmin or the user ID created under Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server 11S Internet Information Service Winows Server 2000 2003 Chapter 7 Configuration 449 Archives Database Links Document Manager Cache Start the tool with Start gt Administrative Tools gt Internet Information Services IIS Manager and allow under Internet Information Services gt Local Computers gt Web Service Extension the following settings All unknown CGI Extensions All unknown ISAPI Extensions Active Server Pages Server Side Includes SSI 450 Chapter 7 Configuration Archives Administration Archives Administration Introduction On this tab you find a collection of basic administration tools for the archives and external databases You can save and restore the data you can automate
451. ng of internal output tray LOWER 101 Setting of output tray EXTERNAL 102 Setting of output tray EXTERNAL2 SET_PRINT Enable or disable setting of print file output to check the output FILE o print file If set to 1 the output print file will be written in directory u prismapro diag printers lt printer name gt prn o setting of print file output disabled 1 setting of print file output enabled SET_TIMER o Enable or disable setting of the timer for dummy job inquires o setting of timer disabled 1 setting of timer enabled Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation 247 PCL Module Print Parameters 248 Parameter De fault Value STA TUS_TIMED 1 USE_PJL 1 Description Enable or disable setting of the regular inquire for the printer status o setting of inquire disabled 1 setting of inquire enabled Note For Functional Code V3 05 XX and lower In the Printer Parameter Section PJL set STATUS_TIMED on o Default setting on 1 may give unpredictable re sults Enable or disable PJL job control and PJL printer info o PJL disabled 1 PJL enabled Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation Chapter 7 Configuration Configuration Overview Overview and Usage of the Configuration Interfaces Configuration Overview Introduction i i The configuration interfaces are used to configure an Oc PRISMAproduction Server system This entails defining which computers are
452. nly Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Oce Custom Ticket Parameter St_Preprint_Dest St_Resource_Public St_Native_Public St_PFL_Public St_Preprint_Public St_PFL_Delete General Description Options and Syntax De fault Name of preprint cache where output is to be stored Default no Store resource public yes no Default no Store native data public yes no Default no Store in PFL public yes no Default no Store as Preprint public yes no Default no Delete preprint after it has been released to a PFL yes no Default no Attach message to a job yes no Default no Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Job Attributes gt Store Output POD only Text of the message Job Attributes gt Message Message_Type Type of the message display confirm Default display General option to print job header pages or not yes no Default n
453. nnector and demo files installed in u prismapro demo odda m Designer Formatter LINUX RPM license dependent CD must be ordered and in stalled separately for all versions from Oc PRISMAproduction Server V3 10 05 For detailed information see the release notes installation description distributed with the RPM Usage of the Document Designer The following steps are necessary to be able to use the ODDA support in Oc PRISMAproduction Server m Install the two RPMs mentioned above and provide the necessary licenses When successfully activated an Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow service oddaser vice and a library named ODDA is available in Oc PRISMAproduction Server The library is designed as common access point for the ODDA resources Workflow and Job Configuration called in the ODDA service The library concept guarantees that the resources are accessible from all servers within an Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster 634 Chapter 12 Oc Document Designer Integration in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Oc Document Designer for Oc PRISMAproduction Server Note there are 2 licenses involved the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Connector license and ODDA Command Line license The Oc PRISMAproduction Server Connector license enables disables the ODDA support the ODDA license allows execution of the ODDA Command Line program in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow m Enable access to the resources used by the
454. nnectset k yln s yln h v The meaning of the options is as follows Option Description sSY ly Switch logging on ln Switch logging off tn Sets the trace level to n where n has to be in the range from o to 4 o means no trace at all 4 is the highest level which gives the most detailed report ky Switches the hold data function on k n Switches the hold data function off sy Switches the call of the PJM on so jobs are being put into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow s n Switches the call of the PJM off so jobs are not being put into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow h Shows the help screen v Shows the version of this program Invoking the program without any option displays the current settings Temporary DPconnect data which are held are stored in u prismapro tmp dpconnect Trace and log file are written to the path u prismapro diag dpconnect There are up to six different trace and log files written for each print job Each file has the ODS job ID in its name The file names are Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 193 DPconnect Maintenance Programs lt job ID gt _startdpconnect_ lt pid gt log lt job ID gt _dpconnect_ lt pid gt trc lt job ID gt _pjmdpconnect_ lt internal number gt log lt job ID gt _dpconnectserv_ lt internal number gt tre Trace and protocol files and temorary data are deleted periodically by the dels script The d
455. not finished complete Transfer Job Control Generally speaking only one server has the control over the job The job control can be transferred to the other server and back again On the server without job control the job Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 627 Mirror Print Jobs Prerequisites and Functionality 628 has the status Exception mirrored When transferring the job control the status of the job changes respectively The possibility to manually transfer the control over the job to the mirror server depends on the job status and on a permission granted to the user in the user administration Mirror Policy Controls the behavior of the system if mirroring jobs is enabled Parameter Description Mandatory If this option is selected the system only creates the job if mir roring was successful In other words the job is submitted on both systems or it is not submitted at all Optional In this case the system tries to mirror the job but if this is not successful the job will be submitted on the original server any way You can set these parameters in Configuration gt System and or in the PJM gt Transfer Mode The PJM policy always overrides the setting in the System window If you set the policy in the PJM to Default the setting in Configuration gt System becomes valid Mirror Ticket Rules Select a Ticket Rule which has been configured to modify the ticket of the
456. nstallation Security and Services Security and Services Introduction The Linux for Oc PRISMAproduction Server security concept has changed to be much more secure restricted The following services are not enabled anymore as default m Samba Server DO a FULL Configuration before enabling m By default root access to the server is disabled using the FTP protocol After installing Oc PRISMAproduction Server the Oc PRISMAproduction Server users and any additional users created are able to access the server using ftp i Note The write access is restricted to those directories for which the user is granted write access by the file system The following services are not installed anymore Apache Webserver MUST NOT BE INSTALLED m RSH server m RLOGIN server m REXEC server These services can be manually installed using YaST configuration tool section Software subsection Install Remove Software if absolutely needed It is not recommended to use any of these services for security reasons To enable the services use YaST section Network Services subsection Network Services xinetd To see which ports are opened please login as root and enter one of the following com mands netstat anp grep LISTEN lsof i grep LISTEN See also Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 on page 32 Note li The inetd daemon is enabled by default after installing Oc PRISMAproduction Serve
457. nt LDAP Support Introduction Oc PRISMAproduction Server supports the authorization via LDAP Lightweight Di rectory Access Protocol This has some advantages for example m Security mechanisms of LDAP can be used for examle deterioration of passwords m Enables the user to work with the same login data on different platforms The general data of the user and above all the essential login data user name and password are kept only in the LDAP data pool On the user login Oc PRISMAproduction Server tries to find the user name in the in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server data base If the user cannot be authorized in this way Oc PRISMAproduction Server tries the login via the LDAP server If LDAP has authorized the user he is allowed to access Oc PRISMAproduction Server Test Connection to the LDAP Server 262 In order to authorize via LDAP Oc PRISMAproduction Server needs information to connect to the LDAP server These connection parameters must be supplied in the System Configuration To ensure a correct connection to the LDAP server the Oc PRISMAproduction Server administrator can establish a test connection with his data At this point the administrator receives significant error messages why the connection or the authorization fails For security reasons on a normal login only a general error message is issued if the login fails To test the connection and only for this reason the administrator has to pro
458. nt UP3I Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring landscape staple only gt Take landscape staple substitu tion action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices if landscape staple is requested in the input ticket All UP3I devices selected here are used Ignore Statement gt No stapling is done Landscape Dual Staple Translate Statement directly gt A UP3I Stitch Edge Stitch left edge command is put to the job only if landscape dual staple is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 207 DPconnect Appendix 208 LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take landscape dual staple substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UPI Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring landscape dual staple only gt Take landscape dual staple substitution action from the ticket template Job At tributes Print UP3I Devices if landscape dual staple is requested in the input ticket All UP3I devices selected here are used Ignore Statement gt No stapling is done Dual Staple Translate Statement directly gt A UP3I Stitch Edge
459. nt In this case the oversize contents of the documents is cut off c Scale the document to any paper format For this purpose you have to define the desired paper format and to check the option Fit width or height respectively in the converter dialog With this setting the document will be scaled proportionally until one paper edge either left or right or on top of the page is reached You also have to define the position of the document as described below You have the following possibilities for positioning Top Left Top Top Right Left Center Right Bottom Left Bottom Bottom Right In case a the preset standard position according to the PostScript Graphics Model Bottom Left is used The document page is therefore placed in the lower left corner of the paper format Chapter 10 Workflows 581 Workflow for scaling PDF files 582 In case b you can select any position In case c you can select several positions Depending on whether you scale fitting to paper width or paper height you have three different methods to position the pages Scale to paper width top of paper center of paper bottom of paper Scale to paper height left paper edge center of paper right paper edge Note High magnification or diminishment of the contents of the document may lead to a loss of quality of the images because these are mostly optimized for a 1 1 reproduction Chapter 10 Workflows
460. nt job implicitly specifies also the resolution of the resulting print data The Oc PRISMAproduction Server system Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Jobrequirement Functional Module instructs the required data stream converter PostScript PDF or PCL RIP to apply the resolution of the destination printer while ripping If there are printers attached to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system with different print resolutions and you want them to be used in conjunction with jobrequirement you have to establish different virtual printers configured with different print resolutions Doing so enables you to let the RIP generate the print data in the correct resolution by selecting the virtual printer with the appropriate print resolution Printers with multi resolution capabilities MRM will lead to print data ripped for 600 dpi DPconnect specific DPconnect does its own check for printer postprocessing requirements If the selected destination printer for DPconnect jobs does not meet these printer postprocessing require ments then DPconnect will omit these requirements or will stop the print job according to the DPconnect settings In order to make all DPconnect jobs pass the workflow and take advantage of jobrequire ment the virtual destination printer SelectPrinter has to be set up in such a way that it covers all possibly occurring printer postprocessing requirements In fact this should be a superset of the postprocessing cap
461. ntation o KDE Introduction o KDE Application Manuals Manuals of applications of the start menu Administration System administration documentation o Li Documentation Change the Default Network Settings After the installation is finished you have to change the network settings because the unattended installation of LINUX configures the server with the following default values which have to be changed BEFORE connecting the server to the network Hostname lxoo1234 ops de m Network adapter 1 192 168 10 50 255 255 255 0 Setting of Hostname and Network Addresses Note Li You must not use the DHCP to add network addresses Syntax of host names Like many operating systems do Oc PRISMAproduction Server also supports hostnames compliant to the syntax specified in rfcg52 rfc810 and rfc608 see below In expansion to the rfc definitions the string length restriction for Oc PRISMAproduction Server systems has been increased up to 32 characters Excerpt of rfc9 52 rfc810 and rfc608 Chapter 1 Installation 33 Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 34 A name Net Host Gateway or Domain name is a text string up to 24 characters drawn from the alphabet A Z digits 0 9 and the minus sign and period No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a name No distinction is made between upper and lower case The first character must be a letter The last characte
462. ntdata QIC 1x010222 0ps oce net CARTRIDGE TAPE APA Printdata CARTRIDGE 1x010222 ops oce net PFL_TAPE PFL_TAPE PFL_CPIO fdev sto x010222 ops oce net PFL_HOST PFLHOST PFL_TAR Ix010222 ops oce net Columns Columns Description Device Device namen in the system Device type for example TAPE Format Language module dependent data format resources or print data The physical name of the device as used by the operating sys tem for example dev rsto Physical Devices Server Name The computer to which the device is connected Double clicking opens a list of all computer names in the system 300 Chapter 7 Configuration Master Slave Configuration Master Slave Master Slave Configuration Introduction Select Configuration gt Master Slave to configure the Oc PRISMAproduction Server computers in an Oc PRISMAproduction Server network by entering their IP addresses All the other details in the Master Slave table are provided by the system The entry for the master is also provided by the system Before adding a server you have to check the following m The IP address of the first network card is the address which is used by Oc PRISMAproduction Server check this with sbin ifconfig entry under etho This address must be accessible in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server network m Job acceptation and job processing must be sw
463. ntly selected printer match the ticket template settings The new combination of ticket template and translation table can possibly affect the results of the ticket template settings for example the setting of the copy count 10 in ticket template 3 will be ineffective in combination with translation table 1 because this table specifies to take over the copy count from the input job Before submitting the job you have to ensure that all requirements for the printing of the job can be achieved by the ticket template Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 191 DPconnect Configuration Example For this reason it is highly recommended to set up the system according to the example above if you have a complex printing system and if you are printing jobs in different ways 192 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Maintenance Programs DPconnect Maintenance Programs Trouble Shooting dpconnectset DPconnect is equipped with trace and log features to analyze program errors It is pos sible to set the trace level and to switch logging on and off Additionally it is possible to hold temporary DPconnect data instead of deleting them and to tell DPconnect to accept incoming jobs but not to put them into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow for debugging reasons These actions are controlled with the console program dpconnectset The invocation is as follows dpconnectset l yln t ol1l21314 dpco
464. ny bytes follow after the last W in this case 10 The symbol here represents the decimal value o5 This control byte indicates that the string ID is assigned to the actual macro ID Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 115 PCL Converter Saving Resources on Hard Disk 10th com Esc amp f2X mand The macro control command executes the macro with the last of all assigned macro ID 11th com EscE mand Printer reset command 12th com Esc 12345X mand This PJL command initiates the termination of the converter and control goes back to PJL Example 2 00000000 Esc 12345X Universal Exit Language 00000009 PJL JOB 00000017 LF Line Feed 00000018 PJL DEFAULT DISKLOCK OFF 00000043 LF Line Feed 00000044 PJL FSMKDIR NAME o fonts 00000072 LF Line Feed 00000073 PJL FSDOWNLOAD FORMAT BINARY NAME o0 fonts Matu ra_MT SIZE 36496 00000139 LF Line Feed 00000140 lt Fontdaten im Mass Stor age Font Format gt 00036638 Esc 12345X Universal Exit Language 00036647 PJL ENTER LAN GUAGE PCL 00036670 LF Line Feed 116 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Saving Resources on Hard Disk 00036701 Esc c1 D Assign Font ID lt 1 gt 00036706 Esc c5 F Make Soft Font Perma nent 00036711 Esc 1X Primary Soft Font Select ID1 00036715 Esc amp n10W Alphanumeric ID Com mand 00036721 2 Matura_MT 00036731 Esc c1 D Assign Font I
465. o Job Attributes gt Message Job Attributes gt Head er Trailer Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket 551 Oce Custom Ticket 552 Parameter Header Trailer Header_User Header_User_File Header_User_Outtray Header_User_Intray General Description Options and Syntax De fault Option to print special system header pages the general option header must be yes yes MSG no yes Print system header trailer and message pages MSG print system mes sage error pages only no system header and trailer pages Default no Print user header page yes no if yes you also have to set Header yes Default no Name of the file which contains the print data for the user header HEADER lt filename gt Output tray in which the header pages should be put Default A B C D Default Default Input tray from which pa per for header pages should be taken Default 1 2 8 Default Default Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes Job Attributes gt Head er Trailer Job Attributes gt Head er Trailer POD only Job Attributes gt Head er Trailer POD only Job Attributes gt Head er Trailer POD only Job Attributes gt Head er Trailer POD only Print Job Ticket yes no if yes you also have to set Header yes Default no Job Attributes gt Head er Trailer POD only Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket Oce Custom Ticket
466. o HotDir input may be used with custom designed print job submitter software even if it takes advantage of Xerox Job tickets a Highlight Color The above mentioned print job generators may produce highlight color or full color jobs If highlight color or full color PostScript jobs are to be printed on a highlight color Oc printer color separation has to be activated for the Unity RIP explicitly Because the quality of color separation depends on the print data the setting of the color separation parameters has to be done manually in the job ticket template of the receiving LP input queue The following information of the Xerox job tickets is supported by Oc DPconnect a Number of copies and sorting sheets or stacks Print all job types Standard Signature Booklet 2 up Print page ranges Print simplex duplex duplex tumble can be modified within page ranges Page numbering also with page ranges header and footer text boxes Definition of not printable margins Scaling of page images Image shift can be modified within page range Rotation of images can be modified within page ranges Beginning of a chapter any pages can be forced to be front pages Multioverlay of images on one page Input media for the document Choose size color drilling paper type order count weight and medium name m Exception pages and selection of the input media size color drilling paper type order count weight and medium name for
467. o a problem within the decoding of the DCC Signal of the connected monitor in some cases the resolution of the X Window system may be wrong and could therefore result in a wrong resolution CRT screens or even in a black screen TFT screens Steps to solve this and set up the proper configuration after installation 1 Press CTRL ALT F2 to change to terminal mode 2 Login as user root 3 Execute init 3 to stop the X Window System 4 Execute sax2 to start X Window System configuration 5 Accept the automatic default or change configuration as needed 6 Finish setup and save the configuration 7 Execute init 5 to start X Window System again Chapter 1 Installation 21 Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 Default Network Settings The unattended installation of LINUX configures the server with the following default values which have to be changed BEFORE connecting the server to the network a Hostname lxoo1234 0ps de m First network card 192 168 10 50 255 255 255 0 To change these default settings please refer to Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 on page 32 for details of how to configure the system properly 22 Chapter 1 Installation Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Introduction The following chapter describes how to patch SUSE Linux or to update the operating system to a higher service pack level Update o
468. o bin Ipr Creates a print job u prismapro bin Iprm Deletes a print job from the Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server print spool u prismapro bin Ipq Shows a limited set of information on the LP print jobs u prismapro bin Ipc Controls the Oc PRISMAproduction Server LP print environment Note The LINUX manual pages for lp for example man Ip or man Ipr are not valid when Oc PRISMAproduction Server is not installed Use the sections described here instead Chapter 7 Configuration 509 LP Submitting a Print Job with Ipr The lpr command is used to submit a print job using the LP protocol The job can be send to a local or remote Oc PRISMAproduction Server LP daemon LPD or to an other inplementation of a LPD The lpr command implements the LP protocol as it is defined if the receiving daemon supports all of these options that is dependent on it s implementation The Oc PRISMAproduction Server LPD does not implement the I and the w options 510 Syntax u prismapro bin Ipr lt job copies gt C lt class gt D i lt n gt J lt jobname gt K file copies m lt mail gt o lt option gt P lt printer gt lt host gt lt port gt T lt Title gt U lt user gt w lt width gt lt file s gt u prismapro bin Ipr V Operator Description Set number of job copies each file is printed before the next copy
469. o the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer Access with the Explorer Launcher Access with the Explorer Launcher Introduction i Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer is the main application for accessing and controlling Oc PRISMAproduction Server The Explorer itself is a framework under which the actual Oc PRISMAproduction Server applications run The Explorer and its applications are implemented in Java and therefore are platform independent To keep things simple the term Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer will be used for the combination of the Explorer framework and the applications throughout this chapter If some issues regard exclusively either the framework or a specific application this will be addressed explicitly The Oc PRISMAproduction Server concept is highly client server based where the Ex plorer is a thin client It doesn t need any permissions on the client side except when local files or resources should be included in a job So the Oc PRISMAproduction Server concept itself encourages using the Explorer in a distributed environment and accessing Oc PRISMAproduction Server from desktop computers You can access the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer from outside a server cluster via the Explorer Launcher With the Launcher the local file system is accessible applications can be started by the Explorer For example when clicking on a PDF file
470. obs of other users Job modifications Release mirrored jobs Delete mirrored jobs Pass control of mirrored jobs to mirror Note The permissions to handle mirrored jobs are only visible if a valid Interconnec tivity license is installed Reprint jobs Modify user defined filter Confirmation for reprintable jobs no the reprint has not to be confirmed simple a dialog is issued to confirm the reprint job Chapter 7 Configuration 273 User Management User Permissions 274 with message a dialog is issued with the necessity to type in a message for example the reason for the reprint The text is shown in the message details window a Modify form not constrained by filter If this permission is disabled only the forms which are present in a filtered job list can be modified in the job properties dialog a Modify job queue not constrained by filter See above a Modify printer not constrained by filter See above Modify printer in jobs of other users Modify copies in jobs of other users Modify job queue in jobs of other users Modify form in jobs of other users Modify print range in jobs of other users Modify priority in jobs of other users Modify file copies in jobs of other users Modify Form Definition in jobs of other users Modify Page Definition in jobs of other users 1 1 Note According to the settings you make here the corresp
471. odify them The compiled JSL s are written to one file called u prismapro data cat lt cat alog gt Idparm dat where lt catalog gt is the current catalog Note Li If you select JSL in the List of Files amp Workflow Definition section of the Print Job Manager LCDS Ticket you can also compile JSLs with the PJM Use this command to edit and compile JSLs You have to compile every JSL you load into the system in order to make it available for the LCDS Module Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation 221 LCDS Module LCDS Resources UI Element Description JSL file name Type in the JSL max 6 digits name without file extension to be compiled or choose a JSL file from the list Type in an aster isk to compile all JSLs in the selected catalog You can also use to replace single characters List box Lists all JSL s on the server Edit Starts a notepad to edit the JSL s To edit a JSL enter the JSL name max 6 characters without the file extension and click the Edit button This opens an editing window in which you can make changes To save changes close the window You are then asked whether you want to save the file Answer Yes to save the file or No to discard the changes When you have fin ished editing you must compile the JSL to make the changes effective Wildcards in the JSL filename are rejected by the UI if the JSL editor is called Note i An imported JSL can be used f
472. ollecting allow gaps in the file numbering scheme off on Default off Paper size A4 A4_uncut A3 A3_un cut B4 Letter Le gal Ledger As5 For mat1 Format2 variable size in the format width height unit e g 15 5 24 8 cm or 8 5 11 inch Page layout Simplex Duplex Tumble Default Simplex File Properties POD gt Compose use only with Oct File Properties POD gt Collect File Properties POD gt Collect File Properties POD gt Collect File Properties POD gt Convert File Properties POD gt Convert Oce Custom Ticket Parameter Fix_Screen Media_Names PS_LPI PS_Angle files APA Pdscc Pdstrc General Description Options and Syntax De fault User screening on off Default on Papers List of papernames separat ed by semicolons Screening frequency in lpi 0 1 999 9 Default 85 0 Screening angle in degrees 0 0 360 0 Default 45 0 Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes File Properties POD gt Halftone File Properties POD gt Convert File Properties POD gt Halftone File Properties POD gt Halftone Specifies default carriage control character oxo1 ASA carriage control character oxo2 IBM carriage control character oxo4 OCE carriage con trol character oxo8 LCDS data stream ox10 None Force single line spacing 16 ox20 None Force double line spacing 32 0x40 None Force trip
473. ollowing options New User To create a new user or to modify an existing user m select from the menu User gt New user or Edit user m or select New user or Edit user from the context menu 266 Chapter 7 Configuration User Management User m or click the tool bar icons or amp A new user will be created with a default name which you can modify at once When creating a new user the permission group operator is assigned as default group If you want to assign a different group you can do this in the table of the basic window after closing the dialog Note If an LDAP user is created here the user name is only used to assign the Oc PRISMAproduction Server specific settings to the real LDAP user In this case general user data cannot be entered because these are managed in LDAP The fieds for these data are not active If you create a new user or if you modify an existing user via the Edit function the following dialog opens Login Username new_user_ 1 Authorization External First Name Last Name Settings Password Password Aging Language Country Prefs Default Contact Phone Email Person Job Title Company Address 1 Address 2 P O Box Zip City Country See the table above for a descriptio
474. olor value Depending on the options settings data streams for the single colors are created As options you define pa rameters which control the selection of colors by the RIP Layout of PS and PDF Documents to enable Color Separation 84 Only the most important and common settings are discussed below Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity Color Separation Pure colors The easiest selection is posible with pure colors because the color component which should be separated in a document can be uniquely assigned a primary color value Therefore a direct extraction is possible Color mode Description RGB Allows the selection of Red Green or Blue CMY K Allows the selection of Cyan Magenta or Yellow sRGB With sRBG standardized RGB the RIP converts the colors using a special color rendering profile which creates a single numeric value for the color impression simulated by the RGB scheme Then the separation algorithm is applied to the scanlines Prerequisites a To ensure a safe and simple color separation the usage of documents PS and PDF containing colors in different color spaces should be avoided m Applies to colored logos images and fonts use only one component for all elements for creation and display of the color information to be extracted the color to be printed is not relevant in this case It is only important that all elements are of the same color tone and color type
475. omated predefined job tickets with data coming in This is also the preferred approach for the current Document Designer use case Hot directories can be seen as input channels which process similar data So a separate hot directory could be defined for each type of input data Document Designer workflow combination On the other hand also some logic can be applied to an Oc Chapter 12 Oc Document Designer Integration in Oc PRISMAproduction Server 637 Oc Document Designer for Oc PRISMAproduction Server PRISMAproduction Server hot directories Ticket Rules scripts This would also allow processing the different combinations with one single hot directory To avoid the creation of too many hot directories or to make the logic applied to a single hot directory not too complicated the following approach is recommended a Define different hot directories for different Document Designer workflows a Differentiate among different applications using the same Document Designer workflows by Ticket Rules or small scripts Demos The examples mainly show how an ODDA job ticket must look like and allow the ad ministrator to check after the installation whether the ODDA support works in principle 638 Chapter 12 Oc Document Designer Integration in Oc PRISMAproduction Server index Accounting Administration Database Permissions cccsessseseseseseeeeees 320 General Settings sssaaa 317 legacy Files siis
476. on Q B Y Be s Expert Mode O POD Ticket Job Attributes le PCL_test Print Range s 1 per Job KA From Page Printer S7000_PCL z Mmem gt To Page Job Queue 1 Default class AA List of Files m L A a ji i La x a La tb Format PCL File Copies 1 No File size Format Compose Collect 1 fujprismapro demo pcl demo pcl 231898 PCL no No icket lt Internal gt Native New Ticket generated Native Workflow Before the job is submitted to the spool the PCL data are parsed for esc sequences by the input esc sequence replacement filter Within this processing step barcode esc sequences can be replaced by a bitmap representation of the barcode esc sequences and other escape sequences can be removed or replaced The behavior of the input esc sequence replacement filter is controlled by a file properties window in the PJM see PCL Native Workflow in the PJM on page 237 In this processing step only printer independent changes should be made 234 Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation PCL Module Native Workflow Job Submission The output esc sequence replacement filter handles printer specific changes to the PCL datastream for example tray selection The barcode filter converts esc sequences into bitmaps Barcodetype 128C 2 Barcodetype 128C 2 Barcodetype 25industrial Esc s24704T 3
477. on C E User Homes Directories 000 EOL EII General Notes If you start a Backup or a Restore Import Oc PRISMAproduction Server will be shut down automatically When closing the window it is checked if Oc PRISMAproduction Server is still down an you will get a notice and the possibility to restart the system Additionally you can stop and start Oc PRISMAproduction Server via the traffic light icons in the toolbar The Backups are written to the following predefined path usr local prismabackup mount dir Backup and Restore Workflows 600 General If you start a Backup or a Restore Import Oc PRISMAproduction Server will be shut down automatically When closing the window it is checked if Oc PRISMAproduction Server is still down an you will get a notice and the possibility to restart the system Additionally you can stop and start Oc PRISMAproduction Server via the traffic light icons in the toolbar Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Installation and Workflows The Backups are written to the following predefined path ust local prismabackup mountdir Create a Backup To create a Backup the following steps have to be performed Type in a Backup name mandatory without blanks Type in a Description optional without blanks Select at least one component The Backup Start button now gets active Press this button to st
478. on Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Step Action Open YaST Control Center gt section System gt section Language YaST Control Center 1001234 i Eile Edit Help p z E Jetc sysconfig Editor 2 Boot Loader E System ia Date and Time High Availability eor Devices li LVM Language J Network Services Partitioner B Power Management mony pan and Users BB vituatization AJ Powerweak EA Profile Manager 2 Miscellaneous Y System Backup aA System Restoration HA AS System Services Runlevel AJ System Settings Search Configure powertweak settings for experts Choose appropriate setting and ensure that within section Details the UTF 8 Encoding is disabled The appropriate settings are Local Settings for User root Yes Use UTF 8 encoding needs not to be selected Detailed Local settings will be selected automatically Finish configuration Timezone Configuration Step Aetion Action ai Open YaST Control Center gt section System gt section Date and Time lt Choose appropriate settings Finish configuration Display and Monitor Configuration The default configuration of screen resolution is configured for standard TFT panels 1024x768 60Hz If this is not applicable for the given hardware setup please open YaST Control Center and choose section System with subsection Graphiccard an
479. on is changed all components are notified via a central event mechanism and the applications can adapt their behavior appropriately Because of the central importance of this database there has been a backup restore system regarding configuration data from the very beginning of Oc PRISMAproduction Server V3 Compared to the Configuration Backup the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup deals with all data of a server cluster and includes also the configuration backup data File Set A group of files related to each other Their location in the file system is defined by the physical path definition for flexibility reasons it is separated in a root path and a directory path Their content is defined by a sequence of includes and excludes The excludes are necessary as a directory may contain more than one file sets Example the directory u prismapro resources contains both APA and LCDS resource files When defining the APA file set one has to exclude the LCDS files and the other way around Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 623 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Glossary Term Description Import A backup can be restored or imported Import means crossing Operation System LINUX Caldera to SuSE Oc PRISMAproduction Server configuration and Oc PRISMAproduction Server version boundaries Thus importing is more flexible than restoring Only backups created by an Oc PRISMAproduction Server version equal or lower than t
480. on to the LDAP server Addi tionally you can define the default values for the Oc PRISMAproduction Server specific handling of those LDAP users who are not registered in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server user management see User Management Overview on page 258 Illustration Be ODS Parameter System and Job Parameter eMail Notification Mirroring LDAP Parameter Country Preferences Password LDAP Server Settings Host ops oce net Port 3269 ssl Protocol LDAP v3 A 4 Base DN ou OPSUsers dc ops dc oce dc net Test Username servicel Password Test Connection LDAP Integration Settins Permission Group service kA Mapping Ready LDAP Server Settings 290 Description Name or IP address of the LDAP server Parameter Port number which is used to access the LDAP server The LDAP specification recomments port 389 and for the SSL communication port 636 Port SSL Indicates whether the communication via the above configured port should be SSL based or not Note that an LDAP server supports SSL and non SSL commu nication on different ports If you address an non SSL port with SSL an error will occur and the other way round Chapter 7 Configuration System Configuration LDAP Parameter Parameter Description Protoco
481. onding GUI option fault Additional notes Print output file yes no Default yes Job_name Jobname Job Parameter max 64 characters do not use and if you work with archives Default tmp Job_Type Print b_Type POD APA LCDS OLDS Menu Ticket gt new Default POD Copies Number of jobcopies that Job Parameter are to be printed 1 32767 Default 1 Copy_Sheets Copies on sheet level Job Parameter gt yes no Copies on sheets Default no POD only Multi_File_Print Copies on job and file lev Job Parameter gt el Copies per Job Files yes no Default no 548 Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket Oce Custom Ticket Parameter General Description Options and Syntax De fault Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes Job_Class Job queue Job Parameter 1 999 Proof_Print Proof print yes no Job Attributes gt Print POD only Default no Printer_Name Name of the printer or of Job Parameter a printer cluster Print_Mode Normal Two up Identical Job Attributes gt Print copies Invers Two up De fault Default Default Outtray Output Tray De Job Attributes gt Print fault Printer De fault A B C D Default Default Input Tray Default Print Job Attributes gt Print er Default 1 2 3 POD and APA only Default Default For LCDS use JSL STOCKS SCT technique Print_Range List of print ranges which Job Attributes
482. onding fields in the Job Properties dialog in the All Jobs window are enabled disabled Example If the Modify print range in jobs of other users permission is set to no the Print range field in the dialog is not editable Media assignments settings a Allow to create and modify papers m Allow to create and modify forms Message server settings m Configure message system a Reply open message requests Note The user is allowed to confirm open message requests like the mount form message m Delete messages Print Job Manager settings m PJM Expert Mode a PJM Preparation Mode a PJM Production Mode Chapter 7 Configuration User Management User Permissions Allow to set priority on Job Ticket Note the priority of a job can only be set directly in a Job Ticket not in the PJM window Nonetheless the PJM leaves the parameter untouched i e if such a job is submitted by the PJM the priority is considered If a user tries to submit a Job Ticket containing the priority parameter and does not have this right granted an error is re ported and no job is submitted Allow to mirror jobs Note The permissions to handle mirrored jobs are only visible if a valid Interconnec tivity license is installed Printer Status Viewer settings Reset printer Allow to change check for Form Name Allow to change check for DPI Allow to change check for Prin
483. onfiguration LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters XResExport parameters 1 Filter Section TraceFlags TraceLevel Contains the trace flags for better differentiation of the traces in the input filter The trace flags should always be set to FFFFFFF8 Only for data tracing at the highest level trace level 4 the trace flags must be changed to FFFFFFFF Warning data tracing will produce huge data trace files which take up hard disk space Trace parameters are optional When they are used they should be positioned at the beginning of the section I Filter specific trace flags Default FFFFFFF8 Defines the trace level for the I Filter component The next higher level always includes all lower levels The parameter is optional o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information ComInfo Subsection TraceFlags I Filter specific GCI communication interface trace flags De fault FFooo00000000000 Parameter is mandatory TraceLevel Defines the trace level for the GCI communication interface during the resource export The next higher level always includes all lower levels The parameter is mandatory o no trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information SubcatInfo Subsection CMD
484. onfiguration Menu Entry Icon Description Export Queues Opens a file selection dialog to export the current job queues ch list You can select to export in the V2 xx or V3 xx format Reload configura Reloads the actual status of the data stored in the database Any tion changes that you have made via the interface are discarded if amp you do not save them prior to executing this function Chapter 7 Configuration 377 FCB Configuration FCB FCB Configuration Forms Control Buffer 378 In the configuration list you can open the FCB Forms Control Buffers configuration applet With this applet you can view and edit the FCB files installed in the u prismapro cfg fcb directory You can create FCB s delete FCB s change their channel assignments or change their number of lines Per installation these FCB s are identical in name and contents to the standard FCB s defined by IBM So you will probably never edit these FCB s Note After installation it is a good idea to transfer all the system FCB files from the IBM host stored in SYS1 IMAGELIB to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master directory u prismapro cfg fcb Restrictions m Editing FCB files on slave servers is not supported a Viewing editing the horizontal shift defined in the FCB is not supported Chapter 7 Configuration Overview of LCDS Module Processes LCDS Jobs Overview of LCDS Module Processe
485. onfiguration Printer Configuration Printer Drivers Backends Printer Configuration Printer Drivers Backends Introduction There is a variety of printer drivers and backends available in Oc PRISMAproduction Server which allow you to drive a wide range of printers For the possible combinations of printer drivers and connections see Printer Configuration Add a new Printer on page 342 Note Some of the drivers backends need an extra license to work with them Note For details concerning the print parameters see Oc PRISMAproduction Server Technical Reference Guide chapter Print Parameter Available Drivers Backends IPDS Driver AFP2IPDS Backend on page 356 a Linedata Printer Driver LCDS on page 357 m PostScript Backends Xerox 6180 VP2110 VP61xx OCE31x5 Canon 150 CPS700 900 on page 360 Chapter 7 Configuration 355 IPDS Driver AFP2IPDS Backend IPDS Driver AFP2IPDS Backend Introduction i The AFP2IPDS backend also called SPS Smart Print Subsystem receives data in line data or structured field format It composes data for printing according to the parameters defined for the job Parameter description see This backend is especially designed to support the enhanced functionality of the Oc high volume printers which is partially outside the scope of standard IPDS The basic functions of the backend are a Together with print resources data is c
486. onnect Functionality on page 147 are recommended Job Input via HotDir 156 Input type and HotDir configuration a Data Oc Custom Job Ticket Triggerfile Possible Input ASCII PCL PDF PostScript AFP IOCA and TIFF data with or without Xerox job ticket same as for input via LP input queue Jobs without Xerox job ticket will be processed according assigned job ticket template but ticket parameters provided by the custom job ticket belongs to the job override job ticket template parameters Multiple input files per print job are allowed All file data types mentioned above may occur in one single job Specification for a converter for job files in the custom job ticket is not generally required because DPconnect itself determines file data types Only in cases where DPconnect fails to determine a file type correctly or if you want to explicitly choose one certain converter out of several possible converters a converter specification is needed Ifa job has more than one file possibly existent Xerox job tickets in these files will be ignored Xerox job tickets are honored only if the job has one single file DataFile Possible Input ASCII PCL PDF PostScript AFP IOCA and TIFF data with or without Xerox job ticket same as for input via LP input queue Jobs without Xerox job ticket will be processed according assigned job ticket template Data Triggerfile Possible Input ASCII PCL PDF Po
487. ons job and files can be used but you have to be aware that not all parameters are suitable An example is the parameter files File Filename because it is not known in which path the file is located after transmis sion The parameters are integrated without testing whether they are correct or not In this case the user takes the responsibility It the section is not specified the parameter s are written into the userinfo section If you want to add your own parameter s it is strongly advised to put these into the userinfo section Each Input Channel has the parameter ExtractParameter which controls this feature The following values are allowed a Off No parameters are extracted from the data file s a AFPParameters Parameters are extracted from the beginning of the AFP NO OP s data file a PCLParameters Parameters are extracted from the beginning of the PCL data file Chapter 7 Configuration Input Modules Overview Default Job Ticket The Default Ticket can be used to specify general Oc PRISMAproduction Server settings for an input channel These tickets do not contain a file section file Instead a file defaults section filedefaults exist The parameters defined in the file defaults section are used to specify defaults for all the data file s belonging to the job These defaults are used unless they are overwritten by another parameter source The Default Tickets can be found in u pri
488. onsists of three or four tabs the connection to the Document Man ager Cache is not available as tab by default it can be switched on via the menu Illustration AF Create library h A T X fh lt Delete library PFL Archives Database links Administration Name Type Description Server Reload data from server ly 1 DEFAULT Final cache Default library on master 1x010222 ops oce net DEI 2 2 RIP_oniy Preprint cache Converted files 1x010222 ops oce net DEFAULT 3 RIP_and_IMP Final cache Converted files with imposi 1x010222 ops oce net DEFAULT Tabs of the Archives Application PFL Archives See Archives PFL Archives on page 443 m Database Links Document Manager Cache See Archives Database Links Document Manager Cache on page 445 m Administration See Archives Administration on page 451 Tool Bar Icons Description Create archive Opens a dialog to create a new archive F See Archives PFL Archives on page 443 Delete archive mir Opens a dialog which allows you to select the correct server for ror the deletion of the marked archive in the list x Chapter 7 Configuration 441 Archives Overview Description Mirror archives Allows you to mirror the selected archive on a different server fa Select a server in the dialog box and click OK Reload data from Shows the actual status of the data stored
489. onts m Resources u cust resources local unity lt USER gt Resource Attention Directories and file names are case sensitive This is especially critical if you are importing files from other systems for example Windows Example 1 A PostScript job of the user operator requires the image file logo tif PS Adobe 3 0 logo tif Get Tiff showpage Therefore the file logo tif has to be stored in the directory u cust resources local uni ty operator to finish the conversion without errors Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 77 Unity User Resources and Fonts Example 2 A PostScript job of the user operator requires the image file var lib images logo tif PS Adobe 3 0 var lib images logo tif Get Tiff showpage Because of the absolute path statement the file logo tif will only be searched for in the directory var lib images and not in u cust resources local unity operator Example 3 78 A PostScript job of the user admin requires the image files var lib images imageooo1 tif to var lib images image1ooo tif The files are automatically stored in the var lib images directory PS Adobe 3 0 var lib images imageooo1 tif GetTiff showpage var lib images imageoooz tif GetTiff showpage var lib images image1ooo tif GetTiff showpage Linux command In s var u cust resources local unity admin var You can use the O
490. onverted to the printer specific IPDS format m Print resources can be embedded in print data if not they are retrieved from one or more external resource libraries Resource handling see m The backend also determines the alignment of the print pages on the physical medium depending on how parameters are set two consecutive or identical pages can be printed side by side for instance and printing can be on either one or both sides of the medium If specified in the print parameters the backend also inserts information pages header separator message and trailer pages a The backend reacts directly and efficiently to problems that occur during execution of print jobs m It detects and distinguishes device data and user errors and reports them Note For details concerning the print parameters see Oc PRISMAproduction Server Technical Reference Guide chapter Print Parameter AFP2IPDS Output Backend and Oc PRISMAproduction Server Server 356 The mission of the AFP2IPDS backend in the server context is to enable the implemen tation of an AFP2IPDS capable output management system The AFP2IPDS backend is running under the control of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Output Distribution System ODS It is fully integrated in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Server workflow Oc proprietary interfaces are used to allocate the jobs and access the print data which is stored in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server spool Different
491. or to restore another configuration backup For detailed information on how to work with the application see Backup Restore Window on page 330 Chapter 7 Configuration 329 Backup Restore Window Backup Restore Window Introduction The Backup Restore window consists of two parts a a Backup Selection Table which gives an overview of all configuration backups An icon indicates if the backups can be restored on the system or not a a Backup Viewer Backups can be viewed by loading them in the selection table Illustration EET State Name Description Version Created at Created by Last restored at A 231005 1 953 3 10 05 Apr 25 2007 8 service Apr 25 2007 9 amp 31005 2 RC2 3 10 05 Jul 11 2007 10 service Jul 11 2007 10 History Content Database Details Name Created at Version History of backup 3100 Backup Jul 11 2007 10 11 29 3 10 05 Master 127 0 E Restore 1 Jul 11 2007 10 34 44 3 10 05 B Master 127 0 v account 3 10 15 v adm Unknown v afp2ipds_bb 3 10 01 v afp2ps 3 10 26 v apa 3 10 05 v backupEdge 2 00 02 hackunre 210 06 Tool Bar Menu Functions You can load create restore refresh or delete backups using either the Edit menu the toolbar icons or the pop up menu if you right click on a backup entry 330 Chapter 7 Configuration Backup Restore Window Icon Description View th
492. ord The password which should be used for ftp login Chapter 7 Configuration 351 Printer Configuration Print Parameter Printer Configuration Print Parameter Introduction Depending on the backend type of the selected printer AFP PS PCL this section allows you to modify various sets of print parameters Thus you can adjust the performance of the printers set up dummy printers and so on Details on the print parameters and backends are explained in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Technical Reference Guide For AFP printers you can select predefined tuning sets which allow you to easily modify the print parameters for example to enable traces or to drive non Oc printers Caution A Modifying the print parameters might have a decisive impact on the overall performance of the system Illustration General Print Parameter Job Queues cluster Output Devices Printer Notification cy sean Section LI Key CODEPAGE DEVICEFLAGS DEVICETIMEQUT DEVICETRC DSCASECTRL DSMAXSTREAMS DUMMYDEV ESDMODE ESDSIZE EXT_CODED_FONT EXT_CODE_PAGE EXT_FONT_CHARSET EXT_FORMDEF anfigure Printer P5000 on Server Ix010222 ops oce net tscodes tab 0x603 1539 600 1 2500 1 0 40000 S Defaut a tscodes tab Description CIT to EBCDIC which the LI uses during the neration of the infopages is table describes the code table from e
493. orer applet For details see chapter PJM gt Properties for LCDS file in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server User s Guide Multiple Process Chains The use of parallel LCDS Process chains is supported from V3 10 Two typical use cases may be given here to explain the usage and advantages m Use Oc IPDS twin fanfold system print while spooling both in the twin configuration one process chain supported in V3 0X and 2 parallel process chains in a two single configuration m Process Copy Compile and Print sequentially production data on a production catalog Parallel a new test catalog may be created and resources may be copied and converted JSLs may be edited and compiled and test print done This test actions may be per formed parallel to print process on production catalog without interfering with each other For details concerning use of this function for multiple process chains please see also chapter LCDS Parameter Configuration gt Description of the JCF Parameters in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Administrator s Guide for example keyword Devi ceName1 2 3 Other LCDS Options Form Sample See chapter PJM gt Properties for LCDS file gt Feed in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server User s Guide View CMD Files You can view and delete Xerox CMD files with the LCDS file system Knowing the contents of these files makes it easier to adjust the required workflow for the LCDS Module which resour
494. ories in the LCDS Module It also gives you the possibility to edit JSLs After the copy process the resources are converted if selected to the AFP format and are stored on the harddrive in the directory u prismapro data cat lt cata log gt fnt img lgo frm where lt catalog gt is the current catalog Note If you select Format gt Resources in the List of Files amp Workflow Definition section of the Print Job Manager LCDS Ticket you can also copy convert resources with the PJM Attention This program is not available to the user operator Illustration is E General Server 1x010222 ops oce net F F Catalog DEFAULT JSL Resources Input device TAPE Resource name B E copy E Convert Edit Compile Copy Convert Ready Resource Types The LCDS Module accepts the following resource types Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation 217 LCDS Module LCDS Resources Resource Type Description CMD Command files CMD are transferred into the system from an input media After this they only serve for information pur poses They will not be converted or processed in any way FNT Fonts FNT are transferred from input media and converted to Oc PRISMAproduction Server fonts Kanji fonts will be rejected LGO Logos LGO are transferred from input media and conv
495. ormap resource usually not used 560 Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes APA Settings gt Resource Libraries gt Font Libraries APA Settings gt Resource Libraries gt Form Defini tion Libraries APA Settings gt Resource Libraries gt Object Con tainer Libraries APA Settings gt Resource Libraries gt Overlay Li braries APA Settings gt Resource Libraries gt Page Defini tion Libraries APA Settings gt Resource Libraries gt Page Segment Libraries APA Settings gt Resource Server APA Settings gt Options gt Number of Pages APA Settings gt Resources gt Color Mapping Table Oce Custom Ticket Parameter General Description Description of the corre Options and Syntax De sponding GUI option fault Additional notes JDE Name specifies the label format of the tape or the structure of the record of HD Files Tape ANSIo1 ANSI Host and Label format Default NONE none labeled tapes HD Files FIXED fixed record length VAR variable records with binary IBM format length field VARBLK variable blocked records with binary IBM format length field UNDEF undefined record length using the record APA Settings gt Options gt Tape Label or gt Record Structure delimiter as delimiter ATXT_LF both Linedata and SF where at least Linedata must have the CRLF d
496. ossible values lt File name gt Field1 Field8 Parameter Possible values Description Uses the last file specified with the keyword FileType for eventu al sorting Note The Alphabetically and Alphanumerically sort ing algorithyms are used together with the File TimeStamp First the files are sorted using the FileTimeStamp when more than one has the same timestamp the se lected sorting algo rithym is used Description Name of the default ticket to be used for job submission or Use the content of the defined file name field ExtractParame ters AFPParameters gt Extracts parameters for the OCT from the first No op in the AFP data file Off gt No parameter extraction is done PCLParameters gt Parameters are extracted from the beginning of the PCL data file See also section Extracting AFP parameters in Input Modules Overview on page 460 497 Chapter 7 Configuration HotDir 498 Parameter Field1 Field8 FieldSeparator DataFileSortSe quence Possible values Description lt Section Keyword gt Off gt Files are written in the OCT in the sequence they are found in the directory Alphabetically gt The files are sorted alphabetically using the system locale and written into the OCT in this se quence Alphanumerically gt The files are sorted alphanumer ically and submitted in this se quenc
497. ossibly existing job ticket preceeding the data is removed Data Not active only relevant for A possibly existing job ticket preceeding the data is not re RAW processing moved Raw data with or without Xerox job ticket can be printed on Xerox printers or via Oc PRISMAproduction Server with DPconnect PostScript Data PostScript Unity RIP During job processing PostScript data are converted into AFP code with embedded TIFF containers by the Unity RIP The generated data can then be printed via an IPDS or a PostScript backend PDF Graphic Arts Plus During job processing PostScript data are converted into AFP code with embedded PDF containers by the Graphic Arts Plus Normalizer The generated data can then be printed via an IPDS or a PostScript backend Do not convert RAW PostScript data are not converted The data can be printed via a generic backend Default PostScript Unity RIP Remove Input Job m Active Ticket from A possibly existing job ticket preceeding the data is removed PostScript Data Not active only relevant for A possibly existing job ticket preceeding the data is not re RAW processing moved Raw data with or without Xerox job ticket can be printed on Xerox printers or via Oc PRISMAproduction Server with DPconnect TIFF Data TIFF Converter During job processing TIFF data are converted into AFP code with embedded TIFF containers by the TIFF Convert e
498. ot be useful The GUI allows full flexibility so far choice of sequences and values are concerned This requires on the other hand a certain PCL expertise of the user of this GUI You may choose escape sequences via an easy to use list of predefined sequences on the left hand side or alternatively via the 3 character string on the right hand side which allows flexible definition of PCL escape sequences via their 3 character representation PCL File Properties Fonts and Macros Tabs 240 With these tabs PCL fonts and macros can be defined These resources will then be embedded in the beginning of the respective PCL data file These PCL fonts and PCL Macros which fit to the respective application files must be provided by the user in the RESOURCES SHARED library usually u prismapro resources shared which is a link to u cust resources shared It is recommended to use the Server Files application to create PCL and application related subdirectories These subdirectories under the RESOURCES SHARED library Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation PCL Native Workflow in the PJM allow to distinguish for example AFP and PCL resources or PCL resources dedicated for specific PCL Applications Files If the Server Files application is used the resources are automatically shared with the other server of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster If these resources are copied manually please copy the resources to all ser
499. ouble clicking the respective cell in the server column and selecting the number of licenses from the drop down list Restore Oc PRISMAproduction Server configuration using the Backup Restore appli cation under Configuration in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer see Backup Restore Window on page 330 Note Only necessary if you want to use the configuration of a previous installed version Note Restore only works if the same number of servers are defined inside the cluster and at least the same number of valid licenses are configured Chapter 1 Installation 47 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Installation Deinstallation Update Note i Session files contain stored sessions suffix psn in the directory u prismapro da ta shared are not part of the Backup Restore component They have to be saved manually 48 Chapter 1 Installation Oc PRISMAproduction Server Licenses Oc PRISMAproduction Server Licenses Introduction Oc PRISMAproduction Server V4 0 licenses are stored in a CodeMeter dongle CmStick a small USB device which must be plugged in at the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master server The license dongle is not used during Oc PRISMAproduction Server installation Therefore almost all Oc PRISMAproduction Server packages will be installed but must be activated by importing the licenses immediately after the installation process After installation use the licens
500. ount of using mount t smbfs o lfs lt more options gt you should use mount t cifs o lt options gt This connection has no problem handling all files also bigger than 2GB Note Li The command syntax regarding all options has changed respective to smbfs Please see man 8 mount cifs for further details 456 Chapter 7 Configuration Archives Appendix File System Description NCPFS Netware Core Protocol File System like Novell Netware The administrator has to mount a directory of the Netware server on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master On the Netware server The respective directories must be re leased with write permission for the user root On the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master The directory of the PFL archive has to be indicated as mount point The basic path of the PFL archives is u prismapro data archivel When mounting you have to add the directory of the PFL archive for example ncpmount S server U root V volume u prismapro data archive Default The Netware directory can also be mounted permanently by adding it to the etc fstab After mounting the directory the documents are written into the external directory instead of the local PFL i Note Unfortunately you cannot automate the mounting of NFS Samba and Netware direc tories because administrator permissions are required for password input creation of directories on external servers adjusting a
501. ountry Menu Job gt Information gt Receiver Rec_Tel Receiver phone number Menu Job gt Information gt Receiver Rec_Fax Receiver fax number Menu Job gt Information gt Receiver Rec_Shipment Additional information Menu Job gt Information about receiver gt Receiver Shipment Specific shipment informa Menu Job gt Information tion gt Shipment Acc_Custom_Id Booking account for Ac Menu Job gt Information counting gt Shipment O a File Complete Name of file List of Files with physical or logical path Format IOCA PCL TIFF PS List of Files Unity PDF Uni ty AFP LCDS Da ta JSL Resource RAW Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket 555 Oce Custom Ticket 556 Parameter General Description Options and Syntax De fault File_Copies files POD Sample_Range Sample_Gaps Paper_Size Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket Number of file copies that are to be printed 1 32767 Note If you set File_Copies the Parameter Multi_File_Print has to be yes Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes List of Files POD and APA only For LCDS use JSL DJDE based copies command Composer Setname physi cal or local path of the file which contains the imposi tioning parameters Additional parameter for Composer vdfile variable data file Collect files no masked left_in dex right_index directory Default no Collecting Range e g 1 43639 13 C
502. owing expressions Cm is the last page of the input document integer n n integer n integer n integer integer n integer integer n 1 Resource Indicate a resource file which contains only tab pages From Print Data The positions of the tab pages are already part of the data stream of the print data makes only sense with a DPconnect file Chapter 10 Workflows 569 Workflow Tab Printing UI Element Description From Print Data The data stream contains pages which can be identified as tab using Size of Tab pages by their size This method can only be used with special Pages DocSetter documents 570 Chapter 10 Workflows Workflow UP I Devices Workflow UP I Devices Introduction The UP I parameters are processed by the Professional Document Composer which adds the information to the data stream The connection of UP I devices is realized via a special output tray This output tray is created in Configuration gt Printers gt Output Devices In the Type column select the UP I device from a list Illustration Printer Name CPS900 Docuprint Docutech VP5000 P5000_1 Model Oce CPS900 Docuprint_135 Docutech 6180 VarioPrint_5 160 VarioPrint_S 160 Printer Driver Printer Type Postscript Driver Cutsheet Printer AFP Linedata Driver Cutsheet Printer Postscript Driver Cutsheet Printer AFP Linedata Driver Cutsheet Printer AFP Linedata Driver C
503. p l29H gt Bin 9 lt Esc gt amp 130H gt Bin 10 lt Esc gt amp 131H gt Bin 11 lt Esc gt amp 132H gt Bin 12 lt Esc gt amp 13 3H gt Bin 13 lt Esc gt amp 13 4H gt Bin 14 lt Esc gt amp l3 5H gt Bin 15 lt Esc gt amp 136H gt Bin 16 To control the output bins use the following escape sequences lt Esc gt amp liG gt Bin 1 lt Esc gt amp 12G gt Bin 2 lt Esc gt amp 13G gt Bin 3 lt Esc gt amp 14G gt Bin 4 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Saving Resources on Hard Disk PCL Converter Saving Resources on Hard Disk Required Commands You can save resources Fonts Macros Overlays by using the following PJL commands a DISKLOCK a FSMKDIR a FSDOWNLOAD i Note Fonts must be available in the Mass Storage Format If you want to load a saved resource you need the alphanumeric ID command lt ESC gt amp n Wfilename This symbol represents the number of characters after W 2 This symbol represents the control byte The following operations are supported Control Byte Operation Directory Combines the actual font ID with font fonts of the given string ID Selects the font with the given String ID fonts as primary Applies the actual Macro ID to the string pcl macros or ID pclxl macros Combines the actual macro ID with pcl macros or macro of the given string ID pclxl macros The directories are strictly predefin
504. page 256 Chapter 7 Configuration System Configuration Overview System System Configuration Overview Introduction This application allows you to make global settings for the entire Oc PRISMAproduction Server system In detail you can set up parameters on seven different tabs ODS Parameter Order Distribution System Oc PRISMAproduction Server net work See System Configuration ODS Parameter on page 282 System and Job Parameter See System Configuration System and Job Parameter on page 284 eMail Notification See System Configuration eMail Notification on page 286 Mirroring See System Configuration Mirroring on page 288 LDAP Parameter See System Configuration LDAP Parameter on page 290 Country Preferences See System Configuration Country Preferences on page 293 Password See System Configuration Password on page 295 System parameter menu and toolbar see General Usage of the Configuration Applications on page 256 Chapter 7 Configuration 281 System Configuration ODS Parameter System Configuration ODS Parameter Introduction These parameters control the handling of print jobs the disk usage and the ODS trace level throughout the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system Illustration B amp ODS Parameter System and Job Parameter eMail Notification _ Mirro
505. pe or portrait The Unity is not a cropping tool though it may sometimes work if you specify a smaller page size than the original PS PDF document requires The origin of the page is the lower left corner Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 93 Unity Conversion Unity Conversion Workflow You control the workflow and define conversion parameters via the Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server Print Job Manager This creates a job ticket on the basis of the settings you specify and sends the ticket to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Master The master then directs the distribution of the work packages sends instructions to programs and monitors all the stages in job handling This is done in a way that maximizes the data throughput and distributes the workload evenly across the ODS network PJM Job Ticket gt UnityRIP PRISMAproduction System IOCA Files Bag Sony NG a Creating a conversion job with the Print Job Manager Using the folder icon select a PostScript or PDF file and add it to the list of files Select the file you have just added to the list then select PS Unity or PDF Unity in the Format list box the Unity then performs the conversion Once the conversion is complete continue as you would for any other format see description of the Print Job Manager Creating PostScript and PDF print files The Oc PRISMAproduction Server DVD also contains the install
506. planation of the parameters in the temporary file ACTION The action which caused the program call SUBMIT A new job has been submitted MODIFY The status of a queued job has been changed DELETE A job is deleted from the queue Attention MODIFY request can appear before the SUBMIT ac tion but the status will be set to preparation PREPARE ODS_JOBID The unique job id of the job inside PRISMAproduction FILEINDEX Index of the current file in the list of files in one PJM ticket starting with 1 for the first file USER The name of the user who submitted the job and the hostname of the machine separated by the sign E mail address format JOBNAME Name of the job FILETYPE Type of the print file data type and resolution separated by Data type APF AFPDS or Linedata PCL HP PCL data Resolution o dpi default resolution 240 dpi 240 dpi 300 dpi 300 dpi 600 dpi 600 dpi FILESIZE Size of the print file in bytes FORM The form id of the job PRINTER The name of the printer RANGE The printing range of the job COPIES The printed and the specified copy count of the job separated by T 1st number printed copies 2nd number specified copy count Chapter 7 Configuration 347 Printer Configuration Job Notification 348 PAGECOUNT The printed and the specified page count of the job separated by JOBQUEUE JOBSTATUS Pr 1st number printed pages 2nd num
507. plexity parameters are defined globally via Configuration gt System gt Password for all users with Authorization Auto or External Permissions Users of the Permission Groups applic and operator can only access to the User Info application see User Management User Info on page 269 This means these users can only edit their own user data and their own password The password has to conform to the rules of complexity It can only be changed if it is changed outside of the minimal period of validity The aging parameters are visible but cannot be modified Users of the Permission Groups admin and service have full permissions to modify the passwords of all users at any time in the User dialog see User Management User on page 264 If passwords do not comply with the rules of complexity a warning is dis played in the User Management which can be ignored If a password is changed in the login dialog it has always to conform to the rules of complexity Chapter 7 Configuration 295 System Configuration Password Illustration eo ODS Parameter System and Job Parameter eMail Notification Mirroring LDAP Parameter Country Preferences Password Password Aging Days before password expiration to issue warning Days after password expires with usable login SI Maximum number of d
508. plorer Example local LPD u prismapro bin Ipr P PS700 J report22 3 u printjobs report22 This command sends the local print file u printjobs report22 to the print server that is configured for logical printer PS700 and generates a print job with the given job name Three copies of the job will be printed When the Ipr command is used to send a job to a remote LPD lpr P lt print er gt lt host gt none of this can be seen on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server explorer This workflow is needed when special LP parameters other than filename need to be passed to the remote LPD It is planned in the future to support here also the Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow Example remote LPD u prismapro bin Ipr P PS700 PrintServer J report22 3 u printjobs report22 This command sends the local print file u printjobs report22 to the print server name PrintServer that is configured for logical printer PS700 and generates a print job with the given job name Three copies of the job will be printed Parameter lt number gt Multiple job Copies Job copies Default 1 entries or Lpr Option Internal LP OCT Parameter Description C lt number gt C job Job_Class Job queue when num ber gt o and lt 999 C lt string gt originator Send Job class ing Param_C i lt number gt originator Send Ident spaces Not sup ing Param_I ported Chapter 7 Configuration 511 TP Internal L
509. ported English en 5081 German de 5081 z Delete messages automatically m Delete all messages if they are older than 30 G days during system startup and daily at 00 H00 E o clock 2 languages supported Configuration modified Language Settings Allows you to select the language to be used for the message system By default both di rectories for english and german are enabled If you are definitely using one language only for the whole Oc PRISMAproduction Server system you can deselect one language to save resources Column Description Language Languages which are available for the display of the messages in the system ISO Code ISO conform abbreviation of the language Message count Total number of messages available in this language Language support Mark the checkbox for each language which should be available ed in the system Automatic Deletion If you want to automatically delete older messages you can indicate the number of days after which the messages are deleted from the system After this time the old messages will be deleted on system start up Additionally you can also specify a certain daily point Chapter 7 Configuration 305 Message System General Settings in time when this deletion should be performed preferably a time when you are not busy with the system 306 Chapter 7 Configuration Message System Automatic Saving Message System Automat
510. ported by a form message or by Otext to the operator If the active table does not match the requirements the system searches for a matching table in the SCT DAT file If there is exactly one matching table it will be set active automatically after issuing a warning If there are more than one matching tables a list of these tables appeares for the operator to choose from In case the system cannot find any matching table a list of the required stocknames is issued for the operator to create a new table with the respective settings The SCT table which is used by the x filter during the conversion process is locked auto matically by the system so it cannot be modified by the operator This is done because the name of the SCT table is used as FORM ID form message or in the Otext allowing the operator to view the requirements of paper loading of every job before it is printed The FORM ID gives information on the start configuration An Otext message will be displayed if the status of paperloading is changed during print process by DJDE or JSL Note Li SCT configuration is only used if the tray selection of the PJM is set to by the stockset configuration Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation 223 LCDS Module Stockset Configuration Tool Illustration E ACTIVE E LOCKED Update act New name Show actual Show active New Duplicate Delete Printertyp Cutsheet Comment Comment
511. ppendix LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take right side dual staple substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UPI Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring right side dual staple only gt Take right side dual staple substitution action from the ticket template Job At tributes Print UP3I Devices if right side dual staple is requested in the input ticket All UP3I devices selected here are used Ignore Statement gt No stapling is done Stitch at Specified Position Translate Statement directly gt A UP31 Stitch Edge command is put to the job only if stapling is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take Stitch at a specified position action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UPI Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring stitching at a specified position only gt Take stitching at a specified position action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UPI Devices if stitching at a specified position is requested in the input ticket All UP3I devices selected here are used Ignore Statement
512. pter User resources above The installation of fonts on the hard disk is supported by the shell scripts pfb2font and pfazfont The shell script pfb2font converts fonts in binary format to ASCII The shell 80 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity User Resources and Fonts script pfazfont replaces the file name of fonts in the ASCII format pfa with their font name The following procedure is recommended to install additional type 1 fonts m Create a temporary font directory mkdir HOME fonts m Copy font files to the font directory cp testfont pfb HOME fonts cp testfont pfa HOME fonts m Change to the font directory cd HOME fonts m Convert the fonts for binary font files pfb pfb2font for ascii font files pfa pfazfont m Copy fonts into the user resource directory and link fonts In s HOME fonts u cust resources local unity lt USER gt fonts For step 5 the corresponding rights have to be set If the link already exists you don t need step 5 Installation of additional TrueType Fonts Like Type 1 fonts you can also install TrueType fonts locally The fonts have to be copied or linked to the respective font directory The following directories are available m for fonts which are general available u cust resources local unity global fonts m for user specific fonts u cust resources local unity lt USER gt fonts After copying the fonts to the correct director
513. ptions The latter are the human readable identifiers of the backups Delete Backups Backups can be deleted with the Delete command if they are not needed any more They can be located by means of the SearchBackups command as described above As backups or directories containing backups can also be copied rearranged manually an optional search directory can be defined for the search so to speak as a temporary mount point Description of the Delete options Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 615 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Option Parameter Meaning Description backupID Identifier of the backup to be deleted i Note For security reasons no temporary definition of a different mount point is supported with the Delete command Plug in Specific Functions There are two commands which support plug in specific actions a The command GetPlugins which lists all plug ins known to the framework a The command GetPluginContents which lists the content of a specific plug in GetPlugins No parameters lists all plug ins known by the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup framework When the content of the plug in data in backup is to be displayed by Get PluginContents the plug in name must be entered exactly as displayed by this command GetPluginContent The content of the plug in specific data of the backup given is displayed Description of the GetPluginContents options Opt
514. r lt IP Address gt PrgJobSubmis sion pjm lt Another executable script or binary gt TicketRule i lt String gt which is used as base to add MVS alphabetical class value to it Description Defines the job acceptance on this server when the mirror serv er doesn t accept the job To be able to use this feature the Inter connectivity license is needed and the MirrorServer must be defined for this port Name or IP address of the mir ror server Only available when the Interconnectivity license exists and the mirror server is defined in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Sys tem Configuration This program or script is used to submit the job into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server sys tem See section The job submis sion in Input Modules Overview on page 460 Name of the Ticket rule to use when the job is submitted The Ticket Rule must be defined in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket Rule Configura tion first before it can be selected in the list Chapter 7 Configuration 499 HotDir Behavior in Error Situations HotDir Behavior in Error Situations Introduction Dependent on the situation the behavior of the HotDir daemon in error situations is to make sure that the least interference of the normal workflow is achieved This section explains what happens when a certain situation appears The default ticket is not found The defau
515. r Ban Tinned 1 0 6 2 0 6 3 4 20 6 0 66 Gnd Options End Xfilter These settings transfer the following values to the JOBNAME field JDE name from the beginning with length 6 one blank as separator JDL name from the beginning with length 6 one blank as separator the contents of HRPTNA form position 5 with length 12 end of HRPTNA one blank as separator the contents of ACCTINFO from the beginning with length 37 end of JOBNAME 64 Byte for example the result will be if HRPTNA has the value HOST REPORT NAME and ACCTINFO the value for example ACCTIN FQ 901023 4567890123 45768901234567890123456789012345678901234 DFLT___DFAULT_ REPORT NAME_ACCTIN FO901023456789012345768901234567 In this example blanks are represented by underscores In this example blanks are represented by underscores Example 2 JOBNAME 1 0 6 3 4 8 0 0 3 2 2 0 6 These settings transfer the following values to the JOBNAME field JDE name from the beginning with length 6 one blank as separator the contents of HRPTNA form position 5 with length 8 Nothing else will be transferred because the type o ends the list for example the result will be if HRPTNA has the value HOST REPORT NAME DFLT___ REPORT_ In this example blanks are represented by underscores the trailing blank is truncated Chapter 7 Configuration 409 LCDS Parameter Configuration Special Functions and User Scripts Multiple Process Chains The use o
516. r Disabling the xinetd daemon is forbidden as it is a basic service required to run Oc PRISMAproduction Server or newer Chapter 1 Installation 39 Security and Services Services Table The following table gives an overview about the condition of the services which ports are used how they are controlled if they are installed during the initial unattended instal lation and which status they have concerning the Oc PRISMAproduction Server func tionality Service Description Port Status Default CodeMeter WebAdmin 22350 Code Meter needed started Web Admin software Cold StandbyServer 3052 USV control optional NI Only installed if running a Cold Standby configu software ration using a USV HTTP Server must not be installed not available NI Internet Daemon INETD no port YaST needed started OP Basic IP service dispatcher PP ODS Spool Internet File Transfer Protocol server FTP 21 optional started OP Common service to share files over the Inter net PP m Run Unity Rip at a Windows system File transfer via ftp into a hot folder HotDir m DPconnect with Xerox Client Software JBOSS 8080 1099 PP internal needed started LDAP Server must not be installed not available started Mail Transfer Agent 25 YaST usable closed NFS Server 955 udp YaST usable closed 958 tep OP X Windows 6000 YaST usable closed 40 Chapter 1 Installation Security and Services
517. r The generated data can then be printed via an IPDS or a PostScript backend Do not convert RAW TIFF data are not converted The data can be printed via a generic backend Default TIFF Converter Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 169 DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab Item Description Remove InputJob m Active Ticket from TIFF A possibly existing job ticket preceeding the data is removed Data m Not active only relevant for A possibly existing job ticket preceeding the data is not re RAW processing moved Raw data with or without Xerox job ticket can be printed on Xerox printers or via Oc PRISMAproduction Server with DPconnect When to use which Information Source 170 Rules shown below If the Rules shown below are used to identify the desired converter this implies that DPconnect is able to determine the data type correctly If this is not possible another source custom ticket ticket template has to be used If custom ticket or ticket template do not provide sufficient information the Rules shown below are the recommended information source Oc Custom Ticket The job specific custom tickets which are generated by the Input Modules HotDir and LP usually do not indicate a converter which is to be used Only if the job generator sends an OCT file custom ticket with the print data to a HotDir possibly a converter statement exisits the job generato
518. r printing o Deletion mode for xrx input file off 1 Deletion mode on Default Specifies a basic shift of the print data images on a page This basic shift modifies the SHIFT parameter in JSL AlignScan defines the shift in the direction of the long side of a page AlignDot defines the shift perpendicular to the long side of a page both for pages where the long side 14 AlignScan defines the shift in the direction of the short side of a page AlignDot defines the shift perpendicular to the short side of a page both for pages where the long side gt 14 lt shift value gt defines a shift in units of 1 300 inch BFormNumOff Custom Tone Specifies if page numbers due to DJDE JDE NUMBER should be printed on BFORM pages or not o Printed Default Normal Xerox Handling 1 Switch Off printing see Copy Parameters FrmAFPOut FrmShadeColor see Copy Parameters The parameters in this section are valid for Xerox inline resources via DJDE FILE see Copy Parameters Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters I Filter Traces Section FrmShadeModify FrmShadeType see Copy Parameters see Copy Parameters InfoPagesFix JobnameCfg JOB NAME Defines which parameter is used to enable or disable the printing of the SPS trailer page containing the account information There are three parameters which
519. r Stations Introduction If a printer is able to print multicolor jobs it s required to configure the available toners for the printer The toners are configured with the Consumables Configuration on page 322 application In this tab the administrator has to specify which of the available printer colors are usable for the current printer This does not mean that all of the toner stations are built in at the same time Illustration Model Printer Driver Printer Type Server Name VarioPrint_5 160 IPDS Driver VarioStream_7400 PJL PCL Driver Continuous Feed Printer Ix010222 ops oce net VarioStream_8550 IPDS Driver G ysg000_Twin VYarioStream_8750_Twin IPDS Driver Cutsheet Printer Ix010222 ops oce net Continuous Feed Printer _ 1x010222 ops oce net Twin Printer 1x010222 ops oce net PA ra E Auto insert colors from printer General Print Parameter jJob Queues Cluster Toner Stations Input Devices Output Devices Printer Notification Gray Cut Available for Printer Toner name C009 B15 C10 C009 B25 D10 CO10 B15 C10 C010 825 D10 C011 815 C10 C011 825 0D10 CuU01 815 C10 CUO1 B25 D10 Companygreen Companyred GO01 B15 C10 G001 B25 D10 Bo ajajaj vijana 003 B15 C10 configure Printer VP5000 on Server Ix010222 ops oce net Color Color names 0753002 0753002 00743001 007 43001 N occo A OCT 1C01 00755002 00755002 EE companygreen EE Compan
520. r a description of the Input Modules configuration window see Input Modules Overview on page 460 Chapter 7 Configuration 493 HotDir Global HotDir Parameters In the menu Edit select Edit global parameters gt HotDir to open a dialog which allows you to configure the following parameters Bold values are default values Parameter Possible values Scanning Inter 5000 val lt Number minimum 1000 gt Delete if older than oxffffoof8 Trace flags General Parameters Parameter Possible values Description Directory scan interval in mil liseconds Not used Delete files older than days Disabled when set to o See Generating a trace file for details See Generating a trace file for details Description Description lt Any character String gt The description of the Hot Di rectory File Input Parameters Description Parameter Possible values AutoDetect gt Automatically uses the correct directory scan type of the follow ing two NormalDirectoryScan gt Scans the directory in a normal way FastDirectoryscan gt Scans directories by using the directory file time doesn t work for mounted or exported directo ries ScanType Directory scan type 494 Chapter 7 Configuration HotDir Parameter Possible values Description Defines what kind of job infor mation is provided fo
521. r has the value 1 the data file parameter will overwrite this Note The reference Job Id and the Job name from the data file will always overwrite the LP control file values This can cause problems when job actions are requested from this job using the lp clients lpq lprm HP Unix client When using a HP Unix client select in the LP configuration the value Remote printer is on a BSD system using the sam utility Chapter 7 Configuration LP Enable Printer Access Li Utilities i Printing from a client to an LP printer defined on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server must be configured This is done in the hosts lpd which can be started from the menu Edit using the entry Edit hosts Ipd A dialog pops up with a menu bar icon and a table with 2 columns In the Allowed systems column clients can be entered so that they can print to an LP printer The Comment column is used for a description of the entry The name ofa client can be written with wildcards to be able to allow multiple IP addresses to be enabled Examples 160 120 10 160 To allow all clients to have access to the LP printer use the single wildcard Note To allow the local LP clients to send jobs to the LP Daemon add the entry localhost The Oc PRISMAproduction Server LP package contains the following utilities use u prismapro bin as path Utility Description u prismapr
522. r his or her account in this window This includes also the settings for the user language and the country preferences which can be different from the global settings in Configuration gt System see User Management User on page 264 Note Li The Authorization settings cannot be modified here Chapter 7 Configuration 269 User Management User Info for operator and applic User Management User Info for operator and applic Introduction Here the data for the user who is currently logged in are displayed Illustration Login Username Authorization First Name Last Name Settings Password Password Aging Language Country Prefs Default Contact Phone Email Person Job Title Company Address 1 Address 2 P O Box Zip Country User Info Window The information in this window can also be viewed by users who have no permissions for the user management If the user who is logged in is an LDAP user this window displays the data which is managed by LDAP as long as the data can be assigned to Oc PRISMAproduction Server fields Every user can make or modify the settings for his or her account in this window This includes also the settings for the user language and the country preferences whic
523. r instance Recommended 2 GB Hard disk At least 2 GB free disc space Deliverables The product package consists of the following components m PostScript 3 Converter a PDF Converter fully capable of PDF 1 6 m 136 standard fonts Adobe Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 75 Unity Overview Optional m 8 Chinese fonts m 12 Kanji fonts i Note To use the optional fonts Kanji version you need a separate license on the computer system on which you are running the Unity Installation The Unity is part of the installation package on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server DVD see chapter Oc PRISMAproduction Server Installation Deinstallation Update in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Administration Settings and Tasks Guide Licensing The license for the Unity is one of the POD Module licenses which are managed on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Master For this reason the license for the Unity is automatically available when the Unity is configured together with the POD Module However if you add the license from the dongle for the Unity to an existing system you have to update the entries on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Master using the Licenses application of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer see Licenses on page 313 i Note The Unity will run for a transitional period if the dongle or the dongle license is no longer valid In this case an error message wi
524. r may add this statement but not nec essarily The custom ticket can only provide converter statements on HotDir reception These make sense if the data types change from job to job and the data type recognition of DPconnect doesn t work properly Furthermore this method allows you to select a defined converter out of a number of possibilities for example Graphic Arts Plus Normalizer instead of Unity RIP foor PostScript data Ticket Templates Ticket templates usually contain a converter statement But in cases when jobs with different data types have to be processed this statement is not useful because the converter statement of the ticket template is often incorrect The converter statement in ticket templates is useful if the data type doesn t change if jobs are to be received also via LP protocol and if the data type recognition of DP connect doesn t work properly Furthermore this method allows you to select a defined converter out of a number of possibilities for example Graphic Arts Plus Normalizer instead of Unity RIP foor PostScript data Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Data Processing Mode Tab Jobs Consist of Multiple Print Files Via HotDir jobs with multiple print files can be received In this case the followng re strictions exist a The RAW processing of jobs which contain multiple files with preceeding job ticket is not allowed because these job tickets may contradict ea
525. r must not be a minus sign or a period The hostname of the Linux system MUST definitely meet the above criteria otherwise the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Software will not work Also the format of the syntax for the file etc hosts MUST meet the following requirements see example IP ADDRESS FULL QUALIFIED DOMAIN ALIAS MORE NAME ALIASES 192 168 10 50 lxo01234 0ps de lxo01234 alias2 alias3 alias4 As a minimum the fields IPPADDRESS FULL QUALIFIED DOMAINNAME ALIAS must be present for each entry Otherwise Oc PRISMAproduction Server software will NOT work correct Step Action 1 Login as root and open YaST Control Center Most Used Applications Sj Control Center root KTimer C Eind FilesiFolders Shutdown File Manager Super User Mode All Applications T Applications gt amp Audio amp Video gt amp Browse gt i3 Communicate a Images gt Office gt PRISMAproduction Menu gt Configuration i Tools gt Desktop Applet E Control Center root GB Eile System Find FilesFolders fag Monitor By Home Sux Network Hy PRISMA Explorer Remote Access gt SUSE Help Center a Terminal aeii Actions Codemeter Control Center W My System 4 Settings Run Command E Leck Session E ton out Chapter 1 Installation Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Step Action
526. r the job FileType TriggerExt DataFile gt A data file is to be submitted as a single print job Data OCT File gt One or more sub directory data files together with an OCT are submitted as a print job The OCT must be sent as the last file Data TriggerFile gt One or more sub directory data files together with a trigger file are submitted as a single job The trigger file must be created as the last file DatatOCT TriggerFile gt One or more sub directory data files together with an OCT and a trigger file are submitted as a print job The trigger file must be created as the last file trg lt Any character String gt File Ready Parameters Parameter FileSizeDelay Possible values 5 lt Number gt The file name extension of the trigger file Description The delay in seconds which is waited after the file doesn t grow in size anymore before the file is marked as being complete Is used only when the keyword Trigger is set to the value Au toDetect or FileSizeExtended Check Chapter 7 Configuration 495 HotDir Parameter Possible values Description ProcScanType CheckAlIProcesses Checks all running processes if they have opened the file found in the monitored directory Is used only when the keyword Trigger is set to the value Au toDetect or ProcessOpen FileCheck Trigger AutoDetect gt Select the File ready trigger type Automatic
527. r the riod of time the password cannot be changed protect from an same password immediate rechange of the password Default is a blank the new password can be changed immedi ately Expiration date Date when the password expires in any case The day indicated here is the first day from which on no login to the system is possible anymore This is a superior indication which can be used for instance for a limited access of a user The entry is not used to enforce a periodic change of passwords The Days after password expires with usable login setting has no effect if the user login has expired after reaching the expira tion date Default is a blank access never expires Password Complexity The higher the complexity of a password is the more security is provided The password should have a reasonable length and should contain as many different characters as possible Selection Box Description Min length of The longer the password the greater the security is password Default is a blank no minimal length is required Min number of Minimal number of special characters a password must numeric characters contain Default is a blank no special characters are required Min number of Minimal number of numeric characters a password must contain special characters Default is a blank no numeric characters are required Chapter 7 Configuration 297 D
528. rameters tab a list with known ticket parameters and their descriptions is displayed New or cus tomer specific parameters which are not in this list can be added edited and deleted in this table Predefined parameters cannot be edited or deleted Note All parameters which you define here are globally known over all ticket rules and must therefore have a unique name Illustration E o r th X oe Rules Parameters Variables Value Tables Name Description Used in Rules client Client_Branch Additional information about client C client Client_City Client city Corresponding GUI option client Client_Company Client company Corresponding GUI o client Client_Country Client country Corresponding GUI opt client Client_Fax Client fax number Corresponding GU client Client_Name Name of the client Corresponding GU client Client_Street Client street Corresponding GUI optio client Client_Tel Client phone number Corresponding client Client_ZIP Client zip Corresponding GUI option file File_Size please insert a description Show_rule Add Parameters Click the Add button in the main tool bar to add a user defined parameter You can enter a name which is only valid if it contains a between section and key Additionally you can add a description text All user defined parameters can be modified later on Description Name test test_test Each Parameter has a unique name which has t
529. rch Cancel search Exit Document tab If you select this tab you can search documents according to certain at tributes like Size Greater than Smaller than Last access From date To date Hits More than Less than and Creation date From date To date The number of Results can be limited up to 200 Job Info tab Under this tab you can specify Job name Job queue Printer name and Printer type of the jobs you are searching for Job Info Receiver tab Under this tab you can specify information on the receiver as a search filter to find the desired jobs Inputfile tab Under this tab you can specify attributes of the input file like Name Format none IOCA PCL TIFF PDF Unity PS Unity ImpScheme and ImpSetname After you have selected the search criteria and after clicking the Start search button the search result is displayed in another dialog If the default settings on a tab have been modified the caption of the tab turns red The output of the results is also influenced by the number of results you have specified and the File type filter The results are displayed in lists of archives and documents You can select single files to rename or delete them Help Help opens the PFM help system Tool Bar The toolbar contains buttons for each of the devices configured via Configuration
530. re action to each plugged in component This means that each component is responsible for backing up and restoring it s own configuration data Even more each component is also responsible to support backwards compatibility between it s backup data Therefore it is not possible to modify the data add or remove files directories which is being backed up or restored Backup Phases The Backup Restore framework sends out several so called triggers to each plugged in component This gives the particular component the possibility to react accordingly Below a summary is given of all triggers which are executed when a configuration backup is being requested m Cancel Backup Initialization Phase Notifies a plugged in component that a configuration backup will be started The component must stop its processes which influence the configuration backup process immediately For example the ODS will cancel any running job The canceled ODS jobs must be reactivated again by the user after the backup has finished m Preupdate Backup Phase 328 Chapter 7 Configuration Backup Restore Basic Concept Restore Notifies a plugged in component that it can start making a backup of its configuration data a Uncancel Backup Finalizing Phase Notifies a plugged in component that the backup has been finished The component can now start to operate normally again Note If one or more plugged in components fail in backing up their confi
531. re applications in only one customer catalog Wait for end of print including SPS dummy printer is possible Note It is important that you print the applications because otherwise not enough information will be collected m Stop collect tool with e choose the catalog to collect and store the final file named u spool collect tgz and press Enter to exit In any case original XEROX resources print files and printouts should be supplied as well 412 Chapter 7 Configuration Paper Configuration Tool Paper Paper Configuration Tool Introduction You can use this dialog to define paper types which are available throughout the whole system You need paper types m for the use in DPconnect m as input parameters for conversion Most of the default paper types are already prede fined in the Standard Paper table They are also offered in the Convert dialog in the PJM For the conversion only the size of the paper is relevant m to describe the contents of the input trays You can use the User defined Paper table to define any paper with specific attributes Use the Form table to define forms which can be assigned to a job under the PJM dialog Job Attributes gt Print The form names also appear in the job lists The Tab table displays all available tabsets together with their description These tabs are available in the Tab Printing dialog of the PJM POD only You
532. re not edited properly services may NOT start and the system will NOT work properly Attention All configuration items regarding the system MUST be done using YaST control center when possible Attention After the configuration of the network a reboot of the server is definitely required Note The SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Administration and Configuration Guide is automat ically installed for extended documentation of the system To access it please open item SuSE Help SuSE Hilfe in the start menu Then choose SLES Admin Guide Chapter 1 Installation Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Illustration Start Page KOE Help Center File Edit View Go Settings Help d i a OOO es RAAM Contents Glossary Searct gt Release Notes for SUSE Linux Ente E SLES Documentation F Application Manuals E Administration E Development Release Notes for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 I Online Resources A short description of the most important changes for this SUSE Linux Enterprise Server release SLES Documentation SLES Documentation o Start Up Guide en Start Up Guide en o Installation and Administration en Installation and Administration en o Heartbeat en Heartbeat en o Architecture Specific Information en Architecture Specific Information en o SLES 10 Storage Administration Guide en SLES 10 Storage Administration Guide en Application Manuals o Reference docume
533. re restores a Backup PrepareImport prepares current Oc PRISMAproduction Server for the import of a Backup Import imports a Backup History displays the backup restore import history SearchBackups searches for Backups Delete deletes a Backup GetPlugins shows all possible plug ins GetPluginContents shows contents of a plug in i Note In the detailed descriptions below the following is true Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 603 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Command options in square brackets are optional lt string gt represents an arbitrary string with no length restriction If it contains special characters it must be included in double quotes m lt string list gt represents a comma separated list of arbitrary strings with no length re striction but without comma If it contains special characters the whole list must be included in double quotes m Strings enclosed in single quotes represent themselves i e they must be entered as is without the single quotes m Default values are underlined Normally this is the value of the option if the option is not defined at all a The sequence of the command line parameters is significant they must be entered in the order how they are described in this document respective the help infor mation displayed by the commands themselves Create a Backup Create a Backup 604 All directories files defined in a template specific for the current
534. re the LCDS process chain ifil ter gt xfilter gt spooljob should run Alarm_Delay represents the minutes between the Accepted time of the print job and the time limit Alarm_text is the message shown in the message popup window if the time limit is reached Description of the corre sponding GUI option Additional notes Job Attributes gt Print LCDS Only Name of the client Client company Client city Client street Client zip Client country Client phone number Client fax number Additional information about client Menu Job gt Information gt User Menu Job gt Information gt User Menu Job gt Information gt User Menu Job gt Information gt User Menu Job gt Information gt User Menu Job gt Information gt User Menu Job gt Information gt User Menu Job gt Information gt User Menu Job gt Information gt User Oce Custom Ticket Parameter General Description Description of the corre Options and Syntax De sponding GUI option fault Additional notes a Rec_Name Name of receiver Menu Job gt Information gt Receiver Rec_Company Receiver company Menu Job gt Information gt Receiver Rec_City Receiver city Menu Job gt Information gt Receiver Rec_Street Receiver street Menu Job gt Information gt Receiver Rec_ZIP Receiver zip Menu Job gt Information gt Receiver Rec_Country Receiver c
535. ready restored remain untouched false The restore process continues with the next plug in when an error occurs The restored directories files of the plug in which raised the error may be incomplete i Note It s up the user to ensure data in tegrity when there are errors dur ing the restore process Errors are reported on the console and logged in the Oc PRISMApro duction Server Backup log file Import a Backup 610 The directories files collected in the backup are imported in a system with a different Operation System and or a different Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster but with identical host names and IP addresses and or a different Oc PRISMAproduction Server main version A backup is identified by its Backup ID which is generated internally when the backup is created To scan for existing backups use the SearchBackups command described below As default all data in the backup is imported However a selective import is possible based on m either by including only data of certain plug ins command option plugins a and or by including only the data of certain Oc PRISMAproduction Server servers command option servers Note The import operation is only supported in version 3 04 3 10 and 4 0 Only Backup data of versions less than the current version can be imported When importing only part of the data the user is responsible for data integrity As for data integrity reasons t
536. request the following is valid the ticket template Translation mode is Substitute Statement with an other Action AND Apply to all Jobs is set OR Translation mode is Substitute Statement with an other Action AND Apply to Jobs requiring lt certain postprocessing gt only is AND The corresponding postprocessing request is present in the input ticket Rules no 1 AND 2 do not apply AND for at least one postpro cessing request the following is valid a Translation mode is Translate Statement directly AND The corresponding postprocessing request is present in the One or more direct ly translated post processing out of the input job ticket input ticket Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 187 DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries i 188 Note If there are two postprocessing requests one being translated directly one being substi tuted by a ticket template action the directly translated request is being ignored and only the substituted request becomes effective There is a check made to find out whether the resulting postprocessing does match the UP3I postprocessing settings of the selected output tray of the destination printer This ensures that only those UP3I postprocessing requests which are really available become effective If the check fails a job problem message is attached to the job and the operator will be asked how to proceed Using PDC Stitch
537. resources via xfilter rfilter and Copy JCF external resources via XRC For the CustomTone 1 the main idea of the documentation still applies Only the Xerox color names see table below are converted in respective AFP OCA Colors names all other colors except BLACK K100 AFP Black into AFP Yellow oxo6 Yellow was chosen to be able to distinguish this from the normal HC case Using Color mapping tables CMT the color names hex codes can be mapped to certain highlight color stations numbers defined on by the printer or gray values etc Using CMT s all CustomTone toner stations can be addressed These CMT tables may be acti vated on the physical printer itself imported via Floppy or USB stick configured in the logical SPS printer of PRISMAproduction PDS settings Parameter PDSCOLMAP or configured via PJM using the SPS printer pds parameter PDSCOLMAP as key and lt CMT Name gt as value in the Job Attributes Custom Setting Tab The CMT lt CMT Name gt must be present in one of the directories of the Resource Library path defined Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Special Functions and User Scripts for the respective Job For LCDS this may be the directories for the printer resources system resource or the job resource XEROX Names AFP Names OCA AFP Hex Code RED COLOR_RED Ox0002 GREEN COLOR_GREEN Ox0004 BLUE COLOR_BLUE Ox0001 CYAN COLOR_TURQCYAN oxooos CARDINAL
538. ributes section of the PJM m Finally submit the job with the Submit button Job Queue 358 LCDS_Driver Jobs appear in the Job List with Type LCDS This assures that the spool will direct LCDS jobs to an LCDS printer and not to an AFP printer Other jobs usually appear here with Type AFP including ordinary standard LCDS jobs converted by the xfilter Restrictions m Page number see column Pages in the job list is not known exactly This is because Oc PRISMAproduction Server cannot know the page structure as the break down of the job into pages would require JSL information VFU PDE which is available on the Xerox destination printer only Therefore a simple minded page counting has been implemented Each advance across channel 1 is counted as one page a Printing page ranges see column Print range is not supported same reason as above a Check pointing is supported but the only check point is at job begin same reason as above a Accounting records are written But the accounted page numbers have the same re striction as mentioned above Chapter 7 Configuration Linedata Printer Driver LCDS Printers configured as XEROX LCDS Printers appear in the printer pool You can operate activate deactivate reset interrupt assign to job classes them in the usual way Successful operation of LCDS jobs will produce messages in the messages window Download Configuration
539. ring LDAP Parameter CountryPreferences Password Max Number of Jobs 9 Hold Finished Jobs h 12 Hold Finished Mirror Jobs h 12 Hold Locked Jobs h i Hold Log Files d 2 Min Free Diskspace 15 Threshold value Free Diskspace 3 ODS Protocol Level 1 Ready ODS Parameter Parameter Description Max Number of You can define the maximum number of jobs that can be active Jobs simultaneously in the ODS The default is o jobs no upper limit Without indicating an upper limit the number of possible active jobs is limited by the setting of the minimum free disk space on the system Hold Finished Use this field to specify how many hours you wish successfully Jobs h completed jobs to be kept in the job list The data files belonging to finished jobs are deleted following this time so as to save space Ifyou enter o finished jobs are kept due to system requirements for 70 seconds Jobs with errors are treated differently these are kept on the system until they are actually removed Default 12h 282 Chapter 7 Configuration System Configuration ODS Parameter Parameter Hold Finished Mirror Jobs h Description Number of hours which have to pass after deleting the original jobs before the mirrored jobs will be deleted from the mirror server If you enter o h the mirrored jobs are deleted at the
540. rinter 344 Printer Driver Chapter 7 Configuration Connection Printer Model Sends Postscript and POD IOCA based AFP to Oc PostScript printers Vario Print 2090 21xx 31xx 61xx 62xx CPS700 and CPS900 Sends Postscript and POD IOCA based AFP to non Oc PostScript printers for exam ple Canon_150 Digimas ter_9110 and Xerox Do cutech_6180 The input data will be con verted from the IOCA format to the PostScript format PostScript files can be printed directly using the PIM RAW format The printer answers as AFP printer Consequently you can only select this data type in General gt Data Format i Note Please note that DigiMaster has Ticket support only no job monitoring via printer This is the functionality of the former DocuTech Driv er and DigiMas ter Driver Licenses Printer Configuration Add a new Printer i Printer Driver Connection PJL PCL Driver Network with LP Protocol Linedata Printer Driver 370 Channel intercom 2 Network with Socket Port Generic Driver Network with FTP Proto col Network with LP Protocol Network with Socket Port EXE Subbackend Centronics LPT Note Printer Model For VP6000 also fully composed MO DCA data APA LCDS and PDF Con tainer based AFP POD are sup ported PJL PCLs printers especially VHV PCLprinters Prints
541. rinter Capabilities for Tabulator Media Sets Sort Order of Tabulator Media Sets E Ask at Job Problems Job Processing Window 160 Simplex Print on Tabulator Media Single Tabulator Media Set per Job EA Ascending Z The following controls influence the way incoming print jobs are being processed Item Description Input Job Ticket overrides PRISMAproduc tion Ticket Tem plate Allow Identical Copies from Tick et Template Checked The impositioning requested from the incoming job overrides the PDC impsitioning which is probably set in the job ticket template assigned to the LP input queue over which the job was received Unchecked The PDC impsitioning which is probably set in the job ticket template assigned to the LP input queue over which the job was received overrides the impositioning requested from the incoming job Ifyou explicitly want to use a PDC impsitioning which fits to a paper post processing attached to the printer you have to set this switch to off Default Checked Checked If identical copies are required in the ticket template assigned to the LP input queue over which the job was received this mode will be printed even if Input Job Ticket overrides PRISMAproduction Ticket Template is activated Unchecked Indentical copies in the ticket template are ignored All other Composer settings are also overwritten by the Xerox ticket Default Checked
542. rmanent use of BackupEDGE the product must be licensed and furthermore NO change in configuration already made is necessary Configuration Recommended usage of Backup Media Oc has extensively tested Microlite BackupEDGE with different media In order to create reliable backups Oc recommends to use tape drives The tests also showed that using DVD s as backup medias is NOT RECOMMENDED as the media are too dam ageable Disaster Recovery Microlite BackupEDGE offers the functionality to create a full disaster recovery backup which consists of a bootable media and the backup data In order to use the disaster re covery functions it is necessary to create a bootable media and to perform an unscheduled full backup afterwards so that this backup can easily restore the entire server after a crash Please see the Microlite BackupEDGE manuals on how to create a bootable media and on how to perform an unscheduled full backup Note Li Please note that every time the hard disk or hardware configuration is changed in a way that new different partition tables are set up or new hardware kernel driver modules have to be used a COMPLETE set of disaster recovery media must be created Also all backups referring to the old hardware setup of the server are NOT usable anymore Further Information and Tips As for every backup it is absolutely recommended to stop Oc PRISMAproduction Server before performing any backup operation This is necessa
543. rnrnnssessrnnnenenrnnnnn 339 Printer Configuration Add a new Printer s ssssssseeessssssreressrerenns 342 Printer Configuration Job Notification s seessesseeesssssernnsesrsrsnns 346 Printer Configuration General sssssssesssssssssnnssrrnrnnesennrnnnnnnsrnnnnn 349 Printer Configuration Print Parameter sssssseessssseresssssrnressrernns 352 Printer Configuration Printer Drivers Backend6 eeee 355 IPDS Driver AFP2IPDS Backend ccccsesceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseneeeesenees 356 Linedata Printer Driver LCDS eccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 357 PostScript Backends Xerox 6180 VP2110 VP61xx OCE31x5 Canon 150 CPS700 900 ssisisccsssve ccovectecesecnaecatesesssecucvensteseapsbavswsssducssercendetieas 360 Printer Configuration Custom specific Infopages and Resources for Configured Printers asori a rar ea aae Aaaa Ea a 362 Printer Configuration Job QueueS sssssssssssssssernrsssrrnnnssnernnnn 364 Printer Configuration Cluster ssesssssseesesssnrnresrrennnsnesrnnnnnnnrnn nnn 365 Printer Configuration Toner Stations ccscseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 366 Printer Configuration Input DeViCeS cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 367 Printer Configuration Output Devices ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 368 Printer Configuration Printer Notification eeeeee 369 Printer Configuration Gray CUIrVeS cccccceeescsceeeeeeeeeea
544. rogram are a All Oc printers with SRA3 controller and bundle 5 functional code CPSI are sup ported Note To have access to all functions of the program the connected printers must have a CPSI license for the functional code Support of PPML version 2 2 with UTF 8 coding Conversion of PPML files and resources to AFPDS Setting Simplex Duplex via the GUI Setting of X2up via the GUI of the Professional Document Composer PS PDF TIFF and JPEG objects are supported Conformance Subset Graphics Art of PPML The restrictions are a Multilevel is not supported Color support depends on the abilities of the printer a Only PPML files are supported which comply with the Graphics Arts Conformance Level a PPML and AFPDS files up to a maximum of 2 GB are supported a By mapping color on gray scales contrasts maybe lost Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PPML Converter Workflow PPML Converter Workflow Introduction Prerequisites m Proper installation of Oc PRISMAproduction Server POD Module V4 0 or higher Proper import of licenses All external resources for the PPML application must be located in the subdirectory ppml of the application ma The PPML application should be located in the same directory but can also be stored in any other directory m The related DTD file must be located in the directory u prismapro lib ppml Per default the files ppml102 dtd and ppml 220 dtd is copied in this direc
545. rom the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring booklet maker only gt Take booklet maker substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices if booklet maker is requested in the input ticket All UP3I devices selected here are used Ignore Statement gt No booklet maker is used Printer Default Finishing Translate Statement directly gt Take postprocessing commands from the ticket template Job At tributes Print Print UP3I Devices Substitute Statement with an other Action gt LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take postprocessing commands from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocess ing Apply to Jobs requiring printer default finishing only gt Take post processing commands from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices if printer default finishing is requested in the input ticket All UP3I devices selected here are used Ignore Statement gt No printer default finishing External Finishing Device Custom Translate Statement directly gt A UP3I Special Handling command is put to the job only if exter nal postproce
546. roneous option Quiet mode o gt lt invalid option gt No connection error Is set when no connection to the PRISMAproduction server specified by s option could be established STDERR Message describing the connection problem Quiet mode 1 gt lt server name gt gt lt server error message gt Ticket handling error Chapter 8 PJM Command Line 543 PJM Command Line Parameters Return code Meaning Is set when the tickets given in the t or r and or oct cannot be found opened STDERR Message describing the open problem Quiet mode 1 gt lt local ticket open error message gt 2 gt lt reprint ticket open error message gt 3 gt lt custom ticket open error message gt 10 File transfer error Is set when one of the files in the list of files cannot be trans ferred Transfer process stops with the file in error files already transferred to the server are deleted on the server STDERR Message describing the file transfer problem Quiet mode 1 gt lt file name gt gt lt error message gt 11 Negative Ticket check Is set when the combination of the local or reprint and custom ticket with the command line options results in an invalid ticket All errors found are listed Note that there are errors which are so basically that no further analysis can be done for example an invalid printer as most of the checks are printer related Analysis stops with such an error S
547. ropriate status changes by supplying a filename a parameter to the executed utility This file contains all additional information about the job or the printer Both types of notification are configured in the Printer Configuration Manager a Job ANI one global configurable program a Printer ANI configurable for each printer separately Job Active Notification Interface Clicking the toolbar button 8 or the entry in the printer menu opens a dialog allowing you to configure the job ani utility Execute on Master for any Job changes collectReferencejabinfos Save Cancel The command is specified globally for all print jobs The command is executed always only on the master server In the text field of the dialog the customer is able to specify his own programs or shell scripts which are executed each time when one of the following conditions occur m A new job has been submitted m The status of a queued job has been changed Ready to print gt Printing gt Locked m A job is deleted from the queue 346 Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration Job Notification The specified program gets a file as the only command line parameter which contains some information on the job m This is always a unique name in the whole file system m Directory for the temporary files u prismapro data ani m This file must be deleted by the program after it finishes processing the information Ex
548. rred See chapter Input Status in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server User s Guides 460 Chapter 7 Configuration Input Modules Overview Illustration H exe 7 Service Input Channel OTM_IN_APA_AFP HotDir1 Description pjm pjm pjm PrajobSubmission Trapping AFP d pjm DefaultTicket OTM_IN_APA_AFP APA 600dpi_witho APA 600dpi_with APA 600d pi_with t MirrorServer 10 53 76 32 TicketRule CHG_PRT_ON_MIRROR Group General General File input File input File input File input File input File reacly check File ready check File ready check Job sequencing Job sequencing Parameter Description EnableProcessing CustomTicketExt IgnoreHiddenFiles ScanType FileType TriggerExt FileSizeDelay ProcScanType Trigger JobSequencing JobSonSequence DefaultTicket ExtractParameters Field 1 Field2 Field3 Fleld4 Fields Field Field Fields FieldSeparator true oct true AutoDetect DataFile arg CheckAllProcesses AutoDetect false Off APA_600dpi_withou off Iv FPParameters otf Default Yalue off Description AFPParameters Extracts parameter for the OCT from the first Noop in the AFP data file See also section Extracting AFP parameter otr No parameter extraction is done default Overview on the Behavior and Features of the different Input Modules Download on page 474 HotDir on page 488 LP
549. rror or interrupted or hold state operator in tervention is required error service error occurred when processing job step intr service job step has been interrupted by operator hold service job step is in hold error print error occurred while printing intr print print process has been interrupted by operator hold print print process is on hold wait for starting time to occur finished The job is finished but still visible in spool operator intervention is required for reprint final finished job cannot be reprinted locked job can still be reprinted 546 Chapter 8 PJM Command Line Chapter 9 Oce Custom Ticket Oce Custom Ticket Oce Custom Ticket Introduction The Oc custom ticket provides the possibility to modify an existing job ticket during it s execution It is possible to insert a job section with global parameters Into this section you can insert up to 9998 subsections files which define the parameter of the single print files If there are already print files in the loaded job ticket their parameters will be modified You only have to add those parameters and sections which should be modified by the OCT Sections and parameters which are not inserted will be ignored The following table describes parameters which can be modified via the Oc Custom Ticket Parameters of the Oc Custom Ticket Parameter General Description Description of the corre Options and Syntax De sp
550. rrow next to this icon a pop up menu appears with the following options New Queue See above Insert Queue Areas Opens a dialog where you can specify a range of job queues to be added to the list Ranges between 1 and 999 are possible You can also define a description for the queues to be added If you define or these characters will be replaced by numbers for example 7 07 and 007 Map MVS Queues Opens a dialog where you can map queues which have been defined on an MVS host system Base Number Default is 100 i e the first number of the MVS queue inserted is 100 The base number range is from 01 950 You can also define a description for the queues to be added MVS is the recom mendation In this case is replaced with the MVS names A Z and 0 9 Example MVS generates MVS A MVS B MVS 2 MVS 1 P MVS 9 Add Copy of a Adds a copy of the marked queue entry Queue Ga Save Queue Con Saves the current configuration in the database figuration B Delete Entries Either delete the selected queue or all queues from the list x Add Queues to Opens a dialog where you can assign the selected queue s to Printers the printers configured in the system Import Queues Opens a file selection dialog to import saved job queues You 4 can select to export from the V2 x or V3 x format Chapter 7 Configuration Job Queues C
551. rs essentially have the responsibility for pre venting errors and there are always alternative courses of action available defined as part of the language Consequently it is at present up to the user to ensure that for example all the required resources are embedded correctly in the data stream Error messages that can occur on IO processors or due to incorrect parameters Messages in Stand Alone Conversion The Converter error messages are output on STDERR in accordance with the conventions described in the table below Messages in Conversion Integrated into Oc PRISMAproduction Server All processes on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system run under the control of the Order Distribution System ODS This also goes for the output of error messages ODS always uses the error code 203 for converter errors Messages are displayed in the ODS Control window The Oc PRISMAproduction Server messages and logs only tell you that a conversion was begun and whether it was completed aborted abnormally due to an error or canceled by an Oc PRISMAproduction Server Cancel command ODS is always specified as the module reporting the error Known and acceptable differences between the PCL Converter and the HP Reference Priner LaserJet a Ifa Universal Exit Language lt Esc gt 12345X command appears within a PCL file all resources softfonts macros overlays are deleted and are not available anymore after a UEL command Reason the
552. rsectvaevsoasne 322 Country Settings Country Settingsss sesssscesscesesscssasessoessovorenseees 264 D Devices Configuration Devices Configuration ccc 298 300 DPconnect Barcode Gab sssassvesvesdussesscextsaeevsivsivnisarvaectecins 174 Configuration and Job Submission 153 Configuration Example ccc 189 Data Processing s 5 ccnceecscesesseoverses sonrensoentecies 164 Puinictiotiality sscascesecssissiesesiiideth deanzectiaeiioiest 147 Hints for using Ticket Templates 0 0 0 0 177 Input Job Ticket Translation ccecceeee 172 Job Processing sicsccssssssescssccsssssataesssisaczsasaseaces 160 Maintenance Programs cceeseeeeeseseeeeeeees 193 Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries 178 Translation Rules for Input Job Ticket Statements a EE S 196 User Iintertaceiicdcaccsciscesccaconscisteavervnavaevinens 159 E Events Configuration Events Configuration s sssssssssessssserisreereseee 280 Explorer Launcher Explorer Launcher acsccsesscssecssccoveseictseoasserasoionss 56 F Forms FONS 263 cosa vaveancvacabihecensscceiavnssscunssstonareerteesss 414 G GetTiff Service Get Lift Service sirieias orasan 100 Graphic Arts_Plus Graphic Arts PlUs sssssersesieveescssdestctscsssisitisnien 96 639 Index l Installation Installation Deinstallation Update of PRISMAproduction siseserereisisniean 45 Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 23 Installation of SUSE Linux Create server configuratio
553. rt m YES like SEND_REND a NO m Close Channel like CLOSE_CHAN Delay time in milliseconds between the last channel end of a full buffer see ChanBufSize processing a received CCW and the DeviceEnd set by ifilter Setting the delay time gt o may be useful when the channel is opened in daisy chain mode and other network traffic is running parallel on the channel FCB Ignore L Chapter 7 Configuration Indicates whether the online print data will be checked against the FCB o or not 1 The default is o If the customer uses skip to channel and this channel is not definied in FCB the ifilter generates an errormessage 30000063 ifilter Data check for input from 370 channel and interrupts the printout It may be useful to set the FCB Ignore to 1 to force a printout In this case you have to be aware that the printed data are incor rect Therefore you have to adjust the print data and FCB i e channels set in the print data must also be defined in the FCB for correct printout LCDS Parameter Configuration Special Functions and User Scripts LCDS Parameter Configuration Special Functions and User Scripts Introduction This chapter describes some special user settings and user scripts for the LCDS Module Changing the Default Paper Size You can start the program setpapersize in a Linux command line window after logging in as root setdefpaper shows the default p
554. ry and the local copy is passed to the Document Designer command line Chapter 12 Oc Document Designer Integration in Oc PRISMAproduction Server 635 Oc Document Designer for Oc PRISMAproduction Server 5 The Document Designer Job Definition File optional If lt job file gt is pre fixed by ODDA the addressed JOB file is temporarily extracted from the ODDA library and the local copy is passed to the Document Designer command line Note as the integration of ODDA in Oc PRISMAproduc tion Server is based on the AFP engine only the latter is referenced by oddaservice Only the AFP engine configurations can be referenced by 6 6 The Engine Configuration Name referred to in the Job Definition File op tional only valid if also a Job Definition File has been defined The Engine Configuration Name parameter must only be used if the Job Definition File contains a respective AFP engine configuration and has been saved with op tion Include all engine configs by the ODDA Production GUI Note i If there is more than one file defined in the files section and the Document Designer should process them all they can all refer to the same oddaservice dynamic extension If different WFDfiles and JOBfiles Engines are to be used for different input files exten sions of their own must be defined Also tickets with a mix of conventionally processed files and files to be processed by the Document Designer
555. ry to stop all database services and prevent backup of print jobs in progress which would result in a backup of just parts of jobs and other related data which makes such a backup useless All necessary information about starting stopping Oc PRISMAproduction Server for backup is pro vided in the next chapter Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 591 Connectivity to Oc PRISMAproduction Server Connectivity to Oc PRISMAproduction Server Introduction 592 With Oc PRISMAproduction Server some predefined configurations will be provided which will configure some basic setups and also checkup scripts BackupEDGE provides an interface to create own Backup Sets or import predefined Backup Sets Important hereby is the fact that such Backup Sets can also execute commands such as to automat ically request to stop Oc PRISMAproduction Server before starting the backup Please see the BackupEDGE manual on how to create your own Backup Sets or import those provided by Oc PRISMAproduction Server In detail BackupEDGE provides three different scripts in the etc directory which are named m etc edge start is executed BEFORE starting a backup m etc edge passed is executed AFTER SUCESSFULLY finished a backup m etc edge failed is executed AFTER the backup failed for any reason Within these scripts commands can be executed or complete own scripts can be inserted or called The scripts can be used for any user defined
556. rySchlbk BoldItalic AlbertusMT Light GillSans BoldItalic NewCenturySchlbk Italic AlbertusMT AntiqueOlive Bold GillSans Condensed Q illSans ExtraBold NewCenturySchlbk Roman NEWYORK Arial BoldMT Arial ItalicMT Goudy BoldItalic Goudy ExtraBold AntiqueOlive Compact GillSans Italic Optima Bold AntiqueOlive Italic GillSans Light Optima BoldlItalic AntiqueOlive Roman GillSans LightItalic Optima Italic Apple Chancery GILLSANS OPTIMA Arial BoldItalicMT Goudy Bold OXFORD Palatino Bold Palatino BoldlItalic ARIALMT Goudy Italic Palatino Italic AvantGarde Book GOUDY Palatino Roman AvantGarde BookOblique Helvetica Bold StempelGaramond Bold AvantGarde Demi AvantGarde DemiOblique Bodoni Bold Helvetica BoldOblique Helvetica Condensed Bold Helvetica Condensed BoldObl StempelGaramond BoldItalic StempelGaramond Italic StempelGaramond Roman Bodoni PosterCompressed BODONI Helvetica Narrow BoldOblique Helvetica Narrow Oblique Bodoni BoldItalic Helvetica Condensed Oblique SYMBOL Bodoni Italic Helvetica Condensed TEKTON Bodoni Poster Helvetica Narrow Bold Times Bold Times BoldItalic Times Italic Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 79 Unity User Resources and Fonts Bookman Demi Bookman Demiltalic Helvetica Narrow Times Roman Helvetica Oblique imesNewRomanPS BoldItalicMT Bookman Lig
557. s Default no reprint Name of the ticket rule which is applied to the executed job ticket This function is not implemented in the PJM user interface Default no ticket rule Name of the job Default tmp if no job name has been defined in the local ticket or custom ticket The job name in the custom ticket overlays the job name in the local reprint ticket jc lt job queue gt nc lt copy count gt prt lt printer name gt Number of the jobqueue Default 1 Number of jobcopies Default 1 Name of the target printer or clustername The printer also determines the resolution at which the job will be printed Instead of a configured printername or clustername you can also insert the keyword lt Any printer gt or lt Any nnn dpi printer gt nnn stands for the resolution Default the first printer available form lt form gt pdef lt page defini tion gt fdef lt form defini tion gt title lt title gt PRISMA form name which will be displayed to operator before printing starts Default STD i e no form message is displayed PRISMA Page Definition If more than one file is defined in the list of files the page defi nition is set for each of the according print steps PRISMA Form Definition If more than one file is defined in the list of files the form def inition is set for each of the according print steps Specifies a title for System Header Pages File Parameters
558. s History In contrast to Restore you can use Import to import components from older versions for example from V3 02 to V3 10 If the entry Do not overwrite existing files is activated files which have the same name will not be overwritten Files with a different name will be stored The History view shows the list of all actions which have been performed on the system You can filter this list if you either activate Backup Restore Import or Error If you select Error only these actions will be listed which have an error in their Status column 602 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client Introduction The client included in the prismabackup package is a Python script which performs a few functions directly like preparing Oc PRISMAproduction Server for the Backup Command Line Script Name of the command line script prismabackup py Usage prismabackup py lt command gt lt options gt Details prismabackup py h lt command gt Overview of commands the script can perform Command Performs h displays this page v displays version PrepareBackup prepares current Oc PRISMAproduction Server for Backup creation CreateBackup creates a Backup PrepareRestore prepares current Oc PRISMAproduction Server for the restore of a Backup Resto
559. s Introduction i The LCDS Module includes a set of programs running under LINUX as different pro cesses to convert and prepare original XEROX applications and resources for printing on Oc printers and on standard IPDS printers The processes can be concatenated resulting in a process chain of one or more process sections The LCDS Module has a fixed directory structure This is shown below Note lt catalog gt is the name of the active customer catalog The default is DEFAULT Process Overview Directory Contents u prismapro bin Modules e g xfilter xdl u prismapro bin Catest spool u prismapro cfg Icds u prismapro lib uimng jcf Configuration files Job control files u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt frm Input forms Xerox format u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt frm_conv Converted forms u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt fnt u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt fnt_conv Input fonts Xerox format Converted fonts u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt img Input images Xerox format u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt img_conv Converted images u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt lgo u prismapro data cat lt catalog gt lgo_conv Input logos Xerox format Converted logos u prismapro data lt catalog gt jsl Input JSL ASCII format u prismapro data lt catalog gt xrx Input data set I Filter
560. s only restricted access to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server configuration cannot be modified Examples for sections within which you can activate or deactivate single permissions in dependent of the corresponding user role Access jobs of other users Job viewer job modification settings Accounting server message server settings Explorer settings Print Job Manager settings for example Production or Expert mode for example working only with predefined print jobs or modifying and saving ticket settings Printer status viewer settings a Media assignment settings a Explorer session settings See User Management User Permissions on page 271 for a detailed description of the switchable permissions The User Permissions application also indicates which permissions of which default user are active or inactive Examples for Permissions and Attributes connected to User Roles i 64 Note These permissions and attributes cannot be modified User role operator has all permissions to monitor and operate thew system display all messages shut down the system import print data from a 9 track tape or a 18 36 track cartridge activate deactivate Host Download change the own password very restricted access to the configuration applications very few modifications possible execute shell scripts and programs which have been stored in a userscript directory by the service engineer User role applic Chapter
561. s to an external storage medium This is particularly important given that a PFL is usually on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server print servers Note Li Documents that have been exported to an external medium remain in a PFL as links marked as a file name followed by so it is possible to display the complete contents of a PFL without going via the external storage medium The origin of the exported documents is always also recorded on the external medium Documents can only be imported back into their original location It is also possible to delete or rename exported files without first placing them back in a PFL Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 69 Print File Manager PFM i 70 Note The exported data can then no longer be imported automatically Menu Bar The menu bar contains the commands for running the PFM functions Media The Media command enables you to choose which medium as default output tape1 and tapez are set you want to transfer the data to You can also export data to an external computer system provided access to this system is configured under Configuration gt Master Slave When configuring media for the PFM via Configuration gt Devices you have to use special keywords which are offered in a drop down list if you double click the respective field Under Type PFL_HOST or PFL_TAPE computer or tape device Under Format PFL_TAR or PFL_CPIO If you select PFL_L
562. s which implements the plug in client m Name of the class which implements the plug in server Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client m Name of the class which implements the plug in content m Name of the class which implements the plug in permissions In the current version of Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup all plug ins refer to the same implementation the generic template based plug in implementation backuptemplate 3xx xml This configuration file is used exclusively by the generic template based plug in imple mentation The backup template file contains entries for all plug ins Each plug in entry contains file set lists for the different Oc PRISMAproduction Server server types Note There mustn t be an entry for each server If there is no entry it simply means that no data will be collected on that type of server This is often true for PrintSlaves as there aren t scarcely any user data available there the PrintSlaves task is mainly to print and all data needed is fetched on the fly from the other servers of the cluster Example section of backuptemplate 300 xml Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 619 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Command Line Client lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt backuptemplate name BackupTemplate 3 00 gt lt 4 lt description gt Backups created from template 3 00 lt description gt lt plugin identifier A
563. scccccecceeceeeeeseeesssesssseseeees 281 System Configuration ODS Parametel ccccceceesseeeesssesssereees 282 System Configuration System and Job Parametet cc08 284 System Configuration eMail Notification ccccsssseseseeeenees 286 System Configuration MIrrOring cccccsccccccecceeceseeeeeeesssessssseeees 288 System Configuration LDAP Parametel cccsccssseeeesesseseneees 290 System Configuration Country Preferences scsseeees 293 System Configuration PASSWOP ccccccccceeeeeeseeeeseeessssessseeeeees 295 DEVICES A E TE E A E E decesdacsanasdeabs 298 Devices CONFIQUratiON cecccecee eee eeeeeee cee eeeeeeeee ee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeas 298 Devices Configuration APA LCDS cccccccccceeceessseesssesssseneees 300 Master Slave sg seh cccscue sens aa a a aE a E E E EE 301 Master Slave Configuration sssssssssssssssssssnrsssssrnnnnnsrrnnnnnsnnernnnn 301 Message SYStem c cccccceesessececeeeeeeeneeeeceeeeaaaeeeeseneeaaaaeeeeeeeeneaaeseneeneaad 304 Message System OVErVieW ssssscssecsssssseesseeeeeceeeeseeessseesesees 304 Message System General SettingGS cccccccccssccsessssssssessssereeees 305 Message System Automatic Saving cccccccccccsseesssessssssssserrees 307 Message System Automatic ANSWELS ccccccsceceesssseesssssssereeees 309 Message System
564. scription Server Name Name of the java server Debug Log entries of the type debug Use only for diagnostic reasons Trace Log entries of the type trace logging program sequences Info Log entries of the type info such as connected and disconnected messages Warning Log entries of the type warning 278 Chapter 7 Configuration Logging Column Description Log entries of the type error such as error messages If you click the Debug Trace or Info column with the right mouse button a context menu opens which allows you to enable or disable the trace debug and info protocol levels either for all servers or only for the marked cells Marked cells can also be inverted Example for a Log File 26 07 2004 08 07 36 TRACE DataServer 27 getNextEvent returned event LOG_PROFILE changed 26 07 2004 08 07 36 INFO ExplorerServer Log profile has changed Update Log Writer 26 07 2004 08 07 36 TRACE ConfigurationServer 233 postEvent event added DB LOG_GROUPS table_changed 26 07 2004 08 07 36 TRACE ConfigurationServer 23 3 getAllEvents returned 1 events 26 07 2004 08 07 39 INFO DeviceFileSystemServer 209 client disconnected 26 07 2004 08 07 39 INFO pfl server 210 client disconnected 26 07 2002 08 07 45 INFO ConfigurationServer 233 client disconnected For a description of the menu and toolbar icons see General Usage of the Configuration Applications on page 256
565. scription in the file and is used globally for all PJL drivers on this server In the future this file will also be replaced by a properties window in the PJM PCL Replacement PCL commands provide access to the printer s PCL control structure The PCL structure controls all features of the printer PCL printer commands other than single character control codes are also referred to as escape sequences PCL replacement is a possibility to change PCL printer commands or escape sequences This function allows to control the features of one particular printer or to change PCL applications device independent Some PCL applications are so complex that it is necessary to use a set of different PCL replacements to adjust them to special printers So the best way for PCL replacement is the possibility of universal changing in PCL data stream which allows covering its diverse modifications The most useful PCL replacements are summarized in the following table Examples for PCL Usual Dependencies Replacement Simplex Duplex Printer dependent print Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation 237 PCL Native Workflow in the PJM 238 Examples for PCL Replacement Paper size Paper orientation Input tray Output tray Foreground Color Job Separation Delete all UP3I PCL sequences Offset PCL setting Delete all offset PCL sequences Move margins top horizontal etc Ticket Parameters Paramater files PJL_ESC_
566. se are selected or shown In the solutions it is assumed that the HotDirWinClient is used with a shared HotDir directory The possible solutions are m The data files have to be printer in alphabetically or numerical order and Oc PRISMAproduction Server shows one grouped job Configure the HotDirWinClient as follows lt path gt HotDirWinClient exe MultiFilesGrouped TransType SMB lt Target gt Configure HotDir FileType Data TriggerFile DataFileSortSequence AlphaNumerically or Alphabeti cally JobGrouping GroupedFileJobs m The data files have to be printer in alphabetically or numerical order and Oc PRISMAproduction Server shows single data file jobs Configure the HotDirWinClient as follows lt path gt HotDirWinClient exe MultiFile Grouped TransType SMB lt Target gt Configure HotDir FileType Data TriggerFile DataFileSortSequence AlphaNumerically or Alphabeti cally JobGrouping SingleFileJobs Chapter 7 Configuration 491 HotDir Parameter to OCT Conversion 492 Each of the input modules has its own internal variable names which are mapped to Ticket section keywords The following table describes the mapping of these variable names Default Formdef files Formdef F1i use System Default nput Tray job Intray use Formdef value I o a Oc PRISMApro duction Server Ticket Parameter Section amp Key word Carriage Control files Pdscc Char Hot Directory FieldName Param eters
567. sed paper must have a size from 203mm 210mm to 432mm x 310mm Ok Cancel UI Element Description Offset Indicate if you wish an offset when stacking Restrictions Information on the restrictions of this postprocessing type Chapter 10 Workflows 575 Workflow UP I Devices VP 5000 High Capacity Stacker with Stitcher Rotator Stacker Degrees E Atternate Offset o Restrictions The used paper must have a size from 203mm A 210mm to 432mm x 310mm UI Elemen Description Rotator Degrees Select a rotation by o or 90 degrees Alternate Offset Indicate if you wish an offset when stacking Stacker Restrictions Information on the restrictions of this postprocessing type Note You cannot use rotation and stacker at the same time This leads to a paper jam VP 5000 Stitcher 576 Corner Staple Edge Stitch Stacker m Use Stapler E Use Stitcher E Offset Position Stitch Offset Top Left Corner um Staple Offset Restrictions The used paper must have a size from 203mm x 254mm to pz9mm x 310mm Description UI Element Corner Staple Use Stapler Activate device Position Select the corner where the staples should be positioned Staple Offset Enter an offset value Edge Stitch Use Stitcher
568. ser getid quiet Displaying the job s Servername user User status JobId1 JobId2 JobIdN status quiet Deleting resources s Servername user User rdelete ResOrPfl1 ResOrPfl2 and reprints ResOrPfIN quiet Cancel and delete s server name user User cancel JobId1 JobId2 JobIdN job s quiet Return Codes Return code Meaning C 542 Chapter 8 PJM Command Line PJM Command Line Parameters Return code Meaning All information is written to STDOUT Job Submission m Message for each file transferred to the ODS Master and a final success message The job identification is automatically included as each message starts with Job lt job identifica tion gt m Quiet mode The ODS job identification Job Id request m Message containing the ODS job identification returned m Quiet mode The ODS job identification Status a Status of job s is written for detailed information of lt job status gt see table below m Quiet mode lt job identification gt gt lt job status gt Resource delete m No information is written m Quiet mode No information Cancel a Information that job s has have been canceled is written m Quiet mode No information Invalid command line option Is set when an invalid option is found in the command line call Parameter parsing stops on the erroneous option STDERR Message indicating the er
569. sers as well as additional permission groups which are provided with different permissions Individually Defined Users and Permission Groups The individually adjustable user management in Oc PRISMAproduction Server is realized on the basis of the basic permission groups Thus the creation of a new permission group is only possible by copying an existing group The copy ofa permission group is renamed and it s editable permissions can now be activated or deactivated User Roles The table above shows that the basic user groups have a set of rights which ensure that the typical tasks of the group can be performed This set of rights can be called the user role The method of copying permission groups ensures that every user defined permission group is derived from a basic permission group The default group from which the current permission group is derived describes the user role By copying a permission group the set of rights which describes the user role is transferred to the copied group Because user roles are derived from the default permission groups these user roles exist operator applic admin or service Chapter 3 User IDs and Access Rights 63 User IDs and Access Rights Permissions Basically you can modify the permissions of a user defined permission group freely without taking care of the origin of the permission group Certain permissions though which are typical for a user role for example that the operator ha
570. server Both these approaches will help restore output on the printing system to rated speed After conversion files are available to users in the format required for further processing for example for printing and archiving Chapter 4 POD Module Operation TIFF Converter Concept Note Li To use the TIFF Converter on a separate system you need a high performance PC with hardware and software that complies with the minimum requirements given in folowing chapter Note li Integration of a dedicated conversion PC into the production workflow has to take place on site so no facilities can be included in the TIFF Converter product package It is up to you to decide how the conversion can best be integrated to suit your needs We have included a few suggestions in this manual but these are not part of the product s func tionality as shipped They are merely intended to give you some ideas and help for im plementing your own solution Prerequisites for TIFF Conversion TIFF conversion requires the following hardware and software Operating sys SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 and higher tem Processor Intel Pentium recommended gt 2 GHz CPU performance RAM Recommended gt 1 GB RAM for 300 dpi and gt 2 GB RAM for 600 dpi resolution Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 131 TIFF Converter Operation TIFF Converter Operation Introduction This chapter explains how to operate the TIFF Converter It
571. server and on the mirror server Therefore the used Job identifier range for each server must be configured in such a way that these servers use different identifiers for lo cally created jobs This prevents mirrored jobs from getting a job id which is already lo cally used The regular exchange of jobstatus information between the two servers secures that either the job on the original server can be printed or the job on the mirror server It is only possible to print the job twice if the communication between the original server and the mirror server is interrupted or defective i Note The following terms are used Original server is the server from which a job to be mirrored is submitted Mirror server is the server which receives the mirrored jobs Chapter 11 Backup Solutions 625 Mirror Print Jobs Introduction Illustration Mirror Server Mirror Daemon PRISMAproduction Spool Status Exception mirrored O 1 I f Original Server F L Default Ticket amp 47 Job status updates gt gt 626 x Mirror Input Modules PJM Ticket Input Chahn ls command line only Rules ce 7l PJM ue 5 Download Jek Ticket Punt PRISMAproduction Hotbfir Submission Spool F Script LP optional PJM GUI PJM Command Line PJM mirrors job PJM transfers print data plus Ticket and
572. ses Action 1 In the main KDE menu go to System and open the CodeMeter Control Center 2 Select the tab Licensing 3 Click on the button Execute Update With this option you can add new licenses or update the existing licenses content 4 Select the update file with the same or similar file name and click Open 5 Exit the CodeMeter Control Center File gt Quit 6 Open the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer and then Configuration gt Licenses 7 Perform the license assignment as described in Licenses on page 313 After this action you can work with Oc PRISMAproduction Server 50 Chapter 1 Installation Change IP Address Host and Domain Name Change IP Address Host and Domain Name Introduction Modification of the hostname IP address or domain name on Oc PRISMAproduction Server V4 0 can be done via the script u prismapro bin modpcname This script can also be used for the verification of the host name Attention A Modification of the hostname or IP address will cause that the import function for ex ported archive files will not work afterwards Additionally all currently defined printers in the Printer Configuration will be deleted afterwards Assumptions Job acceptance is deactivated No jobs in job queue Stand alone system no Master Slave system No Explorer running No Oc PRISMAproduction Server activities Logged in as
573. sh_ Corotron _ Strip_ Fiter_ Blade Other Toner a Description Color Names Available for Maintenance C106 C65 G10 Oc System Toner OCT83C01 C107 C65 D10 Oc System Toner OCT54C03 C107 C65 G10 Oc System Toner OCT54C03 C108 C30 P10 Oc System Toner OCT54C04 C108 C65 D10 Oc System Toner OCT54C04 C108 C65 G10 Oc System Toner OCT54C04 CU01 A25 810 Oc System Toner OCT55C02 CU01 815 C10 Oc System Toner OCT55C02 CU01 825 D10 Oc System Toner OCT55C02 CU01 C65 D10 Oc System Toner ocTssco1 CU01 C65 G10 Oc System Toner OCT55C01 CU01 D25 M10 Oc System Toner OCT55C02 Companygreen Grassgreen Companygreen Companyred Oce Red Companyred x33 Deraun Oc System Toner 153 x99 rd G001 A15 K10 Oc System Toner OCT42G01 B 000 x00 G001 425 810 Oc System Toner OCT42G01 G001 815 C10 Oc System Toner OCT42G01 GO01 825 D10 Oc System Toner OcT42G01 G003 A15 K10 Oc System Toner OCT41G02 G003 A25 810 Oc System Toner OCT41G02 ol G003 815 C10 Oc System Toner OCT41G02 amp io 2 a 6 B B e EN z AN ANA INE E E R E D R E R E R E E E E E E E E E Toner 814 entries of 816 consumables Configuration modified Toner Table Use this table to select the toners you use on your Oc PRISMAproduction Server system You can also use this table to define your own toner colors or to add user defined color names to Oc System Toners First you have to select a ton
574. sing the RGB method But for printing you need colors on the CMYK basis Therefore the data have to be transformed from one color scheme to the other If for example the data are stored and handed on in the PDF format they are usually optimized for display on the screen and the colors used are described using the RGB color scheme Black for example is composed of the color components R o G o and B o White results from the values R 25 5 G 25 5 and B 255 CMYK Black on the other hand consists of intensity values C 0 M 0 Y 0 and K 100 K Kontrast A conversion from RGB colors to CMYK colors has the effect that e g RGB Black is represented by the values C 75 M 68 Y 67 and K 90 in the CMYK color scheme not as exexpectedspected in C 0 M o Y 0 and K 100 Furthermore the conversion is not lossless You can only correct this loss if you use elaborate color manage ment and rendering tools In many cases knowledge on the correct use of color spaces is missing This leads to the fact that many different data have to be processed in the workflow of a print site or a service provider These data often have to be adjusted and modified for special applications This is especially true for color separation of documents to Custom Tone or Black Functionality of Color Separation with UnityRIP Every page of the document is ripped line by line line scanline hight 1 output pixel width width of page Thus every pixel is checked for its c
575. sist of the program Document Scan and Makeready DSM and QuickPrint DPconnect processes all jobs which have been generated by one of these programs With DSM you can use either production printing or printing via printer drivers Xerox Printer Driver for Windows With Xerox printer drivers you can send print jobs with Xerox features from all Windows applications Xerox XDS Use XDS to create print jobs with Xerox features from any PostScript PDF PCL ASCII and TIFF files and send them for printing Xerox FreeFlow Print Manager Use Xerox FreeFlow Print Manager to create jobs with Xerox features from any PostScript PDF PCL ASCII and TIFF files and send them for printing Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 157 DPconnect Configuration and Job Submission Standard LP Client You can use an LP Client to send print jobs without Xerox features After receiving a Xerox print job on an Oc PRISMAproduction Server system it will be shown in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer under All Jobs 158 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect User Interface Overview DPconnect User Interface Overview Introduction The user interface of DPconnect is integrated in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer under Configuration The DPconnect UI consists of three tabs for the job processing the input ticket translation and the barcode functions Before printing jobs via DPconnect
576. smapro cfg jobinput ticket Sub directories are allowed Blanks are allowed in default ticket names but it is suggested not to use blanks these are difficult to handle in Job Submission scripts The delivered example Default Ticket names start with a dot These tickets will be overwritten each time the RPM which provides these tickets is installed Even if a con figuration backup has been performed these dot tickets are NOT saved It is therefore strongly recommended to rename the tickets if they are modified and the to omit the leading dot To edit or create the Default Ticket the PJM icon can be used in the Input Modules tool bar The Job Submission Script i i Note Prefer to use the Ticket Rules application if it can replace the current Job Submission functionality The use of the Job Submission script is slow and increases the risk of loosing a job if this script is not programmed properly Note Switch traces on to see how the input module calls the job submission script and to see the contents of the generated Oce Custom Ticket For details see the chapter Generating a trace file The print data files are received Download LP or detected HotDir by the Input modules As soon as the file is received correctly the print job is submitted into the Oc PRISMAproduction Server spooler An exception is the Download print while spooling feature where a print job is submitted before the co
577. ssing is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 205 DPconnect Appendix 206 LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take external postprocessing from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocess ing Apply to Jobs requiring external finishing only gt Take external postprocessing from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices if external finishing is requested in the input ticket All UP3I devices selected here are used Ignore Statement gt No external finishing Stacker Translate Statement directly gt A UP3I Stack AlternateOffset Stack command is put to the job only if customer specific postprocessing is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take stacker substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocess ing Apply to Jobs requiring stacking only gt Take stacker substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I De vices if stacking is request ed in the input ticke
578. ssion the user cannot create new or open existing sessions The user is not allowed to create new workspaces in the navigation bar It is also not possible to add applications to existing workspaces The respective functions are not available in this case However the user is still able to move available workspaces into the application area and to combine them Allow to rearrange workspaces Note Without this permission the user cannot move workspaces from the navigation bar into the application area and vice versa The distribution and size of the applications within a workspace can always be modified for example PJM smaller Job List bigger Default session Note A default session will be opened if there is no workspace saved for this user on this computer or if the user has none of the session permissions described below See also chapter Create and Save User Defined Workspaces and Sessions in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server User s Guides General Explorer settings Allow modification of explorer settings Note With this permission the user is allowed e g to open the dialog under File gt Preferences Allow to write to HOME library Note Removing this permission should prevent overloading the home directories from outside Too much data in theses directories could have a serious impact on the system perfomance General Job Viewer settings View jobs of other users Control jobs of other users Delete j
579. stScript AFP IOCA and TIFF data with or without Xerox job ticket same as for input via LP input queue Jobs without Xerox job ticket will be processed according assigned job ticket template but ticket parameters provided by input file name override job ticket template parameters File name parts As print jobs processed by DPconnect are PRISMA POD jobs only POD relevant ticket parameters are effective here In every case input data type will be determined automatically same as for input via LP input queue Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Configuration and Job Submission Processing Default Job Ticket Choose one of the selectable job ticket templates m PrgJobSubmission Select startdpconnect ExtractParameters Choose Off Job Submission from Xerox Environment DigiPath FreeFlow Makeready After logging in on a DigiPath FreeFlow Makeready workstation the user will be asked for an ftp account if he sends a job for the first time This account has been set up on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server master to receive data from DigiPath FreeFlow Makeready via ftp m User Id xdt m Password xdt If you want to print on an Oc PRISMAproduction Server system you have to select the corresponding symbolic printer on the DigiPath FreeFlow Makeready workstation After this you are able to send print jobs like a DigiPath FreeFlow Makeready user does it DigiPath FreeFlow Makeready con
580. ster Type Select the cluster type Jobsplitting is only possible with the POD Module For an explanation of the menus and tool bar see General Usage of the Configuration Applications on page 256 Chapter 7 Configuration 277 Logging Logging Logging Introduction On this tab you can set up a trace level for every java server application Only marked entries in this list are added to the log file The log file itself is located in u prismapro diag explorerserver explorerserver log After every restart of the system Reboot Reset a new log file will be created and the old one will be saved Illustration fu 3 SSSR PPSs 3 3 s 3 3 Server Name Other DataServer DatabaseServer UserConfigServer ConfigSlaveServer ExplorerServer ConfigServer ConfigurationServer NetworkM onitorser FileSystemServer Jettyserver SlaveFileSystemServer OdsStatusServer OdsConfigServer MessageServer LicenseServer AccountingServer BackupServer IniServer LibraryConfigServer ResourceServer HomefFileSystemSer DeviceFileSystemse Priserver CutsheetPjmServer GCIFileSystemServer PjmServer PrinterStatusServer jafPjmServer Warning R a a a 8 8 A Y a a a a RRRRRRRRRRRR RRR RRR R RRR ERRER RRE RARARNRNRRNRARNRNRNRNRNRNRNRNRNRNRNRNRNRNRNRRRR RRR SNL SPP RRR RRR RRENEN E Column Titles Column De
581. still be writ ten General Parameters Parameter Possible values Description Description lt Any character String gt The description of the LP print er Data Output Parameter Parameter Possible values Description OutputDataS AddCRLF gt Specifies the data structure of the tructure Add CRIF as record delimiter output file AddCRLF_WithAFPTrim gt Add CRLF as record delimiter with AFP record trim NoRDW gt Remove record length field compressed data PassThrough gt Leave the input data file as it is LCDS data stream VAR gt Use the IBM format RDW Variable record 4 byte as record delimiter VAR_WithAFPTrim gt Use the IBM format RDW Variable record 4 byte as record delimiter with AFP trim OCT Parameters Chapter 7 Configuration 521 LP 522 Parameter DefaultTicket Possible values 55 or lt File name gt Description Name of the default ticket to be used for job submission ExtractParame ters TicketParame terPriority StartMVS Class AFPParameters gt Extracts parameters for the OCT from the first No op in the AFP data file Off gt No parameter extraction is done PCLParameters gt Parameters are extracted from the beginning of the PCL data file MVSHeaderOverwrites NoopParameter gt MVS Download header parame ters overwrite the AFPParameter in the Noop of the data file s NoopParameter
582. t Letter Legal Ledger Variable Make sure to choose the format in which the pages of the PCL file were generated The resolution is set automatically by the Print Job Manager 4 Choose the printing mode in the Page Layout box Simplex Duplex Tumble The PCL Converter can compose files for output on one or both sides of the paper With output on both sides you can choose whether the finished document is to be set out like a book pages are turned to the left or like a wall calendar pages are turned over the short edge You can use the collect function to chain multiple PCL files for processing together Consider that a PCL reset ESC E is executed before and after each file Note A further point to consider When you place a series of PCL files in the List of Files and indicate that you want these files to be chained the chaining is performed following the conversion Each file in the list is treated as a completely separate entity and a number of PCL Converters can work on the list at the same time However conversion using more than one PCL Converter can change the order in which the files are sequenced If you want to keep your files in a particular order you must create a chained file yourself before performing the conversion Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 125 PCL Converter Troubleshooting PCL Converter Troubleshooting Introduction 126 The PCL language is defined such that use
583. t All UPI devices selected here are used Portra Ignore Statement gt No stacker is used it Staple Translate Statement directly gt A UP3I Stitch Corner Staple Top left corner command is put to the job only if portrait staple is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Appendix Options LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take portrait staple substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring portrait staple only gt Take portrait staple substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices if portrait staple is requested in the input ticket All UP3I devices selected here are used Ignore Statement gt No stapling is done Landscape Staple Translate Statement directly gt A UP I Stitch Corner Staple Bottom left corner command is put to the job only if landscape staple is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take landscape staple substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Pri
584. t printer is indicated in every template The tempate names should reflect the function of the tickets Set up LP input queues 1 2 3 4 and 5 These queues necessarily have to start the program startdpconnect Assign the corresponding ticket templates to these queues The queue names should reflect their function Set up the five logical printers in DigiPath Each of these logical printers represents a defined print function in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Therefore you have to connect the printers with the LP input queues of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Configuration Example Example for Assignments between logical DigiP ath Printers PRISMA LP Input Queues and physical Printers DigiPath Print Jobs Logical Logical Logical Logical 1 Printer 1 Printer 2 Printer 3 Printer 4 Printer 5 Impositioning Impositioning Print on Imi ing Impositioning for PPP 1 for PPP 2 Printer 2 for 2 Up Prints tor Booklet Print on Print on Input Tray Printon Prints Printer 1 Printer 1 Control by Printer 3 Print on ost Pi Post Pi Paper Attributes Input Tray Printer 3 sing on PPP 1 sing on PPP 2 10 Copies Control by Tray Input Tray No Input Tray No Input Tray Numbers Control by Tray ra l Numbers PRISMAproduction LP inQueuet LP4n Oueue2 LP4n Queue3 LP m Queue4 LP4n Oueue 5 Ticket Ticket Ticket Ticka Ticket
585. t cn First Name Last Name Phone Fax Email Job Title Company Address 1 Zip City Country P O Box givenName sn telephoneNumber facsimileTelephon mail title company street postalCode st postOfficeBox User Info Name of the field as it is used in the Oc PRISMAproduction Serveruser management LDAP Attributes Name of the attribute as given by RFC This name can be modifies to adjust it to the current LDAP scheme Please note that no values can be assigned to incorrect attribute names because Oc PRISMAproduction Servermakes no differ ence if the field exists in LDAP and is empty or if it exists not at all Values Displays the values which are found in the LDAP data pool The values refer to the user who is indicated under Test Delete LDAP Settings In order to delete the LDAP settings simply delete the contents of the Host field After saving the configuration all other LDAP settings are also removed 292 Chapter 7 Configuration System Configuration Country Preferences System Configuration Country Preferences Introduction Here the gobal systemwide settings for the country preferences are performed These settings can be modified for each user in the user administration see User Management User on page 264 Note Li The Country Preferences can only be modified by users whose account is based on the
586. t data The output data created by the Document Designer is passed to the next workflow step normally the print step The user interface of the service is that of any Oc PRISMAproduction Server service m An indication that the service is running in the Jobs Viewer m An entry in the Services application m One or more messages in the Message Window mainly in case of an error a A termination information in the Jobs Viewer and the Message Window The error information handling is based on the return code of the Document Designer command line call The current version of Document Designer supports only a few return codes therefore it is not possible to give the user detailed information just by interpreting the return code For that reason the ODDA logging file is scanned for Fatal Error entries and Oc PRISMAproduction Server error messages are created for these entries These should give the user operator enough information to be able to deal with the error situa tion Assumptions a The ODDA service links the input file by the name PrismaInput That is the data input module in the ODDA workflow must be named Prismalnput m The output created by the ODDA workflow is expected to be AFP as the ODDA service is embedded in an Oc PRISMAproduction Server AFP workflow Using Hot Directories See also HotDir in HotDir on page 488 In Oc PRISMAproduction Server a hot directory is an important possibility to link fully aut
587. tRules Definition of Conditions Settings Messages and Return Exit A value can also refer to a variable see TicketRules Variables on page 430 For example it would be possible to check if the printer_name is part of the job_name Use the Paste to value list box to select an existing variable and to paste it into the Value field A value may also be set to delete which means that the whole key entry will be deleted in the ticket which is not the same as to set an entry to empty The delete must not be typed in but can be selected from the combo box The definition of a setting is always checked for consistency If there are inconsistencies for example if the setting s name already exists the font color is red and a tool tip shows the cause If the setting is well defined the font color turns into black Only if all elements of the setting are correct the Finish button becomes active and you can add the setting to the sequence of actions Add message Dialog The Ticket Rules application offers the possibility to generate a message when the rules are applied to the ticket 5 different messages with totally free text are offered They differ only in the message type Log Error Warning Info and User Action To create a message you first have to enter a unique Name and then select the appropriate Message Id The corrensponding Message Type is then inserted automatically These two text fields are conn
588. te Input Medium Type Standard Custom Defined Input Medium Color Custom Defined Input Medium Type Medium Length mm 210 Medium Height mm 297 Medium Weight g sqm 80 Predrilled Hole Count o Ordered Input Medium Set Size o Medium Name Controls for the translation table 172 Configuration for Printer Jobticket State ment Description Select the printer or the cluster for which the translation rules in this dialog should be valid Printer groups lt Any xxx dpi Printer gt are also presented in the list Define for which input jobticket statement a translation mode should be created using the control elements on the right side of this window The control elements shown depend on the selected statement that is they depend on the number and kind of the available parameters Controls which are not available for a statement are not visible Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Input Job Ticket Translation Tab Description Translation Translate Statement directly Mode The statement is processed in the same way it would be pro cessed on a Xerox printer Substitute Statement with an other Action The data argument values required for this statement are taken from this translation table settings Substitute Statement with LP Input Queue Template Action
589. te value in cell Predefined Entries in Tables Ifa column must contain a predefined entry a double click on the column displays a list of the entries you can pick Chapter 7 Configuration 257 User Management Overview User Management User Management Overview Introduction 258 Basic information on users and permissions can be found in User Ds and Access Rights on page 62 Generally all applications have to log on to Oc PRISMAproduction Server to get access to the functions of the server applications like the Explorer server or License server This takes effect either within the system for the connection between master and slave or even more for a connection from outside the system for example via a Windows workstation with the Explorer Launcher Basically a user can log on to Oc PRISMAproduction Server from every server within an Oc PRISMAproduction Server cluster or from every workstation which is connected via LAN A user logs on with user name and password The login data can be verified either by Oc PRISMAproduction Server or by LDAP Oc PRISMAproduction Server supports different user types by means of different login and authorization mechanisms a External Users Option Authorization External This user mainly works on an external workstation Access to Oc PRISMAproduction Server is probably only one of his tasks This user does not need a user name on the Linux server
590. ted Icon Description Add condition Opens the condition definition window and allows editing of before conditions check a value of a parameter in the incoming job after ticket against a specified parameter value Finally a valid condi gt m tion can be chosen and this will be added to the sequence of P actions Simultaneously a placeholder is inserted which has the focus so the next action can be placed here A condition with an empty block makes no sense and is therefore not considered as well defined See TicketRules Definition of Conditions Settings Messages and Return Exit on page 425 Add or condition Allows you to add more conditions by disjunction Add else An else statement will be added to the sequence of actions Add setting Opens the Add settings dialog which allows editing of settings before see TicketRules Definition of Conditions Settings Messages after and Return Exit on page 425 Finally a valid setting can be chosen and this will be added to the sequence of actions Chapter 7 Configuration 423 TicketRules Definition of Rules Icon Add foreach before after iss Description This new action type is intended for the use of Value Tables An existing Value Table has to be selected Simultaneously a placeholder is inserted which has the focus so the next action can be placed here A loop with an empty block makes
591. tent text which is in the file you search for or for files of a certain File size ot modification date Last modified You can also include Subdirectories in the search If you search in archives which are connected with a database you can select much more criteria to find the correct files Search in PFL archives connected with a database Open again the file selection dialog in the PJM and navigate under Look in to an external archive If you click the search icon the dialog will be enlarged and provides now a sub dialog which allows you to search the external archive This sub dialog offers four tabs to specify you search Tab Description Document If you select this tab you can search for documents according to certain attributes like Size Greater than Smaller than Last access From date To date Hits More than Less than and Creation date From date To date The number of Results cab be limited up to 200 Job Info Under this tab you can specify Job name Job queue Printer name and Printer type of the jobs you are searching for Job Info Client Under this tab you can specify information on the client as a search filter to find the desired jobs Job Info Receiver Under this tab you can specify information on the receiver as a search filter to find the desired jobs Inputfile Under this tab you c
592. ter Update Problems B Package Summary Size Avail Ver inst Ver Source Update Problem The packages in this list cannot be updated automatically Changed Packages Possible reasons _ Automatic Changes They are obsoleted by other packages There is no newer version to update to on any installation media They are third party packages In addition to your manual selections the following packages have been changed to resolve dependencies Please choose manually what to do with them The 5 safest course of action is to delete them yi dbus i qt QT4 KDE bindings for D BUS WZ dmapi Data Management API Runtime Environment p makedumpfile Partial kernel dump W perl TimeDate Perl Modules for Time and Date Calculation iL ii J KD Continue Cancel Now click Accept to start the update and choose Start Update to confirm again the Update EE Confirm Update All information required to perform an update is now complete If you continue now data on your hard disk will be overwritten according to the settings in the previous dialogs Go back and check the settings if you are unsure Start pm 28 Chapter 1 Installation Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Now all installed SUSE Linux Enterprise Server packages will be up dated to the latest Service Pack Level The update will run completel
593. ter Job Queues Cluster Colors Input Devices Output Devices Printer Notification Gray Curves Execute on Master for any Printer Status changes collectReferencejobinfos a Explanation of the parameters in the temporary file PRINT The name of the printer ER STATUS The new status of the printer INACTIVE Printer is inactive NOTREADY Printer is not ready MESSAGE Printer waits on an operator reply HALTED Printer is Halted after job interruption WAITING Printer waits on a multihost network printer PRINTING Printer prints IDLE Printer waits for a print job STARTING Printer is starting DRAINING Printer is draining LICENSE Printer waits on a free print speed license Chapter 7 Configuration 369 Printer Configuration Gray Curves Printer Configuration Gray Curves Introduction i 370 Note This function is only visible usable if a valid Unity_RIPR license is installed Definition This function was originally designed for conventional printing processes and basically helps to optimize physically different printing units for a consistent print image This applies basically also to digital printers The same datastream may have different results on different digital printers These differences are especially apparent with gradients and raster images containing different gray or color gradients Therefore the printer transfer curve has been implement
594. ter Name Allow to change check for Job Queue Allow to change check for Colors Allow to change check for Data Type Allow to change Autostart setting Allow to change check Message Receiver Claim printer allow to select other user name Chapter 7 Configuration 275 Cluster Configuration Cluster Cluster Configuration Definition In this case a cluster is a group of printers Each printer can belong to several clusters A printer is addressed either by the cluster name or directly by the printer name This depends on the settings in System Configu ration Select Printer Configuration to assign printers to clusters which you have configured Illustration B Gh X Cluster Name Cluster Type Jobsplitting Jobsplitting CS_Test_Cluster Printer FF_Test_Cluster Printer General printer cluster Type Printer Ifa cluster name is specified with a print job the system picks from the cluster the printer that can execute the job The selection can be based on factors such as the kind of paper currently loaded in the printer what job class the printer is currently running etc If more than one printer would be able to run the job load balancing factors come into play i e the job is submitted to the printer which has least to do A few examples of clusters LB load balancing clusters Printers of the same type that are selected on the basis of their workload
595. ter Pool gt Maintenance Report in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server User s Guides Note Li For a complete Workflow for the definition of colors in a print job see Workflow Color Selection on page 578 Consumables Tables You can define your consumables in these tables For each printer these consumables can be selected in the Printer Pool Printer Maintenance dialog Additionally you find in this table predefined entries for all available Oc toners with their name and description These entries can only be selected but cannot be modified Chapter 7 Configuration 325 Consumables Configuration 326 Column Developer Brush Corotron Strip Filter Blade Oth 1 er Description Description Name of the consumable After clicking the Add button a new entry will be added to the table The first column header contains the consumable name Add an additional description here Available for Maintenance Chapter 7 Configuration If you check this box the operator is able to select this consum able in the Printer Maintenance dialog in the Printer Pool application to report its replacement or the refilling to the ac counting If the box is deselected the Consumable name field in this window is switched into the editable mode which allows the operator to enter consumable name for the selected type by himself Backup Restore
596. ter connected fore in Oc PRISMAproduction Server to this computer Printer Any printer type is allowed The printer types mentioned in DPconnect Functionality on page 147 are recommended m Xerox XDS In the main window click the button Connections and click Add in the Printer connections dialog to add a new symbolic printer Parameter Description Connection be LPR over TCP IP tween the Xerox printer and the computer Name of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Vitual printer One of the LP printer queues which have been configured be fore in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Type of the Xerox Any of the server types mentioned in DPconnect Functionality server on page 147 are allowed m Xerox FreeFlow Print Manager Open FreeFlow Print Manager printer registration and do the following settings Parameter Description Printer protocol LPR printer with ASCII ticket profile or LPR printer with XPIF ticket profile recommended is the most capable one or LPR printer without ticket profile Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 155 DPconnect Configuration and Job Submission Parameter Description Hostname IP Ad Name of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server dress Queue name One of the LP printer queues which have been configured be fore in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Device type Any printer type is allowed The printer types mentioned in DPc
597. ter postprocessing you want just by choosing the right DigiPath logical printer Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 177 DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries 178 The importance of the LP input queue assigned job ticket templates is in DPconnect version 1 02 much higher than in version 1 00 In conjunction with DPconnect translation tables these templates now fully work as a container for almost all DPconnect print job properties Because of this the DPconnect V1 00 Startparameter GUI is not longer necessary since these startparameter settings are now to be done in the job ticket template Use the PJM GUI for editing the job ticket templates Startparameter GUI controls for setting diagnostic functions have been moved to a new command line diagnostic program see DPconnect Maintenance Programs on page 193 In principle an Oc PRISMAproduction Server job property can be supplied with the Xerox DigiPath job ticket or with the LP input queue ticket template or with both of them The table below shows this in detail Some few properties have an entry in column DPconnect this means that DPconnect sets the value of the entry which cannot be modified A mark in column Input Ticket means that this property may be delivered with the Input job ticket If the corresponding switch in the DPconnect translation table is set to Translate Statement directly t
598. ternative character for empty fields in the output file character gt v Shows the version of this program jview jview may be used to show the page images of the resulting AFP file of a print job which is processed successfully and is staying in the spool queue jview is a shell script which 194 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Maintenance Programs performes internally a call to the PDV image viewer The advantage of this program is that the shown jobs don t have to be put into the Print File Library previously You also may view multiple jobs if a range of job IDs is specified So for each job the PDV is started repeatedly To go to the next job the actual PDV has to be terminated and then the PDV is started again to show the next job The program invocation is jview s lt start job ID gt jview e lt end job ID gt p 213 v h Options Component Function s lt start job ID gt Specifies the job ID of the first job to be shown no leading zeros needed e lt end job ID gt Specifies the job ID of the last job to be shown no leading zeros needed p 213 Selects the viewer PDV or PDV3 v Shows the version of this program h Shows the help screen When no s or e option was given all jobs will be shown If only the s option is given all jobs beginning with lt start job ID gt up to the highest existent job ID will be shown If only the e option is g
599. text parameters variables or column headers o Enter free text at cursor position with keyor Enter a reference at cursor position by sele he Paste To Value list and click on the Pal Finish Then for example a setting can be added that changes a parameter value using a value out of the value table Name Parameter Overwrite Value Paste to value Used in rule s Description Customers class Parameter of a Setting he parameter is job Job_Class job Header_User job Header_User_File job Header_User_Intray job Header_User_Outtray job Intray job JT print job Job_Class job Job Class e values 1 999 nding GUI option Jo j Finish Cancel The next picture also shows the use of colors and the pasting of strings to a value When you click into the value field you can select a Parameter Variable or Value table row in the Paste to value combo box and then paste it to the value at the cursor position This is also described in the Description part at the right side when the cursor is in the value field Chapter 7 Configuration 435 TicketRules Define Foreach Loop Name Customers class A value can be any combinati Parameter job Job_Class parameters variables or col Enter free text at cursor posi Overwrite wu Enter a reference at cursor pi he Paste
600. th the code 11 n appears every time the program is started A positive value for the secondary error code indicates the number of days without a valid license a negative value indicates a license violation 76 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity User Resources and Fonts Unity User Resources and Fonts Introduction A The default directory which is searched for resources is the installation directory u prismapro lib unity But this directory is not accessible for the normal user for the installation of resources For this reason two additional directories will be searched for resources Resources in the directory u cust resources local unity global are available for all users In contrast to these resources the resources in the directory u cust resources local unity lt USER gt are only available for the user who is currently logged in The user directory will be searched first and then the global directory This results in the following order when searching re sources from within the PostScript code First u prismapro lib unity Second u cust resources local unity lt USER gt Third u cust resources local unity global If different resource files are stored in the USER directory and in the global directory under the same name the file from the USER directory is used You have to possibly create further subdirectories in this directory m Fonts u cust resources local unity lt USER gt f
601. that the files may be sorted using alphabetic names size date and type for JSLs This may help marking the files You can access the local file directory tree opening the GCI file view of the respective server where the local files are located and clicking the Change to parent directory icon to access the Linux root directory Press the Copy selected files to clipboard icon in the upper right corner 4 Change with the GCI file system resource manager to the target catalog Change to the ysl or rds sub catalog Note If the respective subcat is not created yet please use the Create new directory icon to create a sub cat and select the respective subcat type for example jsl Press the Paste files from clipboard icon to copy the files of the clip board into the actual sub cat Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation 215 LCDS Module Organization of Resources Note Li Please note that the file manager will issue an overwrite warning if the files SL or AFP resource is already present In this case it is recommended to skip chancel the copy process in order to avoid for example the overwriting of already changed JSLs 216 Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation LCDS Module LCDS Resources LCDS Module LCDS Resources Introduction A This application allows you to copy and or convert Xerox resources from a Xerox formatted input media or from hard disk to the correct direct
602. the backup process and you can transfer data from older Oc PRISMAproduction Server versions Illustration rx amp PFL Archives Document Manager Cache Database links Administration Backup documents and job data Backup path and name Backup Path u prismapro lib postgres Backup Name PFLEXT Backup progress Progress AutoBackup PFL admin status Ready Backup documents and job data Note li This backup works only for the Oc PRISMAproduction Server PostgreSQL database system and the PFLEXT database For backups with different databases the database itself or the system administrator is responsible It cannot be performed by Oc PRISMAproduction Server itself Here you can select the directory and the name of the backup The default database PFLEXT of Oc PRISMAproduction Server will then be saved under this name Note Li Not only the documents of a PFL archive are saved but also the meta data of the PFLEXT database This means that document data AND meta data are saved in one file with the backup tgz extension Chapter 7 Configuration 451 Archives Administration Restore documents and job data Restore Filename The backup filename is restored in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server PostgreSQL database system Import documents of previous PRISMAPro versions Indicate the direc
603. the current ap iat a plication selected Apply JCF Save the current parameter settings for the currently displayed changes server and JCF B Discard JCF Reloads the parameter settings from the currently selected changes server and JCF All modifications performed before are discard ed Reset all parame Sets all parameters for the currently displayed server back to ters to default val their default values All modifications performed before are ues discarded amp Reset selected pa Sets the selected parameter for the currently displayed server rameter to default back to its default value All modifications performed for this value parameter are discarded o Parameter Table Double click a value of a parameter which you want to modify Either a drop down list opens which allows you to select the desired value or the value column becomes editable for you to type in a new value sometimes hex format The help text which is displayed in the lower area of the window as soon as a parameter is selected explains the function of the parameter and its values See also LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters on page 387 386 Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Param eters Introduction The following tables describe the JCF parameters for the different LCDS Jobs See a
604. the input job requirements should be represented in Oc PRISMAproduction Server In this example the translation rules are left at their default settings direct translation and have therefore no further importance The example also contains general information on the processing mode of incoming jobs for example the input tray selection mode LP input queue and DPconnect translation table represent a pair which together repre sents the complete set of print processing rules As you can see from this example the number of ticket templates does not necessarily have to be the same as the number of DPconnect translation tables Only one assigned translation table can be effective for a specified printer however more than one ticket template can be effective for this printer in the example printer 1 is driven by translation table 1 and ticket template 1 or ticket template 2 To see which translation table is used together with which ticket template s for a specified printer you have to display the as signed translation table by selecting the respective printer on the DPconnect UI Addi tionally you have to find the ticket template which contains as name of the target printer the name of this printer Example The example shows the following situation m Printer 1 is a continuous feed printer which should print in two different ways it should either drive paper post processing PPP 1 or PPP 2 Both PPPs need different impositioning s
605. the printing process Only viewable with TrueProof To view the printfile before actually printing it TrueProof is required together with a li cense to enable the GraphicArts feature of ripping PS PDF objects Use of PDF security features Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity Unity Plus Graphic Arts_Plus As part of the GA workflow the incoming PDF files will be split up into single page PDF sections Therefore the PDF files must not have the security feature enabled that prohibits the modification and or print of the document Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 99 Unity GetTiff Service Integration Unity GetTiff Service Integration Definition If a valid license has been installed on the system the GetTiff Service extension can be enabled in the Unity tab of the file properties dialog of the PJM Without the GetTiff option enabled the referenced TIFF file will be read and rasterized during the rip process Because images cannot be cached in the Unity even the same image being called several times within the PostScript source file has to be read and rastered new Typically this functionality is used in conjunction with PostScript forms using a defined set of TIFF images as forms and being used multiple times within a doc ument With the GetTiff Service option enabled the macro will record every call for every TIFF image into a separate file together with position and scaling informatio
606. the system import Licenses on page export delete or modify 313 Accounting Configuration of the accounting database Accounting Admin access and of the accounting legacy files istration Overview on page 316 Consumables Pre configure consumables which are Consumables Con then available for maintenance in the figuration on page Printer Pool application 322 The application also provides a complete list of all available toner colors from which you can create and save own color names and values Backup Restore Save or restore a configuration of the sys Backup Restore tem Window on page 330 Library paths Configure the physical path of the default Library path config libraries uration on page 27 Printers Set up and configure all printers and their Printer Configura parameters in the Oc PRISMAproduc tion Overview on tion Server system page 339 Job Queues Create all job queues which can be as Job Queues Config signed to the printers in the Oc uration on page PRISMAproduction Server network 375 FCB Configuration of Forms Control Buffer FCB Configura tion on page 378 Chapter 7 Configuration Configuration Overview Application Description LCDS Jobs Configuration tool for LCDS printing LCDS Parameter Configuration LCDS Jobs Win dow on page 385 Define special media which you like to
607. these pages a Insertion of cover and separator pages and selection of input media size color drilling paper type order count weight and medium name for these pages a Insertion of slip sheets and selection of input media size color drilling paper type order count weight and medium name for these sheets a All postprocessing options depending on the postprocessing devices available for the Oc printer Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Functionality m Paper postprocessing devices which have an impact on the right edge of the paper This is achieved by a 180 rotation of the print image on the page as it is done with the Xerox DocuTech 6180 and using postprocessing devices which have an impact on the left paper edge Stapling on a defined position Definition of font name and font size for ASCII print jobs Definition of the orientation Portrait Landscape for ASCII print jobs Accounting sender name receiver name Direct insert Highlight color taken from page image data not from job ticket Halftone screen setting Job message Job start message Job name Document name Printing of ordered media for example tabulator sheets LP Input Queue name Redirection of the job to the indicated queue on the print server and processing according to the assigned ticket template m Support of job tickets for re prints of print files which are already stored on the servers To match specific user requirements
608. this check box the applications in the list will be sorted alphabetically m Restore selection on reopening If you activate this check box the selected application will be reopened every time the Configuration workspace is opened again Chapter 7 Configuration Configuration Overview The following items can be configured and will be described in the subsequent chapters Chapter 7 Configuration 251 Configuration Overview Illustration 2 User Co User Info 2 User Permissions ee Licenses ee ResourcePreparer amp 4 Cluster Logging G Master Slave ia Message System amp Accounting Consumables E Input Modules E DPconnect 252 Chapter 7 Configuration Configuration Overview Configuration Context Menu The following menu appears if you click the list of configuration applications with the right mouse button If you activate the Sort alphabetically entry you can sort the list alphabetically If Restore selection on reopening is marked the application which you have used before is reopened automatically every time you start the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ex plorer or reopen the Configuration session within the Explorer Application User Management Cluster Configuration Applications Description Central administration of users and user permissions Create cluster of the type Printer or Jobsplitting User
609. tible to 3 xx If you rerun the check after the conversion these backups will be displayed as up to date i Note It s very important that Oc PRISMAproduction Server is reset after the conversion The noreset parameter is supported for internal use only There is no reason of pre venting the automatic reset in the customer environment For security reasons the backup directory u prismapro bak should be saved before running the conversion It s recommended to pack it by tar cvf backups tar u prismapro bak and copy the file into a different file system not u In case of an emergency the backup directory could be restored by tar xvf backups tar To use the backups of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server V3 02 20 in Oc PRISMAproduction Server V4 00 or higher save the backups in a tar archive as described above and restore the archive on the new system Chapter 7 Configuration 335 Backup Restore Convert old Backups After all the backups of interest have been converted the saved tar file can be deleted 336 Chapter 7 Configuration Library path configuration Library paths Library path configuration Introduction Select Configuration gt Library paths to configure the physical paths of default libraries Note Li For the PJM type libraries HEADER TARGET and OUTPUT you can also enter a new path at the bottom of the window When selecting files in the PJM List
610. tion Y 2 amp H heZe xX lO b e R Name Priority Steps Queue Printed pages Printer Form Twe Color Resolution Copies J test_color 128 0 1 1 0 31 S9000 STD AFP a a 0 1 waiting 580 Chapter 10 Workflows Workflow for scaling PDF files Workflow for scaling PDF files Introduction With UNITY version 3 00 12 and higher it is possible to modify the size and position of PDF files These modifications are only possible with PDF files because the format consists of independent single pages PostScript as a computer language is able to produce pages with repeated program loops This has the effect that the pages are not independent anymore and cannot be scaled as individual sheets You have the following possibilities for scaling a Keep the original size of the document It is sufficient to define the document format as paper format Example The page size set for the PDF or PS document is DIN A4 Insert DIN A4 as paper size in the converter dialog b Use a larger paper format but keep the original size of the document Example In the converter dialog DIN A3 is set as paper format The docu ment in letter format is to be placed unchanged on this page Because the target format A3 is larger than the original format letter you have to de fine on which position on the target page the document has to be placed This is also required if the paper format is smaller than the size of the docu me
611. tion Server 2 LCDS Info pages supported parameter See the document Print Services Facility MVS MVS Download Guide for a full de scription of the various parameters The Info pages keywords are only valid for the AFP Driver SPS V4 and the IPDS Driver SPS V5 With these keywords defined in an Info page template the parameter values will be printed on the info page Other backends have their own keywords docu mented LCDS Module Parameters marked with 2 are supported by LCDS in the sense that the Download parameter are passed through to the spooljob in order to be available to be printed on SPS banner pages These supported parameters are the general parameters Chapter 7 Configuration Input Modules Overview like ADDRESS etc Naturally the APA special parameters like FormDef PageDef are not supported because they are not used by the LCDS module Hint for REFERENCE_ID REFERENID For LCDS REFERENCE_ID has always been the reference from the print spool job to the ODS_ID of the converter job which has produced the print job s To be able to print the MVS Job_ID on SPS banner page please use the LCDS only parameter REFERENID Chapter 7 Configuration 473 Download Down load Introduction General The Download Input Module license dependent makes it possible to receive print jobs from the MVS Host using the TCP IP network To send the data on the MVS Host the software product Oc
612. tion Server Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup only saves and writes back configuration backups already created from the Con figuration Backup Restore Therefore you have to use Configuration Backup Restore within Oc PRISMAproduction Server to save your configuration data Components The prismabackup package consists of two RPM s 596 Chapter 11 Backup Solutions Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup Tasks and Components Server oce sys prismabackup rpm Client oce sys prismabackup_client rpm The two RPM s must be installed on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Master server and don t interfere with Oc PRISMAproduction Server itself The RPM s are located on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server installation CD Server The Server package installs a command line client which acts as user front end as well as a server which collects all necessary data for the backup restore action initialized by the client A StorageManager writes the backup data directly to a connected network drive These are the plug ins defined in Oc PRISMAproduction Server Backup and they deal with the following type of data a LCDS_APA_PrintResourcesPlugin with all resources for LCDS in the cluster a AFP_PrintResourcesPlugin with all resources for APA in the cluster a POD_ComposerResourcesPlugin with the impositioning sets of the POD language module in the cluster a POD_UnityRipResourcesPlugin with the resource files needed by the PostScript r
613. tion by setting the 370 channel parameters gt 3 a 7 370 channel unit must match the hardware equipment of your Linux server m 7 370 address must match the 370 address of your Xerox destination printer o by setting the TCP IP parameters respectively m IP Address must match the IP address of your Xerox destination printer m Port must match the port number where your Xerox printer listens Like in most other printer types the Print parameter DUMMYDEV is supported Chapter 7 Configuration 357 Linedata Printer Driver LCDS a DUMMYDEV o sends output to the physical printer a DUMMYDEYV 1 discards output which may be useful for testing FCB configuration You can configure this item with an own applet which you select from the Explorer tree Testing with the Demo Job After having configured an LCDS Printer and before receiving MVS Download jobs we recommend to print the demo job This demo job contains 4 pages of EBCDIC coded data with ANSI carriage controls The jesfilter will add an FCB FCB1 add 2 header banner pages convert ANSI to IBM3211 carriage controls and add 2 trailer banner pages before submitting the job to the spool m Open the PJM with an LCDS job ticket Open the job ticket u prismapro de mo jes jesdemo TIC a Under Printer select the LCDS printer you created before in the printer configuration Activate Print and Header Trailer in the Job Att
614. tional Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow step in the usual Oc PRISMAproduction Server workflow The location of this workflow step is immediately before the print step When a job has been scanned the respective job entry in the All Jobs view in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer obtains an info icon 4 indicating that additional information for this job is available A double click on this job opens a popup window showing detailed information regarding requirements for the destination printer Jobrequirement does not affect print job data and print results in any way Using jobrequirement The jobrequirement function can be used either via an LP input queue see LP on page 508 via the Vario PJM application and via the PJM itself menu Job gt Determine Requirements Integrating the additional jobrequirement workflow step into the workflow of a job is accomplished by a suitable job ticket If jobs are received with an LP input queue the associated job ticket template has to be prepared respectively The jobrequirement installation package provides two additional job ticket templates which are put in place when installing Oc PRISMAproduction Server a JOBREQUIREMENT TIC a JOBREQUIREMENT TIC Both ticket templates are prepared in order to invoke the jobrequirement step with a pa rameter set see Controlling jobrequirement information output on page 61 suitable for most of the use cases The first one
615. tities that can be addressed individually or whether they are to be dependent and operate in mirror mode The size of the PFLs is limited only by the disk space available on the server concerned So there is no need to reconfigure the PFL in the event of an overflow Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Print File Manager PFM Illustration aia Documents in archive Exported documents Filter Filter Filter bi Filter Archives Documents o X 4 Media Documents DEFAULT E ES A RIP_anc_IMP RIP gt i mia om iw ma z here are no documents in archive DEFAULT Print File Manager Window All administrative and transfer functions are executed via the PFM window which you start by clicking Print File Manager in the Explorer tree view You need administrator access rights to use these functions There are also functions for creating folders and for renaming and deleting files The main window has functions for exporting documents from a PFL to an external medium a tape or another computer system and for importing them back into a PFL There are also various functions for manipulating documents deleting and renaming them for example Since saving documents for reprinting will soon fill up a PFL Who knows we might need it again soon it is important to have an option to export file
616. to be in ASCII text mode Then it is automatically moved into the jsl subcatalog of the selected catalog Files without extensions but with AFP resource prefixes like O1 IX or Co are as sumed to be AFP resources and are automatically moved to the tds subcatalog Please note that the file names are also automatically changed to the upper case which is the default of both subcatalogs Please note that there is no overwrite protection Resource name Lists all resources on the selected medium Xerox file name and file type Wildcards are allowed all files A FNT all fonts which start with character A Copy Check this box if you only want to copy the resources on your system Check this box also to ensure that the resources are converted after copying Convert Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation 219 LCDS Module LCDS Resources Ul Element Description sss sC Copy Convert When you click the Copy Convert button the system begins Button loading the relevant resources onto the server During copying the button is dimmed which means that the function is not available The names of the resources being copied to the server are displayed in the Messages window When the files have been read and the Convert checkbox is marked the Xerox resources of type FNT FRM IMG or LGO are converted to the LCDS Module format and saved in t
617. to belong to the network and which printers job classes etc are to be made available for users to choose from You also use the configuration interfaces to define manage and modify resources and permit resource sharing and to make general system settings The configuration data is stored in the central database on the master This data is available to all the computers in the network You can edit the configuration data on the master via any of the servers in the system The users admin and service are authorized to edit configuration data the users applic and operator can only access the data for viewing Click amp Add Workspace gt Configuration in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ex plorer View menu All configuration applications appear one below the other and can be launched with a single cllick of the mouse If you click with the right mouse button in the list you can sort the entries alphabetically Note The manual presents the descriptions of the configuration interfaces in the order of the list shown below The list is not sorted alphabetically Note See also General Usage of the Configuration Applications on page 256 Definition 250 By default no application is launched if you open the Configuration entry in the Explor er If you click with the right mouse button into the application list a context menu is displayed with the following entries a Sort alphabetically If you enable
618. to black Only ifall elements Chapter 7 Configuration 427 TicketRules Definition of Conditions Settings Messages and Return Exit of the message are correct the Finish button becomes active and you can add the message to the sequence of actions Add rule Dialog This table shows all rules which are subRules This means the activation modus is subRule Depending on the status of the subRule the font color is red or black SubRules are always part of a superRule Apart from superRules you can change any rule to a subRule in the rules list see Tick etRules Main Window on page 418 Add Return Exit Adding other action entries will not open a definition window Other entries are 428 Action Description Stop rule execution here but continue rule execution in super Rule if this is a subRule Return Exit Stop execution of this rule and of the possibly existing super Rule Like exit but also stop job execution in the PJM This can be useful to check if a job can be printed with the given environ ment at a print site When a job is not submitted due to reach ing Exit job in ticket rule execution a message is generated automatically by the ticketrule server Exit job Chapter 7 Configuration TicketRules Parameters TicketRules Parameters Introduction li All actions in a ticket rule work with the ticket parameters If you click the Pa
619. tofMeaure Unit Unit of Measure Measure Page Layout All settings available here Use Media based Tray Selection All settings available here Substitute missing Fonts ee No Composing no Compose files before chaining yes Chain files before composing i no Set no Store Job Ticket with linked Set no Professional Document Composer Create page seg ments Load page seg ments before print Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket In Tem DPconnect put plate Tick a a E Highlight Color X All settings available here Merge X All settings available here Cropping X All settings available here Overlays X All settings available here Variable Data All m en available here power All settings available here Signature All settings available here Assemble n ea All settings available here Creep X All settings available here Blank Sheets X X All settings available here Marks X All settings available here Input Trays X X All settings available here Print Range X All settings available here Halftone X All settings available here Custom Tone Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 183 DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries Oc PRISMAproduction Server Ticket In Tem DPconnect put plate bi cone S Opoo o x O 1 All se
620. tory which contains the documents of the older program versions Then enter the PFL archive which should receive these documents The documents are copied from the directory into the PFL archive Then the meta data will be analyzed and written to the database Automated backup of documents and job data This dialog allows you to automatically backup the document and job data daily weekly or monthly from a defined point in time The backup is written into the given directory under a given filename If you select with date stamp the current date will be added to the filename Additionally an e mail can be sent automatically to a certain receiver as soon a backup is started The respective mail server has to be configured under System in the configuration workspace The settings can be summarized in the List of tasks This list can contain several tasks If you click Apply the tasks are accepted by the system 452 Chapter 7 Configuration Archives Search Function Archives Search Function Introduction If you search the local file system you have the following possibilities Search Locally with the PJM File Selection Click Add input File in the PJM List of Files section Then click the search icon 4 Now you can search the Oc PRISMAproduction Server file system for the required files You can search for a file Name possible wildcards and are allowed or for Con
621. tory during installation Conversion and Printing 1 Open the PJM with a POD ticket and set the correct format PPML Beem tt Job Ues Het RQ e DYE Expert Mode gt job Parameter lob Attributes E Message Z a gt Iz Job Name ppmitest_ E Store Print Copies 1 per Job X i Z GHeader Trailer Printer VP5000 pme pee Z Job Queue 1 Default class z E Notification g Gi Custom Settings List of Files A x teh b Format OCA File Copies a No File Size lormat Compose Collect PDF Unity PS Unity TIFF PPML Raw Ticket lt Internal gt POD New Ticket generated 2 Add the PPML file to be printed to the List of Files 3 Open the File Properties by clicking the respective icon Z Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 145 PPML Converter Workflow 4 A window with two dialogs is opened Collect PPML Options Compose PPML Resource Path Simplex Duplex Tumble E Do not optimize PDF Elements Choose the path where you have stored the resources for this job You can additionally adjust the layout Simplex Duplex or Tumble with witch the jab should be printed Cancel 5 Inthe PPML Options dialog first set the correct resource path Basically there are two possibilities to store the resources for the PPML converter m Ifthe resources
622. tput AFP 48 GraphicArts Workflow Limitations 98 The main advantage of the GraphicArts workflow is that the native PDL PDF will be kept until the RIP process at the chosen printer begins By that the print quality can be optimized and specific printer features can be used like deciding at the time of print whether you want the output to be in black and white or in highlight color Possible increase in file size To be able to use the same POD components like the Professional Document Composer and make use of multiple RIP instances in the printer it is necessary to create independent single page objects out of an PS PDF datastream or file By doing this all resources like fonts or forms which all or multiple pages share among each other have to be added to every single page object Therefore the resulting normalized AFPDS data may become a multiple of the size of the original input file This effect can also be seen if you use the extract pages to single pages feature with Acrobat Professional Pages may not print During the conversion process of creating independent PDF objects for every printable page the contents of the source file itself is not checked Some errors show up only during the ripping process even if the file can be viewed without a problem The reason for this is that a viewer is much less restrictive than a RIP respectively a printer Therefore it may happen that problems can only be seen during
623. trace file and then submits each se Chapter 7 Configuration 531 LP Windows Tools lected data file as a single print job to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server This program can also be used separately in a batch file The used path should be C Program Files Oce inputmodules exe The second file is a shortcut which calls the LprWinClient exe and must be put into the Windows directories where the send to menu entries are located C Documents and Settings lt user gt SendTo lt user gt must be replaced by the name of the user who is using this tool Frequently asked questions 532 a Always use the prismaproduction path u prismapro bin when using the LP clients lpr Ipc lpq and Iprm a Editing files on a Dos or Windows system can result in files with a special character Ctrl Z at the end This may result in unpredictable problems Therefore it is recom mended to use the configuration tools m The LINUX system in general is case sensitive This has to be considered for all entries into configuration or script files a HP UNIX client During LP configuration with the sam utility Please select Remote printer is on a BSD system Transfer of LPD jobs from a Windows OS During transfer of many small jobs via LP from a windows system the transfer process may slow down It seems that the communication hangs or slows down but jobs are still transferring data The cause for this is that the Windows NT
624. trace information Default 1 system trace information 2 minimal trace information 3 medium trace information 4 maximum trace information Resource Converter XRC section 388 Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters I Filter Section CustomTone Deletion_mode Specifies the Custom color support m o Only Black Highlight color values are used in the Datas tream Resouces Default 1 Custom Color Support on In data stream color ID s for he requested color are used explicitly rather than the highlight color brown Printer has to be set respectively using Color Mapping Tables For Details see Highlight Color Support Specifies how to deal with the input files after a successful copy conversion m o Every converted input file resource will be copied into a CONVERT internal library and then deleted from the COPY internal library This is the default In the CON VERT internal library all the input files will be accumulated for a later Convert processing if desired 1 Every converted input file resource will be deleted from the COPY internal library a Specifies how XEROX forms are converted in to AFP docu ments m o Conversion FRM gt Overlay FRM gt 01 Default 1 Conversion FRM gt Page Segment FRM gt ix 2 Conversion FRM gt Overlay Page Segment FRM gt o1 ix Chapter 7 Configur
625. tration m on the Slave if the user name created for the Oc PRISMAproduction Server login is the same as the one created for the Linux login via KDE Auto login is not possible if you access Oc PRISMAproduction Server from outside via workstation In this case you always have to confirm a separate login dialog Important Auto Login on Slaves The four default users are created on every Oc PRISMAproduction Server computer master or slave in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server database and also in the operating system Please note that Oc PRISMAproduction Server only supports the additional creation and administration of user names with the option Authorization Auto ona Master This means a new auto login user name is only created in the database and the operation system of the master and nowhere else This means also that changes of the default accounts for example a different password are only performed in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server database and in the operating system of the master Consequently you have to perform these changes on every slave by hand in order to access the slaves in the same way as the master Login Dialog The login dialog requires the entry of a valid username and a corresponding password The login dialog appears a if the logon is performed from outside for example via the Explorer Launcher a ona Master or Slave if the Linux user is not registered as Oc PRISMAproduction Server user in the Oc
626. tributes Print UP3I De vices if binding is requested in the input ticket All UPI devices selected here are used No Binding is done Right Side Binding Translate Statement directly gt A UP31 Bind Default command is put to the job only if binding is requested in the input ticket All sheet images are rotated by 180 Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Ignore Statement gt LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take right side binding substitution action from the ticket tem plate Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices All UP3I devices selected here are used Applies to jobs not requiring any postprocessing Apply to Jobs requiring right side binding only gt Take right side binding substitution action from the ticket template Job Attributes Print UP3I Devices if right side binding is requested in the input ticket All UPI devices selected here are used No right side binding is done Bookletmaker Translate Statement directly gt A UP I Bookletmaker Booklet command is put to the job only if binding is requested in the input ticket Substitute Statement with an other Action gt Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Appendix Options LP Input Queue Template Settings for UP3I Postprosessing Apply to all Jobs gt Take booklet maker substitution action f
627. tructure of the created AFP file This option is interesting for applications having highlight color and color shadings which should be printed on HC printer with good small registration abilities like fpr example VPoz If this option is used the respective Fonts named T1IColXo IIITBIIC lt hex value up to 64 gt lt hex value up to 64 gt for example T 1B2A13 are automatically loaded in the respective catalog The hex values represent the color and black percentages IB Fonts are used in the ALL_BLACK case IC fonts are used in the ALL_COLOR case and II fonts are used for RASTERICT case For example font 10853 represents a font used for a mixed shading of approximately 8 color and 83 black You can also use these fonts manually To use this option please uncompress gunzip and extract tar xvf the fonts collected in file u prismapro data cat STANDARD ink_shading_fonts tgz in the rds subcat of this directory STANDARD and copy the used fonts or all fonts in the rds subcat of the actually used catalog Offset ScndRot Specifies the maximum number of fonts for each rotation m OFFS_SECND_64 64 Fonts for each rotation for exmaple for printing on Xerox IPDS mw OFFS SECND_128 128 Fonts for each rotation standard IPDS Default Chapter 7 Configuration 391 LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters I Filter Section Tre_level XRC XRC_TraceFlags ComInfo XRC_TraceL
628. ttings gt Resource File Extension gt entries of Form Definition Exten sion APA Settings gt Resource File Extension gt entries of xxx Extension APA Settings gt Resource File Extension gt select use ignore File Extensions APA Settings gt Resource File Extension gt entries of Outline Font Extension APA Settings gt Resource File Extension gt entries of Overlay Extension APA Settings gt Resource File Extension gt entries of Page Definition Exten sion APA Settings gt Resource File Extension gt entries of Page Segment Exten sion APA Settings gt Resource Libraries gt select use Printer Definitions addi tionally or ignore Printer Definitions Chapter 9 Oc Custom Ticket Description of the corre 559 Oce Custom Ticket General Description Options and Syntax De fault Parameter LIB_FONT LIB_FORMDEF LIB_OBJECT_CON TAINER LIB_OVERLAY List of individual resource paths of fonts List of individual resource paths of formdefs List of individual resource paths of object libraries containers List of individual resource paths of overlays List of individual resource paths of pagedefs LIB_PAGEDEF LIB_PAGESEG Resource_Server Pages Pdscolmap List of individual resource paths of pagesegments Defines the name or IP of the resource server Number of print pages for Display only Defines a default col
629. ttings depending on the exchanged packages So please backup your config uration settings first During the installation update procedure the licenses are not checked or changed New licenses have to be entered after installation via the license manager window The licenses are part of the configuration backup The information shown during installation is intuitive Please follow these instructions Illustration PRISMAproduction install gt Introduction Actually installed Available Packages AddOns Source ppro40002QS2 Details Details Introduction Welcome to PRISMAproduction installation Please choose one of the installation options and press next You can exit this wizard anytime by pressing cancel Installation Oir stallation of AddOn packages Update Undo Uninstallation Back Next l Cancel Installation Steps 1 Stop all printing converting and transmission processes 2 Log out of Oc PRISMAproduction Server and login as root Chapter 1 Installation 45 Oc PRISMAproduction Server Installation Deinstallation Update 46 3 Save the Oc PRISMAproduction Server configuration using the Backup Restore appli cation under Configuration in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer see Backup Restore Window on page 330 Close the Explorer window when backup is finished Note Perform this action only if want to keep the configuration of t
630. ttings available here Primary Color Filter All e available here a ee All settings available here Image Generation All settings available here Scale All settings available here Input Trays none All settings available here Use Paper Name as RIP Color oo Use Paper Name as RIP Type ls Important Settings 184 Automatic Start of the TrueProof Browser The TrueProof Browser will be opened automatically showing a list of printed jobs on the connected TrueProof server if all of the following conditions are true The DPconnect service module has finished successfully Destination printer has the printer model TrueProof 1 7 a Destination printer is none of the lt Any xxx dpi Printer gt printer group n The ticket template job attributes request the action Print Chapter 4 POD Module Operation DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries Using Printer Clusters In the Job Parameter Printer dialog you may also select a printer cluster In this case DPconnect takes required printer properties from the first printer in this cluster In the printer list of the DPconnect translation table you can also see printer cluster which allows you to define translation rules also for these clusters Presentation of Job Problems Problems with a job are either the result of contradictions in the input job ticket or of requirements in the input job ticket which cannot be fulfille
631. uction Server server contains a _ underline See host name syntax description in Configuration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 on page 32 The Explorer Launcher can be downloaded from each Oc PRISMAproduction Server master server A Launcher download page is offered Type in the following URL http lt master gt explorer launcher jsp and the following screen appears Chapter 2 Remote Access to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer 57 Access with the Explorer Launcher English Deutsch Oc PRISMA production 4 02 Access PRISMAproduction from your local PC The application is granted full access to your local PC Download the launcher application and save it to your Desktop by a name of your choice but don t change the extension Then just double click on the symbol to connect to PRISMAproduction launcher exe Windows executable launcher jar Generic Java archive for all operating systems The Oc PRISMAproduction Server master can be addressed either by name or by IP address The type of addressing is of importance because the Launcher downloaded is explictely linked to that address If the address has changed the Launcher must be downloaded again for example if the current Launcher has been downloaded via IP address and the IP address of the server has changed respectively via name and the name has changed The Launcher is offered in the Web Page in two variants a Asa
632. ule for I mode printers a Recording data This element of the PFM works with the Print Job Manager PJM You as the user have no direct contact with this element If you activate the Store option together with either the In PFL or As Preprint option while defining the job ticket the PFM will copy the data to the Print File Library in accordance with your setting once the data has been composed a Managing data You can make configuration settings via a GUI to determine how documents will be managed in the PFL a Transferring data You can transfer data from PFLs to devices tapes or other com puters that you select via the GUI and import data from these devices into a PFL The PJM manages the reprinting of files from the Print File Library With the help of integrated PFM functions it can display the contents of the PFL and therefore present documents to be reprinted directly on its user interface PFL data folder in the file selection box The Default Print File Library is held on the ODS master and is under the control of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server file management system It is possible to keep several PFLs on any servers in the ODS network All PFLs can be configured as public or private repositories You make this setting within the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer under Configuration gt Archives see Archives Overview on page 441 You can also determine whether the PFLs are each to be separate en
633. und the value set for the min free diskspace Default 3 ODS Protocol Level You can define a protocol level for the ODS system For normal operation select level 1 from a range of 1 5 Default value is level 1 lowest protocol level Chapter 7 Configuration 283 System Configuration System and Job Parameter System Configuration System and Job Parameter Illustration ODS Parameter System and Job Parameter eMail Notification Mirroring LDAP Parameter Country Preferences Password System Parameter Language English Trusted Hosts TCP IP 10 53 61 6 Jada Update Remove job Parameter E Operator Intervention E Run Job on One Host E Access Each Printer of a Cluster System Parameter Parameter Description Language The language of the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system The setting you make here applies to all the computers in this Oc PRISMAproduction Server network The Oc PRISMAproduction Server system language is used if the user language see User Management User on page 264 is set to System Further it is used for internal information and system messages Default setting is English 284 Chapter 7 Configuration System Configuration System and Job Parameter Parameter Trusted hosts TCP IP Job Parameter
634. uration for other solu tions of this sequencing problem None Default No special data file handling is done by the HotDir windows client HotDir can be configured to sort the files the alphabetically or alphanumerically Chapter 7 Configuration 505 HotDirWinClient 506 Parameters MultiFile OCT Description Specifies what needs to be done when multiple data files are selected The possible options are Grouped All data files are grouped and submitted as a single job Single Default Each data file is submitted as a separate job Specifies the Oct to be used with this job The possible options are lt OCT file gt The name with or without path of the OCT file to be used lt OCT file gt When no path is provided the OCT has to be in the current folder lt Empty gt When no value is specified the OCT is one of the selected files This file must have the extension oct Trans Type Specifies the data transfer type The following options are valid FTP The data is transferred using the ftp protocol No shared mapped folders are needed SMB default A shared mapped folder is needed to be able to submit the print jobs Target If the option TransType FTP is set the Target option specifies the FTP server where the data are sent If the username and the password are empty Target lt Server gt lt Remote directory gt anonymous is used as username the password is set to t
635. uration of SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Configuring the Default ftp Server pure ftpd for root Access This configuration is NOT included within YaST and have to be done by an editor Configuration file is m First edit the file etc pure ftp pure ftpd conf and set the value MinUID 100 to o Minimum UID for an authenticated user to login MinUID 100 gt change to o m Then edit the file etc ftpusers comment the entry root by the sign Postfix postgres root sapdb a Finally reboot the server Remote Access with ssh For remote access to the server use the ssh protocol 128 bit encrypted connection This service is enabled as default Configuring the Samba Server The Samba Server can be configured using the SuSE configuration tool YaST The only exception is to add Samba only user to the system This must be done using the com mand smbpasswd Please see the SuSE Admin Guide for further details Enable telnet and rsh Services This services will be configured in the xinet d configuration YaST gt Network Services gt Network Services inetd To get root access to telnet add allowed terminal devices to etc securetty one per line Telnet terminals are pts 1 pts 2 a s o Open a Program with root Privileges in KDE Environment Use kdesu lt program gt Modifying Other Settings After Installation Keyboard Step Action 1 Login as root 36 Chapter 1 Installati
636. urther on a Xerox system after export with the LCDS Resources Export Explorer applet Compile Starts the compile process after selecting or typing in the JSL name If you use wildcards like or all matching JSLs will be compiled When compiling JSLs messages will appear in the Message window for each processed JSL The compiler shows start and stop messages and a summary of all JSLs which were read successfully compiled or interrupted Cancel Operation Aborts the compile process 222 Chapter 5 LCDS Module Operation LCDS Module Stockset Configuration Tool LCDS Module Stockset Configuration Tool Introduction This tool allows you to define the status of paper loading of the printer In detail you define in which input bin the various sorts of paper stocknames should be loaded for the different applications Therefore the SCT links stocknames to input bins or input bin combinations and saves this configuration to SCT tables When printing an LCDS application you have to activate the matching SCT table A change of the arrangement of paper loading during an LCDS conversion process initiates an operator message defining how to load the paper into the printer form message Otext The process works as follows while converting an LCDS application the system checks if the stocknames used by a STOCKS command are defined in the active SCT table If this is the case the table names will be re
637. us version from scratch To update an Oc PRISMAproduction Server to the latest Service Pack level please follow these steps carefully Action Prepare the Oc PRISMAproduction Server system for a reboot of the system Reboot the server and insert the latest SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Service Pack Installation DVD into the DVD drive Boot from DVD and choose menu item Installation do not enter any options and boot the server Boot from Hard Disk Installation Installation ACPI Disabled Installation Local APIC Disabled Installation Safe Settings Rescue System Memory Test Boot Options Choose the language and click Next 5 Accept the License Agreement for Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 selecting check box Yes and click on button Next Chapter 1 Installation 25 Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 26 ee ee Action After scanning and analyzing the computer for all installed hardware and installed operating systems select Installation Mode Update and click Next a Installation Mode m Select Mode D New Installation Update N Other Options L Include Add On Products from Separate Media Now a list of installed operating systems is shown and there must be a single item SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 which is highlighted automatically click Next to continue a Select for Upd
638. ust be 2 Unit 296 ox128 Software 305 The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set 0x131 Date Time The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set 306 0x132 Artist 315 The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set ox1 3b Hostcomputer The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set 316 0x13c Ink Names The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set 333 ox14d Target Printer The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set 337 0x151 Copyright The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set 33432 0x8298 Tags not included in the list above are not supported Conversion with the Print Job Manager PJM Load a TIFF file into the List of Files amp Workflow Definition section of the PJM Be sure that TIFF is selected in the Format list box Now you can click the Edit File Pa 138 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation TIFF Converter Operation rameter button and make your settings to collect several TIFF files in one file to make composer settings to define medias or to separate colors Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 139 TIFF Converter Troubleshooting TIFF Converter Troubleshooting TIFF Converter Error Messages If the TIFF Converter is run as a separate process the converter error messages are output to STDERR in English Error 01 Cannot open output
639. ust be either 1 3 6 or 8 Samples per Pixel 277 ox115 Rows per Strip 278 0x116 The parameter value must be 1 If the image is divided into strips the number of rows per strip is unequal to the image length an image is created for each strip Strip Byte Counts 279 0x117 Min Sample Value 280 0x118 Max Sample Value 281 0x119 Both Bytecount of compressed Data and Pointer to Byte Counts are supported If the image is divided into strips data fields of cor responding lengths are created in the Image Data Descriptor The parameter value must be o The parameter value must be 1 Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 137 TIFF Converter Operation X Resolution The parameter in the tag is entered in the Image Data Descriptor 282 ox11a X image dots per base measuring unit The resolutions have to be 300 and 600 dpi if the image is divided into stripes The X resolution must have the same value as the Y resolution Y Resolution The parameter in the tag is entered in the Image Data Descriptor 283 ox11b Y image dots per base measuring unit The resolutions have to be 300 and 600 dpi if the image is divided into stripes The Y resolution must have the same value as the X resolution Planar Config The parameter value must be 1 uration 284 ox1 1c Page Name The ASCII string is output to STDOUT if parameter a is set 285 ox1id Resolution The parameter value m
640. utsheet Printer Server Name 1x010222 ops oce net 1x010222 ops oce net 1x010222 ops oce net 1x010222 ops oce net 1x010222 ops oce net Printer Notification Print Parameter Job Queues Cluster Colors Input Devices Output Devices Physical Number STANDARD SAMPLETRAY STANDARD UP3I VP_5000_HCS STANDARD STANDARD SAMPLETRAY FINISHER JUP31 DT6180_bind UP31 DT6180_bookletmaker UP3 Duplo_Bookletmaker UP3I Duplo_stitcher JUP3I VP_3090 Stitcher configure Printer VP5000 on Server Ix010222 ops oce net Configuration of UP I Devices If you select the tray with the UP I devices as Output Tray the button UP3I Devices becomes active in the PJM Job Attributes gt Print dialog Select Job Attributes gt Print gt UP3I Devices to enter parameter for these devices Every device configured in Configuration gt Printers gt Output Devices is represented by a tab The parameters offered refer to the device on the active tab only You can decide for example in case of a stitcher which corner of the paper is to be stitched or in case of an cutter you define the line for the cut If the output tray is changed the PJM checks if the UP I parameters fit to the new tray If they don t fit the PJM offers to remove the parameters The following UP I devices can be configured Chapter 10 Workflows 571 Workflow UP I De
641. ve option on the GUI This parameter connot be set via the GUI Default Transfer of ticket and data Ticket Rule which is executed on the mirror server lt ticket rule gt none gt 3 none means that no ticket rule is executed on the mirror server Ifa ticket rule is set via the tr parameter the ticket rule set here is executed on the mirror server additionally to the ticket rule executed on the original server Respective option on the GUI PJM gt Menu Job gt Transfer Mode gt Mirror Jobs during Submission and Ticket Rule Default The value set in Configurtion gt System User who starts the job on the mirror server Respective option on the GUI Configuration gt System gt Mirroring gt User Name Default The value set in Configurtion gt System Password for the user set under muser Respective option on the GUI Configuration gt System gt Mirroring gt Password Default The value set in Configuration gt System Usage of Ticket Print and File parameter groups These parameter groups may be used exclusively or combined where they supplement each other The idea behind is to allow to print either without a Job Ticket or with a Job Ticket Oct and replacing parameters in the ticket Parameter Group Description No local Ticket Local Ticket only For simple print jobs Normally only the file parameter would be used here maybe with setting a job name and
642. vers Chapter 6 PCL Module Operation 241 PCL Module Syntax of the Native PCL Filter PCL Module Syntax of the Native PCL Filter Introduction PCL Sequences lt PCL Sequence gt means a 3 character string containing only m the Parameterized character m the Group character or a character m the Terminating character use upper case letters Do not include the escape character or value Syntax example sT or E lt esc gt s16602T lt esc gt E Examples Examples for replacing values within the PCL sequence with new values General syntax lt PCL Sequence gt lt oldvalue gt lt newvalue gt Operation Replace Value Syntax Foreground Color Change lt esc gt v2S to lt esc gt v3S myo 2 Ww 3 n Input Tray Change lt esc gt amp l2H to lt esc gt amp 17H 61H 2 Paper Media Source from main paper source to autoselect ira Output Bin Change lt esc gt amp loG to lt esc gt amp 11G amp IG o from automatoc selection to Upper 1 Output Bin Simplex Duplex Print Change lt esc gt amp loS to lt esc gt amp l1S amp lS o from simplex to duplex long edge a binding Page Size Media Change lt esc gt amp 2A to lt esc gt amp 126A amp lA 2 Name from Letter to A4 26 Examples for replacing the entire PCL sequence with a new PCL sequence General Syntax lt PCL Sequence gt lt oldvalue gt lt new PCL Sequenc
643. verter PCL Converter Concept Introduction This chapter provides general information about the PCL Converter software product It explains what purpose the PCL Converter serves introduces the requisite components and describes the workflow Definition As well as controlling printers directly the PCL Print Control Language PCL by Hewlett Packard can be used to describe entire print pages containing both text and vector graphics Many of today s desktop publishing programs generate print files in PCL format The PCL Converter enables users of such programs to convert their PCL documents into the AFPDS command language The files can then manipulated using other Oc tools such as the Professional Document Composer enabling them to be output as finished publi cations on Oc printing systems or be converted to TIFF format for archiving or other purposes The PCL Converter supports the PCL 6 PCLse including HP GL 2 PCL XL PJL and PCL sc PCL commands are compact escape sequences embedded in the data stream of a print job an approach which reduces both the volume of data and the command decoding overhead The PCL Converter converts PCL commands into a compressed full page image com pliant with the CCITT T 6 Group 4 Coding Standard G4 MMR and implements it into the appropriate command language taking into account the layout page size settings PJL commands Print Job Language in the data stream are interpreted only if the
644. vice operator 82 The setpagedevice command has been introduced with PostScript Level 2 and is currently the standard for input tray switching by specifying certain media attributes Example ips PageSize 595 841 MediaT ype Standard MediaColor Pink MediaWeight 100 gt gt setpagedevice Supported attributes are PageSize array of two real or integer numbers MediaType case sensitive string MediaColor case sensitive string MediaWeight real or integer number To use this feature you have to select Use medias from document in the PJM under Media in the file properties Chapter 4 POD Module Operation Unity Customizing for Specific Applications Collect Settings for Media Compose Use medias from document inte Use paper size Halftone and Raster Paper size Page layout Color Paper Name A4 z Simplex Unity Width m gt Duplex a Height 29 7 cm Tumble Every different media will be assigned internally to a specific tray This tray assignment can be changed later on when the job is to be printed Control Tray Switching via PS file with setpapertray operator The setpapertray command has been used for inputtray switching in PostScript Level 1 but has been replaced with the setpagedevice command since PostScript Level 2 and should not be used anymore Internally the setpapertray command will be mappe
645. vices Duplo Booklet Maker 572 Stitcher Rotation Folder Axis Offset Trimmer E Use Trimmer With 146 5 Axis Offset 146 5 Staple Positions 52 157 Restrictions Trim Offset 147 Maximal 24 sheets with 80 g m and a cover with 300 g m Trimmer Restrictions Cancel Ok UI Element Description Stitcher Use Stitcher m Activate Stitcher Without no rotation With Rotate by 90 degrees The rota tion works only for formats like A4 letter and similar formats Axis Offset Distance from the outer edge to the inner edge For recommend ed values see table below Staple Positions The staples will always be positioned centric You can influence the distance of the staples by entering values in these fields Axis Offset Distance from the outer edge to the inner edge For recommend ed values see table below Use Trimmer Activate trimmer The trimmer cuts the booklet along the open edge to avoid creeping of the pages Trim Offset Distance from the outer edge to the inner edge For recommended values see table below Information on the restrictions of this postprocessing type Recommend Settings for Duplo Bookletmaker Chapter 10 Workflows Workflow UP I Devices Print i Stitch Fold ing i Axis Axis direc i Off Off tion set set ae LEF 152
646. vide a valid LDAP user name with password If Oc PRISMAproduction Server reports a successful connection the administrator can assume that other LDAP users who can be found in the same LDAP structure and who have a password are also able to log on to the system The essential data of an LDAP user user name and password as well as other user data are not stored and updated in Oc PRISMAproduction Server These data are only displayed in Oc PRISMAproduction Server If there are no entries in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server user management done for the LDAP user he works with the default permission group for LDAP users which can be edited in System Configuration gt LDAP Parameter gt LDAP Integration Proper ties In order to grant an LDAP user specific permissions this user has to be added to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server user administration Therefore this user is added with the property Authorization Ldap This option means that only Oc PRISMAproduction Server specific data are stored in Oc PRISMAproduction Server e g permission group and language setting The general data for example address phone number and above Chapter 7 Configuration User Management LDAP Support all the login details user name and password are managed in LDAP The user name which has to be defined in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server user administration is only used to assign the Oc PRISMAproduction Server speci
647. w i 382 Applet Action JCF Name PJM Format JSL Compile Compile JCF LCDSResources JCF PJM Format LCDS Data PrintLCDS PrintLCDS JCF Sample JCF XResImport JCF XResExport JCF PJM Format Sample Sample LCDS Resources Import LCDS Resources Export Note Some of JCFs can be edited by the UI see LCDS Parameter Configuration LCDS Jobs Window on page 385 others not In most of the cases it is not necessary to change these parameters For a description of the parameters see LCDS Parameter Configuration Description of the JCF Parameters on page 387 Chapter 7 Configuration LCDS Parameter Configuration Job Control Files JCF Layout of the Job Control File The Job Control File JCF contains all job specific parameters It is created by the print service When the job is started it s name is transferred to the appropriate programs as a parameter The information is read by all processes involved The file is divided into sections each destined for a specific process These sections are marked by the lines Begin lt id gt and End lt id gt When the file is generated the name and the section description are communicated to each process for example the input filter is started with ifilter jobfileo1 I Filter Thus the process identifies its section in the file jobfileo1 by looking for the line Begin I Filter for example The sequence of
648. wn This diagnostic dialog provides the user a way to an alyze the cause of the restore problem Note Except for a severe Oc PRISMAproduction Server core system error for example that the database server is not func tioning a configuration restore always succeeds It is up to the user to accept the system restore or not in case not all compo nents could be restored When the restore process has finished the the system will be reset automatically A reset is alwas necessary after a backup has been restored The Explorer will be closed and reconnected automatically While exiting the Explorer all messages regarding the loss of connection can be ignored It s recommended to check if maybe unintentionally functions which have an impact on the whole Oc PRISMAproduction Server system have been activated by the restore for example eMail Notification Job Notification Printer Notification 332 Chapter 7 Configuration Backup Restore Window Icon Description To delete a configuration backup simply select a configuration backup from the backup selection table and click on the delete button After confirming a dialog the configuration backup will be deleted Note There is no way to undo a delete Refresh the back up selection table This functionality simply rereads the available backups from the system Note that any loaded configuration backup dis played in the
649. x These ticket templates can be found in the symbolic directory JOBINPUT_TICKETS The installation provides the follow ing ticket template DPCONNECT TIC default no printer post processing Ticket templates in this directory which have a leading dot before the name are read only You can create your own cus tomized ticket from these tickets To do this you have to copy the template and save it without a leading dot in the same direc tory You can use the PJM for the creation of new or the mod ification of existing tickets A modifiable copy of DPCON NECT TIC is provided as DPCONNECT TIC when installing the system see DPconnect Hints for using Ticket Templates on page 177 and DPconnect Meaning of Job Ticket Template Entries on page 178 Program name for Set this parameter to startdpconnect job submission Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 153 DPconnect Configuration and Job Submission Parameter Description hosts Ipd The computer with the Xerox print job submitter has to be al lowed to send print jobs to the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Do this by choosing the menu item Edit gt Edit hosts lpd on the Input Modules tab in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer In the pop up dialog press the Add button and in the column Allowed systems add the name of the DigiPath workstation Now DPconnect is able to translate Xerox job tickets to Oc PRISMAproduction Serv
650. xt 3 In the following window select Local Printer and click Next Chapter 7 Configuration 529 LP Windows Client 530 Inthe Select a Printer Port window activate Create a new port and select Standard TCP IP port from the drop down list Click Next The Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard is started Click Next and then fill in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server hostname or IP address as Printer Name or IP Ad dress the Portname is added automatically Click the Next button In the next window select Custom and click Settings Inthe configuration window activate LPR as Protocol Fill in the LPR Settings Queue Name with the Oc PRISMAproduction Server logical LP queue name and click the OK button You return to the previous wizard window Click Next and the Finish to complete the wizard After the port is configured you can select the appropriate printer driver AFP PCL postscript etc and follow the instructions of the Add Printer Wizard to finish the con figuration Chapter 7 Configuration LP Windows Tools LP Windows Tools Introduction On the Oc PRISMAproduction Server software CD in the directory tools_win LP some small LP tools are available The following tools are supplied m Starting lpq from the menu a Starting lpr from the send to menu Please give us a response how these tools are accepted I
651. xtended Available Drivers Backends At the moment the following Backends Drivers are available a IPDS Driver see Printer Configuration Printer Drivers Backends on page 355 the Print Parameters are desctibed in detail in the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Admin istrators Guide Postscript Driver see Printer Configuration Printer Drivers Backends on page 355 PJL PCL Driver see PCL Module General Features on page 232 Linedata Printer Driver see Printer Configuration Printer Drivers Backends on page 355 m Generic Driver see Printer Configuration Printer Drivers Backends on page 355 352 Chapter 7 Configuration Printer Configuration Print Parameter For the possible combinations of printer drivers and connections see Printer Configuration Add a new Printer on page 342 Setting up Print Parameters Each time the printer is started in the Printer Pool window all these parameters are stored in u prismapro cfg printers lt Printer name gt backend ini lt Printer name gt means the name of the logical printer in the Printer Pool Window UI Element Description Section The section can be selected in the combobox on the right side of the toolbar Search The search text field offers a possibility for finding a certain row quickly Key Value list To modify a value double click on it s entry in the Key Value list Values mar
652. y automatically and reboot the server again to boot into the new kernel and environment a Package Installation Media Size Packages Time Total 1 37 GB 325 cD 1 1 37 GB 325 aspell en 6 0 21 6 i586 rpm installed size 3 43 MB An English Dictionary for ASpell glibc i18ndata 2 4 31 54 i586 rpm installed size 9 15 MB Database Sources for locale R wo glibc i18ndata 2 4 31 54 i586 rpm installed size 9 15 MB Remaining 1 37 GB Chapter 1 Installation 29 Update of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Action After the reboot the system will automatically boot into the installation system to continue the installation process At the next manual interaction point the window Test Internet Connection will be displayed Choose selection No Skip This Test and click Next to continue if choosing to do this test the server will try to connect to the Internet and to reach Novell websites If the DI RECT connect is not possible it will take about two minutes to timeout and to continue Test Internet Connection To validate your Internet access activate the test procedure The following steps will be performed Download latest release notes Check for latest updates Select gt Yes Test Connection to the Internet via Unknown device Network card 192 168 10 50 No Skip This Test Now the installatio
653. y represents a new method developed by Oc to significantly enhance the print quality especially with images As indicated by the name this technique uses grayscales which can have different shades in one pixel This leads to a smoother and more homogeneous printout of the images In contrast to the usual RIP method the images are not anymore converted to a simple black and white raster 2 bit color depth You need the image information with a color depth of 8 bit per color channel Ina standard prepress RIP process this would lead to a amount of data which cannot be sent to the printer with the required performance Therefore the raster process is moved directly into the printer On the one hand side transfer time is saved on the other hand the decompression of the data in the controller is not necessary anymore The ripped output data are transferred to the IO modules immediately The basic element of the workflow is providing the print data in a composite not rastered format Therefore object containers are used which allow to transport any contents In this special case the contents are PDF pages which are sent to the printer embedded in such a container Requirements The following components are needed to enable the Graphic Arts workflow a Graphic Arts_Plus license a Oc PRISMAproduction Server m One ObjectContainer license per printer PDF Workflow i 96 Note During this process the incoming PDF file is
654. y the file name of each font has to be ad justed to the font name which is referenced in the PostScript or PDF file If you are not sure of these names you can try to generate the file with all referenced TrueType fonts an then convert the file with the Replace missing fonts option disabled This job will finally generate an error message which lists all font names which could not be found Installation of additional Kanji fonts Additional Kanji fonts can be installed by a font installation procedure from a Macintosh computer via the AppleTalk protocol to the local hard disk This is currently only possible with an Unity installed on Windows Chapter 4 POD Module Operation 81 Unity Customizing for Specific Applications Unity Customizing for Specific Applications Notes on Running Fanfold Printers The page length is entered on fanfold printers in increments of 1 6 Consider that the page length set on the printer must always be at least as large as the output size of the file since otherwise PEMs Print Error Marks will be printed Example The page length on the printer is 11 4 6 29 63 cm but the file output size is A4 29 7 cm This means PEMs will be printed You can prevent PEMs from being printed by setting the size in the output file to the value set for the paper format on the printer paper format variable with page length 11 4 6 Control Input Tray Switching via PS file with setpagede
655. y relate to the PCL data stream If not they are ignored Ways of Using the PCL Converter 108 Under Oc PRISMAproduction Server the PCL Converter converts PCL files into AFPDS format Files are composed at 300 dpi for printing with the PCL Module and at 600 dpi for the POD Module Oc PRISMAproduction Server features a user friendly menu interface for working with the PCL Converter The workflow is fully automated It is integrated into Oc PRISMAproduction Server by way of the Print Job Manager Integrating the PCL Converter into Oc PRISMAproduction Server makes the following procedures possible Chapter 4 POD Module Operation PCL Converter Concept m Combining the conversion and print job into a one step process m Linking the conversion seamlessly to the print output m Making the conversion service accessible to all Oc PRISMAproduction Server users If there is a heavy conversion workload or if the production process has to meet specific requirements the PCL Converter should be run on a separate computer RIP server upstream from the print server This procedure is recommended m For applications that print the same documents repeatedly with no changes in content It is possible to eliminate redundant conversion by separating the conversion work from the job of printing the documents m A further reason is the computing power that conversion requires If printing is slowed due to the print servers conversion wor
656. ying version and status of all components RPMs Chapter 7 Configuration 303 Message System Overview Message System Message System Overview Introduction This configuration application allows you to administrate and configure the message server You can modify the following items Language support Deleting messages automatically Saving messages automatically to an external file Automatic answers to messages to question dialogs Actions triggered by certain messages Suppression of the view of messages in the messages window Message System Tabs General Automatic Automatic Triggers Message Saving Answers Suppression See Message System Gener System Auto al Settings on matic Saving page 305 on page 307 See Message See Message See Message System Trig gers Active Notification In terface on page 311 See Message System Mes sage Suppres sion on page 312 System Auto matic Answers on page 309 304 Chapter 7 Configuration Message System General Settings Message System General Settings Introduction Allows you to modify automatic deletion and language settings Illustration th Ll Bx e Generar Automatic Saving Automatic Answers Triggers Message Suppression Language isO Code Message count Language sup
657. you are working on the system level you can do more but you also have to know more Oc PRISMAproduction Server and Launcher Most of the benefits when using the Launcher to run the Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer have been listed above Nevertheless there are a few Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorer specific issues worth mentioning m The Launcher guarantees that Oc PRISMAproduction Server Explorers from different Oc PRISMAproduction Server systems can run on the same desktop computer The Oc PRISMAproduction Server systems may also differ in their release levels The Java context for the Explorer is defined in the launch protocol file JNLP on the Oc PRISMAproduction Server server Even Explorer versions needing different JRE s can run on the same PC as the Launcher automatically picks the right JRE assuming it has been installed a A Web browser is used for starting the Explorer but there is no risk of incompatibil ities in the Java Runtime Environments of the browsers Even browsers which do not support Java at all or have Java support disabled can be used Launch the Explorer The Oc PRISMAproduction Server server must be registered in the hosts file of your desktop computer for Windows WINNT system32 drivers etc hosts In addition it is presumed that JRE JDK greater or equals 1 5 is installed on your system The Launcher gets a connection error if the host name of the Oc PRISMAprod
658. you have to set the missing options for each job via the PJM GUI Normally also the error situation which prevented the job from being accepted in the normal way has to be corrected Example An output tray has been referenced which is not defined for the given printer If the job must be printed on the given printer the referenced tray must be defined for this printer before resubmitting the job link Job control Param eters Creates links on the ODS master to the print files if possible You can find the respective parameter under PJM gt Menu Job gt Transfer Mode Default Copy print data to the server Meaning Chapter 8 PJM Command Line 539 PJM Command Line Parameters 540 Information Pa rameters status lt job id gt prio lt num gt cancel lt job id gt rdelete lt resource id gt Mirror Parame ters Meaning Get basic job status Returns the status of a job a list of jobs The jobid is the 8 digit number displayed when a job is submitted The status can be wait work interrupted error unknown canceled finished If the status is error an additional description of the error will be shown e g error tiffconv Input file wrong format Priority of the print job num 1 255 no blank character be tween prio and lt num gt Example pjm f u prismapro demo ioca demo ioca prio100 The user must have the permission to modify the priority Ca
659. you perform all steps to fully configure a printer Printer Configuration Area Note All buttons which are grayed out dimmed and are not mouse or key sensitive cannot be activated either because the user has no right of access or because the function con cerned cannot be executed at this point Attention Only the users root service and admin can save configuration changes The Printer Menu and Toolbar All functions in this menu are also accessible via the tool bar icons of the Printer Config uration Manager Menu entry Description Enables the Oc PRISMAproduction Server spool in case it has Start print daemon been disabled before The small arrow button allows you to se on Host lect any computer in the network on which the spool should be enabled Disables the Oc PRISMAproduction Server spool The small Stop print daemon arrow button allows you to select any computer in the network on Host on which the spool should be disabled B Saves the configuration If a printer was modified which is Save currently active the user is asked to stop the printer first Chapter 7 Configuration 339 Printer Configuration Overview Menu entry Description P Add new printer Add a Printer fa Copies the selected printer and takes over all its settings Copy Printer x Delete the selected printer Delete selected Printer amp Discards all changes and rereads the dat
660. yrea 007 4201 00742601 9 4 0 Toner Stations Table The table shows all user defined toners in the system including all toner colors which can be delivered at the moment by Oc To allow or forbid the usage of a certain color for the displayed printer the check box in the Available for Printer column has to be un checked The toner colors which are checked are then selectable in the PJM Job Attributes gt Print dialog under Color Selection See also Workflow Color Selection 366 Chapter 7 Configuration Pon page 578 Printer Configuration Input Devices Printer Configuration Input Devices Introduction On this tab the name and number of input devices is configured for current printer Devicecs can be added or deleted Illustration General Print Parameter Job Queues Cluster Colors input Devices Output Devices Printer Notification r X Name Physical Number A 1 B 2 g 3 D 4 i Note Even a continuous feed printer has at least one input tray for continuous feed paper Chapter 7 Configuration 367 Printer Configuration Output Devices Printer Configuration Output Devices Introduction On this tab the number of output trays is configured for current printer From a list you can select the type of postprocessing device you want to use with the output tray

Océ PRISMAproduction Server - Océ

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Oc&eacute; PRISMAproduction Server - Oc&eacute;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Océ PRISMAproduction Server - Océ